Bae ksi ee ron er mel oS es ve sera onene RSS mer al: er come Pee DeeT = et a is MM LIBRARY a =o 5 < ee ae, : S kr < Sen ANNUAL REPORT OF THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES, EMBRACING COLORADO AND PARTS OF ADJACENT TERRITORIES ; BEING A REPORT OF PROGRESS OF THE EXPLORATION FOR THM YEAR 1874. BY F. V. HAYDEN, UNITED STATES GEOLOGIST. te, = 33 A A LO CONDUCTED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE SECRETARY OF THE INTERIOR. . WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 1876. CONTENTS. LENCE R TOMTHE OM ORE TAR We. lcrer cis sacle dele a Qisaci ee fealeig mae Sesie eine eee mietar erate oreiep sarees GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND MINING INDUSTRY. Report oF F. V. Haypen, United States geologist ......--..-.---------------- Chapter I. Brief history of the Lignitic group, first studied on the Upper Missouri—early views entertained by Meek, Newberry, and other paleon- tologists on the age of this group—the Lignitic group of the North- west believed to be continuous southward with the Colorado and Lara- ONE WAS) 6 Goan aca bono geecas 9955 hone6s Gnosan dasdoe Soon oodae8 Hsose0 Chapter II. The Lignitic group as examined at Cation City—Colorado Springs—northward to Cache 4 la Poudre Creek—Monument Creek group—probable age of these groups. ..-.-. -2.- cence ween en ence coenne Appendix to Chapter II, by H. T. West....-..---....--...-..--.--.----- Chanter IIL. Résumé of the geology along the eastern base of the Front or Colorado range: Silurian, Carbonifer< ous, Triassic, Jurassic, and Creta- SOOUIS PAKOMITE mae GOS60 c6db06 CobS06 64hn Soba DEGoeS Oootanadoo she soceos MireiCarhoniterousperoupres-e = secsan- ssis\< 15's) lnieleisielse ie eyeieeteineteete BheyRed bedsvor MriassiciSroOupye ise ciessnis = RENGHSs Inolepispibepecics O° ll) 20) \ Fig. 9. Prunus? eretacea Lesgx -..--2 22521112: ae ios ple.) Wanrnsmprotertoliayss essen sos) enue Bas ) Fig. 3 fouispermales populitolins: | lal eeioys =e lke een | Tig. enispermites Ovalis <3 .2 0.2 ou-e.se lees Peete N. RGHORICnS isis ee ‘ Hick eeLotophyllumaninuse eens Olean Weeks Pe ena | Higa hicustanrophyilam eee. see nee see oO, ea J { Fig 1. Dryophyllum (Quercus) latifolium ...........-.. os 72. Plate VI. 2 Hig: 2: Lomatia Saportanea Lesqe ....--....22....2-2- | [Bis Bc@iesitgeiteers MUN ue: 1) 6 001 can Fig. 4. Menispermites cyclophyllus...........--............ ( Figs. 1 Be Cissites ihlarkenlamus esqaeena sce eae Tea: BOR 1 73, Plate VII. { Fig. 3. Menispermites obtusiloba Lesqv...................... - | Fig. 4. Hamamelites Kansaseana MCS GT ease | eee a ie , 105 205 366 366 306 74. 75. 76, / TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX : : Facing page— s Gio. dey CissitesacnmimatUSes se = scene) as oleclsa see eee } | Fig. 2. Dryophyllum (Quercus) salicifolium .............-.-- Plate Vill. < His. 3. lex strangulata. 2.2222 os co sco cen ence ce ese t 366 | Fig. 4. Protephyllum crednerioides...........-..---.---+--- | Linie, 6, JR AINOS ISIESIN LC o5 Gada 4600 dooS bonoSb Hous ee og eGaese J) Report oF W. H. JACKSON. Fig. 1. Ground-plan of round tower on the Rio Mancos...... \ | Figs. 2, 3. Tower adjoining a rectangular foundation in the | | cation of the Mancos. Plate I. { Fig. 4. A portion of doorway and one corner of acarefully- > 369 | built house, Mancos Cation. | Fig. 5. Cliffhouse on the rocks of Mancos Caiion.......-..-.. | Fig. 6. Inscriptions on cafion-walls......--.--....---------- J ({ Fig. 7. Cliff-house in Mancos Cafion ..--.....--..-----.----- \ Vig. 8. Showing the tenacity of cementing-material........- Fig. 9. A square tower in the valley of the McHImo.--.-...-.- Plate II. < Fig. 10. An isolated rock in the valley of the McElmocovered > 370 Fig. 11. Ground-plan of an extended series of houses in the | valley of the Hovenweep. ( Fig. 12. A two-story house in the crevices of the escarpment ) | in the Mancos Canon. with ruined houses and walls. | Fig. 13. A general view of the valley of the Rio Mancos near | a 47.) Elate TIT. its outlet from the Mesa Verde. ete Ge 14, A view of ruined village in the valley of the over | weep. 78. Plate IV. Cliff-house in the cafion of the Mancos...--..--.---.------------ 372 79. Plate V. Battle-rock in the cation of the McKlmo..-.--...--.........--.---- 374 80. Plate VI. Cave-dwellings in the cafion of the McKlmo...--...----.---.----- 376 81. Plate VII. Watch-tower in the cafion of the McKlmo...--. ufslayet Soar a va iaereeete 378 82. Plate VIII. Ruins in the cafion of the Hovenweep, Utah...............----- 380 REPORT OF ERNEST INGERSOLL. Sam bupillaalticolal@vood-cubsim text) peeeeeteceaaieeniel tases ele cineielsielelosielsielsi= ei 392 84. Limax montanus (wood-cut in text)..-..-...----.------.----------------- 394 85. Lingual dentition of Limax castaneus (wood-cut in text).......----..----- 396 86. Helix (Microphysa) Ingersollii (wood-cut in text) .....-.--.--------.------ 398 87. Heliosoma plexata (wood-cut in text) .---..---------- ee een ween es ween nee 402° REPORTS OF HENRY GANNETT, S. B. LADD, AND A. D. WILSON. 88. Preliminary map of Central Colorado. ----2 22-312 - een e cc wnwe ween ae 412 LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. OFFICE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES, Washington, D. C., October 1, 1875. Sir: I have the honor to present for publication the Annual Report of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, embracing a preliminary account Of its operations in portions of Colo- rado during the season of 1874. The headquarters of the survey in the field were made at Denver, as in the preceding year, as the most suitable point for procuring the outfit and making the necessary preparations for the various divisions which were to investigate the districts specially assigned to them by the geol- ogist-in-charge. The entire survey was separated into seven divisions. Four were for regular topographical and geological duty, and were assigned to specific areas; one party for the primary triangulation; a photographic division, to which was attached a naturalist; a party for special topographical and geological study; and the quartermaster’s division, that furnished all the parties above mentioned with supplies during their field-work. The first division was composed as follows:—A. R. Marvine, assistant geologist, director; S. B. Ladd, topographer; Louis Chauvenet, assistant topographer; M. L. Ward and W. S. Holman, meteorological observers; H. A. Barber, botanist and collector; W. W. Williams, general assistant; together with two packers, cook, and hunter. The party took the field on the 20th of July, crossing over Berthoud’s Pass, and through the Middle Park into the North Park, by the Willow Creek Pass. The survey of the southern portion of this park employed the party for some time; and it was not until the middle of August that they crossed to the main field of their work west of the Park range. This new area presented all the different forms surface-erosion peculiar to a granite, sedimentary, and lava country, making it an exceedingly interesting study both for its topography and geology. The great lava mesa situated at the head of the White River is cut by deep canons that penetrate far into the plateau, dividing the mesa into what appear to be isolated masses, but which are all connected. One isthmus, from three to twelve feet in width and one hundred and twenty-five in length, connected a plateau, of several miles extent, with the main mesa. The highest portion of this mass is on the east side, and, from the base of the almost continuous cliffs which border it, the country descends in long, timbered slopes to the broad, open area of Hgeria 1H 2 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Park, lying between them and the Park range. Portions of this park drain into the Grand, but the greater part into the Bear, the divide between the two being very low. The old Salt Lake wagon-road enters here from Gore’s Pass. The top of the plateau is a rollipg country, with numerous isolated mount- ain-masses. It abounds with numerous small lakes, and is well tim- bered, chiefly with fine spruce. To the west, the plateau gradually falls, the lava top dies out, the sedimentary rocks appear on the surface, and the timber-growth changes to aspen and pine. The valley of the Grand does not present the attractive agricuitural features of the White and Bear Rivers. It has formed numerous cations, which show in a very interesting manner the highly-colored rocks, bent and twisted by many folds. Dwarf cedars, juniper, and the finer pines cover the slopes for some distance up, and the ever-occurring sage- brush the flat bottom-slopes. South of the Grand, and between that and the Eagle, the country rises in broken, irregular mountain-ridges to the rough snowy range, of which Mount Powell is the culminating point. Going west of the plateau, the rain-fall becomes continually less until the party reached 108°, when it entered upon the dry, barren country of Western Colorado. Snow fell in considerable quantities early in Octo- ber, and the clouds that hung around the topographical points caused a great deal of delay. The weather finally grew so bad that it was decided to work toward civilization. An attempt to reach the White River Indian agency by a trail across the mesa was frustrated by the snow. The party reached the top ina blinding snow-storm, with snow nearly two feet deep. One of the party, who had crossed with the mail two weeks before, reported the snow as belly-deep to a horse for fifteen miles, and in places for a considerable distance up to the top of the saddle. Atfter one night’s camp in the snow, and the storm still continuing, .the party decided to turn back, and take the longer but easier route around the mesa. This route offered no difficulties, and they finally reached Raw- lins Springs, the nearest point on the Union Pacific Railroad, Novem- ber 27. A barometric station was established at the agency, and one of the meteorological observers was there all the time. This station will serve as the base for all altitudes in the district. In October, this party divided, a portion remaining encamped atthe mouth of the Eagle, where careful barometric readings were taken that will fix this important point. Approximate determinations of the amount of water in the Hagle, | Grand, and Bear Rivers were made, which will give an ss of the amount available for irrigation. The amount*surveyed is about forty-three hundred square miles, com- prising a narrow strip of country, taking in the south side of North Park, Stretching from Long’s Peak to the Park range. The main portion is bordered by the Park range on the east, south by the Eagle and Grand LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. 3 =< Rivers, and north by the Bear River. Westward the work extends nearly to longitude 108°. The operations of this division during the field-season of 1874 were directed, first, to the survey of a narrow east and west strip along the southern edgeof the North Park, thus extending the work of the previous season in the Middle Park northward to the parallel of 40° 30/ north lati- tude; and, secondly, the extension of the same work westward over the Park range and along the region of the Bear, White, and Grand Rivers, this being the principal field of work. Here, the northern boundary of the survey, 40° 30’, is practically the Bear River; while the southern boun- dary was formed by the Hagle River to its junction with the Grand, and below this point by thelatterriver itself; ontheeastthe Parkrange, about in longitude 106° 30’, limited the area in question; while to the west the survey was carried to an irregular border, about touching, at its extreme point, the meridian of 108°. The narrow strip in the North Park prob- ably covers over five hundred square miles, while the principal and more compact area at the west may beconsidered as averaging nearly seventy miles across eastand west and nearly sixty miles north and south, orabout four thousand square miles in area. Topographically, this area may be divided into three well-marked divisions: first, the region draining mostly northward into the Bear; secondly, that draining southward into the Grand and Eagle Rivers; and, thirdly, the basin of White River and its tributaries, which in itself forms a complete drainage-system, trend- ing westward directly besween the two preceding regions. Atits source, the Bear, with tributaries of the Grand, quits the sources of the White, which rise in a great isolated mesa-mass of lava, between which and the Park range is the deposited basin of Egeria Park. The whole region was examined in the usual manner of the survey: first, such observations were made as to enable a carefully-colored geo- logical map to be constructed, showing the distribution and extent of - the rocks, and formations of various ages or kinds, which compose the surface of the region; sections numerous enough to show how these various formations lie upon one another, or how they probably lie beneath the visible surface, or to show the various foldings or fractures to which they have been subjected and yielded; and as many detail-sections as possible, to determine the changes which take place in the character and thickness of these formations in their lateral extension, and to deter- mine, as closely as possible, their relative ages and general paleontoleg- | ical relations. In this connection, the extent and mode of occurrence of all economical products, as minerals, building-stones, plasters, springs, etc., are noted as far as observed, while collections of specimens of the same, as well as ofall rocks, fossils, etc., are made as far as possible. Second, and chiefly to enable some of this knowledge to be more accu- rately represented, such operations are carried on as to enable a Map, or representation, of all the surface-features of the country to be prepared, its rivulets, streams, plains, hills, and mountains, its cailons 4 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. or-valleys, its steeper or greater slopes, its peaks and passes, and this with all the accuracy that it is possible to give on a map printed on a seale of four miles to an inch, and in 200-foot contour-lines. These topographical observations are directly founded on a careful secondary triangulation, carried on simultaneously with them. At the principal stations of this triangulation, stone monuments from four to six or more feet in height were built, with a wooden stick, on which was deeply carved the number of the station and of the map (according to the scheme of maps of the survey), inserted in each, thus rendering them available in the future, when more accurately located by the pri- mary triangulation, as data on which to base the usual United States land surveys when these may be needed in these distant regions, or for other purposes of references. Further, the general quality and distribution of timber, bottom, agri- cultural, arid, or generally unavailable lands, were also made the sub- ject of observation ; while botanical, natural-history, and other speci- mens were collected as far as possible; and the amount of water flowing in the larger streams was made, in some cases, the subject of measure- ment. A permanent and quite complete meteorological station was established at the White River agency, the base of supplies of the party, while similar observations were at one time continuously taken for nearly three weeks at a point near the head of the White River, and again for nearly four weeks at the junction of the Eagle and Grand. In comparing with these bases the observations constantly made with the party, very complete and accurate hypsometric results will be obtained. In these observations, the usual mercurial mountain-barometer of James Green, with wet, dry, maxima, and minima thermometers, was employed. As the general results, regarding the occurrence of economic products, it may be said that the series of older metamorphic rocks, such as the . granites, schists, etc., of probable Archean age, in which alone the precious metals and minerals of Colorado have been found, and which, form the foundations on which all the bedded rocks, sandstones, lime. stones, etc., of the country rest, are brought to the surface and exposed only along the folded ridges of the Park range, and in the bottoms of a few caflons in some of the southern tributaries of White River, and of the neighboring tributaries of the Grand, and that it is only in these regions, therefore, that the precious minerals may be looked for. Along the northern portion of the district, north of the main valley of ‘the White, and in the extreme west, the surface of the country is formed of rocks of Cretaceous age, which are, for the most part, horizontal beds, flexed here and there into quiet undulations. The coal of the region, which consists of a few seams of fair Lignitic coal, seems to be confined wholly to pretty definite horizons in the upper-middle and upper por- tions of this group; and as these particular horizons have been eroded away from the region in question, except at the north and west, it is here alone that it becomes worth while to search for coal. Farther west, it is LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. 5 understood that both in quantity and quality, this coal improves. In the southeastern portion of the district, above the Grand and Eagle Rivers, the sedimentary rocks, from the extreme base of the Cretaceous down to the granite rocks of the Park range, occur, all thrown into a series of complicated and peculiar folds. Limestone occurs near the Grand in abundance, and on both the Grand and Eagle Rivers are great deposits of gypsum, though other economic products, except some salt and soda springs, will probably not be found here. The imposing mesa about the head of White River and several larger areas near the Park range are composed of great floods of volcanic rock, which have poured over the country in comparatively recent times, but some of which are yet old enough to have experienced the vicissi- tudes of the Glacial period of the West, and to have received a profound impress from erosion, similar to that now going on over the whole country. : The topographical work of the party under my immediate direction was intrusted to Mr. G.B. Chittenden, and was divided into three parts: first, the mapping of the peculiar features of the morainal deposits in the Upper Arkansas Valley; secondly, the reworking of the topography of the Eik Mountains on a larger scale, and with more detail than was possible during the preceding season in the regular progress of the survey ; and, finally, the laying down of the topography, and the line of junction of the metamorphic and sedimentary rocks, and also the coal-outerops on the eastern base of the mountains, from Caiion City to the northern boundary of the Territory, making, in this latter division, small detailed maps where points of particular interest or peculiar complication made — them seem desirable. In pursuance of this plan, the work began at Colorado Springs, in order to investigate that region in detail, before the main party would be ready to proceed across the South Park to the work in the west. Forty-five topographical stations were made on the sedimentary rocks, within ten miles of the springs, embracing the Gar- den of the Gods and Monument Park, so curious on account of their geological structure, and well worth mapping as typical geological fea- tures, which might be readily reached by the student traveling from the east. Joining the main party here, we crossed the South Park to the Arkansas Valley, carrying on a running survey of the road as we traveled. By short marches for five days up the valley, we were enabled to study out, with a good degree of care, the heavy masses of morainal deposits, - which, for twenty miles or more, sweep out from the base of the high mountains which border the valley on the west to the present channel of the river. It will, of course, be impossible, in the time devoted to these moraines, to make a carefully-detailed map of them, but enough notes were taken to give quite accurately their relations to each other, their general forms and magnitudes, and their particular trends, together with their relations to the surrounding mountains. Leaving this region about the middle of August, we crossed the main divide by way of the Lake Creek Pass and entered the Elk Mountains. 6 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. This range reaches out from near the headwaters of the Gunnison River, forty miles to the northwest, and, though not generally as high as the other ranges of Northern Colorado, is by far the most rugged of them all. The reasons for re-examining this range, when it had been sur- veyed in the regular progress of the work, were two: first, their rug- gedness and inaccessibility had made the difficulty of working them last year so great, that they were not surveyed in a style quite up to the standard of the remainder of the work; and, secondly, that their geo- logical importance made it a matter of particular scientific interest that they should be carefully studied and mapped. The geologist and topographer worked side by side through them, making forty-two high mountain-stations; Mr. Holmes sketching the different portions of the whole mass from as many points as possible. They contain about eight hundred square miles, and will be mapped on a scale of one mile to the inch. Marching from here by way of the Twin Lakes and South Park to Canon City, we carried on a running survey along our route, and from the latter place commenced work, on the last part of the summer’s plan, the mapping of the sedimentary border-line and that of the coal from here to the Wyoming line. This work, carried on without interruption, was finished by Mr. Chittenden, Mr. Holmes, and myself on the 20th of October ; it having required seventy-four topographical stations. This survey was of a great deal of practical as well as scientific importance, and of immediate need, since, in the coal-series, we were enabled to lay down pretty closely that broken winding line more than two hundred miles in length inside of which no coal might be found. The labor involved in carefully laying down this line cannot be realized until one notices the almost numberless prospect-holes that have been sunk into the worth- less black shales which, all along the base of the mountains, lie inside the coal-series and tempt the settlers into profitless investments and unrequited diggings after coal. In carrying on this last survey, the Land-Office work has been of great assistance, and also the careful studies of Captain Berthoud of the coal lying to the west and north of Denver. The maps produced from this special survey and included in this report are as follows: — 1. A map of the eastern base of the mountains Hots below the ‘Arkansas River to the northern line of the Territory, on a scale of two miles to one inch. On this map are plotted the line of coal-outcrop, the junction of the sedimentary and sHeLoMmeEphie rocks, and the inner limits of the Cretaceous. 4. A map of the Elk Mountains on a scale of one mile to an inch, plot- ted with 200-foot contours.* 3. A map of the Upper Arkansas Valley, showing the heavy morainal deposits in the vicinity of the Twin Lakes, on a scale of one mile to an inch. *These maps are all reduced one-half for publication. LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. q . 4, A map in the vicinity of Colorado Springs, on a scale of one-half a ‘mile to an inch, made principally for geological purposes. The meanders of traveled roads will be plotted on the final maps of Colorado. While all this work was looked upon as special work, and done with more detail than the regular work of the survey, the results will, of course, be incorporated in the final maps of the Territory, and form a part of them. During the season, Mr. Chittenden made 156 topographical Stations, and the total area surveyed was over four thousand square miles. Mr. W. H. Holmes labored with his usual zeal and skill during the entire season, and much of the accuracy and value of the work is due to him. During the sickness of a member of the party at the base of Sopris Peak, I was detained about twenty days. In the mean time, Messrs. Holmes and Chittenden made a careful geological and topographical study of the northwestern portion of the Elk Mountains, the results of which will be found embodied in Mr. Holmes’s report. Great numbers of topographical and geological sketches were made by Mr. Holmes, which will serve in a remarkably clear manner to illustrate the structure of the interesting regions surveyed. The district assigned tothe second division is limited on the north by the Eagle and Grand Rivers, west by the west line of Colorado, south by the parallel of latitude 38° 20’, and east by the 107th meridian. The area of this district is about seven thousand square miles, of which the party completed 5,300 square miles. The plan of the geodetic and topographical work is as follows: 1st. The latitude and longitude of certain points are determined by as- tronomical observations as accurately as the present state of astronomical science will allow. This work has been done for us, thus far, by the United States Coast Survey. For the prosecution of the survey of Colo- rado, the latitude and longitude of Sherman and Cheyenne, Wyoming Territory, and Denver, Colorado Springs, and Trinidad, Colorado Terri- tory, have been determined by them. 2d. From a base-line measured as accurately as possible, a system of primary triangulation is expanded and extended to cover the area to be surveyed with a net-work of triangles. By this operation, the positions of a limited number of points are established with accuracy. Connect- ing this system of triangulation with the points whose positions have been established by astronomical observation, the latitudes and longi- tudes of the primary points are established. ‘The first base-line for the primary triangulation of Colorado was measured principally on the track of the Kansas Pacific Railroad near Denver. Its length is between six and seven miles. Check-bases at Colorado Springs and in San Luis Valley have also been measured and connected with the triangulation. The angles are measured by a 15-inch theodolite, reading to ten seconds, using artificial signals. The primary triangulation is carried 8 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. on by a special party. Using the lines of the primary system as bases, the topographers of the division carry on the secondary triangulation, locating points within the triangles of the primary system. In the secondary system, as in the primary, all three angles of the triangles are measured, and, in most cases, artificial signals are used on the stations. The instrument used for this work is a sort of theodolite, reading minutes. The stations for triangulation and topography are, in most cases, the highest and most commanding points, and are so selected that the limits of work from one will reach the limits from those around it. From a station, a sketch-map of all the country within the range of vision is made, as also a prospective sketch. Angles taken on prominent points and recorded on these sketches serve to locate them, and thus to correct the sketch-map. The distance between stations must depend on the character of the country, but the average distance apart is seven to ten miles. For the prosecution of its work during the past season, this division made eighty-six stations, or one station to every eight miles of area. The most prominent geographical features occupied by this division are in brief as follows: On the north, the Eagle or Piney River flows, through most of its course, in a broad fine valley, having a course nearly west, interrupted here and there by short cations. At its mouth, itis a ~ large stream, barely fordable at the lowest stage of water. The Grand River, sometimes called the Blue or Bunkara, below the mouth of the Hagle, is in a close cation about thirty miles, interrupted by a short meadow at the mouth of Roaring Fork. Below this caiion, the river flows sluggishly through a broad meadow, which extends for fully fifty miles, but.is narrowed in the middle of its length, where the river cuts through a plateau. Below this meadow, the river enters another canon about eighteen miles in length, and of no great height, from which it flows into the broad valley in which it meets the Gunnison. The course of the Grand, at the mouth of the Eagle, is about west, which direction . gradually changes to southwest, and then near the mouth of the Gun- nison again to the west. The drainage of the southern part of the district is by the Gunnison River. This stream takes all the water from the southern slopes of the Elk Mountains, the western slopes of the Saguache range, and the northern slopes of the Uncompahgre Mountains. For twenty-five miles below the mouth of Cochetopa Creek, this river is in a narrow valley, which is diversified by long tongues of mesa, which separate the numerous streams entering the river on either side. Below this valley is a very heavy cafion cut in a high plateau for fifteen miles. The plateau is horizontal, 10,000 feet high, and the course of the river is nearly west across it, the depth of the caiion increasing with the tall of the river from 3,000 to 4,000 feet. At this point, the plateau breaks off abruptly on the north side, and, while preserving nearly the same height at the edge of the caiion, slopes off gradually toward the north, having LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. 9 the appearance of long hog-backs. On the south side, the plateau pre- serves its horizontality for a few miles, then breaks off, leaving a ridge of upturned beds only to separate the river from the valley of the Uncompahgre. Ata point about thirty miles below the head of the cafion, the river changes its course abruptly from west to north, and flows parallel to the slope of long hog-backs. It holds this course for about eighteen miles, then, at the mouth of the North Fork, a large affinent from the north, it turns again abruptly to the west, and a tew miles farther suddenly emerges from the cafion into the broad valley of the Uncompahgre. The character of this cafion in its upper part is extremely rugged ; its walls are precipitous, and there is hardly a place where a man could clamber down to the bottom. The river fills the bottom of the cation, leaving no beach anywhere. The material of the cation- walls in the upper two-thirds is gneiss and in the lower third stratified - rock. The valley of the Uncompahgre River is very broad, extending forty miles up the Uncompahgre River and twenty miles down the Gunnison. Below this, the river falls through a cafion, which, with slight interruptions, extends to the mouth of the river, while the country back from the river is a flat open valley. The Elk Mountains extend into this district, occupying an area of about one thousand five hundred square miles in the southwestern part. Their character is not that of a continuous range, but of groups of mountains and isolated peaks. The elevation of the highest does not exceed 13,500 feet, and the average of the peaks is scarcely 13,000 feet. These mountains are drained entirely by the Gunnison; the northern Slopes by its North Fork. Besides these mountains, the country is entirely plateau and broad valleys. The plateau has an elevation of 8,500 to 10,000 feet, sloping gradually toward the west. The elevation of the mouth of the Gunnison River is about 4,200 feet ; at the mouth of the Uncompahgre, 4,500; and the general elevation of the Uncom- . pahgre Valley, 4,500 to 5,000 feet; that of the mouth of Cochetopa Creek, 7,400 feet; and of the Grand River, at the mouth of the Hagle, about 7,000 feet. The division was constituted as follows, viz: Henry Gannett, topog- rapher, in charge of party; Dr. A. C. Peale, geologist; Fred. Owens, assistant topographer; Frank Kellogg, assistant; Arca. RK. Balloch, general assistant ; with two packers and a cook. The party left Denver on July 21, traveled one hundred and fifty miles to their field of work, commenced work August 3, ended work October 29, and reached Denver about the middle of November. On July 14, 1874, the San Juan or third division of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey left Denver for the field. It consisted of A. D. Wilson, topographer, directing; F. Rhoda, his assistant; F. M. Endlich, geologist; and Mr. Gallup, who was for a short time attached as barometric observer. The region assigned to this division was the one generally known as the ‘San Juan country”. In 1860 and 1861, a 10 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. party of prospectors, the “Baker’s party”, had reached a section of country that was said to abound in silver and gold. After enduring many hardships, a portion of the men succeeded in again reaching set- tlements, while others were killed by the Indians. Ten years later, the mining-region was brought into public notice a second time, more par- ticularly by the discovery and working of the “ Little Giant” mine. Since then, many prospectors and capitalists have examined the indi- cations of ore, and active mining has taken the place of mere prelimi- nary examination. In 1873, the tract of land supposed to contain all or nearly all of the metalliferous lodes was purchased from the Ute In- dians by the United States Government. It was therefore one of the main objects of the San Juan division to inquire into the geological and mineralogical characteristics of these lodes, with a view to obtain some idea regarding their relations and value. A report thereon will be found in the fourth chapter of the geological report of I. M. Endlich. In every respect, the country surveyed was found to be of such extra- ordinary interest, and the demand for information with regard thereto was So apparent, that it was deemed advisable to publish at once a por- tion of the results obtained. Bulletin No. 3, of the second series, 1875, contains a drainage-map of the country; a report by A. D. Wilson, re- ferring to routes, roads, grades, etc.; one by F. M. Endlich on the mines; and an itinerary, together with hypsometric data, by F. Rhoda. All will be incorporated in the subjoined report in their respective places. While Colorado has furnished so many districts of rugged: mountain country, the one surveyed by this party during 1874 surpassed all. Ii consequence of this character, it was not possible to complete so large an area as was first intended, and about five thousand two hundred Square miles were surveyed. Of these, three thousand two hundred were plotted during the winter following, and the geological report con- . fines itself to them. The remainder will be attached to the work of 1875, thus obviating the necessity of mapping an isolated area. From the report and sketches accompanying, it will be seen that the district was one of unusual character, containing phenomena of great geological importance. Enormous quantities of volcanic rocks were found to form the highest peaks, reaching an altitude of 14,280 feet above sea-level, while many unique features of detail were noted in the Same formation. Metamorphics and sedimentaries were also observed, the former rising to very considerable altitudes. As might be expected in a country so favorable to the formation of water-courses, the head- waters of several large streams were discovered and mapped. Among the most prominent are those of the Rio Grande, Rio Animas, Rio Dolores, Rio San Miguel, Rio Piedra, and the Uncompahgre. Hthno- logically, the southern section was found to present interesting data. Through co-operation of the geological work with that of Mr. Wil- son, the topographer, it became possible to render a geological map that represents the horizontal distribution of the various formations and their members, while sections display the vertical arrangement. LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. 11 On October 19, 1874, the party again reached Denver, after having completed the work above specitied. During the season, sixty-five topographical stations were made and seventy-four camps. Of these stations, eighteen were over 13,000 feet above sea-level. The photographic and naturalist?s division was again under the supervision of Mr. W. H. Jackson, the photographer, who has been connected with the survey for the past five years in the same capacity. The party organized in Denver, and took the field July 21. It com- prised the photographer; Mr. Anthony, his assistant; Mr. HE. Ingersoll, naturalist; and Mr. Frank Smart, assistant, with two packers and a cook. Middle Park was first visited, as it had not been worked up the pre- vious season. A series of beautiful and very characteristic views of the peculiar features of the park were secured, including views about Grand Lake, the Hot Springs, the Great Canon of the Grand, and the mag- nificent mountain-forms and the charming vista as seen along the Blue River. From the head of the Blue, the party progressed southward, via the Arkansas, Poncha, and Cochetopa Passes, to the Los Pinos agency for the Ute Indians, where a series of views were secured illustrating their life and peculiarities. The San Juan Mountains was the next objective point. A camp was established in the upper end of Baker’s Park, in which was left all extra material in charge of two or three of the men, and then, traveling with but few animals and very light packs, rapid side-trips were made, into all the strongholds and fastnesses of the grandest mountainsin all Colorado. Panoramic views from the tops of the highest peaks were secured, illustrating, by bird’s- eye views, the geology and topography of the whole mountain-system. Especial attention has been paid, all the time, to make these views instructive as well as pleasing to the eye, and the system of panoramic views which has. been carried out has been of very great assistance to the topographers in working up their notes and expressing the peculiarities of mountain-forms. To the geologist, also, they prove of great value in recailing to the m‘nd the surface-features, inclination of strata, proportion of valley to mountain land and of timber to the rocky summits lying above it. From the permanent camp in Baker’s Park, a side-trip was made into the southwestern corner of the Territory, in search of the picturesque and interesting ruins of the habitations of a long-forgotten race. No search was made until the Rio Mancos was reached; but, from this point, ruins without number covered the plateau and filled the valleys and cafions. Through the caiions of the Rio Mancos, were found houses of two stories in height, in the escarpment of the mesa, 800 to 1,000 feet perpendicularly above the valley, of well-dressed sandstone, true in all their angles, laid in a firm and tenacious mortar, and the inside plastered and paneled in two colors. The greater majority, of these houses were smaller, but as perfectly built as the larger ones, and all 12 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. were very difficult of access, and resembled swallows’ nests more than anything else. To reach these with the photographic apparatus, it had to be hauled up with long ropes taken from the pack-animals. From near the mouth of the Rio Mancos, the party proceeded northwesterly into Utah, finding group after group of towns and isolated watch- towers perched upon great bowlders and upon the promontories of the mesas. In one place was found a wall, evidently surrounding a town of a very considerable population, which was fully twenty feet in thickness, the outer surface of dressed stone, laid perfectly true, the space between filled with large undressed blocks in adobe mortar. The entire trip to these ruins, from and back to Baker’s Park, com- prised about three hundred and fifty miles of traveling. Only two weeks could be devoted to it, which necessitated a somewhat super- ficial examination. Two series of views were made, the stereoscopic and five-by-eight plate. About forty negatives were made altogether, illustrating perfectly all the leading features in a very unique series of views. He From Baker’s Park, the party returned by rapid marches, via the Rio Grande, San Luis Vailey, and Mosca Pass, to Colorado Springs, where they met with the special party under my charge. Mr. Jackson joined him with his apparatus for a few days, while his party proceeded to Denver and disbanded. The four or five days he was with the special party, about one hundred additional negatives were made, mostly of camp-life and the manner of conducting the various operations of the survey while in the field. The result of the trip sums up as follows: 350 negatives, stereoscopic and five-by-eight, and the most extensive and interesting conchological collection ever made in the Territories. The party was out eighty-four days, making sixty camps, and traveling one thousand two hundred and forty miles. Not a negative was broken or lost on the trip, and the naturalist’s and different zoological and entomological collections came in safe. The work of the survey during the season of 1875 will be extended westward in Colorado to the meridian of longitude 109° 30’.. The area now remaining to be explored lies west of 108° on the western slope of the main range of the Rocky Mountains and comprising the eastern por- tion of the drainage of the great Colorado River. Hundreds of streams of greater or less size cut deep gorges through this country in their westward course to the Colorado River. There are some groups of mountains yet to be surveyed, but the highest peaks have already been located. _ According to the instructions given by the Department: First. There shall be two classes of maps: one known as “ general”, the other as “special” maps; and the “ general” maps shall be subdivided into two classes, viz, “topographical” and “ geological”. Second. The “general” maps shall be on a scale of four miles to. an inch, or zs#¢a5. The sheets thereof shall be twenty-six (26) inches long by thirty-seven (37) inches wide, including the border, and be folded once. The area to be represented on each LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. : 13 sheet shall be two and one-half degrees in longitude and one and one-fourth degrees in latitude. The 112th meridian shall be taken as the standard from which the maps are to be projected in an easterly and westerly direction, and the 38th parallel as the standard from which they shall be projected in a northerly and southerly direction ; these lines forming the division-lines between the atlas-sheets adjacent thereunto. Third. Maps or charts of the second or “ special” class may be constructed on other scales and embracing other areas, whenever it shall be found necessary for the purpose of properly representing mining-districts, mineral, agricultural, pasture, or timber lands, or for other special purposes. At the end of the next season, if suitable appropriations are made by Congress for the purpose, the survey will have completed the most rug- ged and mountainous portion of our continent, lying betwecn meridians 104° 30’ and 109° 30’ and parallels 40° 45/ and 40°30’. This will form an atlas of six sheets, each comprising about 11,500 square miles, or a total of about 69,000 square miles. These maps are intended to express not only the topographical features, but the geological also; and, in accordance with the directions of the Secretary of the Interior, these charts will indicate the areas of grass, timber, and mineral lands, and such other country as may be found to be susceptible of cultivation by irrigation. Numerous special maps of the mining-regions, isolated mountain- ranges, and other localities remarkable for their complicated geological structure, have been prepared on different scales. Much more of this detailed study of interesting localities will be made when the final maps are completed. Collections of great value were made in geology and mineralogy, all of which will be reported on in due time. Since the publication of the annual report for 1873, several volumes have appeared in connection with the survey, which must be regarded as of great value. Volume II of the quarto Series, by Professor Cope, on the ‘Cretaceous Vertebrata of the Western Territories’, contains 304 pages text, with 57 plates. Volume VI of the quarto series, on the ‘“‘ Cretaceous Flora of the Dakota Group”, by Leo Lesquereux, constitutes an original contribution to the vegetable paleontology of America, and will prove very useful in fixing a most important geological horizon. It contains 136 pages, with 30 plates. Much new material has come to hand since the publication of that memoir, a portion of which will be found in this report. A third edition of the “ List of Elevations” and a second edition of the ‘‘ Catalogue of Photographs” have been printed to supply the demand for the miscellaneous publications. The most import- ant volume of the miscellaneous series, however, is the “‘ Birds of the North- west”, by Dr. Elliott Coues, which comprises over eight hundred closely- printed octavo pages. Much of the text is written in popular style, treating of the habits, or, as it were, the domestic life, of the birds; and on this account the demand for it among onr people has been unusually great. Although it does not pretend to be a general work on the orni- thology of the Western Territories, it contains a more or less complete descriptive list of four-fifths of the birds of the United States. 14 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The memoirs that are either now in press or in an advanced state of preparation are numerous and important. Volume IX, “The Fossil Invertebrata of the Western Territories,” by F. B. Meek, is nearly through the press. It will contain 45 plates, with a great number of wood-cuts scattered through the text. Mr. Meek has most thoroughly elaborated every genus, and given the synonymy of all the species with unusual care. He regards this mem oir as his great life- work, and it will add greatly to his fame as a paleontologist. Volume X will be a “ Monograph of the Geomitrid Moths”, by Dr. A.S. Packard. It will form a memoir of 450 pages quarto, with 13 plates, on some of which are engraved one hundred figures. This work is now rapidly passing through the press. Volume VII, “ The Fossil Flora of the Lignitic Tertiary Formation of the Western Territories”, by Leo Lesquereux, is intended to be a mono- graph of that subject. It will contain sixty-five quarto plates, all of which have been engraved by Messrs. Sinclair and Son, Philadelphia. Mr. Lesquereux is now at work on the text, and it is expected to be much superior to the Cretaceous Flora, which was received with such marked favor throughout the scientific world. Volume VIII was originally designed to form an extended memoir on the Fossil Flora of the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations of the West, by Dr, J.S. Newberry. Twenty-six plates have been engraved, and an edition of 2,500 copies printed for over four years. It is to be hoped that some portion of this volume will be issued the present Season. A very interesting memoir, in octavo form, entitled “The Ethnog- raphy and Philology of the Hidatsa Indians (Minnetarees of the Upper Missouri) is now in the press. It was prepared at my request by Dr. Washington Mathews, U.S. A. Dr. Mathews spent some years at Fort Berthold, on the Upper Missouri, as surgeon of the military post, and his leisure time was cevoted to the study of the language and history of | this interesting tribe. An edition of 100 copies was printed by Mr. Shea, of New York; but since that time Dr. Mathews has very much enlarged and improved the memoir, and many portions cf it he has en- tirely rewritten. I had originally intended that it should be substituted for a chapter I had written on this, many years ago, in a volume on the Indian tribes of the Northwest, which is intended to form one of the quarto series of the Survey; but when I found the manuscript to be so elaborate and complete, I preferred to issue it as a separate volume or monograph. I am confident that this memoir will be received with great favor, and that scholars in this country and in Europe will be profoundly grateful for this his labor of love. The Bulletin of the Survey was originally started to embrace such articles as demanded immediate publication on account of their peculiar value or character. Many new species of animals and plants have been collected from time to time, which needed to be published promptly to LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. 15 secure for the Survey that priority of discovery which is its right. The first two numbers, issued during the year 1874, are not paged consecu- tively; but those of the second series, which have been issued during the year 1875, will be paged consecutively, and the illustrations num! bered, so that at the close of the year all the numbers may be gathered together and bound in one volume. A title-page, table of contents, and a complete index will be printed in the final number of each year. The numbers for the year 1874 and 1875 may be bound together as volume I. The irregularities in some of the publications are due to the unexpected progress of the Survey and the acquisition of an unusual amount of material. The history of the Survey, from the shat appropriation of $5,000 in 1867, was briefly told in the Annual Report of last year. It has contin- ued from year to year with a constant growth, though dependent upon the annual appropriation, which will cease or be renewed each year at the option of Congress. During the years 1867 and 1868, the Survey was under the Commis- sioner of the General Land- Office, and the two small annual reports were incorporated in the annual volume of that Bureau. In 1869, the Survey was placed under the Secretary of the Interior, and the first independent annual report was made. When the demand was so great that a reprint of the report of 1869 was ordered, I united the two small reports of 1867 and 1868 with the report of 1869, as First, Second, and Third Annual Reports of the Survey. The original plan of the quarto series only extended to five volumes. Volume V was to include all the natural history, and on the title-page of volumes I and V it is stated that the entire series will be in five volumes, of which the Acridide was to be the first part; but the mate- rials in all branches accumulated so rapidly that the number of vol- umes was increased, and at the present time it will be limited only by the duration of the Survey. The annual reports will be continued from year to year. Circum- stances beyond the control of the geologist-in-charge may delay them, as in the case of the present one, but they will appear as soon as they can be prepared. Besides the regular members of the Survey, there are several collabo- rators, whose time is more or less occupied in the preparation of special reports. Prof. Leo Lesquereux has been continuously connected with the Survey for several years, with a regular salary, devoted to the elabo- ration of reports on vegetable paleontology. Mr. F. B. Meek has also been a member of the Survey most of the time since 1867, with a fixed salary, as paleontologist. Professor Cope has prepared the reports on Vertebrata, and will continue to devote his time at intervals to that special department. Dr. A. S. Packard spent several months during the past summer in Colorado, Wyoming, and Utah under the auspices of the Survey, making large collections in his favorite branches, entomology 16 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. and invertebrate natural history generally. The results of his labors will appear in the annual reports, and in the’ beautiful quarto volume on the Geometrid Moths. Mr. P. R. Uhler visited Colorado during the summer. His collection of insects amounted to about 1,000 species. In the Annual Report for 1875, he will present an elaborate essay on the geographical distribution of insects. A very valuable paper on the Hemiptera of our Western Territories appeared in No. 5 of the Bulletins for the year 1875, illustrated with wood-cuts. Two volumes, quarto, by Professor Cope, are in course of preparation, and will be published within a year if the Government provides the money for completing the engraving :— Volume III, “ Vertebrate Paleontology of the Eocene Formations of the West.” Part I. Distribution and Relations of the Tertiary Basins of the West. Part I. The Vertebrata of the Eocene. Part [1I. The Relations of the Fauna of the Eocene. Volume IV, ‘‘ Vertebrate Paleontology of the Miocene Formations of the West.” Part I. The Fauna of Tye White River Epoch. Part If. The Fauna of the Loup Fork Epoch. Part III. The Relations of the Fauna of the White River and ie Fork Epochs. The Survey is under great obligations to Dr. Elliott Coues, U.S. A., Mr. Robert Ridgway, and Mr. Samuel H. Scudder, for very valuable contributions to its publications. The obligations of the Survey for favors of various kinds have been numerous as usual, but few of them can be mentioned in this connection. From D. Appleton & Co., of New York, very great assistance has been received by permitting the use of the illustrations of Colorado scenery, taken from their magnificent publication ‘‘ Picturesque America.” The publishers of that work were permitted by the Interior Department to use the photographs of the Survey on condition that the Survey should have the electrotypes of the illustrations for use in the reports, and some of the beautiful cuts in this report are the result of their gen- erosity. The illustrations for this report have been prepared in part, while the text was passing through the press. This fact will account for irregu- larities in the numbering of them. The pen-sketches and sections were made by Mr. W. H. Holmes, a member of the Survey. For beauty and accuracy they cannot be surpassed, and they add greatly to the value of the report. To the Union Pacific, Denver Pacific, Kansas Pacific, and Denver and Rio Grande Railroads, the Survey is under obligations for half-fare tickets for its members. The various changes which have occurred in the personnel of the LETTER TO THE SECRETARY. ely party during the past year has thrown an immense amount of executive labor on me, which has exhausted my strength, and consumed my - time to such an extent that I have not been able to give the necessary attention and study to my portion of the report. The editing of so many publications is sufficient labor for one person, and yet this is the _ smallest duty that has devolved on the geologist-in-charge. The varions executive duties, as correspondence, foreign exchange, settlement of accounts, and the supervision of the parties in the field and ofiice, seem to increase from year to year, so that only mere fragments of my time can be devoted to scientific study. The present annual report is submitted with the belief that it contains much that is new and interesting to geologists and the intelligent world generally. ; Very respectfully, your obedient servant, F. V. HAYDEN, United States Geologist. Hon. Z. CHANDLER, Secretary of the Interior. 2H CHAPTER IL. BRIEF HISTORY OF THE LIGNITIC GROUP; FIRST STUDIED ON THE UPPER MISSOURI— EARLY VIEWS ENTERTAINED BY MEEK, NEWBERRY, AND CTHER PALEONTOLO- GISTS ON THE AGE OF THIS GROUP—THE JIGNITIC GROUP OF THE NORTIIWEST BELIEVED TO BE CONTINUOUS SOUTHWARD WITH THE COLORADO AND LARAMIE BEDS. In this chapter, I desire to note, as briefly as possible, the progress of the development of the Lignitic group of the Western Territories; and in doing so I need not go back farther in the past than the commence- ment of my own explorations on the Upper Missouri in 1854. Prior to that time, the observations that had been made by various travelers in regard to the existence of coal-beds in different parts of the West were of so indefinite a character that they cannot be used as evidence, though they may form a part of the early history of discovery. I have frequently stated in my former reports that I regarded this group as, in Many respects, the most important one in the West; that, in its relations to the well-defined Cretaceous group below it, it had a , more important bearing on the physical history of the growth of the western portion of our continent than any other in the geological scale. Although this formation has been studied with great zeal by several parties within a few years, and most important additions to geology have resulted therefrom, there is evidently much more work to be done before all the problems will be solved with sufficient clearness for our entire satisfaction. That the evidence is very conflicting is shown by the wide differences of opinion that are entertained in regard to its age by geologists and paleontologists whose views have great weight in the scientific world. The assistant geologists connected with the survey under my charge have been continually instructed to gather all the materials possible bearing on the age of this group, while Messrs. Meek, Lesquereux, and Cope have been urged to study the subject from their own peculiar standpoints, regardless of unity of results. Many extremely valuable and instructive memoirs have already appeared in the reports of the Survey touching upon this group, and several more are in process of preparation or publication. One fruitful source of difference of opinion has been in the misunder- standing in regard to the different horizons of the coal-strata of the West. That there are important coal-beds in rocks of well-defined Cretaceous age cannot be disputed, and I have long since yielded that point. What we wish to show more clearly is that there exists in the West a distinct series of strata which we have called the Lignitic group, and that it is entirely separate, paleontologically and geologically, from a great group of strata in the Lower Cretaceous, and perhaps extending down into the — Jurassic, which contains a great number of thick and valuable beds of ' coal. It is not necessary to discuss the question whether the term Lignitie shall be applied to the coal of either or both groups. I have used the term Lignitic for the upper group without reference to the 19 20 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF, THE TERRITORIES. quality of its fuel, simply to distinguish it from the other great group of older date, the age of which is not questioned. The time has now come, as it seems to me, when the materials are so abundant that the subject can be reviewed with some care. It is well known that I have held with some tenacity the opinion that the coal- formations of the West are of Tertiary age; and [I still regard the Lig- nitic group proper as transitional or Lower Eocene, and shall so regard its age until the evidence to the contrary is much stronger than any which has been presented up to the present time. When, however, the proof is sufficient to decide the Cretaceous age of the group, I shail accept the verdict without hesitation. It is somewhat doubtful whether the age will ever be decided positively to the satisfaction of all parties; still we shall see in the course of this report that the character of the paleontological as well as the strictly geological evidence is such that it is not a matter of importance whether the entire group be placed in the Lower Tertiary or Upper Cretaceous, and it is most probable that the testimony of the different paleontologists will always be as conflicting as it 1s at present. In order that the reasons for my belief in the Tertiary age of the Lignitic group may be more clearly understood and harmonized with the present state of our knowledge of the subject, I will give a briei history of the commencement and progress of its examination. My first knowledge of this group was obtained in the summer of 1854, when I made a somewhat careful examination of the beds from their first appearance on the Missouri River near Fort Clarke to the mouth of the Yellowstone, and thenceup that river toa point near the mouth of the Big Horn. In all this distance, about six hundred miles, fellowing the windings of the river, the Cretaceous beds appear but once, and then only along the bed of the river for a few miles, while the entire country, with this exception, is occupied with the Lignitic group. The area of this forma- tion on the Upper Missouri cannot be less than one hundred thousand square miles, and extends far north across the northern boundary of the United States into the British possessions. This group everywhere rests upon well-defined Cretaceous beds, which we haveail along regarded as the highest known in the West, and have received the name of the Fox Hills group, from a locality on the Missouri River ealled the Fox Hills, or Fox hidge, where this formation was first studied, and was very full of molluscan life. There is a gradual passage upward from the black~ plastic, shaly clays of No. 4, or the Fort Pierre group, to the yellow cal- careous clays of the Fox Hills group, and at the upper portion, the sediments are arranged in thin layers, very arenaceous, and indicative of their deposition in turbulent as we!] as shallow waters. In these are- paceous sediments, the well-marked marine life ceases to.exist,and soon alter appear the brackish-water species. Between the Big Cheyenne and the Moreau Rivers, branches of the Missouri that come in from the west side, the Lignitic strata overlap those of Cretaceous age, and in the lower beds occurs a species of Ostrea associated with some other brackish- water forms. I am not positive as to the exact position of these fossils, but I am confident that a bed of gray sandstone, with a layer of impure coal or Lignite lie, below any of the brackish-water forms found in the Northwest. Scattered over the weathered surface of these Lower Lig- nitie beds, aud believed, without doubt, to have been originally imbedded in them, were found several specimens of Vertebrata which have been regarded by Protessor Cope as characteristic of the Creta- ceous era. So far as the Northwest is concerned, the brackish-water beds are not more than 200 feet in thickness, while those that are HAYDEN.] GEOLOGY—AGE OF THE LIGNITIC GROUP. 21 purely fresh-water must reach an aggregate thickness of 3,000 to 5,000 feet. During the years 1854 and 1855, I studied this group on the Mis- | souri to Fort Benton, and on the Yellowstone, where it is most exten- sively developed, to the mouth of the Big Horn River and collected great quantities of animal and vegetable remains from the base to the summit. Tivery season, up to the autumn of 1860, I made collections from this group in all parts of the Northwest. The vertebrate remains were studied by Dr. Leidy; the vegetable fossils, by Dr. Newberry and Mr. Lesquereux; and the invertebrate fossils, by Mr. Meek and the writer. None of us even doubted their Tertiary age. Numerous papers were published by Mr. Meek and the writer ou the geology and invertebrate paleontology of this region in various journals, but mostly in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sci- ences at Philadelphia; and inasmuch as these articles are not easily accessible to the general public, I shail be excused from quoting par- agraphs frem them quite freely in an official report. In an article published in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, May, 1857, we siate that of the 150 species of Mollusca already described, 54 species are of Tertiary age, 50 are strictly tresh-water, and only four belong to genera supposed to inhabit salt or brackish waters. This gronp was even regarded as of Miocene age. The first conclusion, at the close of this paper, reads as follows :—“ We have no evidence that any of the Tertiary deposits now known in Nebraska are older than Miocene.” The above paragraph shows that Mr. Meek and the writer attempted to correllate the various Tertiary groups in the Northwest in the light of the Knowledge they possessed at that time. _ But it was from the very abundant fossil flora of this group that the most positive proof of its age was derived. It is hardly possible to estimate with accuracy the thickness of this great group in the North- west, but I should regard it from 3,000 to 5,000 feet in the aggregate, with from twenty to thirty beds or seams of lignite, not including -the thin seams of an inch or two, which are very numerous. These vary ‘from six inches to ten feet in thickness. All through this great thick- ness of strata, the leaves are found in most instances in a remarkabiy perfect state of preservation. Sometimes they are so abundant and so perfectly preserved thet they would appear to have fallen from the trees on the spot and in the greatest profusion. It is not uncommon for a stratum of two feet or more to be composed almost entirely of these leaves, lying parallel with the layers, as if they had not been dis- turbed after dropping from the trees. Along the immediate vicinity of the main rivers (Missouri and Yellowstone), these plants are the most abundant, far more so than in the more important coal-regions of Wyoming or Colorado. : Although my own collections, made from 1850 to the autumn of 1860, doubtless comprise the greater part of the species that will hereatter be found, and therefore form a permanent basis for determination and comparison, yet the force of their teachings is somewhat weakened from the fact that the species from different horizons were not kept suffi- ciently separate. We know, however, that some of the species have a very great vertical as well as horizontal range, and that, so far as can be detected, there is no break in the sequence of the beds from the Saskatchewan to Santa Fé. The tollowing extract is taken from a paper prepared by Mr. Meek and the writer, and published in the proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, December, 1861. This extract will not Paes GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. only serve to show the views we entertained at that time after a careful study and discussion of the invertebate fossils, but incidentally the opinions of other eminent paleontologists : Ne “It would extend these remarks beyond the limits assigned them to attempt any detailed account of the Tertiary rocks of Nebraska, or to discuss at length the question respecting their relations to those of the Atlantic coast, or of the Old World. ees ‘We must, therefore, limit ourselves here to a few brief statements of leading facts, and leave all Nee for another occasion. : “In the first place, we would remark, that no strictly marine Tertiary deposits have yet been discovered in all the Rocky Mountain region of -*Nebraska, nor, so far as known, in any other portion of Nebraska, Kansas, or Utah. “ Throughout all this great central area of the continent, wherever the oldest Tertiary deposits have been seen, they give evidence of freshand brackish water origin, and, where observed resting upon the most recent Cretaceous beds, the two have been found conformable, and sometimes blended together, so as to render it difficult to draw a line between them in the absence of organic remains. All the facts indicate a gradual change from the marine conditions of the Cretaceous ; at first to brack- ish, and then to the fresh-water conditions of the Tertiary. The pre- dominance of Gasteropoda and Lamellibranchiata, and the comparative paucity of types usually considered characteristic of deeper-water deposits, as well as the coarser nature of the sediments, near the end of the Cretaceous epoch of this region, indicate that the waters were grow- ing more shallow as the land on the east encroached on the sea, and islands were rising where the Rocky Mountains now stand, while the close of the Cretaceous period seems to have been attended by the grad- ual elevation of large areas of country here above the ocean-level. This and other contemporaneous changes of physical conditions caused the total destruction of the whole Cretaceous fauna. “After this, extensive tracts of country in the region of the Rocky Mountains, and east of them in Nebraska and other northwestern Ter- ritories, were occupied by bays, inlets, estuaries, etc., of brackish water, inhabited by Mollusca of the genera Ostrea, Unio, Pisidium, Corbicula, Potamomya, Melania, Melampus, Vivipara, ete., all of Tertiary types. As the gradual elevation of the country continued, the salt and brack- ish waters receded and gave place to lakes and other bodies of fresh- water, in which most of the Tertiary rocks of the Northwest were deposited; so that in all, excepting the earliest Tertiary beds of this region, we find only the remains of strictly fresh-water and terrestrial animals. ‘The passage from the brackish to the fresh water beds in the oldest member of the Tertiary of this region seems not to be marked by any material alteration in the nature of the sediments. Nor have we, so far as is yet known, any reasons for believing that any climatic or other important physical changes, beyond the slow rising of the land and the consequent recession of the salt and brackish water, took place during the deposition of the whole of the oldest member of the Tertiary here, since we find. a considerable portion of the species of fresh-water Mol- lusca ranging through this whole lower member. “The principal difference between the fossils of its upper and lower beds consists of the gradual disappearance of strictly brackish-water types as we ascend from the inferior strata. The entire series of Ne- *The old Territory of Nebraska is here referred to. HAYDEN. ] GEOLOGY—LIGNITIC GROUP. 23 braska Tertiary rocks consists of three or four groups, three of which at least (and probably tour) evidently belong to separate and distinct epochs. They usually occur in isolated basins, but have, with one ex- ception, all been seen in such connection as to leave no doubt in regard to their order of superposition. “Their prevailing lithological characters, estimated maximum thick- nesses, and order of succession will be seen in the section given below. g 58 g Subdivisions. iB Localities. os Oo Oem 3 a Be. a a 5 S Fine loose sand, with some layers of limestone; | S On Loup Fork of Platte River, | ¢ a a contains bones of Canis, Felis, Oastor, Hiquus, aes extending north to Niobrara a 3 Mastodon, Testudo, etc., some of which are | € 9 River, and south to an un- 3) a2 scarcely distinguishable from living secies. eon knowr distance beyond the | -3 3 ; : Platte. Ay FA White and light drab clays, with some beds of | x Bad Lands of White River, un- > sandstone and local layers of limestone ; fos- © der the Loup River beds on 3 ee sils, Oreodon, Titanotherium, Cheropotamus, | > ¢ Niobrara, and across the A oo Rhinoceros, Anchitherium, Hyaenonodon, Ma- | & & country to the Platte. 5) eb chairodus, Trionyx, Testudo, Helix, Planorbis, | . 9 AS) Ss Limneea, petrified wood, etc., etc. All extinct. | S = No brackish-water or marine remains.’ = bs Light gray and ash-colored sandstones, with | S Wind River Valley, also west de ee more or less argillaceous layers. Fossils, = of Wind River Mountains. om bir) fragments of Trionyx, Testudo, with large He- | 5+ ee oS lia, Vivipara, petrified wood, etc. No marine | © 3 = as) or brackish-water types. so = j = a Beds of clay and sand, with round ferruginous - | Oceupies the whole country 2 as concretions, and numerous beds, seams, and fe around Fort Union, extend- Os local deposits of lignite; great numbers of 2 ing North into the British Be dicotyledonous leaves, stems, etc.,of the gen- | possessions to unknown dis- | a oo era Platanus, Acer, Ulmus, Populus, ete., with S) tances; also southward to a 1S very large leaves of true fan palms. Also, | © Fort Clarke; seen under the S 54 Helix, Melania, Vivipara, Corbicula, Unio, Os- | & White River group, on North | at! trea, Potamomya, and scales of Lepidotus, with S Platte River, above Fort Lar- &H | bones of Trionyx, Emys, Compsemys, Urocodi- | S amie; also on west side of lem lus, ete. & Wind River Mountains. “The Fort Union, or Great Lignite group, occupies extensive areas of country in Nebraska, and has been seen beneath the White River group at several distant localities. It was evidently deposited in large bodies of water, which were at first brackish, and then gradually became fresh. “The great number of fossil leaves, and numerous beds of lignite con- tained in it, clearly show that the shores of these ancient estuaries, lakes, etc.,in which this formation was deposited, supported dense forests of large trees, and a growth of other vegetation, far exceeding in luxuriance anything now met with in these latitudes. ‘¢ Indeed, the presence of true fan palms, of large size, and the remains of the genus Crocodilus, as well as the affinities of the Mollusca found in these beds to southern forms, all point rather to the existence here of a tropical than a temperate climate during their deposition. In regard to the relations of this formation to known horizons in the Tertiary of _the Old World, we scarcely feel prepared to express a very decided opinion. - «The difficulty in the way of drawing inferences bearing on this point from the remaivs of Mollusca found in these beds is that- they, being fresh and brackish water types, bear little or no analogy to those of the 24 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Tertiary of the States bordering on the Atlantic, nor are any of them, so far as known, specifically identical with foreign forms. ‘¢When we bear in mind, however, the fact, that wherever this forma- tion has been seen in contact with the latest Cretaceous beds, the two have been found to be conformable, however great the upheavals and distortions may be, while at the junction there seems to be a complete mingling of sediments, one is strongly impressed with the probability that no important member of either system is wanting between them. This view is also rendered more probable by the fact that the formation under consideration is known to hold a position beneath the White River group, which is characterized by the remains of an entirely different jauna, clearly of Miocene age. va “¢ Again, the occurrence in this lower group of remains of the genus Lepidotus, which is, we believe, in Europe unknown above the Hocene, while the other vertebrate remains found associated with it have been compared by the distinguished comparative anatomist, Professor Leidy, with types even older than the Tertiary, are facts strengthening the impression that this Fort Union Lignite group probably repre- sents the Eocene of Europe. “Tt should not be forgotten, however, that an extensive and beautiful series of fossil plants from this formation, although not yet thoroughly investigated, have been thought by Dr. Newberry to be most analogous to Mioceue types. . “Yet even if this formation should prove to be of Eocene age, this would only be in accordance with what is now known in regard to the earlier introduction of particular types of plants in the Cretaceous sys- tem of this country than in that of the Old World. ‘ As the Wind River deposits have not yet been seen in contact with any well-marked beds of the other Tertiary formations of this region, and few fossils have yet been found in them, their position in the series remains doubtful. It is, therefore, only provisionally that we have placed this formation between the Fort Union and White River groups in the foregoing section. It may possibly belong to the horizens of one of these rocks, or even represent them both in part, or, what is more probable, it may occupy an intermediate chronological position. ‘¢ The only fossils yet found in this formation are fragments of Trionyx and Testudo, together with the shells of two species of Helix and a cast of a Vivipara. One of these Helices is more like H. Leidyt from the White River group than any of the other species yet known from any of these rocks, while the other is a very large depressed species of southern type, quite unlike any of those hitherto found in any of the other Nebraska rocks. The Vivipara seems to be indistinguishable from our V. trochiformis from the Fort Benton group, though, as it is a mere cast, it cannot be identified with certainty with that shell. No marine or brackish-water fossils have been found in these beds. The White River group is the formation that has furnished the extensive and interesting collections of vertebrate remains which have been so ably investigated by Professor Leidy. It occupies a consider- able area in the region of White River, and is seen beneath the sueceed- ing formation on the.Niobrara and Platte Rivers. Its position above ‘the Fort Union or Great Lignite group has also been clearly and satis- factorily determined. “This formation is mainly composed of a series of whitish, indurated * clays, which have been worn and cut, by the streams, rains, and other atmospheric agencies, into numerous deep valleys and ravines, so as to leave various peaks, isolated celumns, towers, ete., presenting, as seen HAYDEN.] GEOLOGY—WHITE RIVER GROUP. 25 from a distance, exactly the appearance of the ruins of an ancient city. The difficulty the traveler meets with in finding his way through this interminable labyrinth caused the Indians to call it, in their own language, the Bad Grounds; hence the French name, Mawvaises terres, applied by the Canadian voyageurs in the employ of the fur-companies. “The vertebrate remains found in these beds belong to the genera Oreodon, Agriocharus, Pebrotherium, Leptomeryx, Leptanchenia, Pro- tomeryx, Merycodos, Tirtanotherium, Leptocherus, Hyracodon, Entelo- don, Paleocherus, Rhinoceros, Steneofiber, Machairodos, Anchitherium, Hiyopotamus, Hycenodon, Ischyromys, Paleolagus, Eumys, Testudo, ete., etc. The affinities of these fossils, as has been shown by Professor Leidy, clearly establish the Miocene age of this formation. ‘¢« Comparatively few invertebrate remains have yet been found in the White River group. They consist of one species of Helix, one or two of Limneea, a small Physa, two or three small species of Planorbis, ete. No fossil leaves nor beds of lignite have been met with in it, and all the animal remains, aS may be seen from the foregoing list, are terrestrial and fresh-water types. The Loup River beds consist mainly of incoher- ent materials, and were evidently deposited after the upper surface of the White River group had been worn into ravines and other depressions. It occupies much of the surface of the country in the region of the Loup Fork and Platte River, and extends far south of the latter stream. “The vertebrate remains from it described by Professor Leidy belong to the genera Megalomeryx, Procamelus, Cervus, Khinoceros, Mastodon, Hlephas, Hipparion, Merychippus, Equus, Castor, Felis, Canis, Testudo, etc., Many oi which, are very closely allied to recent species. A fewshells of the genera Helix, Physa, ete., apparently identical with living spe- cies, have also been found in these beds. All the species of vertebrate and other remains yet tound in them are distinct from those occurring in the White hiver group and beds below, and they have not yet afforded any brackish or marine ty, pes of any kind. ’ ‘¢ When we take into consideration the position of this formation above the well-marked Miocene White River group, and the relation of its organic remains to Pliocene and recent species, there is little roum for doubting the correctness of its reference to the horizon of the Pliocene ot Hurope. © ‘¢ The extracts which I have given are sufficient to show the opinions of a most excellent paleontologist in regard to the age of this group as interpreted from the invertebrate fossils.” Let us for a moment glance at the testimony of American vegetable paleontolozists. Without quoting again, I will simply refer the reader to the interesting report of Dr. J. S. Newberry on the Cretaceous and Tertiary plants collected by me during the expedition to the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers, during the years 1859 and 1860, a portion of which was reprinted in the Annual Report of Wyoming, 1870, commencing at page 94. It will be seen that Dr. Newberry regarded these fossil plants as uot only of Tertiary age, but Middle Tertiary, or Miocene. In an in- teresting memoir published in the Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History, in 1867, Dr. Newberry remarks: ‘* By far the largest representation of our Tertiary flora is, however, contained in collections made by Dr. Hayden on the Upper Missouri, of which the greater number of species are described in the present mem- oir. These plants are from the lignites proved by the associated fossils to be of the Miocene age. They were collected at various points on the Missonri River, at Fort Clarke, at Red Spring, thirteen miles above, at Hort Berthold, at Crow Hills, one hundred miles below Fort Union, at 26 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the mouth of the Yellowstone, on O’Fallon’s Creek, one hundred miles above the mouth of the Yellowstone, and in the valley of that stream. “‘The explorations of Dr. Hayden prove that this Miocene Lignite for- mation occupies the beds of extensive lakes, which formed basins on the surtace of the continent when it had but recently emerged from the Cretaceous sea. As has been remarked elsewhere, the lower members of the series contain a few estuary shells, showing the access of salt- water at that period; but during the deposition of by far the greater portion of these beds, the water of the ocean was entirely excluded from the basins in which they accumulated. There is, therefore, every reason to believe that the débris of ligneous plants which compose this collec- tion were derived from trees which grew along the shores of the lakes and streams of the Tertiary continent; that then, as now, alternations of seasons prevailed, by which the foliage of these trees were detached by an autumnal frost, and that falling into the water beneath or near them, and sinking to the bottom, they were enveloped in mud, precisely as leaves of our sycamores, willows, oaks, etc., accumulate at the bottoms of our streams and lakes of the present day.” I need not extend these remarks farther to illustrate the views of both paleontologists in regard to the age of the Lignitic group, as observed in the Northwest, up to within a comparatively recent period. 1 need not refer to the views of Mr. Lesquereux, inasmuch as they have been consistent in the belief of their Tertiary age, from the commence- ment of his examination up to the present time, and his arguments in favor of this belief have been set forth in nearly all the annual reports of the Survey. , If the Lignitic group, as developed on the Upper Missouri, is admit- ted to be either entirely or in part of Tertiary age, the question will arise, what bearing has this admission on the age of the coal-beds of Wyo- ming and Colorado ? I beg just here to call the attention of geologists to the geological mnaps prepared by me, and published in the Final Report of Nebraska, 1869, and in the Geological Report of the Exploration of the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers, 1859~60, especially the latter map. It will be seen by the last-named map that the Lignitic group occupies a very large area along the Upper Missouri and the Yellowstone Rivers, that it extends far north into the British possessions. We may then trace it south- ward in a broad continuous belt across the Yellowstone River, between the Black Hills and the Big Horn Mountains, until it is overlapped by the White River group, about sixty miles north of Fort Laramie. If we continue southward along the east base of the Laramie range, we find that the Lignitic group re-appears about ten miles south of the Union Pacific Railroad. We find that where the White River group aud the Lignitic group come in contact, the former is superimposed on the latter, and that really the White River group formed a vast basin subsequent to the existence of the great lake in which the lignitic sediments were deposited. We find also, by examining the White River group along the base of the mountains, that the Laramie range formed a barrier that prevented it from extending into the Laramie Plains; but the evidence is clear that, at the time of the existence of the great Lignitie lake or sea, this, barrier did not prevent the water- communication with the Laramie Plains. Indeed, the evidence seems quite clear that, with the exception perhaps of some isolated peaks ris- ing above the waters, there was no mountain-barrier where we now have the Laramie range. Therefore, with the exception of the Bear River and: Coalville group, we may connect the coal-bearing beds of the SEN: | GEOLOGY—COAL STRATA. 2 Laramie Plains and Colorado with the vast group in the Northwest. I ‘have traced this geographical connection step by step over this great area, have studied the formation with some care, and collected both vegetable and animal fossils in the greatest abundance from point to point. I would say, however, that comparatively few of the fresh-water species of Mollusca, so abundant in the Northwest, are found either in Colorado or the Laramie Plains; but it possesses the same character, and many of the same species of plants are scattered all over this im- mense area. CHAPTER II. THE LIGNITIC GROUP AS EXAMINED AT CANON CITY—COLORADO SPRINGS—NORTEWARD TO CACHE LA PUVUDRE CREEK—MONUMENT CREEK GROUP—-PROBABLE AGE OF THESE GROUPS. Our examinations along the eastern base of the mountains in Colorado were directed mainly to the tracing-out of the connection between the Lignitic group and the older beds. We traced the boundary of this group, With great care, from Cafion City, on the Arkansas River, north- ward nearly to Cheyenne. It is hardly possible that any links in the chain of evidence escaped us, and the principal differences of opinion now will consist in the degree of importance to be attached to that evi- dence. The question is whether the coal-bearing strata known as the Lignitic group of the astern Rocky Mountain region is of Cretaceous or 'Lertiary age. In this chapter, we shall simply record our field-cbser- vations, referring the reader to a subsequent chapter for a brief discus- sion of the question of age. South of Caton City, on the south side of the Arkansas hiver, there is an isolated coal-basin occupying an area of about fifty square miles. The strata lie for the most part in a nearly horizontal position, indicating no ereat disturbance, except along the north and west sides. On the north- west side of the basin, along the immediate base of the mountains, the beds have been lifted up, so that a great thickness of the Lignitic sandstones is exposed, at least 1,000 to 1,600 teet. The Cretaceous beds are also seen lying close to the flanks of the mountains. As we proceed southward along the junction of sedimentary beds and the granites, the Cretaceous beds disappear, and one by one the lower Lignitic, until the whole mass juts against the granitic rocks, with no perceptible evidence of disturbance, except in a general way. There seems to be a rapid slope from the base of the mountains to the Arkansas River, a dis- tance of about five miles, thus giving to the strata a general dip of about 5°. So far as we couid ascertain, there are no coal beds in the northern portion of the basin. The rocks consist mostly of rath- er thick beds of gray, brown, and yellow sandstone, with loose clays and sands between, but no coal-beds. We find that the coal-bear- ing portion does not occupy the entire area, and that a large part is classed as barren coal-measures. The most important coal-mine has been opened on the east side of the basin, about midway, ou Oak Creek. This is one of the most important coal-mines in the Territory. It was described briefly, but quite clearly, in the Annual Report of the Survey for 1869, and since that time in the more elaborate reports of Mr. Les- quereux. In the summer of 1872, Mr. Lesquereux made a careful examination of ihe coal-formations all along the east base of the Rocky Mountains from Cheyenne to Santa Fé. His report in the Annual Re- port for 1872 is quite exhaustive. The Section of the coal-strata on page 323, made by Mr. Neilson Clark, the superintendent of the mines, is more accurate than any other that has been made of the group, and need not be repeated here. It remains now to consider the beds below this sec- 28 HAYDEN. ] GEOLOGY—LIGNITIC GROUP IN COLORADO. 29 ion, which are supposed to be of Cretaceous age, but which might very properly be called beds of passage from well-marked Cretaceous strata to those containing coal and vegetable remains. We have heretotore de- scribed the Upper Cretaceous beds as of strictly marine origin; that tie sediments were deposited in a broad and, at least, moderately deep sea. As long as we find that these physical conditions prevailed, we observea greater or less abundance of fossils of strictly marine forms, as Ammon- ites, Baculites, Inoceramus, etc.; but even when no break can be found in the sequence of the beds, indicating a lapse of time in the deposition of the sediments, we discover that the physical conditions gradually change until there is a complete extinction of all marine forms of life. We find here on the Arkansas River a full development of the Upper Cretaceous formations Nos. 4 and 5, with their peculiar fossils. Wealso observe that the materials of the upper portion of No. 5 pass gradually from a dark- yellow clay to a rusty-yellow sand, and above this, 200 to 300 feet, of a sort of irregular thin layers of mud-like material, with curious concre- tions of sandstone. In this: group of strata, which may be called transi- tional, not a fossil has yet been found to prove the age beyond a doubt. Resting on this irregular group of mud-strata is a bed of sandstone of very variable thickness as well as structure. Sometimes it is not more than 50 feet thick, and then again it is 300 to 400 feet thick. It is fuil of rounded concretionary masses, and shows very clearly that its sedi- ments were deposited in shailow and very turbulent waters. This sand- Stone passes up into clay, and on this clay rests a bed of coal. In the bed of sandstone below the coal, the peculiar vegetation of the Lignitic group is found in considerable abundance, and, therefore, this may mark the lowest horizon of this group. Now, whevever,'in any part of the country, invertebrate remains of any kind are found above this bed of sandstone, they are invariably brackish or fresh water in their charac- ter; and whenever any of these fossil shells are observed below this sand- stone, they are always strictly marine. We have in the vicinity of these coal-mines the details of structure, which we have briefly described above, most clearly shown. Now the question arises, what stress shall be laid on these remarkable physical changes? Would not this form an excellent line of separation between two great periods in geological time? Are not these changes sufficient to indicate clearly that these are probably the beds of passage or transition between the Cretaceous and the Tertiary epochs? We find also a complete change in the vege- table as well as animal life. We are not aware that any of the verte- brate remains, which have been regarded by Cope and Marsh as proving the Lignitic group to be of Cretaceous age, have ever been found mingled with any other forms of life of strictly marine origin. So far, all the vertebrate fossils have been discovered in the Lignitic group. It seems therefore that not a single species of vegetable or animal life survived the physical changes which were introduced during the time of the depo- sition of the transition group. Now, if we have shown this state of affairs in regard to the Cafion group, we may connect this group easily with the Raton Hills group to the southward, and the Monument Creek group far to the northward near Colorado Springs. In passing northward, we see no more of the Lignitic group, so far as we have examined, until we reach Colorado Springs, a distance of thirty miles in a straight line. Here it is exposed in the form of an irregular bluff ridge, running down from the base of the mountains a little south- east, beyond the limit of our explorations up to this time. In section 2, we see in the foreground, at either end, the form of the sandstone bluffs, which appear to be remnants of a far more extended group of strata. 30 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The inclination is slight, 5° to 10°, about; northeast. The bluff-wall undoubtedly extended at one time over the entire interval south and southwest and was joined to the Cafion City group; the intervening por- tions having been removed by erosion, with the exception of a narrow belt just at the base of the mountains. This interval is entirely occu- pied with Cretaceous rocks at the present time. The valley of the Fountain, as well as that of Monument Creek, for some distance above its junction with the Fountain, is underlaid with Upper Cretaceous groups Nos. 4 and 5; but the surface is everywhere so denuded and grassed over that the junction of the Cretaceous with the Lignitic group is nowhere well marked. The lower bed of sandstone, which is usually regarded as the com- mencement of the Lignitic, iscomposed sometimes of yielding arenaceous sediments, and therefore cannot always be relied upon as forming a fixed horizon of demarkation. But, in the majority of instances, this floor of sandstone is present with a greater or less thickness. About ten miles east of Colorado Springs, some very important coal-beds have been opened by Mr. Matt France and others. This locality is a very import- ant one for the study of this great coal-group. Between Colorado Springs and the coal-mines, the intervening country is very rolling or undulating, and so grassed over that no sections of the underlying beds are exposed ; but, before reaching the mines, the rounded grassy hills are covered with fragments of calcareous concretions, from which have been taken a great variety of the fossils characteristic of the Upper Cretaceous. The three forms which are usually so abundant, Ammonites lobatus, Baculites ova- tus, and Inoceramus, are here found in great numbers. This point is about 600 feet higher than Colorado Springs; and inasmuch as the strata are horizontal, we may estimate the thickness of the Cretaceous beds above the valley of Monument Creek at 600 to 800 feet. As we continue to the west we soon come to dark, rusty-brown sandstones, with great numbers of a peculiar kind of sea-weed, called by Mr. Lesquereux Haly- menites. There isa series of alternate layers of arenaceous clay and sandstones, 200 feet or more in thickness, the upper portion containing vast globular concretions, as illustrated in Plate 4, Fig. 2, which corre- spond to the mud-beds seen in the vicinity of the coal-basin of the Arkansas. A section of the beds here would be as follows, in ascending order :— SECTION a. “7 Ft. In. AM Read es Rc 2 EE SD IY ee Re 0) Oni Clave sae tessa aie st Wee e es ees enba dnd 6 0 By} PSE OLOUSY HO) 0 see ey es Ce eS Ae Sry We Kayes Sa om One CuOS ag AES ON ay iratees oc es srepce ese en SNE Ee oases wo clea fa) see ue eh Siete Sie Sree IEE ener cr 16 2 EVEN O We SATIS TOM Ce cies eee et ae ee ee eee tray oat Org pence ee @ GEE SOMA Oa see SE eA NG NN ai 1 Na a BO i apse pan Co te Sal 7. Rusty-brown clay and sandstone.--..----. -.:-------.---------+----- 50— 80 0 8. Alternate layers of sandstone and clay..----.--..--.----.----------- 200 0 9. Cretaceous formations Nos. 4 and 5.......---.-.-.------------------- 600—800 0 This section is in part constructed from shafts that have been sunk for coal. So far as I have observed, the only way to obtain a clear sec- ° tion of the coal-strata, is by boring or sinking a shaft. All other seéc- tions, unless made in some actual cut, may be regarded as only ap- proximately correct. The lower portion of section a, Cretaceous, grad- ually passes up into bed 8, which is composed at the bottom of alter- vate thin layers of sandstone and clay, these layers increasing in thickness toward the top. The upper portion is made up mostly of rounded Goneretions, varying in size from an inch or two to sey- Flate -. Fireclay Sand and \- Sandstone Sandstone ee + —- 4 -- => Lignite with seams of Fireclay, Pebbles d& Gypsum. Lignite with seans of Sand, Clay cd Pebbles = = FO ——— Pees a=) = = Soe —_- Sand soft white Sandstone Showing the variability of the Lignitic beds. Parallel sections taken on the face of Pulpit Rock 5 miles north of Colorado Springs through identical strata and only 20 feet apart. |e ection rapes aoe nt 7 nba eda =e a spyc ee CLE Ww ses ache HAYDEN.] GEOLOGY—LIGNITIC GROUP—SECTION. dl eral feet in diameter. Sometimes these concretions are oval or flat, with horizontal layers; but in most cases they fall in pieces, showing concentric coats, the disk-like shells falling off from the outside gradu- ally. ‘here is also a species of sea-weed, Halymenites, quite abundant in these sandstones. I call them the transition beds, though they may be Cretaceous, and they correspond with those described as occurring below the coal on the Arkansas. Number 7 in the section is the sandstone that usually forms the basis bed of the Lignitic group. This bed is here full of small iron-rust con- cretions, some of them solid, with a gray nucleus, others hollow, the cavity filled with fine dust, a kind of iron-rust. These concretions, vary- ing from an inch to three or four inches in diameter, are so abundant that they cover the ground for some distance from the bluff. About the-mid- dle of the sandstone-bed, there is a band of dark-brown indurated sand, mixed with bits or fragments of vegetable material, about five feet in thickness. This bed or band may, quite possibly, become coal in some localities. At one point in the southern portion of the coal-basin on the Arkansas River, a seam which appears to correspond to this dark band occurs in the lower sandstone, and is quite good coal, two feet in thickness. The quantity and character of the coal at this locality was determined by the sinking of several shafts. In section a, we have: two quite thick beds of coal, both of which were penetrated by a shaft, and thus the section may be regarded as correct. SECTION J. Feet. Pee SUTLAC C=SOl eters sas pele ie linia ola ale eiatala Se wim wre alas d a winicipie cinlesiieininey sieseee tse 8 OO I SEENIGL epee see Sey Hy BOOS OG ID aGS SEDEICR CS COCO S Ce OE ten Ah eee Ree re 6 tha eiee 12 3 IDRAID-ClaKy Sa5 Je eS Shoo CnO RCO TACO EOS SOOT ERee Renee Eee aEes Same eee e ser aa eae 6 4, SORDsSITMe andl Cleyy sso Sesse Seee Goss dood cbco Cc aee ee CE EOE ene TicEaraascossena 9 5, SIBWS | oBloSeeoBSGHe Sete Mee Aes Semen ast aaa Se ae Jeeta eeisis a ape alee eetere ae 5 GMSANCSbOMe ees emesis Se cki be cliicisalvenclon co seeoee esas etlcee ge es a 4 PP MLEMACC OUST Clay sets Valse nya caissisenenicid dots se cislscl dSeue we eek eh eee ces 7 SoS ONES HOM eer seen eini years nsec iciaraleleittniatsinidis ieee eo b,l6la Si nro es ec ay ecelsienensyas 6 9. Coal - Be eeyaateneree yeh cistern dioPcuarcltnoisesay elec, ort eho ine eevee ene 1 10. Sandstone with plants. 30 11. Bituminous shales... Reales dea S ise wa eae dace cd epee as OS Li) ESAS Ue See aan nn 12. ee with iron.. oH BROAN OUUCRO UME USE Sao OBA COs Been ern ere amma Hae 3 14, Pinta ais’. Barat te sciats Mamie tetn che: Sa eVSiais siaiaic a cmicye Scie custeers aes Sem 15. Coal - eee cop sie eis oo relaratiacieevemieitea oa ee cares satis ee Soha e eee ar oeer 6 In section b, which is the record of a shaft sunk at a distant local- ity in the same basin, we have only the upper bed of coal at the base. The two sections give a pretty clear idea of the strata which include the two lower beds of coal. Above the coal-bearing portion, there is an interval which we estimated at about 200 feet, in which the beds were obscure, but thin seams of impure coal cropped out. The mate- rials were clays, afenaceous clays, and thin layers of sandstone, yield- ing so readily to atmospheric forces that no sharp bluffs are formed, so that the character of the strata could not be clearly seen. We then have a range of high bluffs 200 to 400 feet high, which begin at the base of the mountains, about two miles north of Manitou, and extend across Monument Creek, and reach off to the southeast far beyond the limit of vision, down the entire valley of the Fountain to its entrance into the Arkansas River near Pueblo. The rocks all around Pueblo are Creta- ceous, yet it is quite possible that far to the eastward the Lignitic group overlaps them, having originally been connected with the coal-basin to the south near Caton City. We may thus obtain a dim conception of 32 - GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the vast erosion that must have taken place here, to have removed so great a thickness of strata from so vast an area. f Ded The bluffs east of Colorado Springs, above that portion shown in Sec- tions a and b, may be regarded as barren of workable beds of coal. A detailed section of the beds was taken, but it seems hardly necessary to present it here. So variable are these beds that the sections within a fourth of a mile would only bear a general resemblance to each other. The beds are made up of alternate layers of clay and sand, with irregu- lar beds of concretionary sandstone throughout. These beds of sand- stone change constantly, sometimes 30 feet in thickness, and quite .mas- sive at one point, and within a fourth of a mile either thinning out or changed into soft or indurated sand. Toward the summit of the bluffs is a'thick bed of rusty-brown sandstone, which has been worn by the atmosphere into remarkably ragged forms. As we proceed northward from Colorado Springs to the source of Monument Creek, on the divide between the South Platte and the Arkansas drainage, the upper beds of the Lignitic group appear entirely destitute of coal, with a vast thick- ness, estimated at 1,500 to 2,000 feet, with unusually coarse sediments. The materials composing these Upper Lignitie strata of the Monument Creek present the appearance of having been deposited with unusual ‘rapidity in moving or disturbed waters. Figures show with great clearness this peculiar character of the sediments. The peculiar group of strata which, in 1869, I called the Monument Creek group, extends to a point within about twenty miles of Denver, where the Lignitic sedi- ments return to their usual character, and then continue northward nearly to Cheyenne. For a distance of about thirty miles north of west of Monument Creek, the coarse variegated sandstones of the Monument Creek group lap on to the granites, have been slightly elevated so as to incline 5° to 15°, but not detached from the granites, so that for a considerable distance these granite foot-hills formed the western shore-line for the great lake. This group is more fully treated in a subsequent portion of this chap- ter. Up to the present time, but few invertebrate remains have been found in the Lignitic group from the Arkansas to Denver; but in the lower strata in the vicinity of the coal-beds a number of plants have been observed, belonging in most instances to well-known species occurring elsewhere. These plants were observed by the Survey in several loeali- ties along the southern border of the group, generally in the bed of sand- stone immediately below the lowest coal, aud ranging up 100 to 150 feet. The species, as identified by Lesquereux, are Sabai Campbelli, Platanus Haydeni, Ficus tillefolia, Dombeyopsis obtusa. The Sabal has been found at Raton Hills, Golden City, Black Buttes, and on the Upper Missouri River near Fort Union. The Platanus occurs at Raton Hills, Golden City, Black Buttes, and was originally described from the Upper Missouri River, where it is found in great numbers. The Ficus has been obtained from Evanston on the Union Pacific Railroad, Raton Hills, and in Montana on the Yellowstone, so that the evidence, so far - as it can be derived from the few vegetable remains, connects this group with the Ratoa Hills group to the southward, and far to the north on , the Upper Missouri. Other species have been identified. From Colorado Springs, we may follow the Lignitic group northward very nearly to Cheyenne without any break. For a short distance, as we have previously remarked, the Monument Creek group laps on to the granites, entirely concealing all older formations; but very soon after crossing the “divide” to the drainage of Plum Creek, the older beds re- Coal outcrop-v aN Dif wee Pee Se Wy: an Nak \ Nos Nas 77 Vatley of Ralston Cr. bb Volcanic Cape. 7 Maaphy Mere LOOKING NORTH from VAN BIBBER ER. a, Bear Station b, Morrison a, Line of Coal outcrop-vertical 6, Green Mt. Lignitie- horizontal. Section at Bear Cr. HAYDEN. } GEOLOGY—LIGNITIC GROUP—SECTIONS. ao appear in the form of uplifted ridges. This belt, though varying muck in width, is not again interrupted until we reach a point within a few miles of the Union Pacific Railroad, west of Cheyenne. Sometimes this belt extends out from the mountain foot-hills four or five miles, and again it closes up so that the Lignitic bed, as at Golden City, extends up to within one-fourth or one-half a mile of the granites. I need not describe again the geological features of the district about Golden City, so much has already been written, nor need I repeat the fifty or sixty species of fossil plants which have already been detected in this far-famed locality. On the map which accompanies this report, the boundary-line between the Lignitic group and the well-marked Cre- taceous strata is shown very clearly. We may say that very soon after leaving the granite foot-hills, the Lignitic beds, at whatever angle they may be found to incline, return to a nearly or quite horizontal position. We may say that they incline at all angles from 5° to 70°, depending upon their distance from the base of the mountains. From Colorado Springs to Golden City, the outcrops of the coal are very rare; but, from Golden City tothe Big Boulder, they are quite com- mon, and the most productive coal-mines in Colorado are found there. That beds of lignite or coal underlie the plain country far to the east, there is hardly room to doubt. About ten miles east of Denver, on the Kansas Pacific Railroad, at a locality called Tousland, several shafts have been sunk in the level prairie, and a thick bed of coal or lignite was found at moderate depths. A section of the strata is as follows :— 1. Clay, gravel, ete. MONS ANG NOC arya amie cr alata ay seieiaet oe rae sia! sin olssaiaweie situ eicreiajsiwapecieieets 10 to 12 feet. 3. Sandstone, with seams of coal varying from 1 to 18 inches in thickness, with 6 to 8 inches of sandstone between....--.....--....---..----. 30 feet. AMC ODOT MOINTTO Le sete owe Mees ceo o oa. oes shit Geek eS 6 feet. 5 . Sandstone, forming the floor of the mine. This is one of the most elaborately and elegantly prepared mines in Colorado Territory ; but the coal contains so large a percentage of vol- atile matter that it will probably not be made available for economical purposes until the more valuable coal-mines in the vicinity are ex- hausted. The great scarcity of timber all over this portion of the West may, at some future day, render any kind of combustible material val- uable as a fuel. One shaft sunk here is 245 feet deep, and a second one, about a mile distant, is 145 feet deep. Both of them passed through this 6-foot bed. The strata are horizontal. This bed is probably higher up in the series than any of the beds that are wrought near the base of the mountains. senses sees ee eee) ee eee ee eee 2 feet. 3» Clavie eee 2 SS LGR a fo UA OA lA UL EEE Uy 41 feet. AC vadiyeys i ai NAN NaS MCG Ga Tg SEAT eR ya LL io) LC 24 feet. 5. Floor of sandstone. A few fragments of leaves were observed in the hard sandstone, but no other fossils. Shafts have been sunk in many other places east of Greeley, but only thin beds of rather poor coal were detected. It is not probable that any valuable beds of coal will ever be discovered in the immediate vicinity. : Our examinations of the country between the South Platte and the base of the mountains, especially along the valley of the Cache a la Poudre, were productive of most important results. We found in an extensive series of sandstones, sands, clays, ete., a great variety of marine invertebrate fossils belonging to well-known Cretaceous types. The rocks are all quite peculiar, indicating by their structure that these dep- ositions took place in moving waters. A few of the shells were found in the clays, and many of them were inclosed in dark, round, calcareous concretions, scattered through the clay; but most of them occur in isolated groups on the under or upper surface of a layer of sandstone, as if they had been swept into eddies or shallow depressions.. As we have often stated, the physical history of these massive formations is written on the rocks themselves. Plate II. aaeT 1B) ea iil NE ih. ; (2. Se ne | | gi eens Ua Table Butte capped with Trachyte Oo miles north of the Arkansas and Platte River divide. Sandstone. Fire clay. Lignite. Deposit of Lignite in an irregular cavity an sandstone. ee) 2 r by — ‘ony tar HAYDEN, ] GEOLOGY—FOX HILLS GROUP. } t9) In the lower portion of Cretaceous No. 5, or the Fox Hills group, the sediments all show a moderately deep sea and. quiet waters, in which the various forms of Mollusca peculiar to this group flourished in great abundance, and have been preserved with wonderful perfection. Butas we pass upward, we begin to observe signs of a gradual change to shal- low and even turbulent waters. Tracks and trails of worms, etc., are seen on the surface of the thin layers of sandstone, and the more mass- ive sandstones become concretionary, irregular, sometimes quite thick, and then suddenly thinning out so as to be unimportant or entirely absent. While many of the species peculiar to No. 4 as well as No. 5 continue to flourish to a certain extent, new forms are introduced, such as Tancredia americana, Cardium speciosum, Mactra formosa, Mactra alta, and many others, previously known to occur in no other locality in this country except near the mouth of the Judith River on the Upper Mis- ' souri. There are also mingled with them Baculites, Ammonites, Inoce- ramus, ete., forms well known in the Fox Hillis group all over the West. We may continue our way northward to Cheyenne, and from thence to the Missouri and the Yellowstone region to the north line of the United States, and we shall find the Lignitic group remaining substantially the same and bearing similar relations to the Fox Hills group below. In all this distance, the only break in the connection that occurs is a dis- tanee of about two hundred miles, between Cheyenne and the North Platte, where the Lignitic group is overlapped by the more modern beds of the White River group. Our investigations in Colorado seem to warrant the following conclu- sions :— 1st: That through the upper portion of the Fox Hills group, there are clear proofs of a radical physical change, though very gradual, usually with no break in the sequence of time. In this portion of the group are well-marked Cretaceous fossils of purely marine types, and no others. 2d. That above the upper Fox Hills group, there are about 200 feet of barren beds, which may be regarded as beds of passage to the Lignitic group, which more properly belong with the Fox Hills group below. In this group of transition beds, all trace of the abundant invertebrate life of the great Cretaceous series below has disappeared. 3d. In almost all cases we find at the base of the true Lignitie group a bed of sandstone, very irregular in thickness and structure, which seems to mark the horizon or dawn of this group. In this sandstone, the first deciduous leaves peculiar to this group occur. No purely ma- rine Mollusca pass above this horizon. Estuary or brackish-water shells are found in many loealities in greatabundance. These soon disappear, and are succeeded farther north by fossils of purely fresh-water origin. Whatever view we may take in regard to the age of the Lignitie group, we may certainly claim that it forms one of the time-boundaries in the geological history of our western continent. It may matter little whether we call it Upper Cretaceous or Lower Eocene, so far as the final result isconcerned. Weknowthatit playsanimportant, and, toacertain extent, an independent part in the physical history of the growth of the conti- nent. Even the vertebrate-paleontologists, who pronounce with great positiveness the Cretaceous age of the Lignitie group, do not claim that a single species of vertebrate animal passes above the horizon I have defined from the well-marked Cretaceous group below. Having presented these facts as briefly and clearly as we were able, we will leave the further discussion of the age of the group to a future period. 36 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. MONUMENT CREEK GROUP. On the high divide between the drainage of the Arkansas and South Platte Rivers, we find a somewhat singular formation, differing in some respects from any other that we have met with in the West. The sedi- ments were undoubtedly deposited in a rather modern fresh-water lake ; but whether we can synchronize this group with any of the other lake- deposits in the West remains yet to be discovered. This group was named by me in 1869 the Monument Creek group, from the fact that the atmospheric agents have carved out of some of the beds avery peculiar kind of monument, or columns, which long ago attracted the special attention of the traveler. ‘These columns have given name toa small stream, which rises in the divide, and flows south into Fountain Creek, also to a very interesting locality now known as Monument Park, in the valley of West Monument Creek, where these singularly-shaped columns do most abound. These singular columns have been frequently described in previous reports of the Survey ; but the accompanying figures on Plate 3 presents them to the eye in their varied forms far more clearly than any description in words. The boundaries of this basin have not yet been determined, but it is believed that it does not occupy a very large area, probably confined to the high ridge or divide which seems to give origin to so many small streams, which, as seen on the map, flow south into the Arkansas River. In this basin, Beaver, Kiowa, Bijou, Box Elder, and Cherry Creeks, branches of the South Platte, take their rise; while to the south, many branches of the Fountain and Chico take their origin, and flow far south- ward into the Arkansas. With our present knowledge, we may estimate the area approximately as about forty miles from north to south and fifty from west to east, or about two thousend square miles. It is plain that it originally extended over a much larger area; the evidences of denuda- tion by which large portions have been removed being apparent all around its borders. The basin itself lies in the Lignitic group. All around its south, north, and east borders, we find the beds of this group cropping out, while on the west side they are exposed, when not con- cealed by the nearly horizontal beds of the more modern group. Except along the base of the mountains, it is not easy to detect any want of conformability in the connection of the two groups; and this relation is obscure, when the older beds are lifted up at the base of the granite hills, on account of the great amount of local drift, which seems to cover everything to a considerable thickness. The texture of the rocks of this group is quite varied. The aggre- gate thickness is probably about one thousand five hundred feet. The lower portion is composed of rather massive beds of sandstone, varying from a puddingstone to a fine-grained sandstone, usually of a light color, sometimes yellow or iron-rust, with their intercalations of arenaceous clay. In the distance, the whole group presents a chalky-white appear- ance in many localities’ At the immediate base of the mountains, just south of the small lake on the divide, the rocks are variegated sandstones, brick-red, white, and yellow, varying in texture from a fine sandstone to a puddingstone, with all the signs of deposition in moving waters, and so closely resembling the older red sandstones, which we had usually regarded as Triassic, that I had no small difficulty in determining their exact position. Still farther north, on the divide proper, the beds jut against the granites, inclining not more than 3°, and are made up of a coarse aggregate of feldspar and quartz erystals, so that it resembles a very coarse granite. It is plain that the sediments of this group were ay} ee: za Te 7 ], \ Ss ERS Se ete eG ee Plate III, MONUMENT Park, COLORADO. rs Rie ite tse HAYDEN. ] GEOLOGY——MONUMENT CREEK GROUP. : 37 derived very largely from the granitoid rocks. The sediments become finer and finer as we recede eastward from the foot of the mountains into the plains. To the eastward of the line of the Denver and Rio Grande Railroad, the surface is cut up into more or less rectangular masses, with rather broad table-shaped summits, varying from four hundred to eight hun- dred feet in height. The sides are often very steep—almost inaccessible. At a remote period in the past, the erosion has been very great, carving out by an almost inappreciably slow process, these broad valleys, leaving these buttes here and there, composed of horizontal beds, to aid in form- ing some conception of the amount of denudation which has taken place. It is not possible at the present time to estimate the original thickness of this group, but we believe it to have been very much greater than the highest beds now existing would indicate. The summits of many of these buttes are capped with a greater or less thickness of a beautiful purplish trachyte, which must have ascended in the form of dikes from beneath and flowed over the surface. Much of the trachyte is a sort of breccia, composed of rather coarse sandstones, which must have been caught in the melted material. It is quite evident that these outflows occurred during the existence of the lake, though at a late period. As to. the real age of this group, I am inclined to regard it as Miocene, perhaps Upper Miocene. The great Front or Colorado range was elevated much as it is at present, though it rose some hundreds of feet during and per- haps since its deposition. Some of the lower beds of the group, though jutting up against the granitic mountain-sides, have evidently been lifted up several hundred feet above the same strata, far east on the’ plains. 1 think it might be synchronized with the upper portion of the White River group far to the northward, and is probably of the same age as the fresh-water deposits in the South Park, just over the range, which have yielded such an abundance of fossil leaves of plants, fishes, and insects. Up to this time, the Monument Creek group has yielded but few fossils, and those are vertebrates. Professor Cope states that, in the summer of 1873, he made a brief examination of this group for vertebrate remains, and he states that he discovered the hind leg and foot of an Artiodactyle of the Oreodon type. He also has every reason for believing that the fragmeut Magaceratops coloradoensis came originally from the same locality. He further believes the group to be of Miocene age, which was the conclusion of the writer in 1869. Pro- fessor Cope is disposed to regard the fresh-water strata in the South Park as newer than Eocene and probably Miocene. I see no reason why they should not be of the same age as the Monu- ment Creek group. The strata are horizontal, or nearly so, and hold about the same position in relation to the granitic rocks in the vicinity as the Monument Creek group. The sediments are quite different, it is true, and the fossil remains most abundant and varied in character. This condition might very well exist, inasmuch as.we may suppose that the Front range entirely shut off all connection between them. Vol- canic action seems to have been going ‘on to a great extent during the deposition of the South Park beds, and a great portion of the sediments is composed of the eroded material of the igneous rocks. 38 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. APPENDIX TO CHAPTER IL. By H. T. WEST. Different strata passed through in boring for an artesian well by H. T. West, on section 12, township 5 north, of range 66 west, being in the county of Weld, in the Territory of Colorado—bore, 3 inches in diameter. Feet. In. STUER CELSO TI eters re rete ele aie ee Se SINS Se erm er aaa ere) Sao whe oral Meyicret mata etna Soeata (ape a 92 Wuhitewan d-rock. 62 oes ise ees disk See le Baie see cles ise ee ie ele le nice hee eeteee eee a BRIE} HE) (eine eee pe oe eee Cee a ae a eRe ncaa Soa Soko 2 Blacktshailenceiacecccie x ek Se ioc Scns cesta Bet Aisle) Ss eieyere tare) vate en kere reper 2 Oe aye cP Re ee) SOM MEN ied Sree a Sn Pe 0 [BIZIRE! |oRO IO TROLS ((SAVATISTOHOVD)) GOS Gb5 6o56 cooes5 sods opoa6e cc6G00 oggn coca veces 2 BT OWA TOG Kah eta bok citar cee eie ela coin Seis ee eS SES ANU 2 IIo eg a ee 13 FAG TO Will TOC Kees ah I Be 2 NS ed ope cL Se ae a Soft DROW UTOCK oer e eee a ee ei SEP ee aot eV OIE eR ar Blue shale ........ Si RAIN ig se pA NMOL Sl y= II Le LN onan sose aac Hardiwihitersand=rocke ac fo se ee ee a eee tara Sree aN BBWS SHANG eee tetera leiev ate ims wide Some ne ace enk TRIS mv Sib pe RTI ST TST eT SES ee Meira solnre SHA Oe ee ee aaa IE AR US NSA at ea Ge Ce areca T BUDE WEST CEES Vs ees seer skeen tee ne eNO SE Se ee ea hi Elamaub lime sly al Oyge Neate ree ee Ne pe ) BSA ES) fe Bee ayy Pa aS a ae ee Is SPM Ss caer, Ste c BUN YIRLe aCO Neae e ea ardublwershaleeerscaice so cet Bere ee cee ee er ec SAIN Y nat RVR a Ms lees hele eee ae ei gE a aa Le IE 8 Tis eR NLP 1 8 5 2 a Q 8 3 4 3 10 1 : 5 ARAM OTTO NTO CK ves se ee ei Shs a TN Re ee a ee 1 } BS DIesi SH ave WS eee a cl ae pale Ron at Daman acter Spa cae ma MA tA ace AO Luau a gtd i 3 VERO EH Eee 8 ee a Oa aL mPa LS ee IG ARS ee A RU aS SR Sg 3 Rock (probably of a different character) ...-...----- doses sac doe oSobSe oo56 5 PefeamdereO Clee Sek ts MOA GES CI) MEU eA HME Lee ac Je as Pa A a BMT SiS a eee es els LN I aE Te Uae ee a Re ce en Lp 3 Walmiibemroc kage shes tN eS hs SAL Oi ee Geel OIL Raine US py et Ra ee 3 GirayeTOC yee a Se Ae cs ANS LOS Ue SN Ae Eee et ee, eee EA HS es tial] eee ee cei ee ERIS ea 2H ea CN eh ee Gr 2 JB GHB lia OVE) itillas LUE Sena ee en aa eae pe ERM RU nN SCY lee es SMI ey ep in, Gray Slate ee ote ate 0 2aie ata Sle S/N ale OS i RE 4 Be Slabe eee sett a St oe RN 2 Gok en A ee Re at ope i Giraiy Slate ea A i CSL PRONE CN RBA A Mat aM Me Se re ae ee D ByaV@} Sa Set cy ery Uh eae eR CE AL i a a OR Ye HR RE UNS Ea a Ee aca soeo 2 JIC CENTS) Oe Vs) Mase eet PH tcl ARE Sav A Eo LN UR ees eRe ae oe 3 Hard slate; (I am doubtful may have been coal)..-.-2..-.--------.--------- 4 Wihibeysaimd =noclc ay cies ahs SN ee sa As NUD ge UMN sed GaN eS Sea rel pa maa) ot) ard wihitersamd=rocle 032 See ee ie ULL Sees UA cable a kc CON ea TBM asl ail eyes ea cee eee ei Seed aN) As OU ts CO le rea mE tS ete te ea a 4 VAMOS YS LNA 2 asp eee ae Se ad ipsa IE Fe Ss RE A 2 TATA Sales aie ese Se sees Al ce as SRL aR Na te Sy ae 3 PLE DLW POC Ke ee See es eee ere eevee ees Vey pe re en peat sa AC (ho Ue ana 5 Blueishalevsccootes cele kel es a I oes Lee eens are ee il ecoooocooooocoocoooooocooooooooooooooooeooooooooAaooe® These memoranda were taken from the. book kept by the man who did the boring. He saved samples of each stratum, but I think that they have been destroyed. Higley’s coal-mine is in section 20, township 7 north, of range 66 west. Mr. La Grange prospected for a company, of which I was the secretary, in sections 17 and 22, in the same township and range. He made a rough diagram of the results of his drilling (boring), which I have sent him, with the request that he perfect it and return to me, and when he does so I will dispatch it to you. GEOLOGY—STRATA. 39 By the minutes which I kept, I find that he made a verbal report as follows, January 23, 1871 :— Mr. La Grange made a report of his operations in sections 17 and 22, witha rough dia- gram of his views in regard to the different strata of coal in these sections; also that the thickest vein of coal through which the drill had passed in boring in section 22 was 2 feet 7 inches. On the 8th of February, 1871, he further reported— That he had put down a series of borings in different sections to determine whether there were any large veins of coal to be found, and that he could find nothing thicker than three feet, the veins found varying from one to three feet. That boring to the east of section 17, on section 22, he struck and passed through six different veins, none over 24 feet thick. He also stated— That the coal seemed softer than that found on section 17. That, in accordance with instructions, he had bored 51 feet on a section to the southeast, finding five different veins of coal, the lowest being the thickest, and that 24 feet thick and softer than in section 17. That he had also prospected to the west of the shaft sunk by our company on see- tion 17, finding, at a depth of 273 feet from the surface, a vein of good hard (for soft coal) coal; and further prospecting seemed to determine the fact of a rise in said vein to the west of two inches to the rod. He further stated— - That be had thought it best, before cutting an incline (to shaft on section 17), to test the character of the coal and the profitableness of working it, by chambering, which had developed an inclination, or dip, eight inches in ten feet, which allowed the water to follow the work, thus rendering this mine unprofitable. There seems to have been some convulsion of nature in that town- ship, as will be seen from the fact that the Higley vein pitches in such a way as to drain the mine, while at our shaft, not forty rods north, it dips as stated. CHCA Po Bia RESUME OF THE GEOLOGY ALONG THE EASTERN BASE OF THE FRONT OR COLORADO RANGE: SILURIAN, CARBONIFEROUS, TRIASSIC, JURASSIC, AND CRETACEOUS GROUPS. The various groups of sedimentary rocks that occur along the eastern slope of the Front Range of Colorado from Cation City to Cheyenne have been so often described in previous reports that it seems hardly possible to add anything further of importance. We will be able, there- fore, to do little more in this connection than to describe, with some care, the maps, sections, and other illustrations which we have prepared for this report. The “Preliminary map of the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains” will be found to explain itself to a great extent. The topography is given with much detail and in a picturesque form, so that the relations of the sedimentary to the granitic rocks are admirably presented. The characteristic forms of the *‘Hog Back” ridges which have been so often noticed, is clearly shown, as well as the en échelon features of the minor mountain-ranges as they run out into the plains. The pictorial sections which accompany the map will serve to show more clearly than we have hitherto done what we have denominated the plain and mountain districts, as well as the abrupt transition from one to the other. The plain country extends uninterruptedly from the Missouri River to the base of the mountains. The elevation above sea-level at Kansas City is 764 feet; at Denver, by way of the railroad, 639 miles to the westward, the elevation is 5,197 feet; showing an aver- age ascent of about seven (7) feet per mile over an apparently level, treeless plain. Over this broad space the strata are very nearly or quite horizontal in position, until within a few miles of the mountains, where they are lifted up at various angles and the mountain-ranges seem to rise abruptly out of the plains. The topography as well as the geology of the plain country is remarkably simple, and it is only ina narrow belt along the immediate foot of the mountains that it becomes more varied and complex. The elevation of the great Front or Colorado range carried up the sedimentary formations which originally rested on its sides or summit, and the uplift seems to have been very nearly or quite vertical. Whether these formations originally extended uniuter- ruptedly across the area now occupied by the mountain-ranges, is a question which will be more fully discussed at some future period. That this was the case in part, I am very confident, but there are facts that appear to disprove this statement in some instances. It seems proba- ble that a portion of the Rocky Mountain range was outlined at an early period; that it has grown, as it were, through successive ages up to the present time. A careful examination of the map and the picto- rial sections will enable the reader to understand more clearly the remarkable belt of uplifted sedimentary beds along the immediate base of the mountains. Although they seem to be more interesting and picturesque in Colorado, yet these ridges occur to a greater or less AO = Aw SSI EY OF SS Ce sore Ee Se el = — a ee ee Ga ea 2 a ee OC SN qj = ea aa ar SNES : ie See Oe © eses ss Pee | > fo fo Cri = : ( Sete eee Gr ay ee Se is Peo gs 5 + § d i a S& 2S eg 4 S Cie OO as iO AR SASS % O U.S.Geclogical Survey of the Territories. FV.Hayden in Charge. Q GEOLOGICAL MAP oF COLORADO SPRINGS _ AND VICINITY COLORADO Note. The Contours are not contiules : Drainage ts based on Land Survey Work. Most ofthe Streams outside Use Mountains are without Water during the dry Season. Local Drift, covers Lexge Portions of the Us Surface, notably in the Monument Greck Bus Geology by EVHayden. &WH Holmes Topography by Geo B Oh ttenden 1874 Scale 1 mile to Linch A c E. FE G : = SS (al S | HHH ATI == Grantle Sidertare Carboniferous Triasste Turasse Cretaceous Lignitie Coat outcrops Monument Cr | Ik ; == Gresute Upper Lignatic Strata A Section along the North Boundary Line of Map (Monument Creek - Bae was 2 Ricca Bo at ee NS ate a SS (Queens Catton. Near Garden of'the Gols SS SS tt Fountain Creek Monument ('r: D Enea inane «SEED DRT, D & & & . Cretaceo: Craaceous Shales and arift SECTIONS accompanying MAP of COLORADO SPRINGS i and VICINITY. Te ait ‘ pal oer nds nth eat Eee WER maken LU SERA cose Pele Suiplencane hc bi ¥ { it i} 5 fuk 10y 15 : ‘ ces eens Seeenam oes wae a) ee es VI TRET ee 1 : EO / A, : . : | SY | H i | | 0°, g | |! os | te BRAN | ne | a ow WY HY 9 af % Z E . W a) F 1 \ J UL PN a y : f | s OB Y \q j ee ie Yi \ \ : \ bit) | f | NA NC : 5 S \ Z WKS \ ) tom ‘ \" J \ s ; | = \e Hierce ~~ ban Bh } \ 2 Soe ‘S \ 2dyi\ Wi SYA ; i ‘ a) ; “Wk va ) eo \ \9 A \ D, . . \ Le ‘ . \ ; \ } 1) ‘ \ vax 1° i 5 ) — t / ie \g \ io} \P Z ‘ 4 \ , \ ‘ | } ) Ss, . \ \ en A Mi A me OW elo 3) > WZ ZS =f pw mr STAR s' Geis A a Pa | Bae ihe ZA BE ee ¥Ft.St.Vrains y. @) ‘ / eo pe > 0°15" a ine “~ Pal aPlatteville v 14,960 a) u ® we nN is) g Ss Wi; - : Box Eldetig — DENVER —— FS SAG AJunction)s2ii 39°30" DEPARTMENT OF TIE INTERIOR U. S. Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories F. V. Hayden U.S. Geologist in Charge PRELIMINARY MAP OF THE EASTERN BASE OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS COLORADO FROM THE ARKANSAS RIVER TO THE WYOMING LINE Showing the Limits of the sedimentary Rocks and also the Coal Outcrops Surveyed in 1874. Geology by EV.Hayden & W.H.Holmes. Topography by GeozB.Chittenden Lr Ora» a 7 ee Note. 38%5' The drainage in the plains is generally taken from the land survey work. Roads when not taken from the land survey are only approximately Located. Altitudes are principally barometric and are gwen in feet above the sea. Contours are not continuous. The contact of the Granite with the sedimentary rocks is indicated by the broken lne—.—.—.—.—.— The Gal outcrop ws indicated by the havy lings. ———_-- --- -- Seti meh eo Sapte —————— eee ee a et oe a ene ee eee LO i he 5! “ve BA s tet event vac aa ira ( oy os . a ss We yey Wt ie Plate IV. Lj ti Tata ips ex eee atta) . Ne 5 see eh Sey cues ig ‘ CO ARSA OR) No 4ky) Sy Cesk i. ale BE NA, Ships A iT. ioagannay Ay seu s > ee i Pee oh a eyseus SVS ew urhoat hy il Plate V. Fie. 1. Showing the changes in the sediments as we approach the granite ‘“‘shore line.” At the line a,the fragments are large and unworn. Farther out they are more rounded and have a matrix of pebbles and sand. Between the lines aa, and bb, there isabelt,that, although probably Sedimentary can hardly be distinguished from the true granite. FIG. 2. Thickening of Sedimentary beds along the “Shore ° ” ° line’ as seen near Manitou. Plate VI. — AN TN Ss ee aed RCA Fic. 1.—CROSS-BEDDING LIGNITIC SANDSTONES, NEAR COLO- RADO SPRINGS. Fic. 2.—Sm~ur1AN LIMESTONES RESTINGZUNCONFORMABLY ON STRATIFIED GRANITE, WILLIAMS CANON. HAYDEN.] GEOLOGY OF COLORADO SPRINGS AND PLEASANT PARK. AY] extent on both sides of the eastern ranges that front the plains, from the northern to the southern boundary of the United States, and how much farther Ido not know. It is probable, however, that they extend far north into the British Provinces and far south into Mexico. This belt is very varied in its charactér from point to point, sometimes ex- pands to a width of several miles, and again contracts to a fourth or half a mile in width. Sometimes a full series of the formatious known in the west, from the older Silurian to the most modern Tertiary, are clearly exposed, inclining at various angles; and then again only the more modern beds can be seen. It ison this account that the geology, though appearing so very simple in its character, is really quite com- plex when examined in detail. Up to this time we have determined the existence, in this belt in Colorado, of the Silurian, Carboniferous, Triassic,(?) Jurassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary groups; yet, while the more modern formations are very persistent throughout the entire distance from the north to the south line, some of the older beds are wanting in many places. ‘To the far north, along the margins of the Black Hills, Big Horn, and Wind River Mountains, the Potsdam sandstones, with perhaps more modern divis- ions of the Silurian, are well exposed and quite continuous, while to the southward these rocks disappear, except at restricted localities. We find near Colorado Springs and Caton City quite large exposures. of Silurian beds, with a few fossils that are allied to those of the Calcifer- ous group of the Lower Silurian of New York. In the interval, from Fort Laramie to Colorado Springs, a distance of over 200 miles, no one connected with the survey under my charge has yet detected any trace of these beds. It is possible that in Pleasant Park, about 50 miles south of Denver, there are traces of this formation in the variegated sand- stones that lie next to the granites, as shown in the section. At Color- ado Springs, and in the vicinity, there is a considerable thickness of the Silurian beds, which have been frequently described. The reddish- brown, rather coarse sandstones at the base, rest upon stratified grani- toid or gneissic rocks unconformably, as shown in the illustration (Pl. VI, Fig. 2). Above the sandstones there are 600 to 800 feet of yellowish limestone, which, in some instances, is a reddish color, in which have been found severa| species of invertebrate Silurian fossils. South of the valley of Fountain Creek the uplifted belt rapidly closes up to the base of the mountains, and for some distance no beds older than the Creta- ceous are visible. From Fountain Creek to Cafion City this belt ex- pands and contracts from time to time, so that it is quite possible that small isolated patches of the Silurian group may appear in a few places. At Caiion City, and resting for the most part on the mountain-sides, in- clining at a high angle, there is an extensive thickness of these older beds again. The lower portion is a variegated -micaceous, slightly cal- careous, sandstone, closely resembling, in texture and composition, the Potsdam sandstone as seen in other localities farther to the north. Some tolerably well-defined fossils were discovered in the sandstone which rests directly on the granitic rocks, which Mr. Meek has pro- nounced of undoubted Lower Silurian age, but they have not yet been described. This sandstone passes up into a hard and rather massive - limestone, evidently the same as that noted at Colorado Springs. We cannot say more at present invegard to rocks of this age, than to state our belief that they underlie the entire country along the east- ern slope of the Rocky Mountains, from our northern boundary to New Mexico, and that, where they are not visible, they may possibly be con- cealed by the overlying and more modern beds. 42 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. THE CARBONIFEROUS GROUP. The Carboniferous group is alittle more persistent, and yet this seems to be wanting over extended intervals, unless a portion of what have been called the Red Beds is of this age. This group is exten- sively exposed along the flanks of the mountains, 100 to 150 miles north of Cheyenne, as was shown in the annual report of 1870. It seems, however, to diminish somewhat in force, and to contain comparatively few fossils in its southern extension, until we reach Cafion City. From thence southward into New Mexico it increases again in thickness and importance, and yields an abundant supply of its characteristic fossils. I have no positive information of the dis- covery of any well-marked Carboniferous fossils from the line of the Union Pacific Railroad to the vicinity of Caton City, although strata supposed to be of that age are exposed in a few localities. On the small map of “Colorado Springs and vicinity,” a light band will be seen between the Silurian on the west and the Red Beds or Triassic on the east, which represents a peculiar group of strata not observed else- where on the eastern slope, but resembling very closely a series of varie- gated beds, described by Dr. Peale, in the annual report for 1873, in the valley of Eagle River, which yielded well-marked Carboniferous types. This group of strata is composed of variegated beds of sand- stones of various textures, alternately with layers of arenaceous clay. The entire thickness was estimated at about 1,000 feet. It is most probable that these beds are of Carboniferous age. From Colorado Springs the Carboniferous group is not conspicuous at any locality, and for a great portion of the way is not seen at all, but at Cafion City and Wet Mountain Valley the limestones and sandstones contain numerous fossils, both animal and vegetable. From the Wet Mountain Valley, which is but a short distance south of Canon City, Mr. R. N. Clark collected specimens of vegetable remains from the Car- boniferous beds, which were submitted to Professor Lesquereux. He detected Stigmaria fucoides, Brgt., showing scars of surface with stems and leaves attached; mold of the internal surface of the cylinder of a Calamites ; small specimens of a new species of Cordaites, resembling by its nervation Cordaites principalis. An abundance of invertebrate fos- sils have been discovered in this group which have not yet been studied. THE RED BEDS OR TRIASSIC GROUP. The Red Beds or Triassic group is very persistent, and if absent at all, only at very short intervals. No organic remains have yet been found in this group by the members of the survey under my charge, yet, for various reasons, we have assumed the red sandstones to be of Triassic age. It is barely possible that a portion or all of the group is of Juras- sic age. Yet Professor Cope is of the opinion that he has discovered evidence in New Mexico of its Triassic age. The history of this group is still obscure, and remains as one of the problems to be solved by more extended and more thorough explorations. Geographically, it is one of the most widely distributed formations in the West. From the northern boundary to the southern line and east of the Wasatch range in Utah, this red formation makes its appearance wherever a mountain- range is elevated so as to expose the various sedimentary groups. The evidence indicates that it extends without any important interruption over the broad area as defined above. This group is generally admitted to be in part, or entirely, of Triassic age, and I have always so regarded Plate VII. ee iy IDEAL SECTION, showing the manner in which the great diversity of surface dip is probably produced. SURFACE SECTION near Glen Hyrie Col ROI i AMEN Plate VIII. aS ae ae WAL me uiy Sickest OTAL Plate VIII. ae Mes, e x Garpway TO THE “ GARDEN OF THE | -. i ¢ l 1 ARE ELLIE IAEA ST Ae ee a epee RAGS a y CATHEDRAL ROCK, ‘‘ GARDEN OF THE Gops,” COLORADO, RED TRIASSIC ‘SANDSTONES. HAYDEN. ] CURIOUSLY—ERODED SANDSTONES. 43 it, Since my first examination of it, nearly twenty years ago, yet more direct proof must be brought to bear before long in some portion of our continent. These red sandstones have always attracted much attention wherever noticed, on account of their peculiar color, but nowhere have I ever observed them performing such a conspicuous part in giving form to the scenery of the country, as along the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in Colorado. This feature is more marked from a point about fifty miles north of Denver to Colorado Springs, than in any other por- tion of the continent. Along this belt the sandstones are more compact, with every variety of red, from a pale dull tint to a deep purple color. There is also every variety of texture, from a rather coarse conglomerate to a fine sandstone. It varies much in thickness, ranging from 400 to 2,000 feet. Its greatest thickness south of Platte Cafion is in Pleasant Park and in the “Garden of the Gods,” at Manitou. At Pleasant Park, according to Dr. Peale, the aggregate thickness of the Red Beds is about 2,000 feet. This series of beds is well shown in the pictorial section. These sandstones have been elevated at various angles varying from 20° to a vertical position. In the vicinity of the Manitou Springs, in what is usually called the “Garden of the Gods,” the same variation is seen, but in many instances the beds are very massive, thick, and stand in a nearly vertical position. In Plates VIII and IX we can see the massive sandstones, which have been weathered into the most fantastic shapes, standing up in immense walls or columns 50 to 250 feet in height. Plate VIII represents what is called the gate or entrance to the “Garden of the Gods.” In the foreground is seen the massive wall of red sand- stone rising on either side of the opening to the height of 100 to 150 feet. The wall was originally continuous, but has been worn through by erosion. Whatever may have been the agents which in times past have wrought out all these remarkable forms, it is piain that they have acted in former times with far more intensity than at present. In the background, through the opening, may be seen the snow-capped sum- mits of Pike’s Peak, rising to ‘a height of 14,147 feet above sea-level. Plate LX gives an example of what might be called a magnificent mono- lith. It is animmense column of bright-red Triassic (?) sandstone rising to a height of 250 feet above the general level, a portion of a massive stratum elevated to a vertical position, and the contiguous portions eroded away. Figure 1, plate IX, illustrates the singular columns which stand at the entrance of the “Little Garden of the Gods,” or, as it is now ealled, ‘Glen Eyerie.” On account of the peculiar forms which these red sandstones havereceived from the eroding agents of nature, this locality will always remain one of the most celebrated in Colorado. The more careful study of the relations of these sandstones to the underlying rocks, has thrown much light on the physical history of this region. My own observations, farther to the northward, led me to the belief that the great uplift of the mountain-ranges, though imper- ceptibly slow, was an unit in its action; or, in other words, that the changes in the position of all the groups were brought about by the same cause and at thesame time. ‘There could not be a strict conform- ity in the sedimentary groups, inasmuch as entire groups are wanting, and in some eases only fragments of others are remaining. But I have hitherto supposed that the elevation of all the sedimentary strata along the base of the mountains was a comparatively modern event. We now have the evidence, from the texture of these red beds and their position on the anderlying granitic rocks, that the Front Range, during the supposed Triassic period, formed a vast shore-line, and that the sedi- ments of the Red Beds were deposited on the base against the sides of 44 - GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the granitic range. In the annual report for 1373 the fact was seared that the Red Beds, in the form of coarse conglomerates, filled up the -tmeven surface of the granitic rocks below. South of Manitou we find an enormous thickness of very coarse conglomerates, cemented with rather fine sands, jutting up against the mountain-sides, showing clearly that, although elevated and disturbed to a certain extent since their deposition, they were laid down along the base of the Front Range as a shore-line, and that there must have been a period of comparative re- pose. When these sandstones, near the base of the mountains, are found to be made up of conglomerates, they are observed to be very coarse in the immediate vicinity of the granites, but becoming finer and finer sandstones as they extend eastward into the plains. There should there- fore be some nonconformity between the Triassic and the Carboniferous and Silurian groups below, for both of the latter extend high up on the flanks of the mountains on either side, sometimes occurring on the sum- mits of the lower ranges. The seetion in Plate VIL would indicate some- thing. of this sort, for we find the Silurian and Carboniferous inclining 20° and 45°, while the Triassic dips 90°, or is very near a vertical. The diagram also shows how the Silurian beds lie high up on the granite flanks of the mountains. The elevatory force seems to have acted ver- tically, bending the overlying sedimentary strata like metallic sheets, so that within a few yards of the nearly vertical beds the same are hori- zontal or nearly so. This will explain very clearly the abruptness with which the mountains seem to rise out of the plains to the traveler ap- proaching them from the east. The beautiful pictorial section of Pleasant Park may need a word of explanation here. The dotted line a a shows that all the elevated por- tion in the rear or west of it is composed of granitic rocks. The dotted line in the foreground, h h, shows the junction of the Lignitic group to the true Cretaceous beds which here rise up in a very narrow belt from beneath the Monument Creek group. It is exposed by the wear- ing away of the Monument Creek beds. The letter 7 indicates the usual form and isolated character of the numerous buttes that are scat- tered over the plains here for a considerable distance east of the mount- ains. The strata are nearly horizontal, the summits are flat, table- shaped, and are not unfrequently capped with trachyte. Between the dotted lines the Carboniferous, Red. Beds (Triassic), Jurassic, and Cre- taceous groups are exposed. The manner of inclination and the rela- tion of these groups to the granitic range, as well as to each other, is made clear by the section. THE JURASSIC. This formation has already been described in so much detail in pre- vious reports, that I shall mention it very briefly in this connection. Far to the north this group holds a prominent position, not only on ac- count of its aggregate thickness, but also from the abundance and variety of its organic remains. South of the Union Pacific Railroad, in Colorado, it is confined to a very narrow belt, with very few if any tos- sils to establish its age. That it extends most persistently far south- ward into New Mexico, there cannot be adoubt. The narrow belt which it occupies is well shown in the small map of Colorado Springs and vi- cinity. North of the Pacific Railroad, along the base of the front range of mountains, it increases in thickness and is full of characteristic fos sils. In the annual report for 1873 and previous reports, the lithologi- cal characters of all of these groups have been so fully discussed that it -<---" am ewer ed wih Trachyte. J, oximately tertiary rocks Te ue Se is veoe ue a ~ Se = c \ i , ae ———— ay = a. Th yy == — eee eee ES : WHE, 1874 The dotted line a-a separates the Graratestrom —_b, Hexposure of Silurian Rocks. ¢,¢ Carboraferous Strata. d,d, Triassic Redbeds. ¢¢, Jurassic Beds. ff N°l Cretaceous. 9g.N?5 Cretaceous. h,h, Lignitic Sandstone. i, Tertiary Butte capped with Trachyte. j, Standing Rock. Pleasant Park. kk, Platte Mountain, The Coal Outcrop follows, approcmately the sedimentary Strata. the dotted ine hh. Ul, Points where the red and varteagated beds disappear, between these two pounts the outcrop ts semicircular tn form. North and south the cretaceous and tertiary rocks rest upon gramte. Pleasant Park from the South. Mi on Judean . Mate ice ALAS We Mie Bh at wily sins Pie Bs 5 HAYDEN.) | THE CRETACEOUS GROUP. 45 would be mere repetition to refer to them in this report. The Jurassic group in Colorado has little or no influence economically or in giving form to the peculiar scenery. THH CRETACEOUS. The Dakota group is composed of massive beds of sandstones inter- sected with layers of clay, and forms some of the most conspicuous ridges or “ hogbacks” along the eastern base of the Front or Colorado ‘range. Its importance, however, varies in different localities as much as its texture ; sometimes it is scarcely seen and then again it forms one or more of the most important ridges. Its aggregate thickness is never great, varying from 200 to 400 feet, and may be represented by a very narrow belt on the map. West of the 100th meridian it has yielded very few organic remains, although it has a very extended geo- graphical range. It is hardly ever wanting along the margins of ‘the mountain ranges east of the Wasatch Mountains, in Utah. From its structure in the far West, I regard it as a sort of transitional group be- tween the well-defined Cretaceous group and the Jurassic below. Numbers 2, 3 and 4, or the Fort Benton, Niobrara, and Fort Pierre divisions, nay be regarded as one group, under the name of the Colora- do group, as adopted on Clarence King’s beautiful geological map of the Green River basin. Toone who has never studied these divisions in the Northwest, along the Upper Missouri River, there would seem to be no occasion for their separation. Having studied these divisions with much care in their typical localities, along the Missouri River and in Eastern Kansas and Nebraska, I found very little difficulty in tracing them across the country westward and southward, so far as my explor- ations have extended. It is very doubtful, however, if any geologist would bave ever separated the Cretaceous beds between the Dakota and Fox Hills groups into divisions, had they been first studied in the interior of the continent. The Fox Hills group has a very impor- tant influence on the physical history of a most important geological period. It was at the close of this period that one of the most impor- tant biological changes occurred in geological history. So far as we know at the present time, no animal-remains, and very few, if any, vegetable forms, passed above it. A few species of plants probably began their existence in the Upper Cretaceous in the Fox Hills group and continued on up into the Lignitic group, where they reached their highest point of development. The gradual approach of shallow seas is finely shown in the character of the sedi- ments in the upper portion of the Fox Hills group. Not only the shal- low seas but the gradual change of salt to brackish and then to purely fresh waters was amply sufficient to destroy all traces of marine life, which occur soabundantly in the Fox Hills group. Fig.2, Plate LV, pre- sents a fine illustration of the remarkable concretionary masses which characterize in many localities the upper portion of the Fox Hills group as it passes into the brackish-water strata of the Lignitic or Laramie group above. This cut, though intended to illustrate a portion of the Dakota group in Eastern Kansas, serves perfectly to explain to the eye the immense rusty-brown concretions which abound in the mud- beds just beneath the lower sandstones of the Lignitic group at Cafion City and at Colorado Springs, and at other localities in Eastern Colo- rado. These concretions are peculiar rounded, regularly stratified masses, often merely resting upon the pedestals of the softer and more regularly bedded sandstones below. So far as Colorado is con- 46 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. cerned, I have observed no locality where there appeared to be any striking nonconformity between the Fox Hills group and the Lignitic group above. That there may have been intervals of time, during which the Cretaceous sediments were not deposited; that there may have been dry land over large areas, is not impossible, but there could have been no great degree of erosion of the surface of the upper Cre- taceous beds. This apparent conformity, while in certain localities the upper Cretaceous beds received a very much increased thickness, may be due to afar more rapid deposition. In almost all cases, the transition from the Fox Hills group to the brackish-water deposits of the Lignitic seems to have been gradual, with no visible physical break of importance. The great break seems to be illustrated only in the entire change in the animal and vegetable life. But the time at my disposal will not permit me to discuss here many important questions in this connection. For the details of the geology of the Eastern base of the mountains in Colorado, the reader is referred to the previous annual reports of the survey, especially the one for 1873. P late X, Mi i bay | HH} I f GN FOLIATION OF GRANITE IN ESTES PARK, COLORADO. Plate XI. A Dann Wut Paes SEAMING Plate XI, CoLorabo. ? s Par Ee Est EAK AND 18 NG’S Lo CHEEAVE MIR Ey. Vie, ANCIENT LAKE BASINS.—GLACIAL LAKES.—MORAINAL DEPOSITS IN THE VALLEY OF THE Uprrer ARKANSAS RIVER AND ALONG BOTH FLANKS OF THE SAWATCH MOUNTAINS. For nearly twenty years I have written more or less in regard to the ancient lake-basins of the West, but it was only within a few years, since the facilities for traveling have so greatly increased that geologists have found that these lake-basins once oocupied the entire country from the Arctic Circle to the Isthmus of Darien. In very many in- stances they were merely expansions of river valleys, like the greater number of our lake-basins of the present day. During the early portion of the Tertiary period, the western portion of our continent was covered with immense lakes, some of which oceupied a much larger area than any we are acquainted with at the present time. During the Pliocene period, and during the interval to the present time, thousands of small lakes, with a few of large size, were distributed over the great area west of the Mississippi, and the basins with their peculiar deposits are found in the parks, among the mountains, and along every important river-valley. The gathering together of the vast amount of information which is now accumulating on this subject is a task which will, at no distant day, be productive of most interesting results. I have made these few remarks to introduce what I may have to say in regard to the valley of the Upper Arkansas River. The Arkansas River rises in the Tennessee Pass, nearly west of Mount Lincoln, in latitude 39° 21’ and longitude 106° 19’, and flows a little east of south for a distance of about 80 miles in a straight line, when it flexes to the east, and flows through a deep cafion in the granite, and emerges into the plains near Cation City. Near the sources of the river are several expansions of the valley from one to two miles in width, oval-shaped, and covered with a deposit of drift-material. Near the junction of the east branch of the Arkansas the valley, with the terraces on either side, continues pretty reguiarly about five to eight miles in width, but gradually closes up again below Lake Creek, though on either side are vast deposits of the coarse drift-material extending high up on the mountain-sides, especially on the west side of the valley. The valley then gradually expands out and enlarges about five to ten miles in width for a distance of nearly 40 miles. In the annual report for 1873 I have expressed my belief that this valley began in a monoelinal inter- val, with the great Sawatch range on the west side forming the crest of the continental water-shed, and the Park range on the east, which, with its sedimentary rocks and granite basis, formed the east side of a grand anticlinal, the aggregate mass of rocks inclining to the eastward. Our observations over a very extended area only confirmed the opinion axpressed in our last report, that the great Sawatch range formed the central portion of a gigantic anticlinal. The west side of the Park range is, for the most part, very abrupt, and for long distances the gneissic rocks show very clearly the direction of the dip. On the east side the sedimentary rocks dip down under the surface of the South AY 48 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Park. On the west side of the Sawatch range we have the valley of the Gunnison, and west of that the sedimentary rocks incline to the westward, unless disturbed by some center force, for the Elk Mountains. On either side of the valley small streams flow into the main channel of the Arkansas from the source to Caton City. These streams usually have their origin at the very crest or water-divide of the two ranges, and in most instances have cut their way through the solid mass to the main river. Many of these streams have numerous side-branches which have also carved out wonderful gorges near the crest of the mountains, giving to these mountain ranges a ruggedness that is almost inconceiv- able to one who has not actually explored them. It is in the study of these gorges that the geologist learns to appreciate the immense results of erosion in giving form to the rocky range of the West. Even yet the power of this force has not been adequately understood, but the wider our range of observation, the greater is our conception of its power. We may safely assert that at some period comparatively modern, 10,000 or 15,000 feet of sedimentary beds extended uninterruptedly from the South Park across the interval now occupied by the Sawatch range, all of which, but insignificant remnants, have been swept away, while amass of the granite nucleus, of inconceivable dimensions, has also been removed. The general elevation of the Sawatch range for 60 to 80 miles is 13,000 to 14,000 feet above the sea at this time, and it is highly probable that hundreds and perhaps thousands of feet have been removed from the summit. I find it difficult to estimate the extent of the erosion in this region, and can only speak of it in general terms as almost inconceivable to a finite mind. From the nature of the interval or valley, the greater number of streams flow into the Arkansas from the main Sawatch range. They are quite numerous from the Tennessee Pass to Cation City; afew come in from the east side, but the drainage tends toward the east or south- east, so that the streams that rise in the Park range and flow into the Arkansas are comparatively few and. of little importance. The charac- ter of this drainage is well shown on the map accompanying this report. In the last annual report I dwelt with considerable detail on the effects of glacial action in this valley, and, in this report, I can only describe them in general terms, hoping that the beautiful maps and illustrated sketches by Mr. Holmes will render the story plain to the reader. As an illustration of the effects of glacial action in this valley, Lake Creek might be taken as an example. This stream rises in several branches at the very crest of the divide, forming vast amphitheaters. The signs of past glacial action are not very evident about the sources of their side- branches, and they do not reach higher than 12,000 or 12,500 feet. The summits of the high mountains are often covered with debris of broken rocks, apparently not much worn. Insomeplaces the tops of the mountains, like Mount Lincoln for example, are, with the exception of the extreme summit, covered with a thick covering of earth, filled with rocks more or less worn. The most conspicuous signs of glacial action are seen along the sides of the gorges lower down the streams. In the valley of Lake Creek, the sides of the gorge are worn smoothly for an elevation of at least 12,000 feet or above timber-line, and from 1,000 to 1,500 feet above the bed of the creek. In many places the sides of the gorge or caiion are worn so smooth that the surface has tie appearance of enamel, and a thin crust usually peels off, which * have hitherto denom- inated a “ glacial crust.” About four miles abc the Upper Twin Lake on the north side of the ecafion there is ¢ sound mass of granite projecting from the side 309 feet or more, and 1,000 feet high, with [Os WG Ky RP \daben DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. U. 8. GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES, F.V. HAYDEN U.S.GROLOGIST IN CHARGE. ae Bes Zz os ue yy \ WAR as SEC ay) ai Dy») CaN 2 AS Wy iN eget Section A B. 3 is 5 3 ae! ie a oe Cc Section SKETCH and SECTIONS showing the MORAINES of the UPPER ARKANSAS VALLEY ae au - Altitud: a Hes Morainal dost and local. drift i Bee Seek in COLORADO. les on map in feet above the sea. Gramiic areas blank .- Vertical scale of sections & Umes TUX ites hae Geology by FV.Hayden and W. H. Holmes, Topography by G.B.Chittenden. 1874 Scale 2 miles to 1 wich Rta 2 WR Werk ste x! ri Re See “1 hi t, Elbert Creek. Terminal moraine. wu; Massive Mt. eek, lateral moraines. * DGG Lake Cr sh, Twire Lakes. h t, Mt. Elbert. 1, slopes. Drift covered Ett 500 feet high at d. 6 ¢,e, Outcrop of granite. Moraines of the Upper Arkansas. 2miles long, « c, 6, ¢, Clear Creek, with lateral’ moraines- s, La Plata -Mt. Too tt. high at highest point. b 6b, Greek with lateral moraines. miles long, ds my, mum, Inferior moraines. Mt. Harvard ; a, a, a, Arkansas River, 20 Miles. al WES ars aE os, est point. | s of the b HAYDEN. ] GLACIAL ACTION—MORAINES. 49 somewhat the appearance of a bastion which has been worn quite smooth. In the sides of it are depressions like pot-holes, evidently worn out by the attrition of loose rocks against the sides as the water flowed underneath the glacier. There are also points where vast masses of granite have been removed from the sides of the mountain at a great height, giving to the mountain-side the appearance of an ancient quarry. For a distance of about eight miles the bottom of the valley will av- erage one-fourth of a mile in width, with here and there huge masses of granite projecting above the general level, showing very clearly that the entire valley has been carved out of the solid granitic mass. The loose morainal deposits are not conspicuous until we reach a point about two miles above the Upper Twin Lake, where the valley expands out to about a mnile to one and a half miles in width. Here a low swampy bottom commences, which was once, undoubtedly, a portion of the lake. On either side are ridges of the glacial deposits; these increase in size and importance as we descend to the junction of the creek with the Arkan- sas. On the south side of the lower lake a ridge extends from the mountains down to the Arkansas River, perhaps 1,000 feet high, just south of the upper end of the lake, and gradually sloping down 100 or 150 feet in height above the bed of the river. This is a true morainal ridge, and was doubtless formed by the crowding out on either side of the loose materials as the great glacial mass moved down the valley of Lake Creek. This morainal deposit undoubtedly laps on to the mountain-side so that the nucleus of the upper portion of the ridges is granitic. The drift deposits are not generally more than 500 to 800 feet in thickness, and usually much less. The granite crops out in numerous places on the sides of the ridge, showing most clearly that the greater portion of its nucleus is granitic; it also shows that the valley, with the surround- ing terraced hills, has been worn down by erosion from an elevation as great perhaps as the loftiest portion of the main range. The north side of Lake Creek is a very irregular ridge, full of depressions, while on the west side of these ridges are extensive accumulations of rocks more or less worn, showing the direction of the moving force. Besides the vast lateral moraines in the valleys of the streams, there are a great number of what may be called terminal moraines, or detached ridges that tend in various directions. Sometimes they extend a portion of the distance across the valley at right angles to the lateral moraines, or they may diverge at any angle; the great quantities of loose material attached to the glacier seems to have been dropped in quite irregular forms as it moved down the valley. In one instance the granite crops out at the east end of the Lower Twin Lake, about the middle of the valley, and under such circumstances that the inference is plain that the entire valley has been worn out of the solid mass of granite. One of the main objects of our description of the morainal deposits is to show the extent of the erosion which has taken place in this region, and these outcroppings of granite are the remnants that are left as proofs of the magnitude of this work. From Mr. Derry’s house, on the northwest corner of Lower Twin Lake, we have perhaps as good a general view of this valley and its surroundings as we can find. As we look to the south of west we see two tront peaks, which are shaped like eones, rising up to the height of 12,500 to 15,000 feet. A little to the southeast is an unnamed cone, with a broader sum- mit, rising above timber-line. Although these points or peaks ap- pear to be independent, yet they are really portions of spurs or _ ridges extending down from the main peak, which extends further to the west and forms a part of the crest of the range, to which we 4H ~ 50 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. have given the name of La Plata, 14,302 feet above the sea. As we look in this direction, bare, brown, granite masses, rising above timber- line, meet cur eyes, with here and there a few patches of snow to break the monotony or contrast with the desolate somber hue of the granite debris. Deep furrows extend down the sides of the mountains, the chan- nels for untold ages of ice, snow, and water, the agents which have bro- ken down these rocky masses and sculptured the forms which now so much excite our admiration. We see also the smoothly-worn sides of the mountain covered with a sort of enamel-like crust, as a mark of the glacial power. On the sides of the peaks, at different elevations, are nu- merous small green lakes, sometimes with a visible outlet and some- times without, reservoirs of the melting snows. The pines are often dead from the autumnal fires that have run through, adding to the deso- lation of the scene; these falling down in every direction render travel- ing almost impossible. Sometimes no vegetation takes the place of the pines after the fires have passed through them, but not unfrequently the quaking-asp poplar, with its bright green leaves in summer and yel- low in autumn, grow very densely, contrasting most charmingly with the somber green of the living pines, and the somber brown or gray of the dead. Down in the valley, and closed in on either side by mount- ains and the morainal ridges or hills, are the two beautiful lakes, which are laid down on maps as Twin Lakes, the basins of which were no doubt formed by glacial action. If the reader will examine the map accompanying the report he will see more clearly than we can describe in words the location of the beautifal lakes, the morainal ridges and mount- ains that hem them in; the contour lines are not intended to indicate elevation, but are used to show the surface forms. As there are really but two forms, granite and morainal drift, but one color is needed, and with this we have endeavored to separate the surface covered with the morainal deposit from the granite. The map will also show the eleva- tion of the lakes above the sea, 9,182 feet; also the elevation at the junction of the Lake Fork and the Arkansas, 9,096 feet. The depths of the lakes are shown by actual soundings. The greatest depth of the upper lake is 79 feet, and that of the lower 75 feet. It will be seen that the greatest depth of the lower lake is near the upper end. We may thus see by the depth of these lake-basins, as well as their shape and morainal deposits around them, that the force that produced them all moved slowly down from the mountain-range, and that the lake-basins are scooped out of the solid granite rocks. From the lower lake to the Arkansas River the morainal deposits are very thick; the surface ts covered with bowlders more or less, and of greater or less size, some small, others from 20 to 50 feet in diameter. Hundreds of mounds, ridges, and curious depressions, of all shapes and sizes, impede the traveler. The placer-mining has been very extensive here, and by this means we arrive at the true character of this glacial drift. It is com- posed mostly of rounded bowlders, but mingled with it is a kind of light- colored clay and sand. Thedecomposition of the feldspar has produceda kind of clay, which sometimes gathers into localities forming a consid- erable thickness. The description of the glacial action in the valley of this branch of the Arkansas will apply to the others, and presents a general view of the detailed action in the entire valley. The history of this valley from the beginning may be in some points obscure, but, as I have stated in a former report, I regard it as largely due to erosion. In the process of elevation a fissure or fissures must have been formed, and in these the - process of erosion commenced, continuing through a vast period of time, j. Yi ) if MMII, Mi | ka \ . Up; MY Ty rn aH) fe ate A Let gal Sian i a ‘ W Boy Plate XIi. Bouiper Cai UAL alr aN i pee HAYDEN.} MORAINAL DEPOSITS. 51 and operating with greater or less effect at different portions of that period. So far as the drift-deposits are concerned, which at the present time seem to be the only material resting on the granite in the valley, they are undoubtedly of comparatively modern origin, not extending back farther than the Pliocene, but the beginning of the erosion may reach into the past as far as the Jurassic. We have now the evidence that indicates that portions of these mountain-ranges were elevated above the Jurassic seas, and we may suppose that the general outline of the surface continues on the same plan up to the present time. If this was true—and we have no reason to believe the contrary—the erosion may have, and probably did commence far back in the past, and that during the Cretaceous and Tertiary periods the area occupied by the Sawatch range was elevated above the waters; it is more probable, however, that these formations were deposited to a greater or less ex- tent over this area, and that they have been entirely removed or ground up with the present drift. From the source of the Arkansas at the Tennessee Pass to the cation above Cafion City; the distance is about 60 miles, supposing this to be mainly a valley of erosion, area worn away would average about eight miles in width, the depth could not have been less than one mile, so that an approximate estimate can be made of the enormous amount of rock-material has been ground up in the excava- tion of this valley. Up to the time of the great glacial period this eroded material may have been swept out on to the plains to assist in forming the vast Cretaceous and Tertiary beds which we find there at the present day. Geologists generally admit that about the close of the Tertiary period, there was an era of intense cold, which they have agreed to eall the glacial epoch, and our remarks are based on that supposition. We believe that at one period this entire valley, with all the side-valleys or cabons, was occupied witb one vast glacier, diminishing and in- creasing as the temperature was higher or lower, but gradually moving down; that is, the main mass moving southward, and the side-branches moving toward the central mass. As the sides of the mountains are worn smoothly and exhibit signs of glacial action to the height of at least 1,500 feet above the valley, we may arrive at an approximate estimate of the thickness of the glacier. The fissures of the Arkansas and its branches may not have been nearly as large at the commence- ment of the glacial period as at the present time, and the great glacier may have performed the work of erosion for ages, and gradually melt- ing by a change of temperature to the mild climate of the present time, left the numerous mounds, ridges, and other morainal deposits whieh we find so extensive in this valley, and in many other portions of the Rocky Mountain region. I have spoken of this great ice-mass as a single glacier; there may have been a single one increasing and dimin- ishing through ages with the changes of temperature at different seasons or epochs, or there may have been an unlimited number of glaciers, but the glacial phenomena as indicated by the present surface of that country shows a long and continuous period of action. I have before stated that I regarded the valley as one great lake-basin, commencing near the Tennessee Pass. The valley expands out somewhat for the first ten miles, and gradually closes up below the town of Granite for about four miles, when it opens out again into a broad, level, basin-like form. The bottoms of the main river, as well as the little branches, expose the granite. rocks in such a way that we cannot well avoid the conclusion that they have been worn down to their present position from an elevation not much inferior to the Sawatch or Park ranges. Above the Lake Creek on both sides of the Arkansas, are well de- 52 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. fined terraces, which on the east side rise 600 feet above the river. The coarser materials were evidently deposited in water, and are arranged in strata and appear not to have been disturbed to any great extent by changes of level. On the west side the terraces slope down more gradually, and are cut from west to east by deep gorges, by streams froin the main range. The valley itself extending to an eleva- tion of 400 to 600 feet on either side, is filled up with more or less coarse drift-deposits. These vary much at different points, sometimes made up of huge bowlders, inclosed in loose gravel, sand, or clay, and .again a rather fine deposit of sand, gravel, or clay, to all appearances having been deposited in comparatively quiet waters. At any rate there were at all times portions of the lake that were not subject to great currents or any violent agitation. On the whole, however, the drift-materials are very loose, showing that the movements of the water and ice were from north to the southward. All over the surface are scattered in vast quantities immense bowlders of granite, varying from a few feet to 50 feet in diameter. Below Granite, for four or five miles, the masses of granite are remarkable for their number and size, which appear to have been moved down Clear and Pine Creeks. Along the sides of Clear and Pine Creeks are high ridges, or lateral moraines, which may properly be compared to huge railway embankments, rising to a height of 400 to 800 feet above the valleys of the streams. Below the mouth of Pine Creek the valley soon expands, and the surface is covered with loose bowlders, while the ridges and depressions are quite remarkable, and give it almost an artificial appearance. These basin-like depressions inclosed by the moraines are not unfrequently filled with water, form- ing small lakes, often with no visible outlet. These little basins of water occupy different elevations, from the bottom terrace near the river to the point of junction of the drift on the mountain-sides, 800 to 1,200 feet above the river-bed. As we descend the river the bowlders dimin- ish in size, are more rounded, and the deposits of fine materials increase in thickness. Below the mouth of Chalk Creek the valley is covered with a series of yellow-white marly beds, which are cut up into a variety of singular forms, resembling the ‘Bad Lands” and reaching an aggregate thickness of 800 to 1,200 feet. These were observed by me in 1869 and named the “Arkansas marls.” Overlying these marls there is considerable thickness of coarse drift which forms to a great extent the terraces which are very marked for a distance of 30 miles. We can see, therefore, that the greater part of the finer sediments were ' transported to the lower or south end of the river-lake, and deposited in comparatively quiet waters. While we ascend the Arkansas Valley toward the Tennessee Pass, the proofs of great force from the combined action of water and ice are shown on a grand scale. It seems, too, that while there is a variety of deposits in this valley resting upon the granites, their history is consecutive and attributable to one general cause, local glacial action, so far as I have yet observed. I repeat the same statement which I made years ago, that I have observed no proof of any wide ex- tended drift-action like that of the New England States, but in the Rocky Mountains the superficial deposits are all of local origin ; and the source is usually limited to the drainage of the streams in which it is found. For example, although, as I have stated, I believe that all the marls and coarser deposits in the valley of the Upper Arkansas have the same origin, however different in composition, the forces that produced them are limited geographically to the drainage of the Upper Arkansas. I could find no indications that any fragment of rock had been transported even from so short a distance as beyond the drainage west of the Sa- Plate XIII. ce \ ¥3 Sea aD vi FN she veut ena eats Ih ie Plate XIII. CurcaGo LAKE, Conorapo. be Ki - nN HAYDEN. ] MORAINAL DEPOSITS. 53 watch or east of the Park ranges. It is possible that a more detailed. study of the superficial deposits of this valley would afford reason for a separation into different periods so that they might be classified, but my observations lead me to place them in one great period extend- ing from the close of the Pliocene up to the present time. As is shown by the map, the drift-deposits rest upon the granite directly, and no sedimentary beds of any other age are found in the immediate valley, and these deposits in the aggregate do not afford proof of any break in time. Still much new matter could be added to the history of their deposition if an entire season could be devoted to their study. CHAPTER Vi. nu GENERALVIEW OF THE GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY OF THE ELK MOUNTAINS.—ERUPTIVE GRANITES.—RHYOLITES AND DYKES.—EROSION ON A GRAND SCALE.—LOCAL DRIFT- DEPOSITS. The Elk-Mountain group is one of the most remarkable ranges in our western Territories, and, so far as my own explorations have extended, is unique in form and structure. For this reason a small party was organized in the summer of 1874 under my immediate direction, with Mr. Holmes as assistant geologist, and Mr. Chittenden as topographer, . for the special study of this curious and most interesting group. The numerous sections and maps which are given in this report form a por- tion of the results of this specific study. Much attention was given to this region the previous year, and the results printed in the annual report for 1873. As our explorations are extended to the westward of this range, we hope to be able to present a more complete geological as well as topographical view of this region. : The Elk-Mountain group lies immediately west of the great Sawatch range, which forms the water-divide of the continent. It occupies an area of about 800 square miles, between meridians 106° 45’ and 107°195/, and parallels 39° 30’ and 39°. The Sawatch group 1s one of the loftiest and most symmetrical ranges inthe West. It extends from the Mountain of the Holy Cross tothe north, - latitude 39° 28’, longitude 106° 28’, southward to the San Luis Valley, a distance of over 80 miles. For this entire distance the range literally bristles with lofty points, about ten of which rise above 14,000 feet, and many more are 13,000 feet above sea-level. The uniformity of this great mountain-mass is a remarkable feature. Standing on some high peak and glancing along its pointed summits from north to south there seems to be comparatively little variation either in form or height. On either side of the Sawatch range there are several somewhat lower parallel ranges which are undoubtedly portions of an immense anticlinal, of which the main granitic massis the central nucleus. Between each of the parallel portions of the anticlinal are valleys at intervals of greater or less width. Immediately west of the granitic nucleus is the valley of the Gunnison, and on the east, the valley of the Upper Arkansas, and east and west of them are comparatively low granitic ranges capped with sedimentary rocks. Both the metamorphic and sedimentary rocks incline at various angles from the great central mass. There are here represented two quite distinct types of mountain ele- vation, though the forces have influenced each other’s results to a greater or less degree. The Sawatch or main range presents an example of a long-continued, uniform movement upward, which, but for the inter- vention of side-forces, would have produced a remarkably symmetrical mountain-group with the main granitic core or central mass, and on either side parallel valleys and ranges, each becoming lower and lower until the ridges faded out in the plains. The sedimentary rocks would have inclined at various angles east and west from either side, until they became horizontal in the plains. On the east side of the main 54 Plate XIV. O ft. Rhyolite 00 jt. Shale 8 Rhy olite ~“Cret. Shale iL --ehyolite pee es — 4 woo ‘ ‘ ( ( . = \ i u = —— ‘ 5 x EZ) o A portion of the East face of Gothic Mt. showing the relations of the Eruptive Rocks to the Cretaceous Shales. EWE ae sa fay Ree Plate XV. MounTain or THe Hoy Cross, CoLroraDo. HAYDEN. ] GEOLOGY OF THE ELK MOUNTAINS. 55 range, in the South Park range, the eruptive groups have thrown the sedimentary beds into the utmost confusion, producing those remarkable faults and irregularities which were shown in the annual report for 1873. On the west side, in the Elk Mountains, the confusion is still greater, producing not only the most remarkable faults in all the western country, but literally overturning thousands of feet of strata. By exam- ining the preliminary map of Colorado in this report, it will be seen that the trend of the Sawatch range is very nearly north and south, and that the principal peaks from the Mountain of the Holy Cross at the north to Mount Ouray to the south lie along that line. The trend of the Elk group, though less regular, will be seen to be about northwest and south- east. This is a grand illustration of an eruptive range, and appears also to be an example of a sudden violent or catastrophic action. The im- mense faults, complete overturning of thousands of feet of strata, and the great number of peaks, all composed of eruptive rocks, indicate, perhaps, periodical and violent action in contradistinetion tolong-continued uniform movements of the elevatory forces. The sections and maps which accom- pany this report will doubtless enable the geologist to determine the cor- rectness of our statements. The map will show by the colors the erup- tive points, where the granite appears to have been thrust up, as it were, through the vast overlying crust; sometimes a great thickness of strata of various ages is carried up to the summits of the peaks, 13,000 or 14,000 feet in elevation above the sea. Again we find, but a few yards away, the same group of strata in the bottom of the lowest val- leys, indicating remarkable convulsive movements. Although the Elk group may be regarded as an eruptive range, it will be seen by the map and section that the elevatory forces, whether convulsive or uniform and slow, acted along a well-defined axis, thus, as arange, forming a true anticlinal. ; We see, therefore, that the eruptive agents acted along a great fissure in the earth’s crust as a line of greatest weakness, and that this line possessed a trend about northwestand southeast. But the peculiar nature of the forces produced the wonderful chaos in the position of the sedi- mentary beds, while the tendency of these stratais to incline from either side of the axis. It is not uncommon to find thousands of feet of strata which have been carried up to the loftiest points of the axial ridge in nearly or quite a horizontal position. We may suppose that at one period the vast sedimentary mass rested on a floor of pasty or semi-pasty granite; that the forces in the interior were struggling to find vent, carried upward the entire overlying mass of sedimentary strata, and that here and there many thousands of feet in thickness along the axial line or ridge was thrust up through the melted or semi-melted granite in such masses as are shown on the map, at Italia, White Rock, Snow Mass, Capi- toland Sopris Peaks. The map will show that this igneous granite does not reveal itself except along this quite regular axial line. The areas of granite are greatly enlarged by subsequent erosive action, while from the axis numerous streams cut deep gorges,-1,500 to 3,000 feet in depth, sometimes far into the underlying floor of igneous granite. During this period of revolution, and probably subsequently, there were igreat numbers of dykes or orifices from which issued the rhyolites and basalts. Gothic and Crested peaks are illustrations of the upthrust of ‘vast masses of rhyolite, and numerous other quite long dykes will be noticed on the map. Plate XIV represents a portion of the east face of Gothic Mountain, the central mass of which is rhyolite, with only the Cretaceous beds lifted up around the baseandsides. ‘This is an excellent example of these 56 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. remarkable upthrusts of igneous material, vertically through the over- lying sedimentary beds. The Cretaceous strata of Nos. 3 and 4 extend up on the sides of the peak about 1,000 feet above the bed of Hast River, with very little inclination, and between the strata of shale were pressed out portions of the igneous material. The illustration, Plate XIV ys sis so clear that but little space need be used in explanations. The shale all belongs to Cretaceous formation No. 4. An examination of the map and plate of sections would indicate that the aggregate force which elevated the Elk range acted vertically with atangential movement or shove, as it were, from the northeast toward the southwest. There are many faults of remarkable character on the northeast side of the axis, but no very marked examples of the inversion of strata, but on the southwest side of the axis this feature is shown in a marked degree. Time will not permit us to work out in detail in this report the wonderful complications in the strata, which have been pro- duced by the various elevating forces in this range. Much of it was brought out in the various reports in the annual report of the survey for 1873. Mr. Holmes wiil also introduce important details into his report. I shall, therefore, at this time, confine myself to a general view of the geology of this range, which, with the beautiful and remarkably elear illustrations, will be sufficient for the information of the geologist. The axis of the Elk range can be easily traced on the map, and the axial.section will show the immense masses of strata that were carried high up to the very summits of the range. At the southeast corner of the map it will be observed there is a con- siderable area designated as metamorphic granite. This forms a part of the Sawatch Mountains, and may serve to show the relations of that range. To the west of it there are narrow belts, marked as Silurian and Carboniferous. These represent masses of strata that were origi- nally lifted up by the Sawatch range and incline toward the west. On _the completed geological map of Colorado, the connection of these fragmentary masses of sedimentary strata about the summits of the high granite mountains will be made clear. We shall hereafter attempt to show by a series of sections, not only that the Triassic, Jurassic, and Cretaceous groups originally existed here in full force, but that they probably extended across the area now occupied by the Sawatch range and were united with the sedimentary beds of the South Park range. The northeastern slope of the Elk group slopes down into the valley of the Roaring Fork, an important branch of Grand River. Here we find a large area of the various divisious of the Cretaceous group. The Dakota group rests upen the Jurassic, but is not exposed to any great extent, except in the cafions or gorges of the streams. So far, therefore, as a map is concerned, it cannot be represented except by a very nar- row band, but above it there is from 1,000 to 1,500 feet of the remaining portions of the group, Nos. 2, 3, 4, and 5, but not as well defined even as on the eastern side of the Colorado or Front range. The greater portion is composed of black shaly clays with thick beds of sandstones appearing in different positions. A few Cretaceous fossils occur, of well- known and common genera, as Ammonites, Baculites, and Inoceramus. Very few of the smaller forms were observed. This singular Creta- ceous area seems now to form a sort of basin with the Jurassic and Triassic, or Red Beds all around it. Its peculiar form will be noticed on the map. The Cretaceous beds occupy very varied positions, sometimes high up on the mountain-sides nearly to the summits, and then filling up the lower valleys. The faults are without num- ber, for in the process of elevation the strata seem to have been HAYDEN.] GEOLOGY OF THE ELK MOUNTAINS. 57 broken in every direction. The aggregate inclination, however, is always to the northeast. This great mass of Cretaceous beds were influenced by the operations of two quite distinct elevatory forces which probably acted synchronously, so far as forces so different could act. Yo the eastward the long ridges of the Triassic and Carboniferous Red Beds extend down to the west from the axis of the Sawatch range, cut into deep cantons, the waters of which flow into the Grand River. These Red Beds were elevated by the Sawatch range, while the Roaring Fork flows through a sort of anticlinal valley between the axis of the Elk and the Sawaich Mountains. These Cretaceous beds form a sort of an island or basin between these great axes, and therefore lie in the syn- clinal. It is by means of the more modern beds, as the Cretaceous group, that the anticlinal character of the mountain range is more clearly seen. The Triassic and the Carboniferous beds extend over the axis of the range, while the granite nucleus makes its appearance only in limited areas, aS at Sopris, Capitol, Snow Mass, and White Rock peaks. Be- tween Capitol and Sopris peaks there is a long distance where the Red Beds form the axial ridge entirely, and seem to hold for the most part a horizontal position. On the map the Red Beds or Triassic and the Carboniferous groups are thrown together, from the fact that we found very great difficulty in separating them. Not only is there no apparent break in the sequence of the strata, but they are-so mingled together in the uplifts and overturnings that it would have required more de- tailed study of the range to separate them entirely than we were able to give at that time. Co-extensive with the narrow belt of the Dakota group, is a light band which represents the Jurassic group. Neither of these formations is ever exposed over large areas, usually only in out- cropping edges along the margins of the mountain, or in the sides of the caons. The Silurian group, so far as it is known in this region, always rests directly on the granites, whether igneous or metamorphic, and is, therefore, confined mostly to an outcropping belt around the granite areas. On the west and southwest sides of the axis the Cretaceous group appears again, extending far beyond the limits of the map. Its relations to the axis are such as to show plainly that, like the older formations, it formerly extended in an unbroken mass across the area of the Elk range. There can be no doubt of the original continuity of the entire mass of the sedimentary strata. North and west of Sopris Peak the country slopes off toward the Colorado River, and the sur- face is gashed deeply with the gorges of the streams which eut through the Cretaceous beds, oftentimes into the older groups. The Cretaceous strata, however, predominate. In the annual report for 1873, the tremendous effects of erosion, as shown on the west side of the Elk Mountains, were described in detail. These effects are displayed even on a still grander scale on the east side of the range. The gorges or cafions cut by Castle and Maroon Creeks and their branches, are probably without a parallel for ruggedness, depth, and picturesque beauty in any portion of the West. The great variety of colors of the rocks, the remarkable and unique forms of the peaks, and the extreme ruggedness, all conspire to impress the beholder with wonder. ‘The illustration, given in the northeast corner of the map, of Castle group isa type of the scenery at the heads of these streams. We here see from 3,000 to 5,000 feet of stratified rocks lifted up vertically so that the beds are horizontal, or nearly so, presenting to the eye, by the eroded forms, a wilderness of pyramidal cones whose summits rise to a height of 13,000 and 14,000 feet. The sides of the cailons are vertical or nearly so, displaying a continuous section of the 58 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. strata 2,500 to 3,000 feet, composed of alternate beds of sandstones and conglomerates with thin layers of clay or shale. These sandstones vary very much in structure in the same layer, from a fine-grained sandstone or quartzite to a rather coarse conglomerate. These changes may occur in different portions of the same layer or at different positions in the same group of strata. The lower portion of the cation is composed of rather compact sandstones, but toward the summit the rocks become a brick-red and are formed of rather loose sandy material. All the rocks vary in color from a dark dull purple to a brick-red, depending much on the influence of heat. There is a considerable degree of change in these rocks from heat, but only in a few cases amounting to complete metamorphism. These massive walls and pyramids are often inter- sected with dikes which have filled either vertical fissures or not un- frequently have been thrust between strata, forming local beds of rhyolite, sometimes of great thickness. The dividing ridge forms a curious zigzag line, often so narrow as to be almost impassable to one on foot. Knormous amphitheaters have been slowly carved out of the dividing ridge at the head of each little branch. Without speculating upon the character of the forces which were at work here in the far past, whether they were far more intense in their action than at present, we may infer that at this time they operate exceedingly slow. Portions of the divid- ing wall are falling all the time, from the influence of frost or water, and in many instances the amphitheaters extending back over the true di- vide, sometimes even breaking through the axialridge. Usually a vast accumulation of débris may be found damming up the gorge at various distances from the immediate head of the amphitheater, thus giy- ing origin to a small Jake, the waters of which gradually soak through the débris, and, coming out on the lower side, gather into a small ‘stream. It seems "hardly ‘possible that at the present time there are any agents in existence that could have transported this dé/ris down the gorge. It must have required a considerable quantity of water, with large masses of snow or ice, for the debris is often composed of large masses of rock that could only have been moved by floating ice. In the vailey of Roaring Fork, the morainal deposits are remarkable for their thickness. The surface is covered with huge bowlders, some angular and others partially rounded. The terraces are very conspicu- ous, rising, in some instances, to 1,000 feet or more above the bed of the stream and strewed over with huge bowlders. None of the stray ma- terials in any of these valleys or gorges seem to have been transported avery great distance, and never, under any circumstances, is there any drift or glacial deposits from a neighboring drainage; in other words, the loose material does not pass from one independent valley to another. So it is all over the Rocky Mountain region so far as I have observed. All the drift or Post-pliocene deposits are local. | Iregret that, for want of time, this meager account of so important a range of mountains must be closed. In the final report, in quarto, which will accompany the atlas of maps, we hope to present a more careful review of each range of mountains, with their relations to each other. In this report I have attempted to number the plates in consecutive order, but the sheets of sections and maps could not be so numbered, but will probably be clearly understood. CHAPTER Vil? | REPORT ON THE GHOLOGY OF THE NORTHWESTERN POR- TION OF THE ELK RANGH. By W. H. Hommes. DEAR Sie: In accordance with instructions received from you, I con- tinued the geologic examination of the northwest portion of the Elk Mountains, and beg leave to present the following report: When it was found that, on account of the sickness of Mr. Shanks, assistant topographer, the main party could not advance beyond Capi- tol Creek, a small party, consisting of Mr. George B. Chittenden, topographer, myself, and one packer, was detailed to continue thesurvey around to the northwest. It was arranged that we should carry with us provisions for fifteen days, and that a supply-party should meet us on the western side of the range, near the sources of Hast River, if the main party should not be able to reach that point in time. On the 29th day of August, we left the main camp and moved down the valley of Roaring Fork. A well-marked Indian trail led us through a low, syneclinal depression, which is separated from the channel occu- pied by the river, by a long, narrow ridge or hog-back. ‘The depression is occupied by the Lower Cretaceous shales, and the sandstones of the Dakota group form the crest of.the ridge. We soon crossed a low divide and were upon the southern branch of Sopris Creek. This stream heads near the summit of the Elk range, midway between Capitol and Sopris peaks, and on reaching the deepest part of the depression, turns abruptly to the northwest and cuts ob- liquely down through the ridge of Cretaceous, Jurassic, and Triassic rocks. The main Sopris Creek is formed in the snow-filled amphitheaters about the eastern faces of Sopris peak and descends to the valley with great rapidity, falling 6,000 feet in less than eight miles. It cuts its way out from the granite to the Cretaceous rocks and then descends with the dip of the beds, flowing for some time upon the hard floor of the Dakota sandstones. The bed of the creek is everywhere very shallow, and I was unable to determine whether any rocks lower than the Ju- rassic were exposed or not. Dr. Peale, who climbed Sopris peak from this side in 1873, states that there is but little exposure of the sedimen- tary rocks along the north and northeast faces of the mountain, on ac- count of the great quantities of débris and morainal drift. THE ROARING FORK SYNCLINAL. Before passing on to the description of Rock Creek and the western slope, I wish to take a hasty review of the general geology of the valley of Roaring Fork, and give, if possible, a connected idea of its structure. This valley is throughout, so far as examined, in the trough of a syn- clinal fold, and its entire conformation, the course and form of the main valley as well as of all its tributaries, is undoubtedly the result of this 59 60 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. geologic condition. The depression is by no means uniform, and the movements of the stream-bed are quite eccentric, making altogether a very interesting study. From the mouth of Marcon Creek to the mouth of Sopris Creek, a distance of some twelve miles, there is a pretty well marked fault, not following the line of greatest depression, but occurring along the eastern slope from one-fourth to three-fourths of a mile from the axis of the fold. We thus have a fracture parallel with a fold, and the two lines seem to contend for the privilege of accommodating the stream-bed. Above Maroon Creek (see map and sections) the river flows in the syn- clinal; near the mouth of the same creek, itis in the fault. Below this it cuts through the beds again and follows the synelinal for a number of miles. Still lower it turns again to the right, into the fault, and follows it all along the eastern base of the isolated ridge mentioned at the out- set. Leaving this again below the mouth of Sopris Creek, it continues in the fold, while the fault probably diesaway. ‘The dislocation, if any, of the beds, as exposed on opposite sides of the stream, is so slight that it seems quite impossible to determine this point. The downthrow i 1S generally on the west, and does not amount in any case to more than 3,000 feet. In two localities along the fault, there have been outflows of lava. These were observed by Dr. Peale, in 1873, and are located, the lower one, opposite the mouth of Sopris Creek, where it caps a large rounded butte, (see general map.) The other is on the same side of the river, some five miles farther up. The lava appears to be basaltic, and has quantities of cinder and ashes associated with it. It eaps amrim- portant butte near the river-bank, forms an escarpment some 100 feet in height, and covers an area of scarcely more than haifa square mile. Section © of the large sheet cuts this butte, and shows at the same time a most remarkable displacement, the edges of the strata on both | sides of the fault being turned abruptly up, and therefore dipping from the plane of the fault, both toward the upthrow and the down- throw. The beds on the west side are depressed so that the Lower Cretaceous rocks seem to face the Upper Carboniferous of the east side. The upturned edges were apparently leveled off before the flow of lava took place. At the mouth of Maroon Creek the depression of _ the west side has been much greater, and the edges of the beds have been dragged upward and, apparently by a lateral movement, forced past the vertical. Thus is formed the little butte of Cretaceous and Jurassic rocks between Maroon Creek and Roaring Fork, at the junc- tion described by Dr. Peale, (Report for 1873, page 2 363. ) Shortly above this the fault becomes a fold and so continues up the valley of Castle Creek. The sections of the accompanying plate, Fig. 1, cut ten of the most in- teresting points along the line of disturbance, and i is intended to give a connected idea of the folding and dislocations. The sections are so placed as to give the impression that perspective is taken into account and that the point of view is somewhere on the lower course of Roaring Fork. It will be observed, by reference to these, that the southern extension of the synclinal follows the valley of Castle Creek, and that the upper course of Roaring Fork proper is in the granite to the east. A still more extended examination to the southward and beyond the sources of Castle Creek, seems to warrant the conclusion that the portions of Silu- rian (?) quartzite noticed on the east face of station 3 and along the summit of the Italian group beyond, indicate a continuation of the same fold or at least of the same movements that produced the fold. That this is the case, and, therefore, that the entire geologic phenomena of a ot? " Ttalien Mite DA) eee Step eB cS) FIG. 1. Tén Sections across the Synclinal Valley of the Roaring Fork, partially in perspective. rie reser etaaiey oe athy i near ries ait ered Tene Ranied HOLMEs.] SOPRIS PEAK. 61 this region are connected, and, generally cneatioes not the result of complicated causes, may be pretty conclusively shown. It must be noticed, in the first place, that on the east side the sedi- mentary strata lie up against the granite of the Sawatch range, and that on the west they have been carried high up on the arch of the Elk Mountains, leaving the synelinal depression between the ranges. Inthe second place, that the axes of the two ranges are not parallel; that they approach each other toward the south and separate toward the north, giving an included angle of some 30°. In the vicinity of Italian peak the granites of the two ranges are in contact, or nearly So,as seen at a in section 2. On station 3, a few miles farther north, a fragment of the Paleozoic rock is caught up and held, as in a vice, between the masses of eruptive and metamorphic granite, b, section 3. North of this, down the valley of Castle Creek, the sedimentary area widens rapidly. The edges facing the Castle group are bent up at a sharp angle, but as the fold widens it also flattens, so that 30 miles north of Italian Mount- ain, near the line of section 10, the belt of strata is 25 miles wide and has nowhere a dip greater than 10° or 12°, In the plate I have indicated the two granites by different symbols, the metamorphic by short broken lines and the Eik Mountain granite by dots. The points of contact, as shown at a, b, c, &c., are, of course, only given to indicate a probable contact line. That such a separation really exists, however, is evident from the fact that when observed in close contact, near Italian Mountain, they are totally distinct in appear- ance and in reality. In all its general features, the geology of the val- ley of Roaring Fork and of the eastern slope of the Elk Mountains, seems simple enough, and I shall hasten on to the north and west. GEOLOGY OF SOPRIS PEAK AND VICINITY. Having ascended Sopris Creek for some five or six miles, we turned abruptly to the right and crossed the low divide that connects Sopris peak with an outlying triangular spur, and descended by a deep gulch into the valley of Rock Creek. We reached this creek at the point where the upturned edges of Cretaceous No.1 (Dakota group) cross, and found that our descent had been almost with the strike of the beds, N.40° W. This is on the west slope of the Roaring Fork synclinal, and the dip is therefore to the east. The creek passes out into the Cretaceous shales and reaches the river some eight or nine miles below. The crossing of No.1 here marks the foot of the caton of Rock Creek. Beneath No. 1, on the south side, a very beautiful section of the Jurassic is exposed. Near the summit of the bluff, about 200 feet of the Lower Cretaceous measures are exposed, consisting principally of com- pact yellowish sandstones. Some thin beds of shale are interstratified with the sandstones, and near the base there is an irregular stratum of ; moderately coarse conglomerate. The Jurassic section, beginning at the top, is as follows: 20 feet shales, containing seams of greenish and purplish quartzite. The shales weather like fire-clay. 6 feet thinly laminated, fine-grained, flinty quartzite. 10 feet yellowish quartzite. 80 feet shales and calcareous sandstones. 40 feet sandstones and sand shales. 40 feet yellowish sandstone with layers of gypsum. Red shales and red sandstones of indefinite thickness. From the trail, near the creek-bed, a very fine view of this cliffis 62 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. obtained. Weathered into the usual forms produced by alternate hard and soft beds, it begins at the top, by an escarpment of the yellow sandstones of No. 1, passing down into purplish and greenish grays, broken by darker lines of outcrop, each of which gives a tinge of its own color to the already highly-tinted slide, and still farther down the wide band of rich yellow transforms all toits own hue, and the whole sweeps down like a gorgeous curtain over the bright red cliffs of the Triassic (?). The closest search developed no trace of fossils, and it is of course impossible to define the limits of the several periods. The lithologic gradation here, from the Jurassic down through the “Red Beds” into the well-established Carboniferous is most perfect, and the entire absence of fossil-remains leaves us without a clue. In passing up Rock Creek we descend through the strata and on either hand find the cafon-walls composed of the red and maroon Carbonif- erous series. On the left they support the Sopris mass, which stands some miles back, and on the right rise into a cluster of rugged hills, above and beyond which are the lines of Cretaceous outcrop, apparently dipping to the westward. In the bottom of the canon the maroon beds seem, very oddly, to dip toward the Sopris uplift as if not affected by it, but by some movement farther to the west, but they are doubtless folded abruptly up against the northwest face of that mountain. Close under the west walls of Sopris the creek forks. At this point the granite appears, and may be seen, from far below, rising in rugged walls and abrupt spurs. The two branches seem to emerge from the base of these as immense springs, but by a closer approach we could detect the cations through which they flow. They are cut like great gashes through the granite, having between them a high promontory. On the 30th of August we ascended this promontory, and found it to be a very excellent point of observation (station 22). The peak lies to the east, rising very abruptly from the creek and presenting an aston- ishing mountain-slope. The creek-bed is 6,000 feet above the sea, and the peak springs to the height of 12,800 feet in one precipitous, un- broken slope, a rise of 6,800 feet in one and ahalf miles. With the exception of this western tongue, the graiiite mass seems to be a per- fect.cone that has had its apex pushed through the sedimentary strata, lifting them up abruptly all around, but in no case affecting them out- side of a radius of three or four miles. Indeed, if the erosion had been more equal on all sides the exposed granite area must have been nearly circular, but the great erosion of Rock Creek cutting so deeply into the mountain-side, has developed an area something like that shown in Fig. 2. i This elevated area forms the extreme northwest end of the Elk range, and is connected with the Capitol and Snow Mass groups, which lie about ten miles southeast, by a high, red ridge, the crest of an arch in the Carboniferous rocks, which here connect completely across the range. The more recent strata have been broken down and carried away, so that their outcropping edges are ranged low down along the flanks of the mountains, on the east side trending toward the north- west, making almost a tangent with the Sopris granites, crossing Rock Creek at the point where we entered the valley, and swinging around to the north indefinitely, but, very probably connecting, in the low country, with the corresponding series of the west side. i The east branch of Rock Creek, which I have called Avalanche Creek, heads in the northern and western faces of the Snow Mass group, and has cut its way in a most remarkable manner down through the side of the red arch, almost parallel with its crest, striking Sopris | SS —— ee iia =, i ——————— = —7( iN i — 9 : , )- end A 27a Nie eras -——— a aa aie Re: — ta ne ieee (eS NET dtodd Pe | TEENIE > OE ean OSS ERLICRD), SS ee. Becca A An ne Ne Hi aun wi! EASE VRS) | Bg. 3. Section across the Sopris uplift. North i naa i Palin \t} (fe, i Meeat by i. ny) ! Fig. 4 Sketch_Locking down Rock Creek from Promontory Point - Station 22. a,Juncuon of Bast and West Yorks Rock Ercek. c, Catton of Grand River: ¢e, Silurian) Quartates 9g, Cretaceous Nol. The point where Rock Creek was tirst reached. b, Junetton. of Rock Creek and Roaring Fork. dd, Granite of Sopris. £4 Carboniferous Strata. al / The Jurassic Section already giver ts at g. ig HOLMES.] VALLEY OF ROCK CREEK. 63 between our station and the main summit, and joining the main stream below. In the upper course, therefore, it is in granite, in the middle part, in Paleozoie rocks, afterward in granite, and finally again in the stratified rocks, cutting its way, after joining the main stream, from the Silurian out into the Upper Cretaceous. Rock Creek proper, the sources of which were explored last year, can be traced far to the south- ward, as it comes down through a deep valley. This valley widens as it approaches our station, but on reaching the belt of granite, suddenly closes into a deep and precipitous canon. This is immediately under us, to the west, and a stone dislodged plunges down over the crags to the creek- bed, 1,500 feet below. This canon is hardly more than half a mile in length (the width of the granite arm) and opens below into the great triangular valley about the creek junction. The sketch on the opposite page, Figure 4, will aid in making clear the geology north of our station, and about. Sopris. As seen in the drawing, there is considerable irregularity i in the disposition of strata. The isolated fragment of Paleozoic beds between Sopris and Rock Creek evinces a considerable amount of lateral crushing as indicated by a series of abrupt and angular concentric folds or wrinkles. Along the line of the creek-bed there has probably been a slight dislocation or fault as indi- cated by the want of harmony between the strata at e’’ on the east side, and those at ¢” on the western. There are also traces of a considera- ble degree of metamorphism, ‘shown by the change of color near the granite contact, as well as by the thinning-out of the entire series, such as would occur in a number of sheets of iron heated and partially welded together at the edges under the irregular blows of a hammer. It has been suggested that the existence of a shore-line about the granitic area. has, during Paleozoic times, preduced this thinning-out, and especially since, on the eastern face of the mountain, the more modern deposits seem to jut up against or almost against the granite, but it should be observed thatin every locality where this peculiar granite appears, there are unmistakable evidences of abrupt and violent movements, inde- pendent of its relations to the sedimentary strata. It acts in all cases as a foreign element, plastic and aggressive, intruding itself upon a region heretofore undisturbed, and producing disturbances of the most marked and nozsual kind. In this case, however, there is less evidence of violence than in any of the eases farther south, but in lithologic char- acter and methods of upheaval it is the same. GEOLOGY OF THE DISTRICT DRAINED BY ROCK CREEK. We had resolved to follow the course of the western or main branch of Rock Creek. In the cafion there was an old trail leading over the rocks, and we passed through, without difficulty, into the open valley above. Here were some beautiful meadows in which we discovered a group of hot springs. In anumber of places, steam could be seen rising from the grass and reeds, and on approaching we encountered a number of slimy pools, from which considerable streams of hot water were flow- ing. In all there were more than a dozen active springs, in most cases Hee erered with sulphur, and ranging, in temperature, from 30° to On the 29th a rain-storm had set in, and everything was now wet, thoroughly saturated. Muddy torrents poured down the upper slopes and dashed over the cliffs into the valley. Avalanches of wet earth, carrying many rocks and trees, formed near the summits and came roar. ing down, discharging their great masses of débris into the river, and 64 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. tearing out such gorges in the alluvial bottoms as to make travel almost impossible. The continuation of this sliding process from year to year keeps large portions of the mountain-sides swept clear of all movable material, leaving only the bare rock. ; All along these deep valleys such avalanche-pathways may be noticed. The vegetable growth is quite profuse in this region. Dense groves of aspens occupy the more fertile spots, pines and cedars cling to the rocky slopes, while Scrub-oaks and a great variety of smaller bushes abound. ‘There is but little room for agriculture or grazing. At the upper end of the cafion the granite disappears and the yellow quartzites descend into the valley and also disappear, dipping 30° 8. The Carboniferous maroon beds follow, but soon assume a horizontal position, so that there is nothing else exposed in the walls, for a distance of five or six miles. Then, by an abrupt monoclinal fold, the whole series pitches into the valley, leaving nothing exposed but the massive sandstones of the Upper Cretaceous. ‘These beds in turn assume a hori- zontal position, forming shelved slopes to the height of 1,200 to 1,500 feet on either side of the creek. The creek cuts obliquely through this fold, and the section exposed consists of the Upper Carboniferous, Jurassic, and Lower Cretaceous strata. On the left hand the hard layers of the Dakota group, standing almost on edge, form a high ridge that extends to the southward up the western slope of the Snow Mass group. On the opposite side, the trend of the same beds is to the northwest, passing ‘up the face of a high mountainous ridge which culminates in Gannett’s station 26, ten miles west of Sopris. Section C of the large sheets cuts this fold near the creek-crossing, and also gives a transverse - -section of the great red arch which lies between Sopris and Capitol peaks. The facilities for measuring the strata in this locality are very poor. The yellow quartzites, supposed to belong to the Silurian age, do not measure more than 500 feet, while the Carboniferous series will hardly — fall short of 4,500. The Triassic (?), Jurassic, and Cretaceous beds will add about 5,500 more, so that the exposed strata will inclade a thickness of some 10,000 feet. Ever since entering the valley a handsome group of mountains had been in sight, apparently standing in the valley-course, and quite cut- ting off the view. From the crossing of the monoclinal fold, the first of these mountains appeared three or four miles farther up, standing on the west side of the valley, and rising abruptly from the creek. We determined to climb this in order to get good views of the Elk Mount- ains, which lie mostly to the east, and of the unknown area to the west. In the first place, we ascended the steep Cretaceous slope to the right, at its lowest point, and found ourselves on a level with the undulating country to the west. Gannett’s station 26, was on our right, some ten miles to the north, and the mountain which we desired to climb on the left, three miles away, and rising nearly three thousand feet above us. Following the summit, or back of the ridge which leads up toward it, I observed that the Cretaceous strata were rising with the slope, and at. the base of the steeper face were turned sharply up against it at an angle of 45°. In crossing these upturned edges, I observed that they comprised no great thickness; that the bulk of the sedimentary beds seemed not to change from their horizontal position, and that this up- turned portion had been separated from the rest and forced upward by a wedge-like mass of intrusive rock which belonged to the central mass of the group. (See Figure 5.) These strata seem to belong to the Cre- taceous Coal Measures, as there were outcrops of coal and carbonaceous Shale. The horizon would hardly be less than 3,000 feet above No. 1. BP?) PU? FO S14} UPI. spaTUU)D PE aunhn Li (9'9 Pe 99) DN.4s snossDIat0 .addn 24) umMupg ZbpIMD sn pepnipl ‘aQnOdYY ‘EY UOIpIg 'o big | 1 a ) Gp pares seal ie | ij I), | RRA if H \\ ee TH | SRN aN Se —— ~ SSS E ; —_———=— hea ie : i a Z ‘1G. 6.—VIBW IN THE SNowmass Grovp. ey a I a ve vy iat Yyyyyyyy) YY) HOLMES.) : SNOW MASS GROUP. 65 The rock of the peak proved to be an exceedingly fine and handsome rhyolite, grayish in oot and containing many large crystals of white feldspar. Station 23 was made near the highest point. This proved, as I had expected, to be the extreme northern summit of the large group of mountains that lies to the west of the Elk Mountains proper, and may for convenience be called the West Elk group. It is hardly inferior to the main range in area, and is separated from it by the valleys of Rock Creek and East River. Clusters of handsome, moderately high summits could be seen far to the southward, and as far toward the east as Treas. ury or Lookout Mountains. The general outlines and the manner of weathering indicate that they are all of trachyte or rhyolite. To the westward the country is low, and slopes off toward the Gun- nison River on the left, and the Grand on the right. There are no striking geographical features, and the whole visible area is doubtless of Cretaceous age, the exposed rock being mostly of the Upper Creta- ceous group, which comprises perhaps 2,500 feet in thickness of sand- stones, conglomerates and shales, with an undetermined number of coal- seams. As mentioned before, the main body of the stratified rocks about this station are not disturbed, so that the exposures all along the eastern base, beneath fhe body of ’trachyte, are horizontal, and so continue far ‘up Rock Creek. This creek heads in a picturesque group of moun- tains far away to the east, cuts its way down through a number of deep canons, and striking the base of this mountain turns abruptly to the north. From this point we get our first view of the western faces of the Elk Mountains, and are impressed more deeply than ever with their beauty and grandeur. The lower slopes are underlaid by Creta- taceous strata and densely covered by a growth of gray and purple underbrush. Above this, groves of aspens and clusters of dark biue pines relieve the glowing reds and purples of the Carboniferous rocks. Still higher, and in delightful contrast to these ardent colors, are the - summits of gray granite, whose polished and ornate faces constantly remind us of the form in some gothic cathedral. The culminating sum- mits belong to the Snow Mass group, and are so thoroughly hemmed in by serrated crests, and deep zigzagging ridges, that they seem to chal- lenge approach. In a few days we hope to penetrate the obscure valleys that headin this group, and from some of its higher peaks make a more detailed study of its forms and structure. We found theascent of Rock Creek beset with difficulties, and only suc- ceeded in advancing at all by climbing the eastern wall of the cation and remaining on a flat, shelf-like area, formed by the horizontal Cretaceous Strata. In the middle of the afternoon of September 1st, we descended into the bed of a small tributary of Rock Creek, not far below the base’ of Treasury Mountain. In passing down the face of the upper ledge 1 observed that the rock was of rhyolite, and not sandstone, as I had Supposed. This proved to be only a capping, and is doubtless a :rem- nant, separated from the mass west of the creek by erosion, since both walls of the valley, up to corresponding horizons, areof Cretaceous Shales. The creek into which we had descended seemed to issue from the very center of the Snow Mass group, and finding a pretty distinct game-trail we turned to the left and followed it up the valley. On our left hand a steep bluff rose to the height of some 1,500 feet. The strata exposed in its face were probably of ‘the Upper Cretaceous group, and consisted of sandstones and shales, the former predominating above and the latter oH 66 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. OF -THE TERRITORIES. * below, so that there was a gradation from solid sandstones at the top to homogeneous shales at the base. The section includes the group of — strata sometimes called the “ transition group” by Dr. Hayden. The horizon is probably that of the upper part of No.5, Cretaceous. The dip of the beds in this place is toward the northwest 10° to 15°. They seem . but slightly affected by the elevation of the main range on the east, or of Treasury Mountain on the south. Farther up the stream, which we shall call Aspen Creek, the dip increases to 45°, and the upturned edges are lodged against the granite, which, by means of a rather complicated fault, has been thrust up past the broken edges of the entire series of ' earlier sedimentary rocks, bending the edges of the older strata back and driving them into the softer strata above. In the bottom of the creek a small portion of the yellow quartzites are exposed, situated as shown in Section D of the large sheet. This fault would seem to be on the northern continuation of the line of upheaval to which belongs the inverted series observed last year about the southern sources ef Rock Creek. Our investigations at that time were extended to within six miles of this point. Late in the evening we encamped near timber-line, and on the follow- ing morning climbed the high granite ridge to our left. Wesoon found ourselves in the very midst of the mountains. Snow Mass and Capitol and Mount Daly rose up magnificently in the east, Sopris stood alone at the north, and many groups of lofty mountains appeared in the southwest. All around us were only bare rock and snow. The whole area is above timber-line, and the sculpture of the mountains is won- derfully striking and picturesgue. The long crooked lines of crests are connected by subordinate crests, and these all send out sharp, narrow branching ridges which separate the amphitheater-like heads of the numerous radiating streams. As a rule, these high valleys are wide and the ridges narrow, so that the country presents the appearance, in arude way, of a giant honeycomb. Sopris is connected with Capitol by the flat ridge of Carboniferous red beds, Capitol with Snow Mass by a deeply-indented saddie, while south from Snow Mass, the axis crest continues to Maroon Mountain, thence to the White Rock and Castle peaks. From the saddle, midway between Capitol and Snow Mass, a pinnacled ridge extends to the westward between the head-waters of Bast Fork or Avalanche Creek and Rock Creek proper. Branches are thrown out from this between all the small streams, while the chief erest of the spur continues out to station 22. Stations 24 and 25 were made-about midway on this ridge. Station 24 is the most northerly summit of the Snow Mass granite, and is eight miles from station 22. The sedimentary outcrops, which pass just north of Capitol and Daly peaks, sweep around to the north of this station and turn to the south- ward, crossing Aspen Creek, as described on the preceding page. Here the entire series is exposed, there only the Upper Cretaceous and bits of the Paleozoic rocks in the bed of the creek. The lines of outcrop can be traced between the two points. The older rocks gradually disappear as the granite begins to fault up past the broken edges. (See colored map). This may be regarded as the farthest northern extension of the great fault-fold previously mentioned. This fold being a most compli- cated and interesting piece of dynamics, calls for a separate analysis, which I give farther on. On the 3d we descended Aspen Creek to the main creek and continued the examination of the Cretaceous section. The black shales, the upper part of which are exposed in the bluff on the north side of Aspen Creek, occupy the valley from the base of the bluff to the base of Treasury Treasury Moimtain “a, Treasury Mt — yuaguaversaé . — b cast branch of Rock (reek — c.svuthBranth, _d d.Juriction. — ¢.e,e, outcrops of Shales of W?2 cret. circling the north end of’ Treasuny Me. LELE outerops of feret. ~ g Pulls, __hhh, Bluff of middle cretaceous Shales and. Sandstone tasing Asper Creek , _ t,t,t, Trachyte intruded among the Shales. u, Clifton Greek near the Mouth of which is the seam of anthractte Gozl ——. The Creek veut into Treasury Me at cand & und pass ont ut the lulls g. e WAS AN \ \\ Y t/) y) Fic. 8.—CAscaDE ON ROCK CREEK, COLORADO. HULMES.] TREASURY MOUNTAIN. 67 Mountain. The dip is at first slight, but before we reach the Lower Cre- taceous, it rises to 30°. The strike is at right angles to the stream- course, but turnsto the south on both sides of the mountain. It appears, from such examinations as I was able to make, that Treasury Mountain is a short anticlinal, or oval shaped quaquaversal, that seems to have been produced by some agent associated with great heat, since the high degree of metamorphism of the entire series up to the Middle Cretaceous is quite remarkable. I doubt if the sedimentary measures are entirely penetrated in any part of the mountain. The Jurassic and Lower Creta- ceous rocks reach high up the sides of the areh, while the lines of shale- outcrop are ranged around and support the base. The dip is toward Rock Creek on the east and north, and toward two of its tributaries on the south and west. The only place where the Paleozoic rocks have been penetrated and exposed ison the east side, where the two branches of Rock Creek, leaving the Cretaceous synclinal, cut directly into the side of the anticlinal, passing through the Cretaceous, Jurassic, and Upper Carboniferous rocks, into the Lower Carboniferous, (see Figure 7;) here, in a deep, narrow cafion, they unite, and turning to the right the resultant stream follows for some distance along the strike until it reaches the north end of the ovai, where it cuts its way out again into the broad depression eroded from the Cretaceous shales.. In passing out over the highly met- amorphosed beds of the Dakota group, a splendid cascade is formed with a fall of 500 or 600 feet. The sandstones of this group are so greatly changed here that it would be impossible to recognize them out- side of their relations to the overlying strata. They are reduced toa very hard flinty quartzite, greenish in color and nearly uniform through- out. The shales above are much hardened, and the Jurassic and other substrata are so consolidated as to be but a series of flinty quartzites. For the sake of comparison I present in this connection, Fig. 9, two sec- tions of the Cretaceous rocks, one made in this locality and the other on. the border of the plains. The Dakota group is everwhere the same. The series of shales are almost identical, and the transitions from shales to the sandstones above are as like as possible. Palm-leaves and fucoids are found in the lower part of these sandstones and in corresponding horizons. In the east the lignitic coal is found near the base of the sandstones, while the anthracite coal of the West occurs 2,000feet higher. An an- alysis of this coal, made by Professor Mallett, demonstrates the fact that it is of fine quality. (See chapter IX, Dr. Peale’s Report.) The seam is about four feet thick, but the locality is one most difficult of access as well as remote from any probable market. It certainly cannot be utilized for many years yet unless the immediate region should prove rich in mines, in which case it would be invaluable for smelting purposes. Between Treasury Mountain and the Snow Mass group there is a long, narrow Cretaceous valley, produced by an abrupt synclinal fold, in which the strata are doubled back upon each other. The forces have so pre- dominated on the east side that the beds on that side are pushed beyond the vertical and lie atop of the gently inclined strata of the west side. The Upper Cretaceous sandstones do not occur in this depression south of Aspen Creek; we have, therefore, a double thickness of the black shales in the middle of the valley, giving in all a thickness of nearly 4,000 feet. The shales are followed or supported on either side by the older strata, in the usual order. The depression produced by this fold may be followed the whole length of the Elk range, and separates it from the West Elk group, producing northern and southern systems of drain- age. 68 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. THE GREAT FAULT FOLD OF THE ELK RANGE. On September 5th we reached the northern limit of our last year’s work, and little remained to be done but to examine a few complicated spots along the main fold of the Elk range. Most of the difficult prob- lems occur along this fold, between station 24 on the north and Cascade Creek on the’ south, and as the axis of the fold is west of the crest of the range, the complicated parts are cut by the deep transverse valleys of the western slope and many good sections are exposed. Six of these, D, HE, F, G, H, and I, are given in the main sheet of sections accompany- ing the ‘map. It will be observed by reference to the map that the granite, which is represented by heavy horizontal lines and marked A A, occurs in two great masses, and that in these masses are the culminating sum- mits of the range. The northern, which is cut by sections D and B, is the Snow Mass group, and the southern, cut by sections G, H, and it is the White Rock group. At first glance it might seem that these were separate centers of elevation or upheaval, or at least that they were not intimately related, but closer examination develops the fact that there is a line of disturbance of a very marked and extraordinary character connecting them. Section F cuts this fold at ee, and gives one of its peculiar phases. But I found that a very large number of sections, even, could not be made to give a connected idea of so complex a fold. I have, therefore, prepared the accompanying illustration (Fig. 11), in which the entire fold is given in relief and so placed upon an outline map that the location of the various parts may be easily recognized. I have carefully kept in view the idea of showing simply the peculiar foldings of the broken edges of the strata. The granite areas have been shaded down and the effects of erosion partially ignored in order to develop the one idea, and a single convenient horizon, the base of the Cretaceous, is taken, entirely disincumbered, for the sake of greater simpticity. It should be remembered that this representation is highly artificial ; that in reality the fold is very obscure, and has but little apparent effect upon the topography; that it is cut into fragments by ten immense valleys ; and that its anatomy can only be studied on the steep faces of the ridges between these valleys. It will be seen by reference to the figure and the sections opposite, that the conditions all along the east side are simple, there being a gradual and gentle dip from the crest of the range toward the valley of Roaring Fork, while on the west side there has been a general depres- sioD or downthrow, so to speak, amounting in many places to 7,000 or 8,000 feet; at the same time a combination of movements, principally lateral, have produced along the axis an immense wrinkle, a fold so abrupt that the beds are crushed and shattered and the severed edges shoved past each other, as shown in the drawing and sections be- tween e and n. It will not be difficult to imagine that while this was going on, the plastic mass beneath was assisting the movements and shaping the results, and that during the process it forced itself, or was forced, through the fractured line in the two great masses of the Snow Mass and White Rock groups. Beginning at the north, I shall give a detailed description. All along the north face of the Snow Mass group the sedimentary rocks lie in the usual order upon the granites, with a slight dip toward the north. (See axis-section, large sheet.) Between Station 24 and Aspen Creek the granite begins to fault up past the broken edges of the sedimentary miu awe: | Whit Este WOM ane i { y Ey ‘ahacalaln in Aerated ay weeny Fe Siu Drive dap jeratioena maya otd nem A met SEM easel! Mert ale Daryn) et Ai bE, gh entnng ve gene Jalatoaide Ragghanbvage toh a cnygteingaavan} y oy rags ies ‘ oe hy Mt hua 0G falmote ees EN | \ Sazzdstorne 4000 Fe. !\ 2000 to 2000 ft. || Sandstore and Shales. SSeS eS ae | Nol Cretaceous i 300fT. JUTASSTC Fig.9 Sandstones 106 te 200 Fe. i ae a 500 to 600 feet: i] Sandstones and. ee Ba oe t Shales. es Foal a Sandstone felations of the Coal Beds to No.1 Cretaceous. Section 1, West of the Range, Elk Mts. Section 2, Hast of the Range, Cache la Poudre, or Cation Cty. HOLMES.] _ FAULT FOLD OF THE ELK RANGE. 69 strata, and at Aspen Creek,as previously mentioned, only the Upper Cretaceous remains in view, with a fragment of primordial rock at a in the deepest part of the valley. South of Aspen Creek for a few miles the whole series seems to be depressed beneath the sur- face, while the granite peaks on the east side of the fault-line rise to’ the height of 3,000 feet, making a total displacement of at least 11,000 feet. South of b there is a high, sharp ridge formed of a series of almost vertical Carboniferous rocks, which seem to have been carried up by the granite, or at least to Wave been left in the present position by the dragging of the fault. In the south end of this ridge the dip increases from 90 to 135 degrees, that is, 45 degrees beyond the vertical, and nearly the whele series of sedimentary rocks appear in this position in the side of the cafion at c. In the triangular spur between ¢ and d, a large mass has been carried back 90 degrees past the vertical, so that the Silurian quartzites oc- cupy the top of the ridge, and the Cretaceous rocks the bottom of the valley. The foid has been so sharp at e that the beds have been broken off, and the continued upward movement of the granite has bent the broken edges up, producing a synclinal in the inverted strata. In this place the belt of granite is quite narrow, so that the relative positions of the strata on opposite sides can be studied with ease. The Silurian rocks of the east side outcrop on the summit of the water-shed of the range at f 2,000 feet above the creek, and since the Middle Cretaceous rocks of the west side are depressed to an unknown depth beneath the creek-bed, we can safely say that there is a vertical displacement of at least 8,000 feet. The amount of lateral movement (at right angles to the axis of the fault) may be expressed by the difference between the width of the gran- ite belt e fand that of the inverted fragment d e, and will hardly fall short of 6,000 feet. South of ¢ the beds gradually rise again from the inverted position, and a high, narrow ridge is formed of the almost vertical Carboniferous rocks. This ridge is not above four miles in length, and is connected with the main range by an irregular cross-ridge that separates the head- waters of the north and south brauches of Rock Creek. The tongue of granite that extends southward from Snow Mass along the fault-line is obscured before reaching this cross-ridge by the overlapping sedimen- - tary rocks (at h). Here the greatest confusion occurs, and large masses of the rocks, of all ages, are found in the most unheard-of relations to each other. The strata of the west side have been depressed and caught beneath the encroaching strata of the east side, and are folded back upon themselves, as seen in the drawing, Figure 11. This peculiar and somewhat irregular fold may be traced for a distance of six or seven miles, and in this distance is cut at right angles by three immense val- leys. The sections exposed in the faces of these are not always distinct, but at the same time make it possible to study the peculiar anatomy of the fold. I observe that in every place where there is an éxposure the Carboniferous rocks of the east side rest upon the upper surfaces of the hard sandstones of the Dakota group, and with such a degree of regu- larity that I was for a long time in doubt as to the identity of the latter. In studying the section exposed on the north side of the valley which crosses the fault at 7, I began near the crest of the main range west of Maroon Mountain, and passed down through nearly 3,000 feet of Carbon- iferous sandstones, limestones, and conglomerates (which have a gen- tle dip to the east and undoubtedly belong to the eastern side of the 70 | GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. range), but on the slope between h and %, I came suddenly upon the well-known sandstone of No. 1 Cretaceous, lying beneath the Paleozoic rocks and to all appearances conformable with them. Keeping on at right angles to the dip, I passed first over the outcropping edges of Jurassic and Triassic (?) rocks; then over a ridge of Carboniferous conglom- erates and limestones, much crushed and metamorphosed ; and finally, beneath these still, over a full but much distorted series of Triassic, Juras- sic, and Cretaceous rocks. The dip rises in places to 70 and 80 degrees, and the strikes are not quite uniform. I was at first entirely unable to account for this extraordinary succession of strata, and did not succeed in solving the problem until I had followed the outcrops across the valley to the south and discovered in the higher ridge at j the arch of the fold, which, on the opposite side of the valley, had been carried away. It seems that in the first place a great fault occurred, in which there was a throw sufficient to place the Lower Cretaceous of the west side opposite the Lower Carboniferous of the east side, and that a powerful lateral movement had then driven the opposing strata together, the harder Carboniferous rocks sliding forward upon the upper surface of the quartzites of the Dakota group, and at the same time bending them and portions of the firmer substrata back in a sharp fold, which, from the continued pressure, has been carried en masse beyond the vertical and almost severed below by the immense pressure. (See section F, large sheet.) In the next ridge south, at j, the fold is not so abrupt, and the ridge m, facing White Rock Creek, there is only a gentle arch of the strata (see section G, large sheet), while a considerable gap occurs between the faulted strata in which the granite appears. _ At n the infolding ceases, and in the valley at o the strata dip some forty degrees to the west (section H, large sheet).. Toward p they rise again to the vertical, and at q have been pushed back to forty-five de- grees past the vertical by a mass of granite, which now lies superim- posed upon the ridges like so much trachyte. Before reaching the bed of Teocalli Creek at r, the strata fall back again almost to the normal horizontal position. Here the fault forks; one branch extends southward through s, and the other turns eastward along the north face of Teocalli Mountain and continues in a pretty direct course to station 3. The elevation on the north side of this branch of the fault has been very great, and has extended over a large area. White Rock and Am- phitheater Mountains have probably been the highest granitic points, but the whole mass of the Castle group has been carried up so uniformly that the Paleozoic rocks lie in an almost horizontal position upon a plateau-like mass of granite. (See section H, large sheet.) A few miles south of station 3, which is the most southeasterly gran- ite outcrop of the Castle group,:a small pyramidal mass of granite has forced its way up through the primordial rocks bordering the granites of the Sawatch range, producing the summit of Italian peak. Although this bit of granite seems quite isolated from the previously-described centers of disturbance, a very marked line of fracture and faulting may be traced between it and the Castle group, but as the details of this region have already been given by Drs. Hayden and Peale, I shall con- tent myself by giving, in conclusion, a brief recapitulation of the more striking features of the Elk range. Topographically speaking, it is a spur of the great continental divide, but geologically it is quite inde- pendent in origin. It trends nearly northwest and southeast, so that one extremity lies high upon the slopes of the Sawatch range, while the other extends far out into the low country bordering the Grand River. s ie dnleac oie oies ee eee tet 1 ren ‘ mat d Capitol Greek fe) Cinnamon Mt. J aS x S S S S G PART oF THE GREAT FAULT FOLD oF tHe ELA MOUNTAINS. v Gested Butte HG fl GY (Cdotnes Lee 09.) Gp handiee (Ae 0 poh 1S Le ay Paris Ofrancticire iG HOLMES.] : SUMMARY. U1 It seems to owe its present conformation to the occurrence of three nearly parallel lines or belts of displacement, two of depression and one of elevation. The depression along the valley of Roaring Fork, which has already been presented in Fig. 1, is included between the divergin ¢ axes of the two ranges, and exhibits some very curious examples of faulting and folding. The elevated belt, which constitutes the range, is about forty miles in length. It slopes gently toward the depression on the east, but drops off very abruptly on the west in a great fault-fold. Four considerable areas of eruptive granite occur along the axis of this belt or zone, and the de- pressions between these contain synclinal folds of the sedimentary beds, as seen in the longitudinal section given on the large sheet. It will be noticed, by reference to the transverse sections, that the axis section, which follows approximately the crests of the range, is generally to the east of the axis of displacement. The reason of this will be plain, when it is observed that the entire series of strata rise gradually from the valley of the Roaring Fork synclinal, until the axis of displacement i is reached, and that the highest points, which would at first’stand along the line of this axis, are now carried back by erosion from one to five ' miles to the east. The amount of vertical displacement along the fault-fold, between Aspen Creek on the northwest, and station 3 on the southeast, does not fall short of 5,000 feet at any point, and will probably measure 10,000 feet in one or two places along the west side of the Snow Mass group. The depressed belt west of the range, occupied by the valleys of Rock Creek and Hast River, is very intimately associated with the fault-fold, and has been produced by the downthrow on that side rather than by any independent folding, as the strata do not rise at all to the west, except for a few miles along the east face of Treasury Mountain, as seen in sections EK and F. On the 11th day of September we fell in with the main party just south. of Italien Mountain, and after spending a few days in the review of the - geology about the headwaters of Hast River, began our return march to the Hast. nae za) i Pyne / Dihite ke 3 : Seas auction aed Heaney ek ee La AME Dot TR Ui) 2 78 en Raat Si aN ae en = an Ti eee ig er any ~syte eeaacyhdipipei t agonn:tDSeelctany 1 lr thaadaagy a ale at fae om = R Prky Blurre of Sapaston’ = BES Se Nis DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOTt US Geological and Geographical Survey of the Terriforice FY Hayden, U.S.Geologist in Charge OF THE: ELK MOUNTAINS COLORADO FROM SURVEY TY GB.Chivenden in 1874. WITH GEOLOGY HY — EV-Hayden and WH Holmen Saale 2Miloe to Winch Scale of Miles oe ee! OTES Contours are tre hundred feet «part bus tn fort abere the Sea ant have beer aermrined by combination of baremmrie and (rigene: mecrte Traile are shown has ——— Rell = A. Casile Group from the West Gpreal Sedimentary Weathering. Carberferass Sandstone i) a \ \ a if Rey ateea Soe @ Ne Sater wy, : ay) ET itt SS ies IN OMA EAD tea LEGEND. ‘Snare Mars Mt from the W Typical Granite Weathering Brverted Bids of Car moe ve" Se Divide Capitol < a400g tt jection = See Nap che Oreck, fralanche Geek | A [ESE rani oe Samateh Range -Aetamarphic yashington Gulch - Cretaceous Shales :is00 to 3000 [t thick-Fbustle Na. Cretaceoun-uaresite- 200 to 990 /L~ Fossils ~Jurmasia Shales, Maris Sard anit Lire 40oe te e0u/t No Fosstla Reed Beda -Senditercs e Conglomersics-s00s 4 24001 -No Fossils Cardoraterous Sandstone Limestens, Conglemerate and Shale, Tose ta bom fh - Foarile Sihurian(?} Quarexite- bee te ¢20 No Fossile Rete ee Foe SE 20010 SECTIONS accompanying MAP of ELK MOUNTAINS. Vertical and Horizontal Scales the Same iuyee ps asaya, Contact of Eruptine & MAO PRC Granites BR Beds of Hhyelite intruded MOwcen Sedimentary Strata. Base Line of Sectians seve feet a6 the Sea Level The dotted Linea show the probable Caren of Noy}. oR St ‘ } = REPORT OF A. C. PEALE, M. D., GEOLOGIST OF MIDDLE DIVISION. 1 Se i SY i Koei a el TE ted seca eae r REPORT OF A. C. PEALE, M. D., GEOLOGIST OF THE MIDDLE DIVISION. WASHINGTON, D. C., May 15, 1875. Sir: I have the honor herewith to submit my report as geologist of the middle division of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories for the season of 1874. The report of Mr. Henry Gannett, who was in charge of the division, will supplement this report, and to it I refer for more detailed informa- tion in regard to the routes followed, elevation, and topographical fea- tures of the district assigned us. We left Denver on the 21st of July, and by the 5th of August had commenced work near the head of the Eagle River. On the Ist of November work was suspended and we started for Den- ver, reaching that city about the middle of the month. During the three months we were in the field at work 5,300 square miles were sur- veyed. My plan of working was in general the same as during the season of 1873. Accompanying the topographer in charge to almost all the high sta- tions, I made sketches of the surrounding country, on which I defined in colors the boundaries of the various formations. Whenever time permitted I made detailed sections of the strata. This report is divided into nine chapters, the first three of which are devoted to the general geological and topographical features respect- ively of the valleys of Eagle, Grand, and Gunnison Rivers. The suc- ceeding chapters give the special and detailed features of the various formations, and the economical geology of the district. Catalogues of the minerals and rocks are appended. The report is accompanied by maps and sections, for which I am largely indebted to Mr. William H. Holmes and Mr. Henry Gannett. I have colored the geological formations on a provisional map, reduced by photography from the original drawing of Mr. Gannett’s map of the district. The rapidity of preparation and necessary absence during publication of the report must be my excuse for any errors that may appear. In conclusion I wish to express my thanks for the cordial co-opera- tion of all the members of the party. With great respect, I remain your obedient servant, A. C, PEALE. Dr. F. V. HAYDEN, United States Gologist. 75 ali} ty RAS.) E ree a ‘ an 4 7 R; nou Di Rak alte Me a Gy in} ye ag Ate 0 x eine ne 4 wane His my Ne ine here Leon ne Tso een His a pee Me Ti HEE ON A SRT uit ae e ae bo ae Nik tah ie ile J an eure pe Ghent ae. i etait mee beet mye a euiiiee wo CONVENTIONAL SIGNS USED IN PLATES FLT IV VIL VIII TX XTV Quarizcles Light colored gandslones Peed sand slones Gypsiferous shales Santaieee Light shales Dork shales Limestones Alluviusrn Porphyrilie trachyle Rhyo Lele, lesfer. &€ ohsidian Breecita Basalt Archaecan t ecw i . et VRB INTRODUCTION. The territory assigned to the middle division for the season of 1873 was thus outlined in the letter of instruction given to Mr. Gannett, who was in charge, on taking the field: ‘¢ The boundaries of the area to be mapped by your division (or as much of it as the season will allow) are as follows: Commencing at the intersection of meridian 109° 30’ and the Grand River, the line runs northeastward up the Grand River to the junction of the Hagle River; thence up the Eagle River to the mouth of Roche Moutonnée Creek ; thence westward along the northern boundary of last summer’s (1873) work to its intersection with meridian 107°; thence southward along the western side of last summer’s work, approximately on the 107th meridian, to parallel 38° 30’; thence westward on this parallel to the intersection of meridian 109° 30’; and thence northward on this merid- ian to the intersection of 109° 30’ with Grand River.” This area has an irregular boundary, Grand River, on the north, and includes between 7,000 and 8,000 square miles, of which about 5,300 square miles were actually worked during the season. The area is bounded on the west by the Uncompahgre and Gunnison Rivers, leav- ing the area west of these streams for another season. This gave us a well-defined natural boundary as our western limit. The greater por- tion of the area is plateau country, the elevation of which ranges from 9,000 feet to 11,000 feet above sea-level. The mountainous portion is limited to the southeastern part, along the western edge of the Hik Mountains. The drainage is comprehended in two systems, viz, that of the Grand River and that of the Gunnison River. The entire district is within the limits of the reservation for the Ute Indians, and a large portion of it had never been visited by white men. In 1853 Captain Gunnison, exploring for a route for a Pacific Railroad, surveyed a belt of country along the river that now bears his name. | In - the winter of 185354, Col. John C. Frémont passed over nearly the same route that Gunnison did. In 1845 Frémont followed the Arkansas to its head, crossed Tennessee Pass (called Utah Pass by him), to the Piney (Eagle), and followed it for some distance, finally crossing to the Blue (Grand River), and continuing westward. In 1873 Lieutenant Ruffner followed Ohio Creek to its head, crossed to the head of Anthra- cite Creek, and thence to Slate River, going eastward to the Arkansas. All these were merely reconnaissance surveys, and added but little to our knowledge of the country outside of their routes. The great mass of country lying between was unexplored. The general geological features of the district will be given in subse- quent chapters. The greater portion of the district is covered with rocks of Tertiary and Cretaceous age, covered in places with laya- flows. Mr. Gannett’s report will give all details in regard to the elevations of peaks and passes, and topography of the country. 77 Cate AN Kee t Ls i (Rh ete os SEE oe figs os ; *. yi 4 AWD au, at Stee: Sto GCE NEG \ Din oery salsa Bye T/RRN CN ERR EM ee CHAPTER I. SURFACE GEOLOGY—VALLEY OF EAGLE RIVER. _ Eagle River is a branch of Grand River, one of the forks uniting to form the Colorado. It rises immediately opposite the head of the Arkansas, and is about sixty-four miles in length. At its head it is formed by two main branches, one having its source in the Park range, and the other rising in the Sawatch range, which terminates in the Mountain of the Holy Cross. The Sawatch range, on the western side of the valley of the Arkansas River, forms the continental divide. North ot the Holy Cross the range falls off, the water-shed or divide crossing to the eastward at Tennessee Pass, between the heads of Kagle River and the Arkansas. Eagle River flows around the northern end of the Sawatch range. Its general course, at first, is a little west of north. Ten miles north of the Holy Cross it bends more to the westward, and the general course for nearly fourteen miles is north 64° west. Itthen turns abruptly and flows south 78° west, which course it holds quite uniformly for about twenty miles, to its mouth. ; The greater part of its drainage is from the south. The entire area drained by the southern branches is a little over five hundred square © miles. The opposite side of the river was in Mr. Marvine’s district, and will no doubt be fully-treated of in his report. The river is a very rapid stream throughout its entire length. The average fall is 67.2 feet per mile. From Tennessee Pass to the mouth of Roche-Moutonnée Creek, the rate is 150 feet, and from here to the head of the second cafion 49.4 feet, while from the latter place to the mouth it is 32.4 feet. The upper part of Eagle River was partially described in the last annual repoft (1873), our division having followed it as far as Roche- Moutonnée Creek, for the purpose of ascending the Mountain of the Holy Cross. In order that this report may be complete I will have to repeat a portion of the notes on my work of the previous year. Fora distance of about three miles from: Tennessee Pass the river is ina caiion-like valley, the hills on either side being comparatively low and rounded. The rocks are granitic, with occasional dikes of volcanic ma- terial. From this cafion the stream emerges into a broad meadow-like valley of about four miles in length, in which it is joined by the branch rising in the Park range near Quandary peak. The valley is three miles in width, the hills on either side of granitic tock being capped with sedimentary formations, which will be referred to in more detail in another part of the report. Leaving this valley, the river flows immediately into a cation with steep sides, the trail leav- ing and crossing to the western branch. A line of outcrop of quartz- ites crosses the river and follows the summit of the ridge between the two branches. These beds are, in all probability, primordial. Car- boniferous beds outcrop on the eastern side of the eastern branch, but 1 defer their description for the present. 79 SO - GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The western branch is in reality the continuation of the main river, being twelve miles long. It rises in the Sawatch range, and drains the country for six miles south of the Mountain of the Holy Cross. Its course at first is north 40° east, but in the lower two miles it flows almost at right angles to this, being parallel to the eastern branch. On the western side of the stream the hills are gneissic, the sedimentary cap- ping have been removed by erosion. All the streams joining the river -above the mouth of the Piney on the south and west present abundant evidence of intense glacial action. They are parallel to each other, the general course being north 40° east. The glaciation was described in the report for 1873, and I, therefore, simply refer to it here. Before uniting with the western branch, the eastern fork is joined by a branch of considerable size having its source in the Park range, opposite Ten-Mile Creek, one of the tributaries of Blue River. The geology about the head of this stream has never as yet been fully inves- tigated, but I am inclined to think that all the formations, from the Carboniferous to the Red Beds, inclusive, will be found along its course. The Cretaceous beds would scarcely appear until we reach a point farther north, near Mount Powell. As I mentioned in last year’s re- port.* I think it probable that a fault extends along the western edge of the Park range, west of Blue River. After the union of the two forks, Eagle River enters a deep and inac- eessible cation of about four miles in length, cut in dark-colored gneissic rocks, from which it emerges just above the mouth of Roche-Moutonnée Creek. The trail keeps high (800 to 1,000 feet) above the level of the river, on the hills on the eastern side, near the edge of the sedimentary formations, which are exposed on both sides of the cafion. On the western side there are only patches of quartzite, remnants of the Pots- dam group. On the eastern side there are other beds, probably of Silurian age, upon which rest Carboniferous layers, and possibly the Devonian, although it seems to be altogether wanting, there being no positive evi- dence of its existence here. These beds all dip about 10° to 20° to the northeast, the inclination gradually changing more to the north as we follow the river. In the bluffs on the right-hand side of the river, oppo- site the mouth of Roche-Moutonnée Creek, formations from those of: Pri- mordial age to the Permian, or Permo-Carboniferous, are exposed. This, of course, includes the Devonian doubtfully, for that, formation has not, as yet, been positively identified in Colorado. Just above the mouth of the creek gneiss is seen on the edge of the river, but as we go down, higher and higher sedimentary beds gradually form the base of the bluffs, and below the Piney the line of outcrop of the Carboniferous crosses, and still farther down even the Cretaceous shows on both sides, the strike curving around the end of the range and continuing along - the western side to the Elk Mountains, in our last year’s district. On the west side of the river, as far as the Piney, there are long spurs, or ridges, sloping gently at an angle of about 10°, toward the river. These ridges are capped with quartzite, which 1 have considered to be the equivalent of the Potsdam group. These quartzites terminate within a short distance of the center of the range. ‘Erosion has re- moved the beds formerly resting upon them, their hardness preserving them. They are shown in Section B, Plate I. The creeks, separating these ridges, have their origin in beautiful meadow-like parks, nestling immediately below the peaks in the range, from whose snow banks they derive their supply of water; thence they flow with a comparatively uniform descent to within a short distance of *Seventh Annual Report, 1873, page 242. po, BAA ZA VALE ——— De Z a a Ga eT | SUR YL W UCM RS you : oe 9 ‘Tord hi ee cng PEALE] GEOLOGY—EAGLE RIVER. 81 Eagle, when they descend rapidly to its level. The erosion along the main stream has been much greater for several reasons. In the first place the beds have a dip from the maf range, leaving, perhaps, a sort of trough between the Sawatch range and the Park range. This de- ermined the course of the river, which we accordingly find curving around the range as the sedimentary formations do. These beds are also in a great measure made up of sandstones that are comparatively soft, and yielded readily to the action of water. The river, therefore, is in a monoclinal rift for a considerable portion of its course. In thecanon, above the mouth of Roche-Moutonnée Creek, the streams reach the river by falls and cascades. The slopes are heavily timbered with dense pine forests, and along the streams are groves of cottonwood, (Populus tremuloides.) In the cation are huge bowlders, which, mingled with the dead and fallen timber where the forest has been swept by fires, cause great difficulty in traveling. At the mouth of the Piney, a stream coming in from the east, the river again enters a cailon. It is something over a mile in length. At the head of the cation is a high bluff on the right side, while the op- posite bank is broken down, allowing the passage of the trail over the hill, not very far above the level of the water. : On the south side, on the top of the quartzite, (Potsdam ?) are lime- stones, and, a short distance below, the Carboniferous sandstones cross the river, the angle of inclination being about 25°, a little more to the northward than in the bluffs opposite Roche-Moutonnée Creek. Below the canon the Eagle enters a broad valley, extending for ten mniles, to the head of another cation. This valley will probably average a mile in width, and is filled with the debris washed from the hills on either side. It is terraced and covered with a growth of sage-brush, (Artemisia.) Bordering the river is a narrow belt of alluvium which widens in the lower part of the valley around two small lake-expan- sions of the stream. There are beautiful meadows around the lakes. The lower lake is about a mile long and an eighth of a mile wide, whils the upper one is much smaller, being only a little over a half a mile in length. ; Here we found a party of men camped. They were prospecting and fishing. Eagle River abounds in delicious trout of a large size, some that we measured being sixteen inches in length. Their plan was to take the fish every week to Oro City, on the Arkansas River, and sell them. They also claimed to have found gold in some of the streams coming from the Sawatch range. The gold, if present, is probably de- rived from the granitic and gneissic rocks that prevail near the heads of the creeks. The course of the Eagle through the valley we have just described is north 78° west. On the southwest side, the long sloping spurs that we noticed above the Piney still continue. Near the river they are lower, and, for the most part, grassed over, only an occasional outcrop of lime. stone or sandstone appearing. On the opposite side are outerops of red sandstone (Triassic?). I have referred to the cation which bounds the lower end of the valley. It is somewhat curious. On entering it the river changes its course and flows north 45° west, which direction it keeps for four miles. It then turns abruptly and flows south 72° west. This portion of its course in the cafion is three miles in length. On the south side is a semicircular ridge, extending from the head of the cafion to its foot. It reminds one of a bow, while the river, with its bend, is the cord ready drawn to discharge the arrow. We made two stations on 6H J 82 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY: OF THE TERRITORIES. this ridge, which is 1,500 to 2,000 feet above the river. Its rim is made of the sandstone of No. 1 Cretaceous (Dakota group), which crosses the river at the head of the caiien, almost at right angles to its course, the dip being in the direction of the stream. On the north side there is a curious spoon-like curve in the strata, shown in Plate II, which will be fully explained in Mr. Marvine’s report, as it is in his district. Be- neath the Cretaceous sandstone, in place, are the Jurassic shales and limestones, followed by the Red Beds, (Triassic?) underneath which is a series of gypsiferous beds, exposed on both sides of the river. These will all be referred to again when [ come to speak of the various for- mations separately. The river, on leaving the cation, keeps the course it has there until it reaches the Grand. The valley is about twelve miles long, extending to within five or six miles of the Grand. It is wide and bordered with low hiils of gypsiferous shales, covered with a growth of cedar ( Juniperus occidentalis). Beyond these hills are higher ones, not reaching above timber-line, the basis being red sandstones. The gypsum hills are econ- spicuous from their white color and their softness, which causes them to yield readily to eroding influences. They are therefore much cut up by gullies which forthe greater portion of the year are dry, but during storms are the beds of torrents washing down the soft clay. Hach creek extending into them, fans out into a great number of small gullies. The shales and sandstones of which they are formed belong to the same hori- zon, viz, Oarboniferous or Permo-Carboniferous, as do those mentioned as occurring below the Red Beds above the cafion. It seemsas though the Hagle, instead of entering the canon and cutting its way across the hard sandstone of the Dakota group, should have worn its channel through these softer beds that lie to the southward of. its present course. It might perhaps have done this, but that an island of eruptive rock (basalt), of great hardness, caps the hills south of the cafion (see map A), forming a barrier that in all probability determined its deflection to the northward. Fig. 1, Plate II, represents a section across this area from the Kagle to creek g. There are two large creeks flowing into the Eagle from the south in this lower valley. ' The first or eastern one I will designate as creek g, and the other ascreek h. They both have their origin in a broad-topped ridge of red sandstone (Triassic ?) which forms the divide or water-shed between Frying-Pan Oreek, a tributary of Roaring Fork, and the waters of the Eagle. In 1873 we made a station (No. 82), on this ridge, and from it I made asection,* showing the structure of the country as it ap- peared to be looking northward. I said, in the report,} that there seemed to be a series of faults and that the section might have to be modified when the region should have been more closely studied. I found this year that the beds I then thought to be Cretaceous, judg- ing from the color as seen from the station on looking north, are really the gypsiferous beds that lie beneath the red sandstones. Instead of a . number of faults, therefore, as shown in the illustration (Fig. 3, plate 19, Report for 1873), there is simply an exposure of the gypsum-beds in both the places marked “ Cretaceous,” at the head of creek h and in the valley of Hagle River. As I mentioned in my notes of last year, the red sandstones on station 82 dip a few degrees west of north, inclining at a comparatively small angle, which increases as we go northward. On station 8, the dip is in the same direction, as also on station 9. As * Plate 19, Fig. 3, 7th Annual Report, 1873. t Page 266, 7th Annual Report, 1873. 4 sete Beat es te Plate H. ea Z SIO AG Bi EK IEE Ze X Fy A —_ Le a nie aaa Cret. Nos bd Leémestones of Nos. 2c7rd SB C Volcan Ridge ad Press to Grand PR. e Veriegeted Jurus. Siurtes tf Yellow Seutstones 99 Red Beis h Gypsiferous Beds. Fold on Eagle River % ies Sh rer ptr LA MW rae y in sg G u0res % FUT ; 9 LPAI bog ; “| says Quomas bry L _ = = == 7 = —_ = . 3 w) eS —~— 55 B gp P a= ; ZB Ags SQ ee Cy i iS ee aa Ze Jef Soe = S \ GES y OUR. CF “WE es" Id LT ep) GEOLOGY-——EAGLE RIVER. 83 - the creeks. g and h flow towards the Eagle they cut deeper and deeper, until the gypsiferous beds are exposed. The course of the streams is, in general, north 32° west, being entirely different from that of Roche- Moutonnée Creek and its parallel streams. The latter flow north 40° east. The branches between the mouth of the Piney and the head of the cation above creek f have a direction almost due north. What the exact rela- tion is between the beds on both sides of the Hagle I cannot say. In the shales forming the central masses there is a great variety in the dips, owing probably to a number of minor folds, to elucidate which would have required more time than I had at my disposal. On the north side of the river in, Mr. Marvine’s district, the red sand- stones overlying the Gypsiferous series dip a little east of north at an angle of from 6° to 8°. On the south side, : as we have already seen, the dip is west of north. Between the two, therefore, there is either a line of faulting or fold- ing; I incline to believe the latter. I could find nothing that indicated the existence of a fault. There may have been more than one fold, all, however, very gentle in character. The axis of a synclinal fold, I think, runs along the edge of the hills on the south side, having a direction about north 70° west. The southern half of the fold is all that is left, the other side having been removed by erosion. There was probably another fold between this and the river. Between creek g and the canon there is a patch of Cretaceous rocks forming a semi-quaquaversal. This was, I think, the head of the synclinal fold referred to above. The cause of the basin may have been the crossing of the first fold by a sec- ' ond. In the hill south of Kagle River, and between it and creek h, there is a gentle synclinal fold, the axis of which is parallel to the one first de- scribed. In the valley above, with the exception of some irregular dips in the gypsiferous beds, it is obliterated. Just beyond this fold is the anticlinal fold, the axis of which is occupied by the river. This may be a prolongation of the fold between Eagle River and creek g, where we have the volcanic rock capping the hills. The folds seem to radiate from a point near here and to become broader and shallower as we go down stream. I could not determine whether the ends of the strata were broken or not beneath the volcanic material. I will refer to this again in a subsequent portion of the report. Below the mouth of creek h, the Eagle is in a caiion-like valley which continues to the Grand. As I have already said, this valley - is the axis of an anticlinal fold, the rocks on both sides dipping away from the river, the red sandstones (Triassic) being on top, and pink gypsiferous sandstones below. In the gypsiferous hills or the north side of the river, Mr. Marvine noticed indications of an anticlinal fold that he thinks may be the prolongation of the one in the cafion. I am inclined to think, however, that it was merely a local fold in those beds, and that the river above the caiion still keeps ~ in the same axis, although erosion has removed so much material that it is difficult to decide. As I have already mentioned, there is a gentle synclinal fold occupying the hill on south side of the river. It is on the summit, and its axis is parallel to the course of the river. This fold is represented at E in section C, Plate III, which is made on the lineG, C, E, F, of map A. Section D is a section across the valley of the Eagle from’ Station No. 9, the Red Beds capping the station resting on the gyp- siferous beds. Bordering theriver on the north side, a short distance above its mouth, is an irregular layer of eruptive rock, probably basalt, which forms a 84. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. low bluff-like wall, ten to twenty feet above the level of the water. It seems to have come down the ravines in the hills bordering the valley, and to have spread out like the slag from a furnace. The river seems to have stopped its progress, for no trace of the rock could be found on the south side. It seems to have forced the river to the southern side of the valley, and the force of the water has scooped out the hills, leav- ing bluffs on that side in which the strata forming the hills are beauti- fully shown. » Shewing lines of Sections . AB = line of Sectim A Cpa Z 5 lata acted 4 nee areata bic smn La ovina emgatnting Whe a oe > saw - arnabon a 9p ad =e met alg ty ac ant oneabp teivtrnlamenvted ae en a = ecrenenie sy A eR CHAPTER IL SURFACE GEOLOGY—GRAND RIVER AND ITS TRIBUTARIES. Grand River rises in Grand Lake, in the northeast corner of Middle Park, west of Long’s Peak, and derives its supply of water near its head from the Colorado or Front Range, the divide between Middle and North Parks and the Park range. It unites with the Green River to form the Colorado, and has a total length of about three hundred and fifty miles, of which one hundredand fifteen miles is in our district. It rises farther eastward than any other water in Colorado which flows into the Pacific. On some maps the name Blue River is given to it, while the name Grand is applied to the Gunnison and to the Grand proper below the mouth of the Gunnison. Gunnison* calls it Nah-un-kah-reaor Blue River, and the Gunnison henamesthe Grand. Blue River, in reality, isin Mid- dle Park and a branch of the Grand. The reasons for using the name Grand in preference to’Blue are briefly as follows: It is really the main stream, being, at the junction of the Gunnison, twice the size of the latter, andif the name is given to the lower portion it should also be given to the largest stream above. Again, it is so known all through Colorado and at its head in Middle Park, and will probably, therefore, always hold good, while the name Blue is restricted to the branch rising in the divide between the Middie Park and the South Park, and flowing northward along the eastern side of the Park range. In Middle Park Grand River is from forty to fifty miles in length, and has been fully described by Mr. Marvine in his report for 1873, and from the Park range to the mouth of Eagle River, a distance of about forty-five miles in a straight line, it lies within his district for 1874, and will no doubt be fully reported on by him. From the mouth of the Eagle to the mouth of the Gunnison, it formed the boundary between the northern and middle districts, and we have therefore to treat bere only of the general features and geology of its southern drainage in this part of its course. There are three large branches which I will take up in their order, commencing at the mouth of the Eagle. On glancing at the map we notice that there are two general courses for the streams, the Grand flowing south of west and turning more and more to the southward as we go west, until at one point it flows almost due south, afterward turning to the west before reaching the mouth of the Gunnison. The courses of the main branches, especially of the first two, are west of north. The third holds the same general course at first, but are afterward modified by circumstances that will be explained ‘arther on. *Pacific Railroad Report, vol. ii. 85 86 | GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The area drained by these branches includes about 1,300 square mniles. The country included is generally plateau-like in character. This is more apparent to the westward, and in the divide between the Grand River and the North Fork of the Gunnison. The general elevation of the plateau is from 9,000 feet to 11,000 feet. In the eastern portion, from the Eagle River to a short distance west of Roaring Fork, are rolling hills covered with scrub-oak (Quercus alba), eotton-woods (Populus tremuloides), and stunted cedars (Juniperus occi- dentalis). The latter was most abundant on the lower slopes, and seemed to thrive best on soil derived trom the breaking down of the shales in the upper part of the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations. The rocks throughout this region were mostly of Tertiary age, capped in places by basalt. The general geology, however, will be dwelt on as we proceed. The course of the Grand, from the mouth of the Eagle to the mouth of Roaring Fork,is south 60° west. Most of this distance, sixteen miles in an air-line, the river is in cation, the head of which is a little over three miles below the Hagle. It is probably impassable to travel, the sides ' being very steep. There is no Indian trail following the course of the river. Mr. Marvine’s party kept on the hills some distance back from the edge on the northern side, and we followed an Indian trail across the hills to a stream which joins the Grand at the head of the cafion. This trail seemed to be much used and leads across to Roaring Fork, which it strikes:above the mouth of Rock Creek, a branch rising in the Elk Mountains. The valley above the cafion is about three and a half miles in length, and although wider than the valley of the Eagle just above its mouth, is still comparatively narrow. On the north side are limestone slopes, and on the south low, rounded hills of the gypsiferous beds. At the head of the canon and forming the gateway, as it were, are beds of mas- sive limestone, probably of Carboniferous age. They dip to the north- east, inclining about 20°. Farther along in the cafion there may be out- crops of older beds, which can be determined only by following the bluffs close to the river. The hills on the south side of the cafon are capped with a black vesicular basalt, which rests immediately on the Triassic red sandstones. The dip of these beds I was unable to deter- mine, but they are probably conformable to the layers beneath. The creek up which the trail led, after leaving the Grand, joins the river by cutting a small cafion through limestones similar to those at the head of the cation of the Grand. These beds are somewhat mas- “sive, and above them are blue limestones with interlaminated sand- stones passing into gray and white sandstones, with yellow and black shaly beds above. These are beneath the pink gypsiferous beds out- cropping farther up and corresponding with those on Hagle River. Still farther up stream the Red Beds appear, the line of outcrop crossing the creek near its head. Leaving this creek, we crossed to the waters of Roaring Fork, the first stream reached being a branch joining it about two miles below the mouth of Rock Creek. The country between the Grand and Roaring Fork here is a rolling plateau covered mostly with a growth of scrub- oak. The plateau is capped with a black vesicular basalt, which in places is worn away, exposing the red sandstone beneath. The head of the creek is in canon in which the Cretaceous beds are shown, dipping to the southwest. Station No. 11 was almost on the line be- tween the top of the Red Beds and the overlying stata. Farther down PEALE.] GEOLOGY—ROARING FORK. Ore the creek there are exposures of Cretaceous beds in patches, whose re- lations I was unable to determine definitely. Between the head of the creek and Frying-Pan Creek is a broad- topped hill or mesa, capped with black vesicular basalt. I referred to this mesa last year,* and then supposed the capping to be trachytic. The beds beneath it, outcropping on the south and southeast sides, are almost horizontal, the sandstone of the Dakota group (Cretaceous No. 1) appearing on top, the Jurassic beds and Triassic sandstones lying be- neath in their order. A short distance farther north, on Frying-Pan Creek, the dip of the red sandstones, which outcrop in massive beds, is a little east of north at a very slight angle, 5° to 10°. As we have already seen, the Cretaceous formations on station 11 dip southwest. ee head of ‘the creek that we are describing, probably has its origin in a synclinal depression, which deepens to the northwest in going down the creek, and gradually dies out beyond its head on the broad-topped hiils north of Frying-Pan. ‘The folds in this region are generally very gentle, but their axes run in almost every direction. ‘There is so much eruptive materia] on top of the sedimentary beds that it is difficult to trace the connections between the different outcrops. Mr. Marvine thinks there is a fault running beneath the plateau, between the Grand and Roaring Fork. Seattered along the course of the creek, and its brancbes rising in the plateau, are numerous little meadows. The lower seven miles of its course the creek is in cafion, which deepens rapidly as we go down. Therocks at the head are basaltic, capping the bluffs oneither side. They are present on the hills, or rather plateau, throughout the length of the canton. Atone point [ think Cretaceous shows, although I cannot be certain, as I did not have time to visit the outcrop. Farther down, the Red Beds show, and beneath them, at the mouth of the creek, there is a considerable thickness of the gypsiferous series. I will take up next the valley of Roaring Fork. The upper portion of the valley was described in last year’s report, so that this year we have to do only with the lower part of its course, that below the mouth of Frying-Pan Creek. There is one point, however, that I wish to refer to here. When speakingt{ of the small butte between Maroon Creek and Roaring Fork, | was at a loss to account for the inversion of the beds exposed in the butte of which I gave a section. This year the Elk Mountain region was studied in more detail and a great many obscure points were explained. In the case mentioned above, Mr. Holmes found a line of faulting extending along the upper side of Roaring Fork which explained the inversion of. the str ata. Below the mouth of Frying-Pan Oreek on the right-hand side are low, rolling hills, the basis of which. seems to be the Upper Cretaceous forma- tion. On the opposite side, however, there are outcrops of red sand- stones beneath in the bluffs. The Cretaceous strata extend to the gran- ite of Sopris peak, seeming to rest immediately upon it, there being nothing showing between until we get on the otber faces of the moun- tain. The geology about the southern part of the peak was referred to last year. J urassic, Triassic, and Carboniferous layers outcrop on Rock Creek, but this region will be fully described in other parts of the re- port, so I merely mention it here and to return Roaring Fork. The course of the latter stream from the mouth of Frying-Pan to the mouth of Rock Creek, a distance of eleven or twelve miles, is north 70° west, the rate of fall being about fifty feet to the mile. The valley above *Page 265, report of 1873. {Page 263, Report 1873. 88 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the mouth of Rock Creek is about two miles in width, and beautifully terraced. The river splits into numerous branches, inclosing islets on which are groves of cottonwoods. The terrace blutfis on the north side are about one hundred feet in height. Rock Creek enters the valley, emerging from the Elk Mountains, about three miles above its mouth. After the junction of the two streams, Rock Creek turns and flows north 25° west. Just before it turns, it flows by bluffs of red sandstone, out- cropping on the north side. They dip 10° to 20° a few degrees east of north. A short distance back of the river they are capped with basalt, and covered with a growth of low cedars. The hills continue 6n the north or northeast side of the river until we reach the Grand. ‘There is some slight folding at right angles to the river, allowing the gypsiferous beds to outcrop as we go down. It is only a minor fold, for Roaring Fork occupies the axis of the main fold, which is an anticlinal. On the opposite side of the river there are well-marked hog-backs, in which the strike is parallel to the course of the river, as is shown also in the parallel course of the streams draining them. A section through these — hog-backs and across Roaring Fork is shown in section F, Plate IV. In tbe hills, farther back, there is basalt. on the summits. The hog-backs extend to within about four miles of the Grand, when the basaltic capping comes so near the river as to preserve the cdge of the hills and prevent the underlying beds from being eroded. The line of outcrop also curves slightly to the -westward, under the capping, so that the Cretaceous No. 1, which forms the best defined hog back, is considerably farther from Roaring Fork, near the Grand, than it is near Rock Creek. At this point, then, the Red Beds are seen on top, and beneath a considerable thickness of the gypsiferous strata outcrops on both sides of the river. Those’on the south side have weathered into curious pinnacle and tower like forms of pink, yel- low, gray, and creamy colors. The valley of Roaring Fork is here comparatively narrow. The river and local drift is terraced, the terraces in the lower part of the valley being covered with bowld. ers of black basalt, from the hills back of the hog-backs. About three miles and a half above the mouth, Roaring Fork is joined by the creek draining the hog-backs, which here cuts across them and flows along the upper edge of a terrace that is 200 feet above the level of the river. The course of the river here is almost due north until it joins the Grand, just as the latter emerges from the cafion that commences below the mouth of the Hagle. The exit is through a narrow gorge in the lime- stones. These limestones continue along the upper side of the river, dipping generally toward the south, at an angle of 20° to 30°. The inclination is more abrupt near the river, decreasing as we go back, un- til, on the summit of the hills, the beds are almost horizontal. On the - south side the Red Beds outcrop, forming bluffs that at some points are five hundred feet in height, rising in sheer precipices. There are proba- bly gypsiferous beds beneath, but they are concealed by the local débris. A short distance back the edge of the basaltic mass capping the hills appears. Its outlines are somewhat difficult to trace in places, as it is covered with a growth of scrub.oak, and scattered groves of cotton- woods. The line of outcrop of the Dakota group appears from beneath the basaltic area, and keeps along the lower side of the river, the strike being north 75° ‘west. The beds form a series of hog-backs, the contin- uation of those on Roaring Fork. They extend along the Grand on the lower side for eight miles, when they cross and stretch away, to the north- west, in anisolated range which gradually dies out in a plateau. A sec- tion ACTOSS these hog- backs west of station 17 is shown in Fig. 2, Plate Plate IV. La Station 13 ) \; \ \ 47) Wwe = gp ¢ Lei TB, MH oh; Up cS Yh, Ui b i Yp Lig Daa y Li fy eS Di Ma { Roaring Fork: tig h. Section F. PEALE.] GEOLOGY——GRAND RIVER. 89 IV. The valley of the Grand below the mouth of Roaring Fork is only about two miles long, the river again entering a canon. At the head of this cafion the Red Beds cross, and are shown on both sides. Theriver gradually bends and follows the strike, in a monoclinal, rift for six miles, . when it turns again and cuts abruptiy across almost at right angles to the strike, flowing through a valley cut in the soft shaly beds that lie just above the Dakota group. This valley is only a few miles in length, and in it the river is joined by quite a large stream from the north, which: flows along the eastern base of the Cretaceous range, which I have described as ending i in the plateau to the northwest. From this valley the river cuts through the strata at right angles to the strike, and comes out into a broad valley, through which it flows for fifteen or twenty miles, and enters another cafion, or rather cafion-like valley, cut in a plateau in which the beds are almost, if not quite, horizontal. This cafon is more or less persist- ent until the river enters the valley in which it is joined by the Gun- nison. The general course of the river for about nineteen or twenty miles is south 70°-75° west. At the head of the valley the blufis are alinost vertical, and, indeed, in some places, the cliffs, as seen in certain lights, appear ‘to overhang. At the point where the course changes to the southward, the valley is wider, and the Grand splits, forming islands in the midst of the river. This is northwest of station 50. The plateau here, between the Grand and Plateau Creeks, is narrow, and has in reality degenerated into a ridge from which the basaltic capping has been removed. Returning to the valley above the cafion, we see that it is from fifteen to twenty miles in length, and that the drainage on the south is prinei- pally‘through two streams, one in the eastern portion and the other (North Mam Creek, see map KE) on the western side. They rise in the platean forming the divide between them and the head of the North Fork of the Gunnison. The eastern branch is formed by two streams, whose courses are almost parallel. Between the Kast Fork and Roaring Fork there is a smaller creek (¢ creek, Grand River), which rises in a mass of rounded hills, which I referred to when speaking of the hog- backs on the west side of Roaring Fork. Between this creek and the plateau south of the cation there are several folds, the axes of which are parallel, each being northwest and southeast. The rocks underlying the valley are all of Cretaceous age, capped irregularly in places with basalt, especially on the divide. Here the strata are almost horizontal, inclining, if at all, only a few degrees toward the west in the eastern portion. The line of hog-backs before referred to, sxieodin g along the lower side of the Grand from station Ne. 16, through station 18, and cross- ing the river, forms the side of a synclinal fold, the axis of which is, partially at least, occupied by a creek (c, Grand River). The dip of the strata is southwest, inclining at an angle ofabout 15°; this increases as we go toward the Grand, being about 60° there. Station 20 is on the opposite side of the fold, the dip of the sandstones there being northeast at an angle of 15° to 20°. From station No. 19 to 22 there is a mesa coveréd with basaltic bowlders. I am inclined to think also that there is a capping of the same material. The bowlders are derived from the hills near the divide. The mesa is about a mile wide and slopes gently toward the Grand. It is about 400 feet above the valley of the creek at the forks below station No. 19. At station tion No. 22 it is 800 feet high. Between the forks of the large creek east of North Mam Creek, the 90 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. hills are capped with basalt. The elevation of station 24 is 10,642 feet, and station 25, 9,031 feet. There is but little timber here, the summits being grassy and park-like. In some few places there are pines, but _cottonwoods are more abundant. In the hills east of station 24, and on the lower slope, there is scrub-oak (Quercus alba) in abundance. The small creeks rising in the Cretaceous shales we generally found strongly impregnated with alkali. The western branch of the creek referred to above, heads in beautiful meadows. Its course here is nearly due west. After flowing in this direction for five miles it turns and flows to the northwest, gradually crossing to the western side of a low, broad anticlinal. The strata on the east incline 5° to the northeast, and on the opposite side from 5° to 10° in the opposite direction. Beyond, the beds probably become horizontal, as seen in the high white cliffs east of station No. 48, on the edge of the plateau. In looking down upon this valley from the hills bordering it, it ap- pears more open than it really is, for we find that it has numerous hills or buttes in which the sandstones. outcrop. They are gray, chocolate- colored, and greenish. We were not able to visit them, but noted them from the stations on the east side and from the plateau. We were not on the Grand River in this valley nor on North Mam Creek, which joins it above the canon. North Mam Creek flows along the eastern edge of the plateau from which some of its branches are de- rived. Its general course is north 15° east. The branches of the Grand from the south in the cafion valley north of the plateau are all small and unimportant, simply draining the pla- teau. The next branch of importance is Plateau Creek flowing into the Grand 50 or 60 miles below the head of the canon. It is a stream of con- siderable size, deriving its water principally from the mesa divide on the south, the branches heading in the plateau of station 48, carrying water only in the spring and early summer. There are two principal streams uniting to form the creek, one (f creek, map E), having its sources opposite those of the northern branches of the North Fork of the Gunnison, and the other (g creek, map I), rising more to the north and eastward, opposite the head of North Mam Creek. The branch first mentioned is the largest. Its course is generally north. A few miles above its mouth, however, it turns abruptly and flows west- ward, parallel to the other branch, leaving a flat-topped terrace between. It rises on the divide, in beautiful park-like meadows, among low hills whosérounded outlines are covered with groves of quaking aspens whose foliage in the fall of the year is of a rich golden hue, contrasting boldly ~ with the dark green of the pines found on the higher points. These groves abound in game, and are favorite hunting-grounds of the Indians. We found their trails leading in almost every direction. Near the head of the creek are outcrops of soft shaly beds covered in some places with basalt which forms rough points reaching above the general level. In the valleys the soil is made of the débris from the shales mingled with pebbles from the erosion of the basaltic layer which once formed a capping to the plateau. Scattered over it are chips of chalcedony and agate. The sedimentary beds are nearly horizontal. As we go down the valley we find the creek cutting deeper and deeper into the soft strata, leaving high terraces between the branches. Between camp 44 and camp 45 the river falls 2,583 feet, which is about 200 feet per mule. In the lower part of the valley there are outcrops of soft gray sand- stones. The terraces are partially covered with scrub-oak, which make traveling somewhat difficult. The other branch has a much more open POY (3 Pte at ve ve te nine ee) TWDIVO) YF U0 LNT SS SSS PEALE.) GEOLOGY—GRAND RIVER—PLATEAU CREEK. on valley. It rises among low hills, and has a much more gradual fall to its mouth. It is about 24 miles in length, and forms a portion of the boundary-line of the plateau of station 48. Between the parallel por- tions of the two streams jast described there is a terrace, the height of which is about 80 feet, at the bend of the first branch. It is about a mile wide here and slopes to the forks, where it terminates in a point, the entire length of the bench being about seven miles. It is covered with good bunch-grass, and has evidently been used by the Indians as a grazing-ground for cattle. The plateau between this creek and the Grand River is approximately triangular in shape, the base being on the éastern side. Here it is 15 miles in width. To the west it gradually terminates in a ridge, which extends between the two streams. Its length is 15 miles, and its mean elevation, where the general level is best preserved, is about 10,200 feet. It was once, doubtless, continuous with the mesa or plateau which sti]l exists to the southward. Erosion has isolated it. The covering of basalt which once covered it has been partially removed. The remnants left reach from 200 to 250 feet above the general level, forming monument-like points that are visible from a great distance. Station 48 was located on one of these points, a conical mass 248 feet high. The eastern edge of the plateau, as I have already men- tioned, has steep bluffs, overlooking a broad valley. On the north side, also, are bluffs, which as we go down the Grand become less steep, a num- ber of small streams cutting them into small hills. Toward the eastern side the beds are nearly horizontal, but as we go west we find that there is a slight dip to the east, or perhaps a little north of east. The south- ern side of the plateau, near station 48, has a number of creeks draining it, the courses of which are nearly parallel, flowing south. Between them are sharp ridges, at the base of which gray and pinkish sandstones outcrop. On top are light clayey beds and interlaminated hardened shales, weathering a white color, thus giving the bluffs a unique appear- ance, aS seen from a distance. Underneath the basalt, the beds are concealed even on the edges of the plateau. As we go down the creek the valley widens on both sides.. On the south are drift-covered ter- races sloping from the divide. On the north side are low bluifs, close to the river,in which pink and yellowish strata outcrop. These beds are cut into terraces, beyond which are bluffs of variegated sandstones, passing above into light-colored shales. On the latter, station 50 is located. From: station 50 to the Grand the descent is at first rather abrupt. Then there is a gradual slope broken up by the drainage into low buttes. The Grand has a broad bottom, through which it flows sluggishly. South of the station the country is very nearly the same. There are magnificent exposures of the strata, which are inclined but shghtly. On the north side of Plateau Creek are bluffs of sandstone, through which the stream cuts rapidly to soft shales, which weather in the most pecu- liar manner, as shown in one of the illustrations, Plate V. Above the black argillaceous columns are yellow sandstones, and the débris from them has fallen down, capping the summits of the pillars. Below, still lower beds are shown, until a belt of red sandstone is seen opposite Mesa(a)Creek. It here enters a cafion, in which it keeps until it joins the Grand. Almost ail the creeksin this region cut profound cafions ; even the smallest rivulets cut gullies from eight to twenty feet deep. The terraces are covered with basaltic bowlders, and are almost des- titute of vegetation. Good grass, however, is found in the alluvial bot- toms bordering the creek. Scrub-oak and stunted cedars are found on the hills. The cafion on’ Plateau Creek is eight miles long. Below its mouth, 92 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the Grand and its branches cut fearful-looking chasms in the soft rocks. Looking down upon them it is hard to trace the courses of the streams, as it appears to be an inextricable maze of gorges. There is great variety in the colors; reds, greens, grays, yellows, mingle with “chocolate- browns, and white, in parailel lines, which repeat themselves in the different layers. At the head of the cation of Plateau Creek the Indian trail we had been following leaves the creek, goes up Mesa Creek, and skirting the edge of the mesa, leads down into the valley of the Gunnison. The course of Grand River below the mouth of Plateau Creek is gen- erally southwest, and sometimes due south. It flows in this direction until it comes out into the broad valley, in which it is joined by the Gunnison. It emerges from the cafion by cut- ting its way across a line of hog-backs, almost at right angles to the strike of the strata, the beds dipping about northeast at an angle of 109° to 15°. Plate VI represents the bluff on the north side of the river, as it comes from the cafon into the broad valley. The numbers in the following section correspond with those in the illustration. BASE. 1. Black and yellow shaly beds. 2. Yellow sandstone. 3. Yellow shaly beds. 4, Sandstones. 5. Shales. 6 . Sandstone with pinkish hue. This section was made from the opposite side of the Groat. and could not, therefore, be made in greater detail. The beds were measured by angles taken with the gradienter. The height of the bluff as thus deter- mined is 1,890 feet. On the south side of the river the inclination of the beds causes them to disappear, while higher ones show beneath the basalt of the mesa. The slopes, reaching from the edge of the mesa in terraces, are covered with basaltic bowlders, among which we found numbers of moss-agates (none of good quality, however) and pieces of chalcedony. West of the lineof hog-backs, which extend toward the northwest from the Grand, the valley is about eighteen miles in width, reaching to the northwest as far as could be seen. Near the Grand, before the Gunnison comes in, it is very flat and covered with spots of alkali. On the south side of the Grand, in the angle between it and the Gunnison, are terraces, the first of which is one hundred feet high, and the second nearly two hundred feet. The contrast between the two rivers is quite — marked. The Grand has nearly twice the volume of the Gunnison. and and carries a vast quantity of mud with it. Wherever we reached the Grand throughout the entire season it was muddy. ‘The reason is, that along the river there are many exposures of soft shales and clays. The Gunnison, on the other hand, isa clear stream, and remains so except when there are heavy rains, when it becomes very turbid in the lower portion of its course. The divide between the Grand and Gunnison Rivers has been so often referred to in this chapter that only a few more words are necessary to complete its description. In the Elk Mountains the line of the water- shed is very irregular, the mountains rising in sharp peaks, at the bases of which the streams head in amphitheaters, sharp ridges connecting Plate VI. Bluff ov Grand River near the Mouth of the Cunnisor. PEALE.] GEOLOGY——DIVIDE WEST OF ELK MOUNTAINS. 93 the peaks and separating the various streams. This portion of the divide, however, was in the district of 1873, and we have tordo here with the portion west of the Elk Mountains, where it presents characters en- tirely different, being mostly a plateau, from the fact that the beds un- derlying it are almost horizontal and covered with a flow of basalt. The plateau character is best shown toward the west, where the basaltic capping is for the most part intact. West of Rock Creek, at the head of the North Fork of the Gunnison, the plateau is broken into low rolling hills, of which the general level is very nearly the same. The basaltic capping here is very irregular and difficult to define, as a great portion of it has been removed by ero- sion. The hills and also the beds of the streams are covered with round masses of the rock. At station 45 there is more basalt in place. The streams rising near have their origin in small lakes. All over the plateau these lakelets may be found, and along the creeks are beautiful meadows. The timber on the plateau is pine and quaking aspens (Popu- lus tremuloides). There is good grass in most of the valleys. The western edge of the plateau is somewhat irregular but sharply defined, forming a bluff edge of from two hundred tofour hundred feet in height. It is underlaid with sandstones, as will be shown in the sections given in a Subsequent portion of the report. CEA Pah) Wieie SURFACE GEOLOGY—GUNNISON RIVER AND ITS TRIBUTARIES. Gunnison River is the principal branch of the Grand, on the south side. It rises on the western side of the Sawatch range, opposite the Arkansas River, and on the southern side of the Elk Mountains, oppo- site Roaring Fork. Its total course has a length of about two hundred miles, the average rate of fall per mile being about thirty feet. In Gunnison’s and in Frémont’s reports it is called the Grand. In the West, however, it is now known as the Gunnison River, the name Grand being given to the principal stream, as already mentioned in a previous chapter. The principal branches of the Gunnison on the south are Cochetopa Creek, Lake Creek, Cebolla Creek, and Uncom- pahegre River. Those on the north, in our district of this year, are Ohio Creek, Smith’s Fork, and the North Fork. The entire area drained by all the branches on the north is about twenty-six hundred square miles. From the mouth of Cochetopa Creek, the Gunnison flows a few degrees south of west, to Lake Fork; here it changes and flows west, gradually turning to the northwest until it is opposite station 80, a distance of nearly thirty miles; when it again turns and flows nearly due north to the mouth of the North Fork; where it turns abruptly and flows west to ‘the head of what the Indians call Unaweep Caiion. * Its course thence to its mouth is generally northwest. There are three large cahons and several small ones in the course of the river, which will be described as we reach them in going down the stream. The upper one is in granitic rocks, and was described last year. The drainage of the streams uniting to form the Gunnison near its head flows in two directions, viz, southeast or south-southeast, and southwest. In this part of its course it is within last year’s district, and will be found described in the report for 1873. Our work last year extended as far west as Slate River, and we com- mence this year, therefore, with Ohio Creek, the next stream coming into the Gunnison on the north side. In an air-line, from the head of Ohio Creek to its mouth the distance is twenty-two miles. The actual length, however, is nearer thirty miles. It has its originin a group of isolated peaks that mark the termination of the Elk Mountains to the westward. Its sources are opposite those of Slate River on the north and east, and those of Anthracite Creek, a tributary of the North Fork of the Gunnison, on the northwest. It has two forks which unite below a high sugar-loaf peak of porphyritic trachyte, station 30. The western branches have their origin in a group of mountains made up almost entirely of breccia, which in all probability rests on sandstones of Cretaceous age. The most northern of these streams flows along the southern edge of a short range of sharp peaks, whose slopes are destitute of timber, and which form a serrated edge along the summit. This mass is composed of porphyritic trachyte and forms a portion of the divide between * Pacific Railroad Report, vol. ii. 94 PEA] GEOLOGY—OHIO CREEK—-GUNNISON RIVER. 95 - Ohio Creek and Anthracite Creek. A trail crosses through alow pass from the head of the latter creek and keeps down Obio Creek and then follows up Cochetopa Creek to the Los Pinos agency. This is one of the main Indian lodge-pole trails, connecting Los Pinos with the White River agency. Between East River and Ohio Creek are two mesas, isolated one from the other and underlaid by Cretaceous shales and sandstones. These mesas are composed of trachyte, judging from the débris covering the slopes west of Ohio Creek. The trachyte is probably of the same char- acter as that on the opposite side of East River noted in last year’s re- port,* a light purplish rock. As I have already mentioned, the hills on the west side of Ohio Creek are made up almost entirely of breccia. I will refer to it particularly in a subsequent portion of the report. I think, judging from several outcrops seen on some of the western branches of the creek, that it rests throughout the greater part of its extent upon sandstones. The western branches rise in these hills and cut deeply into the brec- cia, which seems to yield readily to the action of water. It appears to bein layers, ard erosion has worn it intofantastic forms. In places, there are castellated masses from which towers and minarets rise; while in others, huge buttresses stand out prominently against the sky. Station No. i is situated in the midst of this mass of ‘breccia. (See map D). The valley of Ohio Creek is from a mile to two miles in width and has a beautitul grassy bottom, with groves of cottonwoods. The hills on the west are heavily timbered with pines, extending down the ridges between the branches. On the lower slopes near the creek there is sage- brush (Artemisia). : The valley of the Gunnison above the mouth of Ohio Creek is very wide, extending from a short distance below the mouth of Slate River to Cochetopa Creek, a distance of ten or twelve miles. It is from four to seven miles in width. The river-bottom in places seems to be quite fertile, and at one place we found a garden in which potatoes, beans, turnips, cabbage, and lettuce had been successfully raised during the season. The southeast side of the valley, reaching toward Cochetopa Creek, is rather sterile-looking, there being but little soil. It is very level and covered with pebbles derived from the Elk Mountains. There is a sparse growth of grass and low sage-brush. The Gunnison here is a rapid and very clear stream of a hundred or a hundred and fifty feet width. It keeps close to the bluffs of breccia below the mouth of Ohio Creek. This valley is the site of a new town called Gunnison City. There were half a dozen log-cabins, most of them in an unfinished state and without inhabitants. The only persons we found living in the valley were the two men who have charge of the cattle for the Indians of Los Pinos agency. They were at the cattle-camp, a short distance above Cochetopa Creek. Below Cochetopa Creek the valley again expands into a grassy meadow, from which the river enters a cafion. Men from the agency were busy cutting grass in this meadow while we were there. The hay made is for the use of the agency and the cattle-camp. The cattle are allowed to run wild among the hills throughout the year and seem to do well. The country is much better adapted to stock-rais- ing than for agricultural purposes. The elevation of the-cattle-camp is 7,743 feet. The lower valley is about four miles long and two miles wide in its greatest width. On the northern side the breccia forms the boundary, *Page 249, Report 1873. 96 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. trachyte capping it as we go toward the hills. On the south side the | rocks are gneissic, as they also are in the cafon. At the upper end of the valley, on the north side, is an outcrop of soft yellowish gray sand- stone. Farther down the breccia, instead of resting on this sandstone, appears to be directly upon the schists. At station 71, however, between the schists and the breccia there is a belt of sandstone that seems to have been metamorphosed. Above the breccia there is a capping of trachyte. The cafion is only about a mile ‘and a half in length, and in it the river has rather a tortuous course, flowing at first south of west and afterwards north of west. The walls are not very high, never exceeding 3500 feet. Below, the river is in another valley similar to the one above. This, however, is not as large, being only two miles long and a mile wide in the widest portion. It is not so well grassed as the valley above. The schists still compose the hills on the lower side, while on the north there are sandstones, breccia, and trachyte in long mesa-like ridges that extend from the margin of the valley toward the hills in which station 31 is situated. Leaving this valley the river again goes into cafion and keeps so almost all the way to the mouth of the Lake Fork, broken only by small and unimportant valleys. The rocks in which the river-channel lies are schists, and the walls never exceed about one hundred and fifty feet in height. This granitic rock forms a narrow strip, leaving a bench or shelf on both sides of the river, reaching back to the edge of the blufis. On top of the schists, forming the base of the bluff, are the sand- stones that probably belong to the Dakota group. As we proceed down the river we find on top of these, black and yellow shales, above which is the breccia to which I have so frequently referred in this chapter. This, in a great many places, has weathered into sharp pinnacles and towers. It is capped with obsidian and trachyte. A section of thebluffs will be given in another place, when the differ- ent layers will be particularly described. These bluffs are on both sides of the river, and form the edge of the mesas that are so characteristic of this part of the valley of the Gun- nison, extending back from the river on both sides. Below station 71 the top of the mesa is about 500 feet above the river-level, and at station 73 it has increased to 1,230 feet, the general surface really remaining at the same level on both sides, while the river in its progress has cut deeper and deeper, making the bluffs nearly twice as high. This height is still greater farther below, as we will find when we speak of the canon. The streams joining the Gunnison cut deeply into the surface, divid- ing the original mesa into many others. The canons thus formed have almost perpendicular walls. Tbere appeared to be more than one layer of the trachyte, for, from the edge of the mesa a higher outcrop can beseen. I was notable this year to determine definitely therelations between the trachytic flows and the breccia on the mountainous mass around station 31. Another year I hope to explain it. Above the mouth of the Lake Fork, the Gunnison flows through a small open valley covered with grass and sage-brush, in which it is joined by a branch of some size from the north. From this valley the river plunges into the largest caiion in its entire course. Lake Fork is itself in a deep caiion, cut through dark, micaceous schists, and until one comes to the edge ‘ot the gorge, he has no idea of its size or extent. Gunnison’s wagon-trail is obliged to cross it a long way back from the river, and come down the stream on the opposite side. ts a a Plate VI Station 38. fig l. Section G Lig 2. Section H LIALY UOSTUUND MYT) (LETS) PEALE. ] GEOLOGY—GUNNISON CANON—SMITH’S FORK. 97 The country between Lake Fork and the Uncompahgre River is rough and rugged. The streams cut deep cafions to join the Gunnison. Mountain Creek, Blue Creek, and Cebolia Creek are the principal streams draining this region. Blue Oreek, to which Lhave just referred, is placed on Gunnison’s map, as a branch of Cebolla, whereas it is a ‘tributary of the Gunnison. The mesas are found on Mountain Creek, and until we reach Cebolla creek. Here we meet with cretaceous shales, seeming to be horizontal, and resting on granite. The granite in places has trachyte resting on it. I noticed it on the hills east of Cebolla Creek. The great cation of the Gunnison is about fifty miles Jong. In it the course of the river at first is west; it gradually changes toward the north, and at station 80 flows northwest, gradually becoming due north, which course it keeps rather uniformly to the mouth of the Nor th Fork. From the head of the cafion to the mouth of Smith’s Fork the main portion is cut in dark micaceous schists. It has its great- ‘est depth, perhaps, opposite station 77; the height from the water to the top of the mesa on which the station was located being about 3,000 feet. The granitic portion is about 2,000 feet deep. It was, of course, impossible to reach the edge of the river while in the canon, so that these figures are not perfectly accurate. They are obtained by comparing the heights of stations 77 and 78 with that of camp No. 53, on Cebolla Creek, about one mile above its mouth, and ailow- ing for the fall of the river between the two points. The error, if any, would, therefore, be very small and in favor of greater depth. The section across the river, through stations 77 and 78, is shown in Figure 2, Plate VII. On the west side of the river is a plateau about four miles in width and thirteen miles long. Its elevation above the river is 2,500 to 3,000 feet. It is composed of schists, and the top seems to have a gentle slope to the eastward. It seems to have had in places a capping of trachyte. East of Cebolla Creek, on the granite hills, a portion of this trachyte stillremains. Tothe northward the plateau runs to apoint, the termina- tion being marked by ahigh conical point of granite. Beyond this, are red sandstones (Triassic), with superimposed Jurassic and Cretiuceous strata, as seen from station No. 80, on the opposite sideof the river. Fig.1, Plate VIL, shows a section through station 80. It will beseen that the granite forms a sort of shelf along the river, on which the sedimentary forma- tions rest, having bluff-like edges a short distance farther back. These beds incline at a small angle (about 5°), causing the country to slope gently toward Smith’s Fork, which here flows almost parallel to the Gunnison. The illustration, Fig. 1, carries the section across Smith’s Fork. Beneath station 80 is an outcrop of the Red Beds. Where the section crosses Smith’s Fork, the latter stream does not cut below the Dakota group (No.1). Near the mouth, however, it cuts through the Red Beds reaching the granite. Smith’s Fork joins the Gunnison as the latter emerges from the gran- itic portion of its cation, and euts across the strata into the Cretaceous sandstones. It rises in ‘the group of trachytie peaks that I have already referred to as terminating the Elk Mountains to the westward. Before it leaves these peaks there are outcrops of Cretaceous shales seen vear the water’s edge, on the main creek at first, but afterward spreading out and covering wider areas. After it is fairly out of the mountains it flows across the Upper Cretaceous formation, and gradually cuts through the sandstone of No. 1, which forms bluffs extending along its course from the mouth of the Southern Fork to the mouth. (See map B). 7H 98 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The Southern branch of Smith’s Fork rises in a comparatively open country, opposite the creek which forms the boundary of the last mesa on the upper side of the Gunnison. It lies almost entirely in the Upper Cretaceous formations, which are exposed in low hills covered with cedars and sage-brush. At one place it cuts a cation through No. 1, from - which it comes into the upper beds, not touching the Dakota group again until it joins the North Fork. This cafion is only two miles long, and must have been determined by a fracture caused by folding. On the west side the inclination of the sandstone is only 5°, while on the east it is 15° to 20°. In the latter there is only a small triangular area of No. 1 exposed, the base of the triangle resting on the stream. Opposite the mouth of this fork is a hill of trachyte, which may have had something to do with the fold we have noticed. About three miles above this hill, on the north side of the North Fork, there is a finger-like rock (trachyte) projecting from the Cretaceous shales. From the june- tion of the forks to the mouth is a distance of thirteen miles, in which the river is in cafion or acanon like valley, the height of the cliffs on either side ranging from about two or three hundred feet at the head to nearly fifteen hundred near the mouth. The walls are very nearly vertical, but they do not rise immediately from the edge of the river, there being a valley between the bluffs, about a quarter of a mile wide, which continues al- most to the mouth of the river as a fertile bottom, groves of cottonwoods fringing tue banks of the stream. Near its mouth the river cuts a narrow gorge in the granitic rocks, the level of the river being some distance below the general level of the bottom of the caton. Map B shows the geology of the region about the mouth of Smith’s Fork, and the lines of the sections H, G,. K, L, and 1. The North Fork joins the Gunnison three and a half miles below the mouth of Smith’s Fork. The course of the Gunnison between the two streams is nearly due north. On station 81 the strata have a dip east of north, while on the opposite side of the Gunnison the inclina- tion is west of north, showing, what is plainly seen from the station, that there is a curving of the strata. Smith’s Fork flows almost in the direc- tion of the strike of the beds on its right side, while the Gunnison, after the union of the two, cuts across the strata almost at right angles to the strike. Where the North Fork comes in the course is again changed, the river then taking the course of North Fork, which is nearly due west. The North Fork is the principal tributary of the Gunnison, its general course, as I have already indicated, being about west. It drainsa large area, and is formed by two branches, one heading opposite Rock Creek and other tributaries of the Grand, and the other having its sources opposite Ohio Creek and Slate River, in the group of trachytic peaks to which I have already alluded several times. The latter branch, on the map accompanying a report of Lieutenant Rufiner,* at its head is called Anthracite Creek, and a short distance below Bah River. Thename “ Anthracite” was given from the discovery - here by prospectors of a bed of coal, of excellent quality. I will refer to this coal again in another part of the report. We have retained the name, but instead of applying the name to only a portion of the creek, have given it to its entire length. In regard to the Bah, Mr. H. G. Proutt says, ‘‘The Bah is said to empty into Grand (Gunnison) Liver below the Lake Fork.” Hetherefore evidently refers to the North Fork, * Report of a Reconnaissance in the Ute Country, in 1373, by Lieut. E. H. Ruffner, Corps of Engineers. t Ibid, page 40. “PEALE.] GEOLOGY—ANTHRACITE CREEK—COAL CREEK. 99 for which he says the Indian name is Bah. Bah, or more properly Pah, is the Ute word for water. Gunnison’s map* gives itthe name of North Fork, which is the name in common use, and therefore we retain it. The group of mountains about the sources of Anthracite Creek were named by Lieutenant Ruffner7 the Philosophers’ Monuments, and the names of Owen, Spencer, Huxley, Mill, and Carpenter given to some of the most prominent peaks. His Mount Richard Owen probably corre- sponds to our station No. 32. Geologically this whole region about the sources of Slate River, Rock Creek, Ohio Creek, and the North Fork of the Gunnisun is exceedingly complicated. The Cretaceous formations which prevail here seem to have been disturbed by igneous eruptions, and they are found at places in great confusion, dipping in almost every direction and pene- trated by numerous dikes. Cretaceous shales, mingled with trachyte, are found on the summits of some of the highest peaks. It is therefore difficult to get at the exact thickness of the strata or to tell the exact horizon to which beds ought to be referred, as they are vroken apart and very much metamorphosed. The country is very-rough and rugged, the peaks being high and often very difficult of ascent. It will require some time te work this region up in detail, and close and careful study will be required to reduce it to a system. Station No. 32 is composed principally of metamorphosed Cretaceous shales, intersected by dikes. A large dike crosses Anthracite Creek, having a course from station 32, South 22° West. Southeast of the station is a ridge of Cretaceous strata which heads a branch of Anthracite Creek on one side close by one of the sources of Ohio Creek, and on the other overlooks the sources of several branches of Slate River. All these streams rise in amphitheaters, the edges of the strata forming steps, rising one above the other. The streams rise in beautiful emerald lakelets. .The course of this branch of Anthracite Creek at first is nearly due south. It then curves around station 32 aud flows northwest for ten miles, when it turns abruptly around a sugar-loaf-shaped mountain and flows west, through a cation cut principally in gray sandstone. In this cation itis joined by the west- ern fork, Coal Creek, when it-again changes its course and flows north for three miles to the North Fork. The isolated peak around which Anthracite Creek flows was named Marcellina by a party of prospectors that we met on North Fork. It is composed of a light-gray porphyritic trachyte. It answers the description of Mount Huxley in Lieutenant Rufiner’s report. but on the accompany- ing map Mount Huxley is located on the opposite side of the creek. The western branch of Anthracite Creek, Coal Creek, rises generally on the rim of a basin of Cretaceous shales and sandstones (see map C), which is bordered by hills of trachyte and breccia, the latter being on the eastern side, and an extension from station 31. For some distance above its junction with the eastern fork it flows through a cation, of which the walls are about a thousand feet in vertical height. The sand- stones and shales composing them ane perhaps slightly inclined toward the northeast, not more than 3° to 5°. There are outcrops of coal at various points along the western ane but the coal is of poorer quality than that on the eastern fork. The other stream, which unites with Anthracite Creek to form the main North Fork, rises opposite Rock Creek and the branches of the . * Pacific Railroad Report, vol. xi. aE iE of a Reconnaissance, &c., by Lieut. E. H. Ruffner, Corps of Engineers, page f Ibid., Page 41. 100 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Grand, immediately opposite the plateau in which station 48 was lo- cated. Its course is nearly south, on aline with Coal Creek. The valley is comparatively narrow, there being but few open bottoms along its course. The slopes of the hills on either side are well timbered with pines and cottonwoods. Near the head of the main creek there are large bowlders of a black basalt, derived, in all probability, from the layer which once covered the entire divide. While on this creek we met a party of prospectors, who said they had found indications of gold along the stream, but not in any very great quantity. The divide between Rock Creek and this branch of the North Fork is a sharp ridge of Cretaceous sandstones, reaching above the timber-line. The strata dip about 15° to the west, the angle decreasing on crossing the North Fork, until they become almost horizontal in theplateau divide - between North Fork of the Gunnison and Grand River. Station 26 was located on this ridge. The lines of outcrop between the station and Sopris peak are the prolongation of the hog-backs on the west side of Roaring Fork. The rock on the summit of station 26 is a compact greenish-gray sandstone, somewhat laminated, and containing in the lower part frag- ments of stems and leaves, and particles of carbonaceous material. The most careful search revealed nothing perfect enough for identification. Be- low this sandstone is a narrow band of dark-colored, very compact lime- stone, of a reddish-brown color on the weathered surfaces. Next below is a coarse textured, soft, gray sandstone, which seemed to continue to the base of the amphitheater which the station overlooked. Near the base ofthe slope we ascended, [ noticed an outcrop of con- glomerate in which the pebbles were of a rock very much like that form- ing the nucleas of the Elk Mountains. The matrix was siliceous. What the relations of this bed were to the sandstones I could not de- termine, as the slopes were covered with a heavy growth of timber, and the underlying beds were for the most part covered with débris. The pebbles were. rounded and evidently water-worn. South of station 26 the strike curves to the eastward, the dip changing more and more toward the southwest. The line of outcrop of the Creta- ceous beds crosses Rock Creek into the Elk Mountains, where they become very much faulted and upturned. In this portion of the Elk Mountains Dr. Hayden made a more detailed survey, and to his report and the re- port of Mr. Holmes, the reader is referred for the geology of Rock Creek and the adjacent peaks. Station 33 was located south of station 26 on one of a group of high peaks, rising from a mass of trachyte resembling that composing the mountains between Anthracite Creek and the head ot Ohio Creek near station 32. The western slope of this mass is extremely steep, the sandstone reaching to the base , almost horizontal in position. At the northern end, however, as seen irom a distance, the strataappear to dip to the northeast at an angle of about 40°, so that there would seem to bea synclinal fold between this point and the ridge, extending from station 26. go. of DP 5a > Pe | fue SS <2) eee Zz Pagres § OK y Soi Soaes S es 3 8 AR gs FEES RSE RE TOR SSSR SR s R G Zz fal oO Sos PEALE, | GEOLOGY—NORTH FORK OF THE GUNNISON. 101 streams heading in the plateau, flows for a short distance through a beautiful grassy valley, from which the country on the west rises in a plateau which is timbered on the slopes. At the lower end of the valley the stream gradually cuts deeper and deeper into the sandstones, until, at the point where it meets Anthracite Creek, it is about a thousand feet below the general level. All the branches here, even the smallest, cut these canons, leaving mesas or tabies between, in which the strata are nearly horizontal, thus giving them about the same general level. After the union of the two main creeks, the North Fork flows a little south of west, almost at right angles to the former courses, in a caion which is from 1,500 to 2,000 feet deep. This caiion is about fifteen miles long.’ In the lower part the river gradually turns to the southward, finally emerging into a rather broad, open valley extending on the lower side to the foot of the hills on which stations 38 and 39 are located. The valley becomes wider as we gotoward Smith’s Fork. It is compara- tively open, being broken only by low hills or buttes of yellowish and gray Shales, all belonging to the Cretaceous formation. ‘These buttes have a scattered growth of stunted cedars and sage-brush. The soil is impregnated with alkali, and generally sterile. The small streams cut deep gulleys in the soft beds, As the river emerges from the canon the mesas on the south side end abruptly in steep bluffs, just north of stution 39. Stations 38 and 39 belong to the trachytic group, to which I have already so often referred. They are beautiful examples of moun- tain forms, rising in sharp conical points. Station 38 rises 4,000 feet above the general level ot the valley which it overlooks. As already described, there is a gradual slope from the Gunnison to Smith’s Fork, the sandstone of the Dakota group forming the floor. Crossing Smith’s Fork, the softer beds, which we have already described, form lines of buttes. Along the North Fork there are outcrops of black shales, in which the general dip is to the northeast. On the north side of the river is a series of terraces sloping from the basaltic-capped mesa which here forms the divide between the Grand and Gunnison Rivers. Leaving the mesa canon the North Fork turns still more toward the south, and flows southwest to within about four miles of its mouth, when ifs course becomes due west. In this valley the river winds in graceful curves, outlined in the most distinct manner, as seen from the moun- tains and plateau, by the fringes of cottonwoods on its banks. Just before it turns to the westward it enters a cafion. The walls, at first, are mere bluffs, cut in the black shales that lie immediately above the Dakota sandstone. By the time it joins the Gunnison it has cut pretty deeply into the Dakota group. The river in this part of its course is parallel with Smith’s Fork, and joins the Gunnison in the canton _ at right angles to the former course of that stream. The Gunnison, peeve®, turns and flows to the westward in the direct line of the North ork. This part of the cafion of the Gunnison is ten miles in length and with walls from 400 to 500 feet high. Although in many places the bluffs rise In sheer precipices from the river’s edge, in others there are alluvial bottoms, sometimes on one sideand sometimes on theother. The general course is about due west. Fig. 3, Plate VIII, represents a section across the Gunnison through the line B F, on map ’B. At ait cuts the river just above the mouth of Smith’s Fork, before it leaves the granitic cafion, and at d@ it cuts the river below the mouth of the North Fork. It will be seen that there is 102 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. a slight synclinal fold between c and d, which is more marked farther west, as Shown in Fig. 2, which is a section across the Gunnison just before it leaves the canon, on the line G H. The following is the sec- tion represented in Fig. 3, the figures corresponding with section L. SECTION. . Granite reaching to edge of the river. Red sandstone ( Triassic ? ). . Greenish and gray shales and sandstones (Jurassic ? ). Shaly sandstones. Massive sandstones. . Laminated sandstones and black shales. | . Black shales. > Cretaceous. . Dark yellow shales. . Light yellow and gray beds. 10. Terrace with light-colored shales. At ain Fig. 2, Plate VIII, the strata are seen to be curved abruptly, the river occupying the axis of an anticlinal fold. This is at the point where it leaves the cation. The fold, however, is not simply a north and south fold, for, as we see in Fig. 1, Plate VIII, there is folding east and west. This is the main fold, or rather the termination of the anticlinal fold, the axis of which the Gunnison follows in the canon above Smith’s Fork. Fig. 1 represents a section on the line I K, almost at right angles to the sections in Figs. 2 and 3. The following are the beds represented in Fig. 2 (Section K): } Dakota group. WONIATR OLY esas 1. Shaly sandstones. 2. Massive sandstones. \p ODE) GRE (RNC: iy 3. Shales and sandstones. > Cretaceous. 4, Black shales. | 5. Yellow and gray shales. 5) In Fig. 1, the following is the section (Section I): . Sandstones of No. 1, Cretaceous. . Yellowish and black shales. . Fine hard brownish shales. OU G9 bo \ Shales forming terraces. As we go south along the west side of the cafion of the Gunnison, we see that the dip, at first, is to the northwest, gradually coming around to the west. The connection between the Dakota group and the overlying shales seems to be broken. Opposite station 80, the Red Beds (Triassic) are seen resting on the schists. A little farther south the Dakota group is washed off, and there are simply remnants of the red sandstones left. I did not have time to visit this from the west side, and until this is done, all opinions must, to a certain extent, be conjectural. As we go farther south we find the granite plateau, before referred to, shown in Fig. 2, Plate VII, f to g, standing between the Gunnison and the valley of the Uncompahgre. Abutting against this plateau, at the head of Cedar Creek, and on the branches of Cebolla Creek, as we have already seen, the Cretaceous shales: are horizontal. Whether the fold noticed at the northern end of the canon becomes 4 Plate VIII. Z os a y , cs 7 OT Le ‘ 1 en ji Z ; \ ie 4 \ 1 : CG: LAG i Ae ’ ta dm 45 A LG ae y r, fer xd SS aes 3 Nis . Z 5 5 U: Sie LE i ‘ tS ‘ ‘ ‘ 7 . , , Z < . p ° , “oA 1 eee ES A y ‘ } Vv A A \ 1 nese A ! . \ A 2 S \ : \ 1 p Geek ye 1 1 ‘ aK ‘ \ N i ‘ 7 J Gunnison River renisore PEVCr ghee See ae se Fig3.Seetion L. 2: i PEALE.] GEOLOGY—UNCOMPAHGRE RIVER. _ 103 fault at the southern, I am unable to say. The western side of the canon will have to be studied before the question can be decided. Leaving the caton the Gunnison keeps its westerly course for about six miles, when it makes some southing to the mouth of the Uncom- pahgre, which joins the river eight miles below the foot of the cafion. The Uncompahgre is the largest tributary of the Gunnison from the south. It rises inthe Uncompahgre Mountains (Sierra de la Piata of Gunnison*), and has a general course a few degrees west of north. The range in which it rises is one of the finest in the Kkocky Mountains. The geology will be fully treated of in Dr. IMndlich’s report, the range being in the southern district. While we were in the valley of the Uncompahgre, we had a magnificent view of its snowy peaks, which stand out prominently against the sky. To the west we had a sight of the Sierra la Sal or Salt Mountains, the peaks being just visible. Near the head of the Uncompahgre there seem to be some beautiful open parks. We did not visit them, as our trail led us up Cedar Creek, one of the eastern branches of the river. We were hut a few miles above the mouth of Cedar Creek, at the point where the wagon-trail Crosses. Cedar Creek is probably dry during the greater part of the year. It rises in a plateau-like divide, opposite a small branch ot Cebolla Creek, a few miles west of the mouth of the main stream. Its general course is about northwest. The upper portion of the valley is narrow and ravine- like, the slopes of the hills being covered with scrub-oak. sage, and cactus, with here and there patches of grass. This valley continues tor about ten miles, when the creek comes out into the broad valley of the Uncompahgre, which at this point has lines of buttes of light-colored clayey-beds, the debris of which forms a soft soil, in which the mules sink to their fetlocks at every step. All the small creeks, dry for the greater part of the year, cut deep gullies in this soft soil, which is almost desti- tute of vegetation. In places there is considerable effloresence of alkali, and gypsum is found abundantly throughout the valley. The buttes are found on the eastern side of the valley. They arefrom two bundred to four hundred feet high, and form two lines, those nearest the cafion of the Gunnison being the highest. The buttes are not so numerous in the lower part of the valley, where the general level is but a few feet above the river-bed. It is more plain-like, without grass, having only a sparse growth of low sage, interspersed with spots of alkali, giving the country a most desolate aspect. Along the river is an alluvial bettom, with good grass, the river being bordered with cottonwoods, willows, and low bushes of various kinds. This bottom becomes much wider as we descend, and is a favorite wintering place for the Ute In- dians. We found traces of their camps, while their trails run in every direction. In one place we found a field where corn had been raised, the stalks of which were still standing. On the opposite side of the Uncompahgre the country preserves a very uniform level for ten or fifteen miles to the west and southwest, where it seems to rise in a plateau. This level country is terraced, cut by the branches of the Gunnison and Uncompahgre, which contain water only in the spring. The terraces are for the greater part desti- tute of vegetation, being coverd with pebbles, among which are scattered fragments of chalcedony aud agate. They are underlaid with Creta- ceous strata, shales in the eastern part, and the sandstones of the Da- kota group toward the west, as the country rises into the plateau. The * Pacific Railroad Report, vol. ii, page 55. 104 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. latter was seen only from a distance, but it is probably similar to the country to the west of the Gunnison, near its mouth, the streams prob- ably cutting through to the Triassic? red sandstones. On the Un- compahere the terrace is about one hundred feet high. On the south side of the Gunnison below the mouth of the Uncom- pahegre, are three terraces. The first is 100 feet above the level of the river, the second 150 feet, and the third 200 feet. Below the junction of the Uncompahgre, the Gunnison Keeps a course a few degrees south of west, until it reaches the mouth of Roubideaw’s Creek, nearly five miles below. Here it enters the lower canon. Above Roubideau’s Creek the valley is very wide, averaging about two miles. The immediate river-bottom is also broad and overgrown with cotton- woods and low brush. There are numerous sloughs along the course of the river, and the fall per mile is very small. The river winds slug- gishly in curves that sometimes seem to approach circles. On the north side are terraces which soon form low hills or buttes reaching almost to the mesa. The edge of the mesa stands boldly out, like the edge of a fortification-wall. Its slopes are well timbered. The buttes below, extendirg toward the river, are composed of yellow, gray, and whitish strata, the weathering of which gives a most curious appear- ance to the landscape. On the south side, as I have already said, there are terraces extending southward toward the Uncompahgre Mcun- tains. The cafion which commences at the mouth of Roubideau’s Creek, ex- tends almost to the moutb of the Gunnison. It is, therefore, about 32 miles in length, in an air-line. By the Ute Indians it is called Unaweep or Kked Canon,* from the deep-red sandstones that are exposed at va- rious points along its course. In the cafon the river winds considerably, and has in places ineadows and even groves of cottonwood fringing it. It is not very rapid, the fall per mile being about eight feet. Although in an air-line the canon is 32 miles long, the length of the river is about forty-five miles, or perhaps a little more, if we allow for all the smaller curves. The course of the river at first for ten miles is north 60° west. It then flows due north for about three miles, when it turns, taking a course to the northwest, which it keeps generally for nearly fifteen miles, when it again bends to the west and gradually curves back again to its mouth in the Grand. The walls of the cation often rise abruptly from the water’s edge in sheer precipices, while in others there is a narrow strip between the river and the edge of the binffs. The latter are better preserved on the eastern side, as the course of the river is nearly at right angles to the dip, which is approximately to the eastward, really a few degrees north of east. At the mouth of Roubideau’s Creek the walls are only 200 feet high, while at station 60 they are 663 feet high on the eastern side, and much higher opposite. This probably increases slightly as we go down-stream, but it can scarcely reach a thousand feet at any point. At first the river merely cuts through the sandstones and, shales of the Dakota group (Cretaceous No. 1), as shown in a sectiou of the blufis given in another portion of the report. As we go down, the river gradually cuts through the base of No. 1 into the Jurassic shales and limestones; and finally, below station 62, the red sandstones (Triassic ?) appear beneath the shales. Fig. 3, Plate IX, represents a section across the Gunnison through station 60 eastward to the mesa terminating the plateau divide. It will * Vide Pacific Railroad Report, vol. II, page 57. ives Neha Mh age in ecios - s tay 5 an seein) 208 4 Total thickness of supposed Carboniferous......---.---------- 2,504 20 The remainder of the section to the beds I included in the Devenian ? is as follows: 24, A laminated trachytic rock .... Pea S01 15 feet. 25. Space probably filled mainly by limestones...-.....--...---- E 26. Black fliney limestone, with pieces of pyrite and fragments of wae Hey Spiri p Spiriferind.....---- SE rey eco taretsvelatalayaic) eels gels re NEN pirifer or Spiriferi 116 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES, Under the head of Devonian, I referred to these beds, and said that they occupied debatable ground. A portion of the upper limestone may have to be referred to the Lower Carboniferous, while the lower layers may be of Silurian age, leaving the center to represent the Devonian. Of course, without fossils to prove their age, ‘all opinions are merely conjectures. The section given above holds good in detail only for the locality in which it was made. The beds are very irregular in their horizontal exten- sion, some of them thinning out very rapidly. Thus, for instance, the bed numbered 17 in the section above, in another place, not more than half a mile distant, was only three feet in thickness, instead of seventy-one. One of the illustrations in last year’s (1873) report * shows this remark- ably well. Not only do they thin out, but they also change in color and nature, as we trace them. ele ace e2 3 Gray laminated trachyte...---.....---. +--+ 22-20 eee eee tees 40 4, Ward obsidian porphyry ---.--.-- -.-- ---22- «<2 --0= socens weer ee = (5. Soft spherulitic and porphbyritic obsidian...........----..----.---- J r} 6: Purple vesicular rhyolite: -.. 2.22. 25222 4ec6 Gee cet Scisjncs 0 ose cians 50 ( epliish-orayatly Olibepenma\- cite -jeee cl eto cielo ais cle\s|=12 = ele ies 51 30 Top. DOD Ses ee Cees a4 aye Se ibe} ac aor ane HE qn Uoe 520 This section goes as far as the top of the bluff, but as we go back there is.a greater thickness, and probably a repetition of the upper por- tion of the section, that is trom the obsidian upward. The letters in the section above correspond to the letters in Fig. 1, Plate XI1V. As the rocks of this section are typical of the rocks in these mesas, I will describe them more in detail. The breccia I will pass by for the pres- ent. The tufa, which rests immediately upon it, is almost white in color, and appears to be made up mainly of feldspathic material, with parti- cles of quartz and mica interspersed. It is soft and very fine in texture, having a sandy feel when crushed in the fingers. Above station 73 this, tuff is about five feet thick. Layer No. 3 is a dull, purplish-gray rock, in which there are numerous particles of quartz and obsidian, with crys- tals of sanidine porphyritically imbedded. There are also a few crys- tals of black mica. Under the glass this rock has a vitreous appear- ance. Itis probably rhyolitic. It is trom two to four feet thick. Layer No. 4 is very hard, and breaks into square blocks, with very smooth, 170 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. regular faces. There are numerous crystals of sanidine in the obsidian. As we ascend, the bed becomes softer, and besides sanidine contains small spherulitic masses, which are generally about the size of a pin- head. In some places, however, they are an inch or two in diameter, and when broken open the cavities in them are found coated with Hyalite. This spherulitic obsidian is exactly like that found by us in the Yellowstone National Park,* and a description of one would answer for the other. Layer No. 6, in the section given above, is a compact jaspery- looking rock, slabs of which ring under blows of the hammer. In the crypto-crystalline paste are crystals of sanidine, bronze mica, free quartz in abundance, and occasionally a pebble of what has the appearance of having been tufa inclosed and metamorphosed. This rhyolite is vesicular, the cavities being lined with blue chalcedony. These cavities are most abundant in the lower part. The description of this rock answers for the layer wherever it is shown along the Gunnison, the only difference being in the color, which at station 73 is a purplish-brown. At station 77 it is more of agray. The geodes of chalcedony are very abundant in the latter place. Layer No. 7 breaks into slab-like masses which weather. white. They ring under the hammer like the layer below. Just above it are indications of a tufa, resembling that above the breccia. It seems to be of a reddish color. Along the second creek west of station 73 the trachytic capping has been removed, and the breccia forms the basis for a considerable distance up the creek, the mesa-form ‘disappearing with the removal of the trachyte. The creek west of stations 77 and 78 forms the present western boundary of this trachytie area. At the head of the creek, as seen from station 79, the trachyte is tipped up, dipping toward the south or southeast at an angle of 10° to 15°. This is also the general direction of the slope of the mesas. Station 79 was located on a point capped with a remnant of the lower part of the trachyte, below which is the breccia. It is im- possible to tell at present how far west this flow originally extended. The breccia which we have referred to so often in the present chap- ter is geuerally of a dark-gray color in the matrix. The included masses are of all sizes, and generally angular. The greatest variety is seen near station 31. I have already spoken of the stratified character at this point, which seems to indicate its deposition in water. The upper layers seem to be lighter-colored and to have the included smaller masses. Farther down there is a dark band, below which the included rocks are in large masses. These layers are variegated, red, green, yellow, and gray. Between the layers are bands resembiing a hard sandstoue and also tufaceous layers. The included masses are, I think, all trachytic. The tufaceous layers are pink and ash colored, and covtain conspicuously black mica and minute erystalsof hornblende. Preceding the deposition of this breccia, there was considerable erosion, as is indicated by comparing the underlying rocks at station 73 with those under station 79. In thé former place there are only a few feet of shales between the Dakota group and the bottom of the breccia, while at station 79 there must be at least 1,000 feet, and there is probably more farther back. On the Gunnison, also, as seen by the sections in Plate XIV, there is abundant evidence of such erosion. The drainage had probably the same general direction as at present. It is also probable that there was an interval between the deposition of the breccia and the flow of the rhyolitic rocks, during which there may have been some erosion of the breccia. It varies greatly in thickness. At station 31 it is 3,000 feet, while on the Gunnison, at station 73, it is only 400 feet. * Report U.S. Geol. Survey, 1872, page 131. Xx wt J Sear Yi = aa VON 77. i, ion Bh } \y EEO IES a 7 25 a | / a ae 4 ‘ TY] Md TI LA \ 7. ity i NS, eee P. GH- ., MAP. D Shewing Areas of Rhyolite and Breccia AB ~ Section R. EF = Section O. CDE abe ST a et pat Feif f 1 pu ki rp rms re i ise, 4m crea GEOLOGY—BASALT—EAGLE RIVER. 171 I have already stated that the origin of this trachyte and breccia is in Dr. Endlich’s district, south of the Gunnison. Since it was poured out, the mass of mountains described under the head of Porphyritic Trachytes have been thrown up, which fact accounts for the abrupt bending of the trachyte northeast of station 79, and the general slope toward the Gunnison. The subsequent erosion has been sufficient to remove the trachyte around station 31, and on the ridges running southward from this mass of mountains. The amount of the denuda- tion on the Gunnison is measured by the distance between the top of the mesas and the level of the River. BASALTIC AREAS. The basaltic rocks of the district all closely resemble each other. They are generally dark-colored, gray to black, and are fine-textured. They contain olivine, sometimes free quartz, the latter not abundantly, and on being pulverized magnetic iron can be extracted from them. The latter always caused a great deflection in the needle at all stations made on these areas. Vesicular varieties occur in many places. The different varieties, however, will be described as we proceed. ‘The short- ness of the time at our disposal in the preparation of this report pre- eludes the possibility of giving definite analyses of the rocks. As already stated, the basaltic rocks are confined to the northern part of the district, where they generally form the capping of plateaus or mesas, showing that they are lava-flows. Their source was probably to the northward, as, with the exception of ove locality, I could find no evidence of their having originated within the limits of our region. As the general features of the country have been already given ip considerable detail I will confine myself mainly to the description of the rocks and their mode of occurrence. © Eagle hiver.—On the summit of the ridge southwest of the Hagle River, opposite the second caiion, there is an isolated area of volcanic rock which I call basalt, although I could discover no olivine. Its ap- pearance, however, closely resembles that of the rocks in the same re- gion that are undoubtedly basaltic. It is dark bluish-gray, rather com- pact, with a slight tendency in places to lamination. There are a few points of free quartz and numerous yellow spots of some decomposing mineral, which may be olivine. The area ocenpied by this rock is lim- ited, comprehending only about nine square miles. It is shown on map A. A Section across it is shown in Fig. 1, Plate I (ftog). It will be — seen that it rests on the upturned edges of the Red Beds, and in places tonches the Jurrassic or Cretaceous layers. The section in the figure is partly ideal, but I think it presents the true relations of the rocks. It seems that there must have been a fissure through which the mate- rial was pushed, and afterward spreading out, it covered the edges of the Strata tipped up by the same force that caused the flow. If it is simply a flow that has spread over the upturned edges of the strata it must have come from the north. The hills north of Eagle River shown at cc, in Plate II, are capped with volcanic rock. It is not probable, however, that this rock is the same flow, although it may be of nearly the same age. We cannot be exact as to the age, although it is probably com- paratively modern. All we can say positively is that it is Post Creta- ceous at this point. I think this flow and the one near the mouth of HKagle River were contemporaneous. The latter, as I shall show, is of recent date. It is near the mouth of the river on the north side, and, although outside of the limits of our district, I wish to refer to it. A more de- tailed description will be given by Mr. Marvine. The flow had its source in the hills on the north side. It came down the ravines and EZ GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. spread out in the valley, covering a space of three or four miles. It forms a bluff edge 10 to 20 feet above the level of the river. A speci- men of the rock that I obtained is a black vesicular basalt containing free quartz and olivine. Cn pulverizing it I obtained a dark, almost black, powder from which magnetite could be separated. This rock is of comparatively recent date, whic. is evident from the following reasons: First. “Tie flow has taken place since the carving out of the valley. It occupies the bottom of the valley, which is nearly two thousand feet in depth, bordering the river like the slag poured out from a furnace. The river seems to be the limit of the flow, none of the rock being found on the south side. It was probably pusbed by it to the lower side of the canon-like valley. Second. The subsequent erosion bas been very slight. The basalt is exposed in a bluff-like wall which reaches to the level of the water, nothing being exposed beneath it. Third. The basaltic rock is destitute of vegetation and comparatively free from any soil. It has the appearance of having just been poured out. The period during which it was poured out is probably to be meas- ured by hundreds of years, and perhaps less, rather than by longer periods. Grand River.—Below the mouth of Eagle River on the south side of Grand River there is an area of voleanic rock that has. been subjected to considerable erosion. This area was probably.once continuous with that west of Roaring Fork. Between a creek, Grand River and Roar- ing Fork it rests mainly on beds of Triassic age, forming a plateau-like surface. Near the mouth of Frying-Pan Creek is a mesa capped with basalt which is probably a portion of the same flow. This latter, how- ever, rests on beds of Cretaceous age, as does the voleanic rock west of the Hog-backs on Roaring Fork. They areall probably remnants of the same flow. The amonntof erosion previous to the spreading out of this material was very great. The Cretaceous rocks near the Grand, between Roaring Fork and a creek, seem to have been entirely removed. The subsequent erosion also has been of great extent. The present valleys and canons have probably been outlined since, and the amount of de- nudation is tobe measured by their depth below the level of the vol- canic rock. The capping of the hills west of Roaring Fork is very irregular. There remain only the remnants of what was once a connected mass. Station 16 was located on the western edge of one of the patches of basalt. In almost all of the vaileys drained by the southern branches of the Grand, between Roaring Fork and the plateau of station No. 48, there are great numbers of volcanic bowlders, derived from the hills that are capped irregularly with basalt. The hills themselves are so covered with débris that it is difficult to define the boundaries of the basalt. The plateau on which station 48 is located is also capped irregularly with basalt. Since the flow it has been subjected to a great deal of erosion, and now the basalt is found only in isolated masses, like that on which we made station 48. The latter is a mammallary process rising 248 feet above the general level, and about 200 feet in diameter. The fcllowing is the section of this curious horn-like point, which can be seen from a great distance in every direction : 1. Dark-gray basalt, containing a large quantity of olivine, also free quartz sparingly. It is a very bard and compact rock. 2. Purplish basalt. This lay er is slightly vesicular. It contains the same minerals that are seen in No. 1. PEALE. | GEOLOGY—BASALTS—FLATEAU CREEK. 173 3. Vesicular basalt. Mostly red in color on weathered surfaces. Some of the pieces found at the base are black, and have cavities lined with carbonate of lime. 4, Tufaceous layer, of which only the upper portion could be seen. The color is white, and in some places the layer has masses of basalt. In layer No. LI fodind the following minerals, besides those mentioned above: Hyalite and quartz in segregations and pyrites coating the weathered surface in a few instances. All these basaltic rocks have magnetite. The local attraction on the station was considerable. The cone on which station 48 was located is situated in an isolated patch of basalt of the same character (see map 3). There are several other areas from which pointed and coffin-like masses rise, none, how- ever, reaching the altitude of station 48. The basalt, as has been men- tioned in a previous chapter, rests on dark-gray shales which weather to a chalky whiteness. This is beautifully shown on the north side of the Grand. It was impossible to tell from the station how extensive the area covered by the basalt is to the north. On this plateau the area does not exceed eighteen or twenty miles. To the westward it reaches its limits at least five miles east of station 50. West of the basaltic line the plateau becomes broken; the capping having been re- moved, the soft beds beneath yielded readily to the eroding influences, and, therefore, instead of a plateau there is a sharp ridge, gradually de- creasing in elevation to the westward. The course of the range, for it forms a very well-defined range, is generally west. Itis very irregular, however, and the streams on either side cut profoundly into the strata. Station 48 has an elevation of 11,063 feet above sea-level. Two and a half miles west the top of the basalt is 150 lower, and two miles farther, that is, four and a half miles west of station 48, it is 350 feet below it. So we see there is a slope to the westward at present. We cannot tell whether this is the original surface, or whether it has been modified by subsequent erosion. It is probable, however, that the original slope was to the westward. We-see the same decrease in elevation from east to west on the plateau between the North Fork of the Gunnison and Plateau Creek. On station 43, which is one of the most eastern of the basaltic points on this plateau, the elevation is 11,134 feet. At station 44, one mile farther west, it is 11,128, while on station 45, eight and a half miles west of station 43, it is only 10,954, a decrease of 180 feet. Five miles west of station 45 the elevation is 10,904, which is practically the same as that of station 45. Sixteen miles west of this point, at the north ond of the mesa, the elevation is only 9,800 feet, and at the south end, which is three and a half miles farther east and sixteen miles south of the north end, it is 9,733 feet. This is a fall of a little over 1,400 feet from station 43, in a distance of about twenty-seven miles. The greater part of the decrease in elevation is in the western portion; that is, in the last twelve miles. As is evident, on glancing at the figures given above, the eastern portion varies but little on comparing the higher points with each other. About stations 43, 44, and 45 the basalt forms points that rise considerably above the general level, while the sur- rounding country is very much broken up. To the westward, however, the basalt forms a mesa-like capping to the country. This mesa is somewhat irregular in outline, forming at first a narrow strip which divides into two arms, one extending to the southwest and the other to the northwest. They are separated by a small creek that drains into the Gunnison. Ithas cut gradually deeper and deeper until the basaltic capping has been removed, leaving a tongue-like process of Tertiary rocks between the arms. In the eastern part of the divide the areas covered with basalt are 174 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. irregular. The highest points in these areas hardly mark the original surface of the flow. The subsequent denudation has been enormous, as will be readily conceived when we compare the elevations of these points with those of the deepest valleys near them. Stations 45 and 48 are almost on a line with each other running north and south. This line also passes through our camp No. 45 which was on Plateau Creek. Comparing the elevations of these three points we find that the creek at camp 45 is 3,891 feet below station 48, and 3,870 feet below station 45. Farther down, the distance from the north end of the mesa to the level of the creek is over 4,000 feet. The south end of the mesa is 4,677 feet above the level of the Gunnison at a point due south of it. These figures will give some idea of the immense amount of material that has been removed since the flow of lava took place, and show also how improbable it is that the original surface still remains. The two plateaus that we have just described are evidently the remains of what was once one continuous mass. The elevation of station 48 is practically the same as that of station 45. On comparing the rocks from the two localities, we find that they are identical in appearance and in structure. We have also seen that there is the same slope to the west on both. If they had not been connected we would find traces of the flow in some of the valleys, but we search in vain for any such evidence. No basalt is seen in the valleys save the bowlders that have been carried down from the plateaus. What the original limits were it is impossible to tell. It is difficult to get at the exact thickness of the basaltic flow as originally spread out. At present it is probably considerably less. At station 48 the total thickness is 248 feet. This is the highest point on that plateau but it hardly represents the original thickness. The thickness at the north end of the mesa is 100 feet. The latter may not be absolutely correct. It was determined from station 57 by angles to the top and base of the abrupt wall of the mesa. The actual base may be covered with the talus so that it is concealed. As to the age and the source of the basalt we cannot say anything very definite. It is, however, in all probability comparatively recent, although older than the flow mentioned as occurring near the mouth of Eagle River. It rests on sandstones and shales of Tertiary. age, which were but little affected by erosion previous to its pouring out. I was unable to fix on any point as its source; I think, however, that it lies farther to the north. The surface of "the plateaus is covered with good grass, and groves of cottonwoods and pines, among which there are numerous beautiful little lakes. Both of them are very well watered. Near station 45 are three beautiful lakes, two of which head streams flow- ing to Plateau Creek, and one heading a branch of the North Fork of the Gunnison. Near station 45 there is a beantiful illustration of the effects of cooling, in the hexagonal columns into which the mass has separated. They are very regular, and are five or six feet in diameter. The surtace of the mass inclines to the northward. The edge of the mesa portion of the plateau is very abrupt, especially on the western side, and at the extreme northern and southern ends. It stands out like the wall of a fortress. The outlineis irregular. The accompanying map will give a good idea of it as also the areas covered by the basalt. Fig. 3, Plate LX, shows a section made from the edge of the mesa to the Gunnison. On the line A B of map BH, a@ represents _ the capping of basalt. In all the valleys of the streams heading in the mesa there is an abundance of bowlders of basalt. They are so numerous in some places, even on the long sloping spurs running from it, that it is difficult to determizs the underlying rock. LJ (es ss < -& = > = ANG sa ; v y M} iN on ote Te itr Aa Ko Bi Lire Se ei H 4 | CHAPTER Ix. ECONOMICAL GEOLOGY. The greater portion of our district, with the exception of the area along Eagle River, lying within the limits of the Ute reservation, of course no mining operations can lawfully be carried on. Indeed, the areas in which mineral-deposits are found are limited to the group of mountains in the southeastern part of the district, and to the gneissic rocks about the head of the Eagle. The remainder of the country is covered with sedimentary rocks, mostly of Cretaceous and Tertiary age, in which mineral-deposits are rare. Lignite is found, but, with the ex- ception of that near station 34, it is of poor quality. GOLD. On Eagle River we met a party of prospectors who claimed to have found gold in placer diggings in paying quantities on some of the streams flowing into the Hagle from the south, below the mouth of the Piney, and above the second cafion. On the North Fork of the Gunnison, southwest of station 26, we met another party, who said they tried the dirt, and that the colors were good. : SILVER AND LEAD. The Elk Mountain mining district was described in the report for 1873. The ores are mainly silver-bearing galena. There are doubtless numerous lodes similar to them at various points around the heads of Slate River and Rock Creek. We did not have time to make a detailed survey here. The rocks are penetrated in all directions by dikes. At the head of ‘Oh be Joyful” Creek, east of station 32, Mr. Holmes got a specimen of galena associated with pyrites. On the other branches ledges would probably be found on searching for them, as the rocks are Similar. COAL. Lignite is found at several points in our district. At the mouthof the Gunnison, and in the bluffs on the river from the mouth to the mouth of - Roubideau’s Creek, it is seen, but of poor quality. This lignite is of Cretaceous age, being found in the sandstones of the Dakota group. On Coal Creek, a branch of Anthracite Creek, a bituminous lignite is found in sandstones, which I have referred to the Upper Cretaceous. Two specimens from this creek were examined, with the following results : Analysis. Specimen Specimen No. 1. 0. 2. VAUGHT oo Se OOO Eo ne ene ERR ea tee tet Mm AE OMSL LO pi 5.04 Res ev MMT RE LELS Pp sias ala eth jajasiers aim aiallerhartnaiels ajenniscley S Slarereee aie eee 31.46 OU) ATED, - 500 CO A See A Na ee NE is I a Si eI A 59.50 59.68 Vs oy cc coal NYSE CAE Se EL SO ms 2 NR Oe IB AEE RUA IR aa a 5.00 4.30 100.00 100.00 This coal is black (brownish-black in powder), has a dull luster, and an irregular fracture. The ash is of a light-reddish color. The analyses 175 176 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. show that the coal compares favorably with the lignites found in otber parts of the West. Anthracite Creek.—In the report for 1873 I spoke (page 259) of the oe- currence of anthracite coal in the Elk Mountains. It is found at the heads of Rock Creek, Slate River, Anthracite Creek, and Ohio Creek. It is probably all of Cretaceous age, and was doubtless originally a bituminous lignite. The coal at the head of a small branch of Anthra- cite Creek was found in a bed from 4 to 5 feet thickness in sandstones. The section has been given ina preceding chapter. These sandstones were tipped up against a range of trachytic peaks, and between the layers of sandstone, some distance above the coal, is a layer of trachyte. The strata dip at an angle of 20° to 25°. This coal is probably a portion of the same bed from which the coal on Coal Creek was ob- tained, although in the latter case it is lignitic. The eruption of the trachyte found near the coal first mentioned probably so heated it as to deprive it of the bituminous matter. This coal from the head of Anthracite Creek has a submetallic luster, is black even in powder, and has a conchoidal fracture. Analysis No. 1. \WAIIGIE Genco sondas eae SOOO S4do GO00 SoDG00 da0SN8 dosed CDOaG Soe) he elate 2.00 2. - 4.50 Wolatmerm atters co. wore csye cle eam ace emilee eng 6 Se eee ee Tees cisle vs cinie clove 2.50 = @arbomits fee sets oe ie See ae ree re aia cles cteroratee lan ee ale cae sortase eee 91. 90 Ash) (Gisandank te ddish-DLOw)) os seleeeleele) ela ental eter ae ete 3. 60 ; ; 100. 00 Analysis No. 2. AV CGT ete ec is'c eica lard yatejoie users alot stererstiniane Seen ce rasa Beare re ni tetaeierstele eisie le 1. 60 5. 00 Wolatileimatters sacs coco. fsee eee bomce Hoes eee soe eee eae amon O), COKE IYO verse ota een pene saaOP 5 CS Oa Dgk Gr | a) 3 8 cS ae eee ws abe aah 7 keley PAD INSN (Gene) ENO 5 0) 55 Se Ga bo co se oe bu 6050 56 ob base ae ad sgcaceae os cgo50s aaneanoe 6. 80 100. 00 These analyses prove the coal to be of excellent quality. Neither of the specimens coked. The percentage of water and volatile matters and the amount of ash compare favorably with other anthracites. Oh be Joyful Creek.—The coal on this creek is also an anthracite. It was discovered in 1874, and the following notes were obtained from Mr. Holmes, who visited the bed. It is two feet in thickness, between beds of quartzitic sandstones and metamorphosed shales, which dip slightly to the west. The coal outcrops about 1,500 feet above the level of Slate River at the mouth of the creek, two miles up the stream. This coal probably belongs to the same horizon as the coal on Anthracite Creek and on Rock Creek.. It probably outcrops again at the head of Slate River. A specimen collected by Mr. Holmes has a submetallic luster, is black, with rusty-colored surfaces from the presence of iron, a tracture somewhat cuboidal, breaking also into layers. This coal seems to be of poorer quality than that of Anthracite Creek and Rock Creek. Analysis. VIVEIIG) GOB Ben Bee Eee a See RISGEeacTi Ss SATE SOR META ASS ooa ode cdobouSan” 4.00 Volatilematters). 22s os22 2 Sie cece ce cienaciee at sec eneeeer rere aes 14. 00 ; 18:00 Carbon ....-. See pee pee ee atten Beer n PPO OER ERcE eect orcs Cec ceonDaMeeErere oc 74.00 Ash (of a reddish color) ....---..---..------ ---- 0 eee tee seen ne wee eee eee ee 8. 00 - 100. 00 It would perhaps be more properly described as a semi-anthracite. The sandstones and shales surround ng it are penetrated by numerous dikes and mineral lodes. PEALE, | GEOLOGY—ANTHRACITE COAL. 177 Rock Creek.—The coal on this creek is also an anthracite. It is found in Cretaceous shales beneath a mass of trachyte. The shales represent a horizon at least 3,000 feet above the Dakota group. The bed is 5 teet thick. _ The following is an analysis of the coal. It has a brilliant luster, conchoidal fracture. Analysis. Wither andavOlatilenmattersi ae =). 2— etree tele ete ear aioisla nto: ernie ovale erat cietsieneteisierare 7.4 Wanbonbes an sGae = civ Ses deil ous cca bake See ere eee e Bh bi dis Seen aero Stuseeisic 88. 92 INS (CREUTTS) TY INAS Gee ae OS | 2A ROME Eee nee eulogy rcsaimic rs 3. 68 100. 00 The following is an analysis of coal from this region (probably from Rock Creek) by Professor Mallet, of Colorado: Analysis. 1 ERYT5ceZ2Y0 Ua ORI tl 60 1 Ope RP 45 ital ae RE aS eh ae Mate I a MAE 91. 92 Ash ot@ark-brownlShicolor:.st.osc,oec meiees Seren Satie ls ai sicisleinweis = sesickeslioee Pn 5. 30 Volatile matters, chiefly water .........-...--.----- aie a tarctorclay shia seiiearene ces 3. 68 100. 00 The analyses given above show a decided advantage over the lignites found in other parts of the Territory, and their occurrence in the midst of so many deposits of galena, nearly all of which is probably silver- bearing, will probably in the future have a decided and important bear- ing upon the mining operations that may be carried on in this region. The following table gives the comparison of average percentages of con- stituents of the Elk Mountain coals with those of anthracites and other varieties, of both foreign and domestic. It will be seen that the coals of which analyses have been given above rank high in the comparison. eS Zz Carbon, Ash. we = Sve 5 Variety. Soa ce ls a Remarks. ee aa) © a Ss o z aS ee] rl 3 iS o bes oS E > SD E is < a) =) <4 ss) 4 <4 Foreign anthracites..| 3. 537+ | 92. 56} 87.96} 90.49 | 9.31] 1.58 | 5.935] 4 analyses, taken from Dana’s Mineralogy ; localities, South Wales and Hanover. cites. Geological Survey of Pennsyl- Pennsylvania anthra- |} 5.811 | 94. 10) 80.57) 88.046) 9.25) 2.90 | 5.348) 7 analyses, from tablein Rogers’s 5 vania, volume ii, part ii. Pennsylvania semi- {10.106 | 90.23) 74. 53) 82. 070} 12.30} 2.70 | 7.661) 10 analyses, from tabie in Rog- anthracites. ers’s Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, vol. ii, part ii. Anthracites fromthe |7.726 | 91.90)74.00|86.804| 8. 00] 3.68 | 5.476) Result of 5. analyses given Elk Mountains, above in the chapter preced- Colorado Territory. ing this table. Penrsylvania bitu- |28.222 | 70. 68) 56. 80| 71. 756| 11. 75| 2.07 | 5. 762| 10 analyses, from table in Rog- minous coals. ers’s Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, vol. ii, part ii. Foreign bituminous..|... .... 89. 27| 75. 59} 81.126) 8.60) 1.41 | 3.694] 10 analyses, taken from Dana’s Mineralogy. Oliio.coals...:.....-.. 36. 65 64. 20} 53. 50} 58.10 | 13.00} 1.80 | 5.12 | 20 analyses, from Newberry’s Geological Report of Survey of Ohio for 1873. Indiana coals ........ 42.21 59. 00} 43. 50} 51.20 | 18, 50|-2.09 | 6.02 | 52 analyses, from Geological Re- : port of Survey of Indiana for 1873. 12H 178 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Baa Carbon. Ash. we FO Ses at sl 4 2 43 © . % Variety. ae z mz g 2 2 ¥ ep Remarks. OSes || & E o & 3 ree st) o & Aas E & a iA <4 i " Illinois coals ...------ 41. 09 64. 90) 47.50) 52.992) 9.60) 2.00 | 6.248) 10 analyses, from Geological Re- port for 1873, Survey of Illi- nois. luwa coals .......--.- Ete Clb locoonallpooao: 842} |losooge|lacasas 6.77 | From table of 64 averages of coal analyses, in Geological Report 1870, Survey of lowa, White. Missouri coals ....... 41.443 | 79.28) 27. 72} 40. 816) 19.97) 2.05 | 9.026} 111 analyses, from Geological Reports for 1873-74, Survey of Missouri. Foreign lignites or |31.596 | 71.71} 47. 46) 60. 414) 14.95} 0.59 | 7.521) 10 analyses, from Dana’s Min- brown coals. eralogy. Lignites of Colorado [41.284 | 59.72) 44. 44) 52. 384| 20.20) 2.00 | 5.616] 14 analyses, from table of proxi- and New Mexico. | mate analyses of lignites, Re- port of A. R. Marvine, United States Geological Survey, Re- port of 1873. Lignites of Wyoming |40.972 | 54. 46| 47. 04} 51.216) 9.60} 1.73 | 5.331] 10 analyses, from Report of A. Territory. R. Marvine. Lignites of Utah Ter- |52.418 | 46. 84) 36.35] 43.035] 7.50] 0.97 | 4.553) 6 analyses, from Report of A. R. ritory. Marvine. Lignites of California [53.613 | 58.32) 47. 83} 49.631] 4.01] 2.26 | 3.395) 10 analyses, from Report of A. R. Marvine. Lignites of Montana /47. 224 | 64.18] 41. 9x} 49.34 | 12. 004 3.19 | 7.036) 5 analyses, from Report of A. R. and Oregon. Marvine. Lignites of Vancou- /44.468 | 51.81) 45.44) 47.552] 18.55} 2.15 | 6.24 ver’s Island and British Columbia. The excellent tables and notes on the western lignites in Mr. Mar- vine’s report for 1873, and the notes on the lignites east of the mount- aips in the reports of Dr. Hayden and Mr. Holmes, preclude the neces- sity of any further remarks here. GYPSUM. Gypsum is the only remaining mineral-of economical importance in the district. The localities and general description have been given in previous chapters. It occurs in quantity on Eagle River and Frying- Pan Creek. The list of minerals given in the eatalogue accompanying the report is, of necessity, small, the sedimentary formations prevailing in the dis- trict, being sandstones mainly of Cretaceous and Tertiary age. CATALOGUE OF MINERALS NOTED IN THE AREA ASSIGNED TO THE SECOND OR MIDDLE DIVISION, UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, IN 1874. AGATE. Cloudy, of white, brown, and gray colors, on the plateaus be- tween the Grand and Gunzison Rivers. Joss Agate, ot poor variety, in the valley of the Gunnison River, west of the mesa, near the Grand. AMPHiBOLE. Hornblende in small needle-like crystals, in some of the PEALE. ] GEOLOGY—CATALOGUE OF MINERALS. 179 rocks in the volcanic breccia, near station 31, at the head of west fork of Ohio Creek. CALCITE. In the Cretaceous rocks on Grand River and on the Gunnison River. i) CoA. Bituminous lignite on south fork of Anthracite Creek. Anthracite? on Anthracite Creek. A poor quality of lignite is found also in the bluffs at the mouth of the Gunnison. FELDSPAR. Undetermined varieties in the schists at the head of Hagle River and in the Grand Cafion of the Gunnison. Sanidine in the rhyolites and obsidian on the Gunnison River. Trachytes of Elk Mountains. GOLD. Said to occur along the upper part of the north fork of the Gun- nison and head of Hagle River. Gypsum. In the gypsiferous sandstones on Hagle River and on Grand River and Roaring Fork. In the Cretaceous strata of Grand River and the Gunnison. CHALCEDONY. Blue variety, lining cavities in the rhyolites on Gunnison River, above the Grand Canon. White, in valley of Gunnison, west of mesa, above the Grand. HYALITeE. In the basalt on station 48, near station 73, on Gunnison River. HORNBLENDE. (See Amphibole.) JASPER. Red in color, in chips on the plateaus, between the Grand and Gunnison Rivers. In nodular limestone in the bluffs on Gunnison River near station No. 60, also near station 73. LIMONITE. Near the head of the south fork of Anthracite Creek. Mica. Undetermined variety, probably Muscovite, in schists of Eagle River and Gunnison River. Brown variety in rhyolites in Gunnison River. OBSIDIAN. Beneath the trachyte on Gunnison River, above the Grand Cation. It is both porphyritie and spherulitic. Pyrite. Octahedral crystals near station 32, Anthracite Creek. Coat- ing surfaces of basalt, near station No. 48. QuARTZ. Inthe schists of Kagle River and the Gunnison ; crystals in the Cretaceous rocks near station No. 32, at the head of Anthracite Creek. SANIDINE. In the trachytes of station 32, station 30, station 34, &e.; also, in the obsidian and rhyolite on Gunnison River, above the Grand Canon. SELENITE. Inthe gypsum beds of Eagleand Grand Rivers. In the Creta- ceous Shales at various points along the Gunnison River. TREMOLITE. In radiating crystals in the porphyritic trachyte on station No. 38. LIGNITE. (See Coal.) CATALOGUE OF ROCKS COLLECTED IN 1873 BY A. C. PEALE, MIDDLE DIVISION \ UNITED SLATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. No. Name, &c. Locality. IROL DLiyileyaee ae era cree wera ei cets olntacieisiavninrse rate Mines on Mount Lincoln. Bs tayeie LOD ere craicrs alate seein niaic nlaieiciawieiate lors hatepevers ie Do. Seetae OMe es ea cee yan nine’ = Sian sisiaeeicebte ale Gray siliceous sandstone (Cretaceous) Mottled limestone (Cretaceous”)....-.-. Do. ; Station No. 6, on Hagle River. --| Below station No. 7, on Hagle River. .| South of Eagle River, near station No. 6. .| Near ane junction of Eagle and Grand Rivers. 0. POR are ear at ee At cea ule Soares North side of Eagle River, near its mouth. Greenish sandstone (Cretaceous?) .--...------- Station No. 26, west of Rock Creek. Gray sandstone, Cretaceous....--.--------.---- Anthracite Creek, near Mount Marcellina. ree mahusandstones-see cece -oa-b.ccnecceseones Do. 1 Q 3 4 5 6 7 B Gypsum . 10 li 12 180 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Catalogue of rocks collected in 1873 by A. C. Peale, §:c.—Continued. Name, &c. eee trachyte, from dike in sandstones - do BSS do Dark greenish trachyte ? from breccia Light reddish tufa from breccia........-..--.-- Black trachyte ? from breccia .....--.---.-..--- Greenish trachyte ? from breccia Black trachyte ? from breccia Dark gray trachyte from breccia Light gray hornblendic trachyte from breccia. - .Greenish laminated trachyte from breccia...-.-. Ashy-gray tufa from breccia ......--.-.....---. Trachyte ? (dike No. 1 in Cretaceous rocks) .... Sandstone conglomerate Trachyte (dike No. 2 in Cretaceous rocks) Trachyte (dike No. 3 in Cretaceous rocks) Trachyte (dike No. 4 in Cretaceous rocks) | Porphyritic trachyte (dike in Cretaceous sand- stones above coal-bed). Porphyritic trachyte? ...--..-.--.-..-.-.---.-- Trachyte ....- HO GossooUbae soo SuasbOUEoS AU GaaBes SHE do Trachyte (dike in Cretaceous rocks).--......-- Sandstone (above dike) Porphyritic trachyte: <...--).-.-.4---2.-525---2- Trachyte (dike) Sandstone (above dike) aa ee do Black basalt Argillaceous shale Black basalt Puarplish basalt Black basalt Amygdaloidal basalt Tee do . ML ra ee eG ST panies ak Cony aca ers 2 8 Black basalt Argillaceous shale (calcareous Cretaceous). .... Locality. Anthracite Creek, near Mount Marcellina. 0. Mount Marcellina. Do. ‘ | West Fork of Ohio Creek. Station No. 31, near the head of West Fork of Olio Gacek 0. tion 31. Ridge southeast of Station No. 32, between head of branches of Slate River and Ohio and An- thracite Creeks. Small southern branch of Anthracite Creek, near the head of the creek. Station 30, head of Ohio Creek. Station 33, between the North Fork of the Gun- nison and Rock Creek. Ridge below station No. 34, west of Coal Creek. Coal Creek, Near camp 36. 0. Summit of station 38, east of Smith’s Fork of the Gunnison. Slope of station 38. Station 39, east of station 32. North side of Smith’ s¥ork, near foot of station 38. Do. Station 40, north of the North Fork of the Gun- nison. Do. Station 42, between North Fork of Gunnison and branches of Grand River. Station 45, northwest of station 42. Ridge leading to station 47. Summit of station 48, south of Grand River. Slope of station 48, south of Grand River. .| Base of station 48, ‘south of Grand River. Top of mesa, near station 54, south of Grand River, north end. Top of mesa, near station 59, south end, east of Gunnison River. Bluff on Gunnison River. below station 60. Whitish UMEKSINA) wosbeenosnorasbucaunesernocadecs Station 71, on Gunnison River. Purplshitrachytesssce sete cesses eee eee West of station 71, on north side of Gunnison River. Porphyritic obsidian, with spherules........... Wahite tute. ooo. astome sere ioe aire eet Above station 73, on north side of Gunnison iver. Graystrachyte) sees ses eesescee nese rereonee ee Do. orphyriticlopsidianeeneeeese eee seen ceeeeeeoee Do. Purple vesicular rhyolite, with hyolite and Do. chalcedony in the cavities. inightitrachytessaces scene reso wesc eee eee ee Do. Purple trachyte..... AON iy SISTA ae A alee SUV Ue cet | Station 77, on north side of the Gunnison, near the Grand Caiion. eeuxplesrhyolitemencssesssecseeeeeeeececeeece tee Do. 5 | Tufaceous trachyte (in breccia) Ns MA eee Station 79, on south fork of Smith’s Fork of the Gunnison, Trachytoinibrecciaesse eee eee eee aee eee eee 0. Trachyte, greenish, in breccia ..........-..---. Do. REPORT OF feoM 2 EN Dita. oS. vie: 1ST. 181 WASHINGTON, D. C., May 15, 1875. Sir: I have the honor herewith to submit my report for 1874. According to instructicus feeeived, I took the field July 14, 1874, as geologist of the San Juan division, and returned with it to Denver, Colo., October 19, 1874. During that time more than 3,000 square miles were surveyed topographically and geologically, including all that sec- tion of country known as the San Juan mining district. The very rugged character of the region, and the inclemency of the weather, impeded our progress somewhat, and the latter not unfrequently was a serious obstacle to the successful and speedy completion of the work. Four chapters and a “ conclusion” comprise the accompanying report. Some difficulty was experienced in finding a suitable basis for classifica- tion in arranging the material collected. The plan of dividing by formations was adopted finally. The first chapter treats of the meta- morphic area, the second of the volcanic, the third of the sedimentary area. In the fourth chapter the geology and geognosy of the imme- diate vicinity of the mining region, as well as the mineralogical features of the mines, have been considered. |leopac - An. 10: Lemnajscutata 2. 7.252262. -[c 552s se sceo ne =e ob fosnass ado: ||lssocdcllsaccagaccenode 11. Ottelia Americana..........--.--.----..--..--- Boee eseacde lla Sea (Seem ine| a mee matatice see Me Sabalvora val asee ccc icmaa cies cee cetera ae cee cee : 13. Dryophyllum subfaleatum........-.-....--..--- sbecdolls coecsicooues lisa soogibososcllooaacsoncacnce 14. Dryophyllum crenatum...............-----.--- ae : 15. Populus melanaria .-.. 16. Populus melanaroides . 17. Ficus asarifolia......-. fue 18. Ficus dalmatica.~..-2.....2.:-2 022-2022 s2csee-- 19. Ficus planicostata......--..-.---.------------- SOM I CUS tilizefOliay suse sateen octet eel eto EMHICUSNTRE SU anise ssa tee sacle ieeeisieees cei ere PP Mi NORD Nines ose sccousaacsscooscaocasees Ad svLauTuUs proestaNss—-- oe esc ee coon ecco wee BEL NGlo te metry He bobo oasanoncoseaespeoSess lasedae|soodee|(acccs |isoode Wooces|) 0b ouosoneenandc 25. Viburnum Whymperi...-.-..----.--..--------- MEBs sdGccadonseas 26. Viburnum marginatum .....-._-.:---.--------. Gb |lessaoscenese o- 27. Diorpyros brachysepala........-....----------- Web \omoosogheeonac 28. Greviopsis Cleburni....-....--..-.------. ----- s sconnal[sooage |losastidcoaoaues 29. Rhus membranacea...--...----.---------+------ SJissosos|| sco ses{latoosalSacod-laosoos caneda 35 30. Inglans rhamnoides ..-.....-..--..---.---------|---<--|------|--0--- Jecees-|-eeee- UGE saa shaososcas *An. for analagous; Id. for identical. Of the thirty species enumerated in this table, one is identical with a Canadian species recognized as Tertiary, as seen below, from quota- tions of Prof. G. M. Dawson’s Geological Report. Six are identical with and six also analogous to those of the Lower European Miocene, two are identical with, and one allied to, Arctic Miocene species. Six have a close relation to those of the Lower European Eocene, or rather of the° LESQUEREUX.] EVIDENCE OF AGE OF LIGNITIC GROUP. 287 Tertiary division, separated at its base under the name of Paleocene. Three are identified and two analogous, in the flora of Golden. Nine identical and one analogous, in that of Black Butte; and four have an- alogy with Cretaceous forms. The relation of Point of Rocks with the Canadian Tertiary is especially marked by Lemna scutata, a floating plant, described by Prof. J. W. Dawson, in the report of the geology and resources of the region in the vicinity of the forty-ninth parallel. The geologist of the commission, Prof. George Mercer Dawson, obtained the specimens from a bed of clay near the very base of the Lignitic formation, where, according to the in- formation kindly furnished to me, the vegetable remains representing this species were very abundant, but difficult to get from the crumbling shale. Though their reference to any living species is not distinctly marked, the peculiar character of the plants does not permit any doubt about its identity with that of Point of Rocks, which is also represented by numerous specimens. Half the spezimens from this place bear re- mains of this species and of another, Pistia corrugata, which may be a mere form of the same. In regard to the identity of the Lignitic meas- ures of Canada with those of the United States, the evidence is equally conclusive. The report quoted above proves it, by good sections and diagrams, which indicate the same distribution of Lignitic beds, clay, and sandstone strata, as in the great Lignitic of the Rocky Mountains, of which that of Canada is a mere continuation. It enumerates, also, besides those which are descirbed, a number of plants from the Lower Tertiary, of a higher stage, mostly of Miocene types. In remarking upon the fossil plants which he had to determine, the celebrated professor of Montreal, J. W. Dawson, says, ‘* That the plants of the first group are for the most part identical with those found by American geologists, in the Fort Union series, and which have been de- termined by Professor Newberry and by M. Lesquereux. They are also similar to plants collected by Dr. Richardson, in the Lignitic series of the Mackenzie River, as described by Heer, and represented by speci- mens in the collection of the geological survey, &c. They alsoapproach very closely the so-called Miocene floras of Alaska and Greenland, as described by Heer, and in their facies, and in several of their species, they coincide with the Miocene floras of Europe.” He then adds, “If we were to regard the affinities of the plants merely, and to compare them with the Miocene of other countries, and also to consider the fact that several of the species are identical with those still living, and that the whole facies of the flora coincides with that of modern temperate Amer- ica, Jittle hesitation would be felt in assigning the formation in which they occur to the Miocene period. On the other hand, when we consider the fact, that the lower beds of this formation hold the remains of rep- tiles of Mesozoic types; that the beds pass downward into rocks hold- ing Baculites and Inocerami; and that a flora essentially similar is found associated with Cretaceous animal-remains, both in Dakota* and Van- couver’s Island, we should be inclined to assign them at least to the base of the Eocene. From this it seems that Professor Dawson does not separate the two essential groups of the Tertiary: the upper one with its Miocene types, a flora indicating a temperate climate like that of the middle zone of the United States ; the lower one with its numerous species of Palms, of Ficus, &c., evidently representing a subtropical vegetation. In this last flora, the one which is now under examination in this paper, there is no species identical or analogous to any of those of the Dakota group. * The assertion is right for Vancouver’s Island but not for the Dakota group. 288 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The extraordinary separation of both floras has been sufficiently estab- lished by former comparison and descriptions of species. In the upper stage some rare types of the Cretaceous re-appear. But apparently the specimens obtained by the survey mostly represented the upper stage of the Canadian Lignitic. For Professor Dawson describes and enumerates, from Porcupine Creek, seventeen species, all of Miocene type, and most of them formerly described by Professor Heer and Professor Newberry. from the Miocene formations of Alaska, Greenland, and especially from the Union group, with which the Porcupine Creek group appears closely allied. These plants are: Equisetum species, similar to E. arcticum Heer. Glyptostrobus Europeus, Heer. Sequoia Langsdorfii Bret. Thuia interrupta Newby. Phragmites ? species. Scirpus species. Populus Richardsoni Heer. Corylus rostrata Ait. Corylus American. Walta. Diospyros species. Rhamnus concinnus, Newby. Carya antiquorum, Newby. . Juglans cinerea? or J. bilinica, Ung. Viburnum pubescens, Pursh. To this and by comparison are added the species catalogued by Heer, from Richardson’s collection on the Mackenzie, which, says Professor Dawson, belongs to the same region. ‘They are: . Glyptostrobus Europzeus Heer. . Sequoia Langsdorfii Brgt. Pinus species. Smilax Franklini. . Populus Richardsoni. Populus arctica. . Populus Hookeri. Salix Rheana. Betula species. 10. Corylus Macquarrii. 11. Quercus Olatseni. 12. Platanus aceroides. 13. Hedera McClurii. 14. Pterospermites dentatus. 15. Phyllites aroideus. 16. Antholithes amissus. 17. Carpolithes seminulum. The species described in the same report from the lower stage of the Lignitic of Canada are fewer and apparently represented by more im- perfect specimens. They are Hquisetum Parlatorti, Heer, of the Miocene of Europe, a species to which #. Haydenti of Carbon is closely allied. Its habitat is marked as Great Valley. ' Lemna scutata sp. nov., abundant at the Bad Lands, and also at Point of Rocks. Scirpus species, Bad Lands. i Salix Rheana? Heer (Great Valley), species of the Miocene of Green- and. CO OOS CU CO DOE LESQUEREUX. | EVIDENCE OF AGE OF LIGNITIC GROUP. 289 Sapindus affinis, Newby, (Bad Lands), species of the Union group. Rhamnus, an undescribed species (Great Valley), corresponding, by its preserved part, to kR. Hridanit Ung., which is Micus jynx, a Miocene species of Europe and of the upper American Lignitie also. Aesculus antiquus, Trapa borealis, and Carpolithes, three new species, described from obscure specimens, from the same locality as that of Lemna, the Bad Lands, west of Woody Mountain. From the exposition of this flora, it is not surprising that Professor Dawson should admit, as the result of his study of the fossil plants of the Lignitic, the Tertiary age of these formations. For, indeed, in this flora there is, as remarked already, no trace of any vegetable remains which, by comparison with the species of the Dakota. group or with those of the Cretaceous of Europe, could be recognized as identical or even related to any of them. Coming back to the other plants of Point of Rocks for considering their characters for an evidence of their age, by comparison with other groups of floras than that of Canada, we find in the table three of them marked as analogous to Cretaceous types. The first, Pistia corrugata, may be, as remarked in the description, an undeveloped or young form of Lemna scutata, a question here without importance. At first I con- sidered this species as being the first of this genus recognized in a fossi! state, for none has been published as yet. But Count Saporta informs me that a species, Pistia Mayelii, Sap. ined., has been found in the fresh- water Upper Cretaceous of Fuveau, France. From the sketch kindiy communicated by the author, his species appears very different in its characters from that of Point of Rocks. The generic affinity, however, is worth remarking, for a plant so profusely represented as is our species, which, by itself or mixed with Lemna scutata, covers both sides of a number of large specimens. By the same degree of affinity, I have marked in the Cretaceous col- umn of the table Sequoia longifolia, also found at Black Butte, and Sequoia biformis ; the first on account of a distant likeness to 8. Smit- hiana, and the other to 8S. Reichenbachi and S. rigida, three species recognized, the first in the lower, the two others in both the upper and lower stages of the Cretaceous of Greenland. The wide distribution of Sequoia species is generally known; it is marked here by the presence of these two species in two stages of the Cretaceous. But without taking into account the longevity of these forms, we have to consider that if we have here two conifers merely rélated to Cretaceous species, this cannot eliminate the testimony of Sequoia brevifolia, which is as profusely represented in the flora of Point of Rocks as Pistia, and by specimens in a perfect state of preservation. One-half of the specimens of Mr. Cleburn, besides a large number of those of Professor Hayden, show it in its two somewhat different forms. As it is distinctly and easily determined, its characters being precise, and as this conifer is a repre- sentative of the Miocene flora of Greenland and of that of the Baltic, its . documentary evidence is more positive than that of the two other Sequoia represented as yet by small fragments, and merely allied to Cretaceous types. I consider as referable to the Eocene by analogy of distribution Sabal Grayana and the two species of Dryophyllum of Point of Rocks. That Palms have originated in the Cretaceous is now an established fact. Schimper, in his Vegetable Paleontology, indicates as from Cretaceous formations two species of uncertain affinity. And nevertheless, in a, more recent work, the Flora of Gelinden, by Saporta and Marion, the authors remark that one species of Palms only was known by its fronds 19 290 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. from the Cretaceous. The recent discovery by Schweinfurth of a fruit, Palmacites rimosus, Heer, * in the Upper Cretaceous white chalk of the oasis of Chargeh, west of Thebes (about 25° latitude north), is another evidence of the presence of paims in the Upper Cretaceous. That, how- ever, remains of this kind are extremely rare even at the end of the _ Cretaceous is proved by the importance attached to the discovery of a fruit of this kind in a region under the tropic. From the Paleocene, as represented in the floras of Gelinden and of Sezane, no species of Palms have been positively determined. [or the fragments described in this last flora under the generic name of Ludoviopsis are indefinitely referred by the author eithertothe Pandanee ortothe Palms. As yet,of the fifty species of known fossil Palms from their fronds, twenty belong to the Mio- cene, especially to its lower stage; eight are described from the Tertiary of Italy, without reference to any of its ‘divisions, nine are Oligocene, twelve Hocene, and one Cretaceous. Of the eight species of Sabal deseribed, one species is Miocene, two Oligocene, and five Hocene. Sabal andegavensis Schp., and S&S. precursoria Schp., two species of the Upper EHocene of France, are very closely related, ‘the first to Sabal communis of Golden, the other to Sabal Grayana found in many localities of the Lower Lignitie, from Mississippi to Vancouver. In considering the Lignitic fiora by the specimens of fossil plants from Black Butte, Golden, Colorado Springs, the Raton Mountains, &e., where the preponderance of remains of Sabal and Flabellaria is so marked, how could it be possible, if even we had no other characters for direction, to refer it to the Cretaceous? The above speaks plainly, and shows how I had to recognize the flora of Vancouver as Tertiary, from the numerous specimens of Sabal sent by Professor Evans from Nanaimo, even if the other plants of the locality had not represented Tertiary types. It was the same case for the flora of the Mississippi State, where the Palms are also in preponderance. At, Point of Rocks, four large specimens upon sandstone represent the same species of Sabal as that of Vancouver and Mississippi, S. Grayana, which, in the opinion of a celebrated European paleontologist, is one of the finest and most positively characterized species of the genus. The two species of Dryophyllum described from Point of Rocks are indicated in the table of distribution as analogous to the Hocene. This genus represents a separate section of the oaks, corresponding by the form of the leaves and the indentations of their borders to the Chestnut- oaks of the present North American flora. Messrs. Debey and Htting- hausen have separated it for the classification of some leaves found in the Cretaceousof Belgium. It represents, therefore, a Cretaceous type, which, however, like some others of the same formation, Fagus, Platanus, Se., does not appear to have reached its full dev elopment from or at its origin. We see it, for example, in the Dakota group flora, in the proportion ot two species in about one hundred and thirty, while in the Paleocene flora of Gelinden it has four species in thirty, and the same number in forty- eight in the flora of Sezane. It then re-appears by more or less numer- ous representatives in analogous species of Quercus, and may therefore be followed nearly without interruption to the present time. From this it is clear that the reference of fossil species of this genus, when remarked in connection with remains of Tertiary plants, should more appropriately pertain to the Eocene than to the Cretaceous. Therefore if the presence of species of Dryophyllum in the Point of Rocks flora, and that also of Pitsia, Sequoia biformis, and Sequoia longifolia, im- * Ueber fossile fruchte der Oase Chargeh, O. Heer. in Denks. der Schweiz, Naturf. Gesells., vol. xxvii, 1876. LESQUEREUX. ] EVIDENCE OF AGE OF LIGNITIC GROUP. ~ 291 prints to it an odd physiognomy, it is either as remnants of the past, merely recording a few features of old generations passed away, or as contemporanéous long persistent types, which do not distinetly charac- terize any peculiar epoch. As proof of this assertion we have the true Lower Eocene character marked in the same flora of Point of Rocks by four species, Ficus planicostata, Viburnum marginatum, Populus me- lanarioides, and Greviopsis Cleburni, which evidently, related to species of the Sezane flora, though in various degrees, have no affinity what- ever to Cretaceous types. The flora of Point of Rocks is related to that of Black Butte by nine identical forms or by one-third of its species. In considering the evi- dence of synchronism, the identity of two floras could not be more posi- tively proved than this, and nevertheless we have here two to three thou- sand feet of interposed measures. It is a remarkable fact, upon which more will be remarked presently. The group of plants at Point of Rocks has, besides the Eocene representatives, six species identified with, and as many related to those of the Micecene of Europe. Therefore we see here, what has been remarked in other localities of the Lignitic, a com- pound or admixture of oid and young tertiary types, in comparison at least with the fossil floras of Kurope, and thus a gereral character which does not distinctly relate to any peculiar stage of Kuropean Tertiary. We have the Paleocene by relation to species of Sezane; the Upper Eocene, especially the Ligurian or Oligocene, by the Palms, and the Miocene by a number of common and generally distributed forms which, like Sequoia langsdorfii, Populus mutabilis, Ficus tiliefolia, Cinnamomum mississipiense, khamnus rectinervis, Juglans rugosa, &e., are omnipresent and constant types, indicating merely the Tertiary age for the Lignitie flora. For this reason I shall continue to carefully record its pointsof affinity with the divers groups of the geological floras of Europe; but at the same time denying as yet sufficient evidence of identity to any of them I persist to consider it simply as the Lower Hocene flora of this continent. I said above that the identity of specific forms at Point of Rocks and Black Butte was worth recording more e¢arefully, as a remarkable case in regard to the distribution of plants. In marine strata the long preservation of types is a matter of little concern, for the cireumstance under which the marine faunas are distributed may be the same for very long periods, as, for example, the mineral elements entering into the com- pounds, the depth and temperament of the water, We. But thatacompara- tively large number of land or fresh-water plants, subject to medifica- tions or forced to migrations by atmospheric changes, may be preserved identical through the lapse of time indicated by the thickness of the measures heaped along Bitter Creek, has not been proved by as positive an evidence as we have it here. The distance between both localities is eleven miles only, and the superposition of the strata is all along so clear, that there is no possibility of any mistake in the calculation of the vertical space separating both points. It is scarcely possible to hazard a conjecture upon the length of time indicated by the building up of these intermediate measures. Evidently of a shore formation, the heap- ing of their materials may have been more rapid than for the deposits at the wide bottom of the sea. They evidence, however, in their suc- cession, a series of sandstone beds which though of greater thickness are interstratified by beds of clay, built up of swampy deposits of long duration and especially of coal-beds, still more clearly denoting the slow progress of the work. A geological fact like the one remarked between the relation of the floras of Point of Rocks and Black Butte and the positive evidence of the 292 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF TIE TERRITORIES. long periods of time and formations which separate them is an instruc- tive document, whose importance as point of comparison in the study of the geographical distribution of our present flora and of its analogy to ancient types will be easily accepted by botanists. But here it has to be considered merely in connection with the question of the age of the Lower Lignitic. The Cretaceous Dakota group is separated from Point of Rocks by a thickness of strata about the same as that which is marked between - Point of Rocks and Black Butte. Nevertheless, between the floras of the Nebraska and Kansas Cretaceous and that of Point of Rocks and Black Butte, we find scarcely any analogous type, and not a single identical form. ‘The erosions may have indeed considerably thinned the marine strata representing the Cretaceous above the Dakota group, but that cannot lessen the strength of the deduction made from the total disconnection of two floras, one of which denotes by its essential characters a marked dissimilarity of atmospheric circumstances, a weighty evidence, if not a positive proof, of a change of epoch, if not in the sea, at least upon the land. It is useless to repeat that, as yet, no marine invertebrate remains of Cretaceous type have been discovered in the whole Lignitic measures above Point of Rocks. We may admit, however, that while the Tertiary age was, at its beginning, represented as a land formation, as seen by its flora, a Cretaceous marine fauna may have still locally persisted in deep seas. Facts of this kind are recorded in European geology. The presence of the Saurian Agathaumas in the Lignite bed of Black Butte is then certainly explainable as denoting the wandering of that animal out of its domain, and its death by penetra- ting into a peat-bog and being irretrievably swallowed by its soft mat- ter. If once imbedded in soft peat, no animal, not even man, can get ont of it. By this fact, and also from the reason that the coriaceous, ligne- ous plants of the bogs are not food for mammals, I explain the scarcity of bones of Hocene animals in the lower beds of the Lignitic. As a shore formation, a surface covered with deep bogs surrounded by sand wastes, this primitive land would not afford food to mammals or even be accessi- ble to them. Every one who has explored a peat-bog knows how these formations are deprived of animal life. Very few bones of the Aurochs have been found in the bogs of North Germany, and the area covered by the Lignitic shows how compact and continuous, not to say universal, were those swamps of the Lower Tertiary. I believe, there- fore, that if the bones of Eocene mammals are not discovered in the lowest part of the Lignitic, they will be found in the upper strata. Moreover, the agglomeration of bones in certain localities depend on pecu- liar circumstances, and donotimmediately and forcibly relate, like plants, to the geueral characters of a whole period. The question of the subdivision of the Lignitic or Tertiary measures, which I have separated in four groups, from the non-coincidence in the general character of the flora, is still disputed, and this division con- tradicted by the assertion that the discordance is merely apparent, and a result of the geographical distribution of species, as we may see it now in groups of plants at distant localities. The contempo- raneity of the fossil floras is not merely marked by the identity of some species, but also by a kind of general character denoting the same climatic circumstances. The modification due to the geographical dis- tribution may be easily recognized by the presence or absence of a number of species in the flora of the Bitter Creek basin, of that of Colorado, the Raton Mountains, the Lower Union group, the Missis- Sippi, and Vancouver. There is between these localities a wide dis- LESQUEREUX. | EVIDENCE OF AGE OF LIGNITIC GROUP. 293 tance; and, indeed, the Vancouver flora may show, in its details, marked points of dissimilarity to that of the Mississippi. But, one of the prom- inent characters of the Lower Lignitic is the predominance of Palms, and we find it manifest in all the localities named above. Indeed, I have found remains of Palm, especially of Sabal, whenever I have seen Lower Lignite beds; and, as it has been remarked formerly, Sabal Grayana has been observed on specimens from Vancouver, Point of Rocks, Golden, the Mississippi, &c. With this there are, in all these floras, a predominance of subtropical forms, and the absence of northern types, rendering more evident their correlation in time. Sufficient details have been given on the species of the group, and on their distribution, in Dr. Hayden’s former report (1873), p. 378 to 390. The group of plants of the Evanston division has, as yet, no remains of palm-leaves, but fruits doubtfully referable to the Paim family; with this it has some of its species of leaves represented at Golden, others at Carbon. The general character of its flora does not indicate as high an average degree of temperature as that of the Lower Lignitic. The group has been separated, as an intermediate one whose relation is not positively fixed now. According to Professor Cope’s description, bones of Hocene vertebrate animals have been found in connection with it. Itstrue horizon may be rendered more definite by further discoveries. But in the group of Carbon the general character of the flora is evident, and its relation to the Miocene of Europe and of Greenland is exposed, not only by this general kind of related facies, but also by a number of species, like Platanus aceroides and Guillelme,* Acer, Populus arctica, Taxodium dubium, Alnus Kefersteinti Betula, Quercus, Corylus, indicating, together with the total absence of Palms, a marked difference in the climatic circumstances governing the flora and that of the Lower Lignitie group. This difference, also, is not remarked at Carbon only. It is reproduced in the sume degree, by general affinity and identity of species, in the flora of Coral-Hollow, San Joachin County, and of Con- tra Costa, south of Moant Diablo, California; of Bridge Creek, John Day Valley, and of Blue Mountain, Oregon; of Bellingham Bay, of © Alaska, as established by Heer’s flora of that country, and therefore fol- lowed northward from Carbon to Greenland. Some of its types are so definite that a single specimen of a species of Acer or Platanus would suffice to positively identify this greup as Miocene, just as a few spec- imens of Quercus furcinervis proved the Hocene ageof the Cascade Mount- ains of Oregon, whose formations were at first supposed to be Post- Tertiary or of recent origin. A few words more will be sufficient to answer the other objections | recorded at the beginning of this paper against the value of vegetable paleontology in its application to geology for the determination of the age of the formations. We know now well enough that remains of fossil plants are abundantly found in the land deposits of this continent. The result obtained from the onset of American researches in vegetable paleontology let us surmise whatan immense amount of documentary data the after-coming geologist shall be able to gather in the same field. The authority of animal-remains shall continue undoubted as far as it refers to marine formations. But when land formations are to be considered, theauthority should, when evident, be accepted as decisive. * The fragment of leaf found in connection with the bones of the Saurian at Black Butte, and considered, from the character of nervation of the middle of the leaf, the only part ' preserved, as doubtfully referable to P. Guillelme ? was identified from better specimens, showing the outlines of whole leaves, as a new species of Viburnum, described in this paper as Viburnun platanoides. ¥ 294 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. There may be some exceptional cases where both kind of evidence may be in opposition, however, and afford reasons for dispute of authority. Forexample, no Cretaceous invertebrate marine remains have been found in the strata of the Lignitic above Point of Rocks, nor in the Bitter Creek series above this point, nor in the whole extent of the Colorado Basin; hence the plants, being characteristic and Tertiary} the whole formation should be admitted as Tertiary, of course. But Vancouver shows, as far as its flora is known, identity of characters of its fossil plants with those of the Lower Lignitic, as known, from the above-named stations; its relation is therefore defined as land formation, and this should be to my persuasion considered as evidence of synchronism and therefore of its Tertiary age, though the beds bearing Tertiary plants may be locally and casually overlaid by marine strata with Cretaceous animal-remains. This case has some analogy with that of the presence of the bones of a Cretaceous Saurian at Black Butte. Conformability or uncomformability of stratification proves very little in regard to the changes which are considered as indicating a new epoch or period. Of course the disturbances of wide-expanded surfaces of the earth modify in various degrees the atmospheric circumstances, and, in a less degree, however, those which govern the distribution of animals under water. Therefore the changes in the characters of the floras or the faunas may be more or less evident in correlation with these dis- turbanees. But these are more generally so gradual that they cannot be remarked by traces of uncontormability, and the consequences in modifications of marine or land beings can be appreciated only at very long distances of time. Gradual changes of this kind seem to have pro- gressed during the whole period of the Cretaceous formations of the West, trom the base of the Dakota group to that of the Tertiary Lignitic, and later still; for in the whole vertical space occupied by the deposits no unconformability of strata is remarked. But the concurrence of gradual atmospheric modifications with those of the earth surface is distinetly recognizabie in the general character of the flora of the lower Lignitic compared to that of the Dakota group, this being of a temperate climate, while that of the Lignitic proves a subtropical one. Of course the life under deep seas cannot be modified in the same degree and in the same period of time. It is but very slowly influenced by land atmospheric changes, and from this there is in some instances between the in- habitants of the land and those of the sea, a forcible geological discord- ance, like that exposed at Black Butte by the Saurian and the plant’s remains wherein it was imbedded. Perhaps the more weighty objection against the deductions taken from the characters of the Lower Lignitie flora is that of the unreliability of comparison between the vegetable types of both continents in their relation to supposed synchronous epochs. From this objection it is said that we should not attempt, in regard to the distribution of the North American fossil plant, to consider anything known of the geo- logical relation of those of Europe. This objection appears at first trifling, and it seems that it could be answered by the mere assertion that as American paleontologists have constantly taken their points of com- parison from Europe, in considering the relation of the animal remains to the age of the strata where they were discovered, vegetable paleon- tology should be allowed to use the same privilege; for no section of natural science can be defined and progress a priori or without means of comparison, and where to find any if the European scientific do-' main should be closed. But in this objection there is something more than the mere privilege of comparison. It seems positive that from its LESQUEREUX.] EVIDENCE OF AGE OF LIGNITIC GROUP. 295 first appearance the American land flora has a proper American character, recognizable not merely in differences, but in priority of types. I have already alluded to this phenomenon, which, though seemingly observ- able in many instances, is, however, not positively ascertained as an actuality, and not referable to a principle of a general application. We have, as far as our knowledge goes, a precedence of vegetable Devonian types which are already seen in the Silurian; the Carboniferous, also, are recognized by remains of Lepidodendron as low as the Marcellus epoch. The Sub-Carboniferous flora of this continent is mostly Devonian for Europe, and the Lower Carboniferous has a number of specific forms, considered by European authors as Permian. Farther up, the Trias is Jurassic by its Cycadew, and the Cretaceous of the Dakota group is typically allied to the Miocene species, and still more to the present flora of this country. If it is so, the objection expressed above is a mighty one, for then our Lignitic flora might be of an older period and representative of an American Cretaceous formation, though having already the characters of European Hocene floras?) We have, in this peculiar case, a point of reliable comparison which answers the ob- jection. The flora of Point of Rocks, considered as Tertiary, is prob- ably at the lowest stage of the formation. Its characters have been exposed in a table of comparison. Now, the floras of Gelinden, in Belgium, and of Sézanne, in France, are connected with strata ac- knowledged by stratigraphy and animal paleontology as of the oldest European Tertiary. And here as at Gelinden, for example, the Creta- ceous type, represented by Dryophyllum, is far more evident than at Point of Rocks, and in the flora of Sézanne it is about in the same, proportion as in that of Point of Rocks and Black Butte. In this case, therefore, no trace of precedence of vegetable types is remarked on this side of the Atlantic, and the floras of both continents, offering evident synchronism by stratification, and both animal and vegetable paleontology, may be considered as giving reliable evidence by the comparison of their characters. It is claimed that the opinion on the Tertiary age of the Lignitic contradicts evidence admitted by the highest scientific authority. Though no personal opinion may be recognized as authoritative in science, we have, on the question discussed here, a concurrence of | views expressed by Dr. Newberry for the Lignitie flora of the Union group of the Upper Missouri River, and by Prof. J. W. Dawson for that of Canada. These are certainly the highest authorities in this country. From Europe, the opinion of Count Saporta, who is deeply interested in the progress of the botanical paleontology of this country, is not less explicit. After the examination of some of the plates prepared for the flora of the Lignitic, he writes: ‘ That Sphenopteris Hocenica is closely allied to Asplenium Wegmanni, Bret., of Sézanne; that species analogous to what I have described as Abictites dubius and Abietites setigera have been found in the Upper Cretaceous of St. Panlet, France; that our Palms, especially Palmacites Goldianus, denote Hocene; that the magnificent species Sabal Grayana is allied to, and perhaps an ancestor of, Sabal major, which in Europe appears at the beginning of the Miocene; aud that Flabellaria communis is extremely similar to Sabal andegaviensis, which is found in the Hocene — Superior of the south of France, but which has not been figured till now.” From all this and other points of affinity which the cele- brated paleontologist of France makes in regard to the species of the lower group of the Lignitic flora, he concludes as follows :*—“ In re- * In letter, October 19, 1875. 296 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. suming, and notwithstanding that Abietites, which I consider as a Cre- taceous type, your first group seems indeed to be legitimately Hocene, by its Ferns, its Palms, its coriaceous and prototypical Poplars, its Cinnamomum, and its Viburnum, as related to the Sézanne flora, and by one of its Palms to the Upper Eocene of Angers. If one would ‘suppose this flora more recent than the Eocene, he would have to admit such a dissemblance between Europe and America that every comparison by the floras between the geological stages of both continents should ap- pear an impossibility.” The assimilation of American species with a number of Miocene species published in Europe is considered by Saporta as doubtful and not quite conclusive; and he remarks, also, that, though his opinion on the age of the Lower Lignitic group is given according to present impression, the great geographical distance renders the affinities between compared localities very difficult to fix with precision, even in supposing them contemporaneous. These quotations must be excused by reason of the importanee given now to the question of the age of the Lignitic, which, controverted in various ways, demands light, and has to be considered in every possible point of view. The problem is not yet solved. Requested, as I am, to contribute a share in the discussion, by closely adhering to paleontologi- cal evidence, and exposing it as far as it is given by fossil plants, [had to enter into details in order to show its weight. And no better oppor- tunity could be afforded for this purpose than a review of the group of plants obtained from Point of Rocks by Dr. Hayden. From the following descriptions it will be remarked that some of the . Specimens have been found and communicated to the survey by Mr. William Cleburn, of Omaha, a zealous explorer and student of the vege- table paleontology of the Western Territories. Description of species of fossil plants from Point of Rocks. 1. FUCUS LIGNITUM, sp. nov. Frond flattened, irregularly dichotomous; branches diverging ob- liquely ; branchlets short, terminal, linear-divaricate, tufted, forking at the point. The fragment figured is the only one of this kind in the specimens. It represents a species allied to Spherococcus crispiformis, Sternb., as de- scribed in Heer’s Flor. Tert. Helv. (p. 23, Pl. IV, fig. 1), and still more, perhaps, to the living Fucus canaliculatus, Agh., very common along the coasts of the. Baltic Sea, and also discoverd in numerous specimens in the Tertiary of Spitzbergen. The base of the lowest branches is four millimeters broad, but the size of the branchlets diminishes nearly one- half at each dichotomous division. The terminal branchlets are only half a millimeter broad, fasciculate-dichotomous, short, split, or furcate at the point, and divaricate. The substance appears thin, membrana- ceous, and yellowish. HaApitar.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 2. SALVINIA ATTENUATA, sp. nov. Leaves small, one centimeter or less in diameter, opposite, joined at the narrowed, slightly-pediceled base, round or broadly oval, indis- tinetly reticulate by vertical and parallel rows of quadrate, large cells, marked in the middle by black spots, formed by very small, close cells, or pores, without any trace of a middle nerve. This fine species is related by its reticulation and its size to Salvinia Mildeana, Heer (Balt. Flor., p. 17, Pl. II, figs. 1 and 2), differing from * LESQUEREUX.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 297 it by broader, less distinct, square areolz, the absence of a dividing middle nerve, and the narrowing of the base to a very short pedicel. By these two last characters, this species is unlike any of this genus. It is, however, probable that the two leaves representing it were not, when embedded into the clay, in their full state of maturity, one of them being smaller than the other, and its areolation far less distinct. — In the young ieaves of the living Salvinia natans, the leaves, betore attaining their {ull development, have the middle nerve scarcely dis- cernibie. Hapsirat.—Point of Rocks, William Cleburn. 3. SELAGINELLA ? FALCATA, sp. nov. Frond small, dichotomous ; pinne narrow-linear, one to four centime- ters long, six to seven millimeters broad; pinnules close, two-ranked, in right angle to the rachis, generally covering each other at the bor- ders, faleate upwards, lanceolate-acuminate, suddenly narrowed to the point of attachment, without distinct middle nerve. I have figured four different parts of this plant, which is abundantly scattered among the floating rootlets and upon the specimens of the Lemna? Scutata. It may represent some kind of floating fern, per- haps, rather than a species of Selaginella. It is, however, closely allied to Selaginella Berthoudi, Lsqx., described in Dr. Hayden’s Annual Report for 1873 (p. 395), differing, however, by the two-ranked position of the leaves and their distinctly faleate form. HAaApBirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden, W. Cleburn. One of Mr. Cleburn’s specimens represents a fragment of a stem ten centimeters long, one centimeter broad, round, but flattened by com- pression, covered with densely imbricate leaves of the same form and size as those of the branches. This stem proves the relation of the described fragments to the lycopodiaceous family. 4, SELAGINELLA LACINIATA, sp. nov. ? Branches dichotomously divided ; divisions two to three centimeters long; leaflets? opposite, distichous, divided from the base in three to five filiform lacini®, some of them forking at the middle, all curving upward, or falcate. By its mode of vegetation, the form and divisions of the pinne or branchlets, these small plants are exactly similar to those described from Dr. Hayden’s specimens under the name of Selaginella falcata. The difference is in the remarkable laceration or thread-like divisions of the leaflets. The laciniz distinet and in relievo upon the stone are like the veinlets of fern-leaves, when, by maceration and decomposi- tion, their epidermis has been destroyed, or like skeletons of leaves. In this case, however, as these thread-like branches are more or less nu- merous, either simple or forking from the middle, and thus differing in number and mode of divisions for each leaflet, this appearance cannot result from decomposition in water. It is probable that these remains represent a kind of lycopodiaceous plant, living sometimes partly im- mersed, and that, as it happens in numerous species of water-plants of this epoch, the immersed leaves become decomposed, and grow into la- ciniate divisions, while the emerged ones are entire or undivided. Tbis difference in the leaves is particularly marked in Nasturtium lacustre, Gray, known to every botanist. I do not know, however, any Lyco- podium species showing this kind of variations in leaves. Even LZ. in- undatum has the leaves of the immersed part entire or without divis- 298 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. ions. It is therefore uncertain if the specific separation of these frag- ments is authorizable. Hapirat.—Point of Rocks, William Cleburn. 5. SEQUOIA BREVIFOLIA, Heer. Branches Hexuous; branchlets opposite or alternate, open and diverg- ing near the base, then curving upward and erect from the middle to the top. Leaves of two kinds, either small, short, scaliform at the base of the branchlets and covering the whole of them when young, or oblong, enlarged in the middle, obtuse or abruptly narrowed to a point, and gradually and slightly so toward the decurring base, distichous, oblique, decreasing in length toward the base and the top of the branchlets. We have a large branch* and numerous more fragmentary specimens of this fine species described by Heer in Flor. Arct. (p. 93, Pl. I, fig. 23), from Greenland specimens, in Flor. Spitz. (p. 37, Pl. IV, figs. 2-3), from Spitzbergen specimens, and formerly in Fl. Baltica (p. 21, Pl. LI, fig. 10). It is well characterized by the form of its generally short open dis- tichous leaves, either abruptly pointed, or obtuse, deeply nerved, and slightly decreasing in width from above the middle to the base. We have, however, a number of specimens with somewhat narrower, nearly linear, longer leaves, which show a notable deviation of the normal form. The cone of this species is not known as yet. One of the specimens bear- ing scattered branchlets and leaves of this Sequoia has a cone, which appears to be a flattened cross-section, or perhaps the flattened base of the cone turned upward, the pedicel marking the central point around which the scales, oblong, cuneate, narrow, emarginate at the top, are im- bricated to the borders. These scales rather resemble those of a Glyp- tostrobus than those of a Sequoia. HABiTAt.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden, Wm. Cleburn, whose collection has about one-half of the specimens representing this species in its normal form, and its variety. 6. SEQUOIA LONGIFOLIA, Lsqx., MSS. Branches thick ; leaves closely appressed, erect, long linear lanceolate- pointed or accuminate, enlarged above the slightly contracted and decur- ring base; scars deep, lingulate-pointed, marked by a deep groove in the middle. This species was already described from Black Butte specimens ; these have, some of them at least, longer leaves than those of Black Butte. In these, the leaves average two and a half to three centimeters long and three millimeters wide; in those of Point of Rocks, the leaves, of the same width, are generally five centimeters long, even more. in both forms, they are marked by a broad indistinct middle nerve, and the surface, seen with the glass, appears very thinly striated in the length. This char- acter, as well as the thick consistence of the leaves, seems to prove the identity of the species, though the leaves of the specimens of Point of Rocks are not only longer but proportionally narrower and scarcely contracted to the point of attachment to the branches. In both, these leaves are generally crowded and covering the stem. HABiTat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 7. SEQUOIA PIFORMIS, sp. nov. Stems thick, pinnately branching; branchlets short, obliquely di- verging; leaves either linear or somewhat broader in the middle, grad- * A beautiful specimen, the property of Mr. E.H.Clarke, agent of the Union Pacific Railroad, who kindly lent it for illustration of the species. LESQUEREUX.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 299 ually narrowed to a point, slightly contracted to the decurrent base, slightly incurved or faleate, sometimes erect and appressed to the stem ; scar-leaves triangular or lingulate-pointed. This species apparently bears two kinds of leaves, even upon the same specimens; either long, twocentimeters, and very narrow-linear, less than one millimeter wide, or shorter and broader, decreasing gradually from the base to the point, linear-lanceolate, nearly one and one-half miilime- ters wide and only eight to ten millimeters long; the middle nerve is deeply marked upon both kinds of leaves. I should have considered the numerous specimens béaring branches of this Sequoia as represent- ing two species, the one with narrow longer leaves, the other with shorter broader leaves. But even the difference in the length and proportion- ate width of the leaves is distinctly perceivable upon one of the speci- mens, and the difference also in the length of the leaves, all narrow and of the same width, is evident upon another. There are, moreover, a large number of specimens, all fragmentary indeed; and the difference in regard to the size of the leaves is apparent upon most of them. In the average, the leaves are much narrower than those of Sequoia Reich- enbachi, Heer, to which this species is related by the falcate form of some of the leaves. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 8. WIDDRINGTONIA COMPLANATA, sp. nov. Stem thick, disticho-pinnate; branchlets short, thick, alternate, ob- lique; leaves small, in spiral order, closely imbricate and appressed, oblong-lingulate pointed upon the primary branches, ovate-pointed or thomboidal and shorter upon the obtuse branchlets. This species, represented by many specimens, is evidently related to Widdringtonia antiqua (Sap. EKt., 2, 1, p. 69, Pl. I, fig. 4), for the form of the leaves, which are, however, more closely appressed in the American species, and more distinctly placed in spiral order around the branch- lets. These leaves do not appear of a thick substance, the coat of coaly matter over them being extremely thin. Haxpitat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden, William Cleburn. 9. PISTIA CORRUGATA, sp. nov. Leaves thick, at least toward the base, varyingin diameter from twoto three and one-half centimeters, broadly obovate, generally bordered from above the base by a wavy margin two to five millimeters broad ; gradu- _ ally narrowed into a short pedicel about three millimeters thick, termi- nating into a bundle of radicles; veins emerging from the pedicel in two or three thick bundles, dividing and diverging from the base of the leaves, and forming in ascending, by a kind of abnormal anastomosis, irregularly polygonal meshes. These leaves, resembling in form a small bladder, contracted on one side, seem somewhat inflated, or at least thickened, from the base to above the middle, or composed of two distinct areas, the lower one cir- cular and separated by a narrow groove, or deep line, from the wrinkled border which surrounds it, narrowing, however, gradually toward the pedicel. The areolation of this border seems disconnected and distinct, representing large quadrangular areole, whose subdivisions curve along in festoons. Sometimes, however, the central part is not inflated, or thicker, and in this case, as in specimens representing young leaves, no traces of borders are perceivable. This groove, therefore, and the sep- aration of the leaf in two distinct parts, may be caused by a kind of fold 300 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. around a tergescence of the lower part, formed by an abnormal growth of radicles. The upper surface of the leaves is somewhat rough; the lower surface, inside of the fringe, is dotted with minute holes, or like spongious. The leaves are generally mixed, or superposed to thin foli- form long radicles, all of the same size, coming in bundles from linear rootlets, two to five millimeters thick. ‘They form a thick coating sur- rounding the leaves, or whereupon the leaves are floating, without evi- dent connection or point of attachment to them. At first I supposed these leaves as representing the same species as the following, but their relation to species of Pistia, whose leaves are flat and not like vesicles, seems to indicate, though the likeness in some of the characters may be, that these organs represent two kinds of water- plants. Comparing this one to leaves of Pistia spathulata, Mich., from specimens of Louisiana, the affinity is remarked not only in the obovate shape of the leaves, but in the kind of nervation, by inflated primary veins diverging from the base of the pedicel, where they pass into bun- dles of radicular filaments of the same characters as those of the fossil plant. Most of the leaves of the living species, the old ones especially, bear from the middle to the base an inflated spongious coating similar to that whichis observed on the under surface of the fossil leaves. The more marked difference is in the central part of the fossil species, which appears surrounded by a distinctly-marked deep line, while in the leaves of P. spathulata the thick zone, though definite, terminates in passing up- ward along the primary veins; but this difference, like that of the areo- lation along the borders, is specific only and the generic identity appears clearly defined. Habsirat.— Point of Rocks, very abundant, and covering by itself only large surface of shale, Dr. F. V. Hayden, Wm. Cleburn. 10. LEMNA ScurTATA, Daws. Fronds round, entire, slightly undulate on the edges, sometimes an inch in diameter, single or grouped; roots numerous, filiform, proceeding from a round spot near the notch of the frond. To this species, as described and figured by Professor Dawson (Report on the Geology of the Forty-ninth Parallel, Appendix A, p.329, Tab. XVI, figs. 5 and 6), I refer a number of round bodies, leaves or fronds, mixed with the species described above. Comparing them with the author’s figures, there is no difference whatever, except that if some of them do not show any trace of veins, others, exactly of the same shape, are veined from the base, where the radicular filaments are attached to them and the veins distributed as in the former species. Some specimens also, one of which has been figured, show the basilar part inflated, or the pedicel wherefrom the veins are diverging, just in the center of the cir- cular organism, as if it had been a bladdery or vesicular plant, flattened by compression. I still believe that both the leaves described above and these represent the same kind of vegetable, these being the young and yet undeveloped organs. All the different appearances of these plants, represented by numerous specimens, have been figured, and the comparison of their various forms will, I think, satisfy paleontologists in regard to their relation to a species of Pistia. Hapirat.—Point of Rocks, mixed with the former, Dr. /. V. Hayden, Wm. Cleburn. 11. OTTELIA AMERICANA, sp. nov. Spathe ovate narrowed to a round pedicel, surrounded by an undu- lated and wrinkled fringe, emarginate at the top. LESQUEREUS.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 301 The central part of this organism, representing the spathe of a water- plant, is oval, somewhat inflated, narrowed toa round pedicel, and sur- rounded by a margin or fringe half a centimeter broad, cut or emargin- ate at the top. The middle part is slightly inflated and striate in ‘the length. The border fringe is opaque, and does not show any ap- pearance of nervation. Comparing it to a figure of Ottelia alismordes, Pers., from Ceylon, kindly communicated by Saporta, the fossil plant seems in perfect concordance of characters with the living. HApirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. Ff. V. Hayden, represented by one specimen only, in a good state of preservation. 12. SABAL GRAYANA, Lesqx. Trans. Am. Philsoc., vol. xiii., p. 412, T. xiv., figs.4—6. Frond apparently large, represented by fragments only; rachis flat, elongated linear-acuminate, six to eight inches long, enlarged at its base and rounded on both sides; rays numerous, gradually enlarging upward, half to two and one-half centimeters broad, marked with dis- tant and distinct slender veins. The characters of this species have been described in detail as quoted above. The species is always easily identified by its slender though distinct and equally distant veins. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 13. DRYOPHYLLUM CRENATUM, sp. nov. Leaves oblong, lanceolate, abruptly oblique to the petiole or subtrun- cate; borders deeply, regularly crenate; substance of the leaves some- what thick, subcoriaceous; surface rough ; nervation pinnate, middle nerve flat and broad, lateral veins diverging sixty to sixty-five degrees, flat, distinct, slightly curving in ascending to the borders subecampto- drome, the veins forking up under the sinuses of the teeth, and a branch passing up along the borders from the point where the veins enter the teeth ; nervilles thick, in right angle to the veins, forming, by subdivision and anastomosis, a square or indistinctly polygonal areolation. Of all the species described of this genus, none is comparable to this one, which is especially distinct by its broadly obtusely dentate borders. It is represented by two fragmentary specimens. Hapitat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 14. DRYOPHYLLUM SUBFALCATUM sp. nov. Leaf subcoriaceous, linear-lanceolate, acuminate or sharply pointed ; borders regularly serrate with short blunt teeth turned upward ; lateral veins parallel, diverging thirty to forty degrees, straight to the point of the teeth; fibrille close, thin but distinct, simple or ramified in the middle, the upper ones joining nearly in right angle, a branch veinlet: which passfrom near the point of the lateral veins under the sinuses, and follows along and close to the borders. There is only a fragmentary specimen of this species, the upper half of a leaf. By its form and nervation, it seems at first referable to the genus Castanea, and, truly, it would be easy to find leaves of the present C. vesca apparently perfectly similar to this fossil one. There is, how- ever, a difference in the areolation, or in the arrangement of the tertiary veins. In these primary types of Quercus and Castanea described under the name of Dryophylium, the upper branch of the secondary veins passes from near the point of the vein under the sinuses and closely follows the borders, which thussometimes appear narrowly marginate, and is joined nearly at right angle by the upper oles This charac- 302 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. ter, though still indistinctly traced in the leaves of Castanea, and of some species of chestnut-oaks, is far less regular, the upper branches which follow the borders being of various sizes, not so exactly parallel to the borders, and not in close proximity to them. This new species 1s intimately related to Dryophylium Dewalquet Sap. & Mer. (flor de Ge- linden), especially to the fragment figured in Pl. Ill, Fig. 2. It differs only by the shorter, less acute teeth of the borders, the slightly faleate . form of the leaf, and the close thin fibrille. Hapsrrat.—Point of Rocks, Wm. Cleburn. 15. POPULUS MELANARIA, Heer. _ Leaves with a long, slender petiole; deltoid, subtruncate at base; borders acutely serrate; primary basilar lateral nerves emerging from above the border base of the leaf, with a pair of thin marginal veinlets underneath. Considering what can be seen of this leaf from the fragment which represents merely its lower half, with the long, slender petiole, the dis- tinct nervation, and a few of the border-teeth, it exhibits characters in accordance with those described above, and translated from Schimper’s Vegetable Paleontology, and especially with the figure given of this species in Flor. Tert. Helv. (Pl. LIV, fig. 7). Professor Herr remarks, that it essentially differs from Populus latior, var. subtruncata, by the position of the lateral primary nerves at a distance from the border-base of the leaves. In the leaf figured as indicated above, this distance 1s still greater than in that in the Flor. Helv. Heer remarks also that he has seen a large number of specimens of the same species, but that in all except one, which he has figured, the upper part of the leaves was destroyed, as it isin ours. He mentions as distinctive characters, the acutely serrate borders of the leaves, and the middle nerve thicker than the lateral ones, the same as seen upon our specimen. I have, therefore, no doubt about the relation of this leaf to the Huropean species. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 16. POPULUS MELANARIOIDES, sp. nov. Leaf subcoriaceous, nearly round, subtruncate at base, long-petioled ; borders undulate; nervation ternate from above the base of the leaf, secondary veins two pairs, at a great distance from the primary ones, these much branched outside; the others simple, all the divisions pass- ing to near the borders, where they become effaced in the areolation ; nervilles thick, flexuous, in right angle to the veins, forming by rami- fication at right angle square polygonal meshes. By the subcoriaceous substance, the long slender petiole of the leaves, this species is referable to the section of the Trepide (Trembling Pop- lars). Asin Populus tremulafolia, Sap. (Et., 3, 2, p. 26, Pl. III, fig. 4), to which this species is allied, the veins and their branches pass through the areas to very near the borders, which they seem to reach. The American form differs merely by less-distinctly undulate borders, the distance of the primary lateral nerves above the base, and by the great distance of the secondary veins. These two last characters are, how- ever, of no moment for the specification of poplar-leaves, as can be re- marked in the examination of a few leaves of the too common Populus alba. In fossil species, Populus Massiliensis, Sap. (Et., 3, 2, p. 30, Pl. II, fig. 6), is represented by three leaves, each of a different character of | nervation. The relation of this species with that of the Tertiary LESQUEREUX.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 303 (Miocene?) of Provence, described by Saporta, may be therefore more intimate than it appears from the comparison of a single leaf. Our species is also comparable to Populus heliadum, Ung., by its form, and to P. melanaria, Heer, by its nervation. HAgiratT.—Point of Rocks, Wm. Cleburn. 17. FICUS ASARIFOLIA, Htt. Leaves petioled, broadly reniform, subcordate or subpeltate, very obtuse, small, with borders crenulate ; primary nerves palmately five to seven; middle nerve straight; upper lateral ones strong, curving inward, branching and anastomosing with the upper secondary veins; veinlets transversal, their ramification forming a protuberant, or em- bossed, very distinct, polygonal areolation. Though this species has been already briefly described from speci- mens found at Golden, in Dr. F. V. Hayden’sreport for 1872 (p. 378), it had as yet not been figured, the fragments of leaves being generally too incomplete. It is, however, easily recognized by its peculiar nerva- tion, forming small, elevated, polygonal areole, an areolation like an embossed checker-board, resembling that of Asarum Huropeum. The fragments of Golden seem to be part of much larger leaves than those of Kttinghausen, who described the species in Bilin Flora (p. 80, Pl. XXYV, figs. 2-3). These per contra, from specimens of Point of Rocks, are perfectly welland entirely preserved leaves, rather smaller, except one, than the leaves of Bilin. They are also slightly more expanded on the sides, or reniform, and the crenulations less distinct, but these border-divisions are, for their size, related to the areolation, which is wider in proportion of the size of the leaves. Our leaves, also, are evidently peltate, at least in two of the figured specimens. One only has the position of the thick petiole marked similarly to that of the European leaves; but even the representation of the species by the au- thor seems to indicate peltate leaves, whose borders are erased at the base or at the point of attachment of the petiole. The differences are too unimportant to be considered as specific characters. These leaves merely represent a local variety, or a var. minor. This species appears to be rare in the Tertiary of Europe, as it has till now been seen only in the plastic clay-beds of Bilin. HaApirrat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden, Wm. Cleburn. 18. Ficus DALMATICA, Ett. Leaves narrowly ovate, obtusely pointed, narrowed to a short petiole; middle nerve thick toward the base, thinning upward; basilar lateral nerves, from above the border-base of the leaves, thin, ascending at an acute angle of divergence of thirty degrees to the middle of the leaf; secondary veins more open, equidistant ; nervation camptodrome, joined by transverse nervilles. In considering the figure by the author in Flora Promina (Pl. VII, fig. 11), there is no difference whatever between the Huropean form and ours; but the description says that the secondary veins are branching at the point, and there is no trace of divisions of veins observable upon our specimens. As, however, the figured single leaf shows merely trans- verse nervilles and not real branches, and as these nervilles are also visible on the American form, it is apparently identical. One of the leaves represented in our plate seems rounded at the base. This is caused by its reversement into the stone, the upper part cf the leaf be- ing flat and the lower curved down in entering the stone where the extreme base and petiole are imbedded. Hapirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 304 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. 19. Ficus PLANICOSTATA, Lsqr. Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Report on the Geol. Survey of the Terr. 1872, p. 393. A small leaf in a perfect state of preservation represents this spe- cies very common at Black Butte. It is easily recognized by the broadly ovate, thickish, entire leaf, slightly pointed or obtuse, rounded or sub- cordate at base, short-petioled, three-nerved from the top of the petiole, Se. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Wm. Cleburn. 20. Ficus TILI FOLIA, Heer. Like the former, it has been described previously in Dr. F. V. Hay- den’s Report for 1871, p. 287, from specimens of Washakie station ; mentioned in supplement to this report, p. 12, from Evanston; p. 6, from Placiére anthracite; in same report, for 1872, p. 375, from above the Gehrungs coal, near Colorado City ; and p. 393, from Black Butte station. We have also specimens from Golden and other localities; for here, as in the Miocene of Europe, this fine species, so easily identified, is distributed through the whole thickness of the Lignitic, excepting, however, the upper stage, that of the Green River group, where it has not been found as yet. I have figured it from specimens of Point of Rocks, not merely because it is there clearly represented, but to show more evidently the relation of this locality with the Tertiary Lignitic. Hasirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 21. FICUS IRREGULARIS, Lsqx. This species was published under the name of Ulmus: ? wrregularis, in Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Report for 1872 (p. 578), the generic reference being then uncertain. Numerous specimens obtained later from Black Butte, where the species is common, shows a thick inflated leaf-stalk, a char- acter which indicates the relation to Ficus. The specimen of Point of Rocks is like the counterpart of one already engraved from Black Butte Specimens; the identity of characters is unmistakable, and therefore it was figured also as another record of identity of the flora of both local- ities. HABITaT.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 22. TRAPA? MICROPHYLLA, sp. nov. Leaves small, round, or broadly oval, obtuse, rounded to a short peti- ole, with borders denticulate from below the middle, three-nerved from the top of the petiole, or irregularly pinnately nerved ; lateral veins at an acute angle of divergence, fifteen to twenty degrees, flexuous, with dichotomous branches, all craspedodrome ; areolation by subdivision at right angle, polygonal, distinct. These leaves vary in size from a little more than one centimeter long and nearly as broad to about two and a half centimeters long and nearly two centimeters broad. They are generally oval-obtuse, somewhat en- larged toward the round point ; the borders are minutely dentate except at and near the base, rounded to a comparatively long and slender peti- ole, the only one of the leaves where it is preserved being eighteen milli- meters long, and its petiole nine millimeters. The areolation is peculiar, in square or polygonal areole, formed by close, thick nervilles, anasto- mosing with veinlets parallel to the veins and their divisions, the areola- tion being clearly defined, and the parietes as thick as the veins. The same kind of areolation is remarked upon the lower surface of the leaves LESQUEREUX.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 305 of Trapa natans, which, though comparable to the fossil ones by the areo- lation, has its borders deeply toothed and a much thicker consistence. In this species, the leaves appear membranaceous and as pellucid, so distinctly marked in black appear the nervation and the areolation upon the yellowish substance of the leaves. These leaves are mixed with the filaments or rootlets described with Lemna? bullata, and represent evidently a kind of water-plant. No fossil leaves published as yet are, to my knowledge, comparable to these, except those described by Pro- fessor Newberry, in the Report of the Colorado Exploring Expedition by Lieut. S.C. Ives (p. 131, Pl. LU, fig. 5), under the name of Neuropteris angulata. ‘The outline or general form of the slightly dentate leaves, the pinnate nervation, and the remarkably acute angle of the secondary veins are characters common to both species; even the irregular though 00 o bscurely marked division of the secondary veins seems to be of the same kind. lt may be remarked that Professor Dawson has observed and described a fruit of Trapa found in connection with his Lemna seu- tata; therefore in cireumstanees similar to those where these leaves, referred to Trapa, are found. HaBitat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden, Wm. Cleburn. 23. LAURUS (PERSEA) PRZESTENS ?, sp. nov. Leaf coriaceous, large, broadly lanceolate or elliptical, narrowed up- ward to an acute point, and downward in the same degree to a thick, short petiole; middle nerve thick; secondary veins strong, parallel; _hervilles distinct; areolation very small, lightly marked. The very fine and well-preserved leaf is sixteen centimeters long from the base of the thick petiole, which is one centimeter long, five centi- meters broad in the middle, where it is the widest, and has thick sec- ondary veins reguiarly branching, with distinct nervilles and the areo- lation of a Laurus. The foliaceous substance of the lower part of the leaf is destroyed, but the middle thick nerve and the petiole are pre- served, as well as the outline-borders. By its nervation, this species is allied to Persea speciosa, Heer, differing by the form of the leaf aud the thick middle nerve. By these two last characters, it is comparable to Laurus princeps, Heer (Fl. Tert. Helv., Il, p. 77, Pl. XC, figs. 17-20), differing, however, by the secondary veins somewhat thicker and slight- ly more distant. It is most closely related to the present Laurus Can- ariensis, Sm. HABsirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 24, VIBURNUM ROTUNDIFOLIUM, sp. nov. Leaf nearly round, small, surrounded by a black border, slightly and distantly denticulate by extension of the borders at the point of contact of the secondary veins and of their branches, all craspedodrome ; sec- | ondary veins open, diverging fifty to sixty degrees, equidistant, paraliel, the two lower pairs ramified, the upper ones only forking near the bor- ders; areolation distinct, from parallel distant fibrille, branching aud anastomosing in large equilateral meshes. © The black borders of the leaves, the general characters ef nervation, and the facies are the same as in the other species of Viburnum pub- lished from Black Butte. This leaf differs especially by its nearly round form, the base rounded to the petiole, the secondary veins more open, and especially the very small, slightly-marked teeth of the borders. But. for this last character, this leaf could be referred to Viburnum platanoides,. Lsqx., as represented by the small leaf of Pl. XX XVIII, fig. 10, of the: 20 H 306 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. ined. Lignitic Flora. In this, the secondary viens are, however, more oblique and more distant. {t may be a mere local variety. Hapsirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. FP. V. Hayden. 25. VIBURNUM WYMPERI, Heer. This species has been described in Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Report for 1873, p. 382, and referred, with some doubt, to the Greenland species described in Arct. Flor. (II, p. 475, Pl. XLVI, fig. 1”). The secondary veins in our species are more distant and less regularly parallel. Though its rela- tion to the arctic species is somewhat doubtful, it does not show any difference whatever from that of Black Butte. Hapirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 26. VIRBURNUM MARGINATUM, Lsqx. The specimen is fragmentary, but the species, very common at Black Butte, is recognizable. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Wm. Cleburn. 27. DIOSPYROS BRACHYSEPALA, Al. Braun. Described already in Dr. Hayden’s Report for 1872 (p. 394), from spe- cimens of Black Butte, and in Report for 1873 (p. 401), from specimens of Sand Creek, Colorado, a locality identified with Golden by its flora. But none of the leaves found as yet are as well preserved and as well characterized as that of Point of Rocks, which is especially comparable to the leaves in Heer’s Fl. Tert. Helv. (Pl. CII, fig. 2). The species is not rare in the Miocene of Hurope, especially in the lower groups, and appears equally widely distributed in our Lower Tertiary. Hapirar.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 28. GREVIOPSIS CLEBURNI, sp. nov. Leaves of medium size, subcoriaceous, ovate, rounded, and narrowed by an inward curve to the short petiole, sinuato-denticulate, three-nerved from above the base; primary veins thick; secondary veins, two or three pairs, distant from each other, and also from the primary nerves, all branching outside with subdivisions or veinlets entering the teeth; nervilles in right angle to the veins, flexuous, simple, or branching in the middle; areolation obsolete. This fine leaf, about five centimeters long (the point is broken), four centimeters broad in its widest part, below-the middle, is so remarkably similar by its form, the denticulate borders, and the nervation, to Grevi- opsis orbiculata, Sap. (Sezane FI., p. 411, Pl. XI, figs. 11 and 12), that its generic identity is positive. It specifically differs by its larger size, the more distant veins, and the double ramification of the primary nerves. This ramification is more distinct and more generally multiple, the branches forking before reaching the borders and curving along them. The leaf has, like those of the European species, a subbasilar margin veinlet, which follows the borders, and is united by nervilles in right angle to the primary lateral nerves above. HABITAT.—Point of Rocks, Wm. Cleburn. 29, RHUS MEMBRANACEA, sp. nov. Leaves small, membranaceous, thickish, oblong, obtusely-pointed, rounded or subtruncate at base, irregularly ‘coarsely duplicato-dentate ; lateral veins open, the lowest decurving to the middle nerve, craspedo- drome, more or less ramified. LESQUEREUX.] FOSSIL PLANTS FROM POINT OF ROCKS. 307 Of this species, there is the point of a leaf, and another one nearly entire, though somewhat lacerated, about two and a half centimeters long, including the petiole (three millimeters), and one and a haif centimeters broad, oblong or lingulate, with borders cut from the base in comparatively large, pointed teeth, either simple or with small pro- tuberances on the back of the largest ones; nervation craspedodroine, the secondary veins entering the large teeth, and more or less irregu- larly and obscurely dividing in very thin branches, joined in the middle, and forming a large, scarcely distinct areolation. By the form of the leaves and the border-divisions, this species is comparable and closely related to Rhus Pyrrhe, Ung., as figured in Tert. Flor. Helv. of Heer (Pl. CX XVI, fig. 20), which has leaves, round truncate at the base, and short-petioled, as in one of our specimens. Like Rhus Pyrrhe, it is also comparable to Rhus aromatica Ait., @ very common species of our pres- ent flora. This has also generally doubly dentate teeth, and, in southern specimens, a thickish, membranaceous consistence. HaxpiratT.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 30. JUGLANS RHAMNOIDES, Lsqx. A small leaf of this species, which is not yet, however, definitively lim- ited, as seen from the description in Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Report for 1871 (p. 294), and which may be identical with Juglans Leconteana, Lsqx., and Cornus acuminata, Newby. Though it may be of the value of the species, the leaf from Point of Rocks is identical in all its characters, even in its size, with some of those found in the burned beds of red shales at Black Butte. Hapirat.—Point of Rocks, Dr. F. V. Hayden. The three following species have been sent also by M. Cleburn from near the Alkali stage-station, on the Sweetwater road, about thirty miles north of Green River station of the Union Pacific Railroad. The proprietor of the specimens did not himself visit the locality, but obtained them from another party, who did not give any details on the relative position of the beds where they were discovered. They repre- sent three species, all new. The character of the leaves, as also the presence of remains of Palms at the same locality, seem to indicate about the same station as that of Point of Rocks or Black Butte. They are described, therefore, as of the same group. z 1. ALNITES UNEQUILATERALIS, sp. nov. Leaves thin, variable in size, broadly oval .or ovate-pointed, rounded - to a short petiole; borders crenato-serrate; nervation pinnate; lateral veins irregular in number and distance, curving in passing to the bor- ders, at an angle of divergence of fifty to sixty degrees, and entering the teeth by their ends or by small branchlets, when they pass under the teeth and follow the borders. These leaves vary in size from four to eight centimeters long and from three to six centimeters broad, one of the sides measuring generally one-fourth in width more than the other. The irregularity in the num- ber of the veins is correspondingly great; one of the leaves, the smallest for example, has, on one side, five lateral veins, the lower much branched outside, and on the other, ten, all simple. The largest of the leaves — of this species, which is represented by a number of specimens, is related by form and nervation to Populus Lebrunii, Wat., which Saporta 308 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. considers as referable tohis Alnus cardiophylla. It is represented in the Sezane Flora (Pl. XV, fig. 8). The general facies of the American leaves is, however, different, the teeth being broader and more obtuse, the nervation more distinctly pinnate, and the disposition of the veins to enter the teeth by their extremity more marked; and compared to Alnus cardiophylla, it is especially different by the constant inequality of the leaves. This last character and the irregularity of nervation are not of frequent occurrence inthe leavesof Alnus. Alnus viridis and A. serrulata are, however, sometimes irregularly veined, and the inequality of the sides is seen in a number of fossil species, Alnus cycladum, Ung., especi- ally A. sporadum, Sap. HABItraT.—Alkali station, Wm. Cleburn. 2. JUGLANS ALKALINA, Sp. nov. . Leaves pinnately compound ; leafiets lanceolate, tapering upward to a long acumen, either narrowed or rounded to a short petiole; borders crenulate ; lateral veins distant, mostly alternate, parallel, separated by short intermediate tertiary veins, curving in passing toward the borders at an open angle of divergence, and ascending high along them in fes- toons; nervilles in right angle to the veins, branching in the middle, and forming, by subdivisions, irregularly quadrate or polygonal meshes. This species is represented by four leaves, and its characters distinct. It is comparable to Juglandites peramplus, Sap., and Juglandites cernuus, Sap., both of the Sezane flora, partaking of some of the characters of both. It is, however, -still more intimately allied to Juglans Bilinica, Heer (Flor. Tert. Helv., III, p. 90, Pl. CX XX, figs. 5-19), from which it merely differs by the position of the lateral veins at a more acute angle of divergence following higher up along the borders, and by the thicker and more numerous tertiary veins. HaAbitat.—Alkali station, Wm. Cleburn. 3. CARPITES VIBURNI, sp. nov. Seeds or nutlets cordate obtuse, five to seven millimeters long, three or four millimeters broad, convex, grooved in the middle from the point to the base, surrounded by a membranaceous pellicle, the remains of an apparently fleshy outer envelope. They resemble seeds of a similar kind which I have found in great quantity at Golden, and referred to the genus Viburnum. Their form is like that of the seeds of Viburnum Whymperi, Heer (Spitz. Flor., p. 60, Pl. XIII, figs. 22 and 27). Hasitat.—Alkali station, Wm. Cleburn. NEW SPECIES OF TERTIARY FOSSIL PLANTS BRIBFLY DESCRIBED. The following-described species have been discovered since the publi- cation of the last annual report of Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Geological Sur- vey of the Territories. They are represented by specimens sent from different localities indicated, with each species, as well as the name of the discoverer. All these species have been figured for the second volume of the Contributions to the Fossil Flora of the Western Terri- tories. 1. SPHERIA RHYTISMOIDES, sp. nov. The spots formed by this small fungus upon the bark of some stems and the leaves of a Myrica are composed of circular perithecia, placed Lusguexeux.| NEW SPECIES OF TERTIARY FOSSIL PLANTS. 309 five or six in a cirele, forming thus a small crenulate ring. The perithecia become connected sometimes, apparently by decomposition ; they are, however, generally separated. The size of the spots varies from one to two millimeters. Hapirat.—Black Butte, upon Caulinites Sparganioides. 2. HYPNUM HAYDENII, sp. nov. Stem rigid, sparingly divided in nearly opposite, short branches, in- flated toward the top, or club-shaped; leaves closely imbricated all around, lanceolate-acuminate or sharply pointed, concave. Comparable especially to Hypnum Boscit, Schwgr., an American species of the pres- ent time. HABITAT.—South Park, near Castello Ranch, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 3. LYGODIUM MARVINEI, sp. nov. A single leaflet of this fine species. It is simple, ligulate, obtuse, serrulate above, hastate at base; middle vein and veinlets distinct ; veins forking once or twice. Allied to the living Lygodium venustum which ranges from Mexico to Brazil. Hapiran, —Top of gypsum series, Grand Eagle junction, A. R. Marvine. 4, LyGODIUM DENTONI, sp. nov. Leaflets bi-tripartite, with short, obtuse divisions and broad sinuses, broadly triangular, rapidly narrowed to a subcordate or subtruncate base, entire, bi-trinerved from the base; primary nerves distinct, like the veins, which are forked once or twice, and become very close along the borders. HABITAT.—Green River group, near the mouth of White into Green River, Prof. William Denton. 5. GONIOPTERIS PULCHELLA,? Heer. An intermediate form, represented by mere fragments of pinne and separate pinnules. The shape of the pinnules united to the middle refers it to G. pulchella, while by the less pointed leaflets and the nerva- tion it represents G. Fischeri of the same author. HapBirat.—Golden, in sandstone, above coal. 6. ZAMIOSTROBUS ? MIRABILIS, sp. nov. This species, whose reference to Zamice is not positively ascertained, is represented by a fragment, the half cross-section of a silicified cone, about fourteen centimeters in diameter. The outer surface is marked by the rhomboidal obtuse top of black seeds, or stony fruits, surrounded by a white vasculoso-cellular matter. In the cross-section of the cone, these seeds, of an enlarged rhomboidal form, three to three and a half centimeters long, six to eight millimeters broad, of the same size in their whole length, or slightly narrowed to the base, appear fixed or implanted into a zone of whitish, subpellucid mass of celluloso-vaseu- lar filaments. Under this ring of white matter, one centimeter thick, comes the central part, or axis of the cone, represented by mixed frag. ments of blackish opaque matter, agglutinated and amorphous. The fruits, or seeds, are represented by a black, compact, opaque silex, pierced in the length by large pores or ducts passing from the top to the base of the fruits. The intervals between them, nearly as large as the seeds, are filled by the same whitish celluloso-vascular matter which com- poses the white zone wherein the base of the fruits is embedded. The 310 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. figure only of the specimen can give a good idea of this fragment of cone. It is distantly comparable, tor the form and the disposition of its surface-scars, to Androstrobus, a genus established by Schimper for some cylindrical cycadeous male cones, formed of imbricated scales bear- ing sessile anthers on their lower surface. For the position of the fruits, it has a distant relation to Zamiostrobus gibbus, Keuss., a cone which shows, in its section, oblong seeds, in right angle to the axis, with their tops appearing at the outside surface. Both these cones are figured in Schimper’s Veget. Pal. (Pl. LX XII, figs. 1, 2, 14,15). There is, however, a great difference in the very large size and in the characters of this silicified strobile with those of a Zamia. It apparently represents a peculiar genus of the Cycadinee. HABITAT.—Found loose around Golden, Dr. Ff. V. Hayden. 7. SEQUOIA AFFINIS, sp. nov. Branches long, slender, pinnately branching; leaves short, oblong, imbricated and obtuse; or longer, lanceolate-acute, erect or slightly refiexed; brancblets bearing cones, open; strobiles small, round-oval, obtuse; scales large, rhomboidal, with entire borders, a central oval mamilla, and wrinkles passing from it to the borders all around; mate branches erect, with more acute and open leaves, resembling sterile branches of Glyptostrobus Huropeus, with small, round catkins, covered to the top by imbricated lanceolate leaves. This species, of which we have numerous and admirably well-preserved Specimens, is much like Sequoia Coutsic, Heer, of the Bovey-Tracy flora, differing, however, from it by the more obtuse point of the scale-like leaves, by more acute and longer leaves of the sterile branches, by more slender branchlets bearing cones at their ends, by proportionally larger, more oval cones (not globular), by the indistinetness of a middle nerve on the back of the leaves, which appear merely convex or inflated, ete. The seeds are of the same size as those of S. Coutsiw; they ditter also somewhat by a cordate base and a mere trace of middle nerve near the top, where it divides and passes on both sides, curving along the borders. HABITAT.—Middie Park, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 9. SEQUOIA ACUMINATA, sp. nov. The form of the leaves is about the same as in Sequoia longifolia ; they are, however, generally shorter, narrower, less crowded upon the stems, and especially distinct by the smooth surface of the leaves. In this species, the denudated branches are striate, while, in the former, they bear the sears of the base of the leaves. This difference, however, may be merely the result of decortication in the specimens representing this last species. | HABITAT.—Black Butte. 10. SEQUOTA?, species. Cones flattened, apparently long, linear-obtuse, marked at the surface by shields of scales, (apophyses.) the only organs preserved. These aresepa- rated from each other, not continuous nor imbricate, rhomboidal in outline, with acute sides, and rounded top, bearing in the middle a round mamilla, from which wrinkled lines are diverging to the borders. The specimen represents two crushed cones, of which nothing can be seen but what is described here. Hasrrat.—Middle Park, Dr. F. V. Hayden. LESQUEREUX. ] NEW TERTIARY FOSSIL PLANTS. 311 11. ARUNDO REPERTA, sp. nov. Stem thick, articulated; surface striated, marked with round, abiuge knots, either placed on the articulations or here and there upon the stem, without normal distribution; ear of seeds crushed, representing lanceolate glumes, sharp-pointed and rounded at base, and ovate-lanceo- late-acute seeds, truncate at the base, with the center elevated or con- vex, apparently covered with a coating of hairs. The glume is longer than tke seeds, and nerved in the middle. Hapirat.—Green River, west of the station, Dr. Ff. V. Hayden. 12. ARUNDO OBTUSA, sp. nov. Though the specimen is not as well preserved as that of the former species, the characters of the organs which it represents are discernible, and indicate a marked specific difference. The striz or primary veins of the small fragment of a branch are thick, more distinct, and evidently separated by four or five thinner secondary veins; the glumes and pallets are shorter, equally striate, without middle nerve, and the seed is much shorter, broader, obtuse at one end,*and truncate at the other. The fragment which I consider a pallet is slightly emarginate or truncate at the point. HAsBiITAT.—Golden, South Table Mountain. 13. PALMACITES GOLDIANUS, sp. nov. Species representing a large fragment of a flabellate leaf with five to nine rays on each side, of a flat, narrow, linear rachis. ays averaging one and a half centimeters broad, marked by deep, narrow furrows, without cost, joining the rachis in an acute angle of twenty degrees, united to it by their whole undiminished base, without decurring along it. Surface somewhat shining; substance thick ; primary veins distinct at least in some places, where the epidermis is destroyed, two to two and a half millimeters distant, separated by ten secondary veinlets, el, but often discernible to the naked eyes. Hspirat.—Golden. 14. SABAL COMMUNIS, sp. nov. Leaves of medium size, borne upon a nearly fiat or merely convex petiole, its top passing at the upper side into a short acuminate rachis, while on the lower side it is cut horizontally or nearly truncate; rays not very numerous, the lowest in right angle to the rachis, not descend- ing lower than its base, rapidly enlarging, carinately folded near the point of attachment to the rachis, becoming mostly flat or scarcely carinate upward ; carine narrowly costate; primary veins broad, gen- erally black when the epidermis is removed, one to two millimeters apart; 1ntermediate veins thin and numerous, averaging twelve in the large intervals of two millimeters. This species is closely related to Sabal andegaviensis, Schp. of the Eocene of Angers, France. HABitat.—Golden, where it is common. 15. Myrica Lupwiai1, Schp. Leaves of middle size, subcoriaceous, oblong ‘or linear-lanceolate, gradually tapering into a long entire acumen, distantly and deeply den- tate along the borders ; middle nerve thick ; ’ secondary veins suboppo- Site, open, parallel, curving in passing to the borders, camptodrome, forking at the base of the teeth, the branches entering them, while the top of the veins is curved along the borders. ss r.—Green River group, near mouth of White River, Prof. W. enton. 312 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. 16. MYRICA INSIGNIS, sp. nov. Leaf membranaceous, large, narrowly-oval or oblong acuminate, pin- nately-lobed ; lobes short, entire, turned upward, triangular-acute; lateral ueins open, slightly curving in passing to the point of the lobes; tertiary ° veins nearly as thick as the secondary ones, forking under the acute sinuses of the lobes, the branches ascending along the sides; areolation large, polygonal, formed by the anastomosis in the middle of the areas of nervilles at right angle to the veins. There are of this beautiful species two fragments of leaves, indicating the average size of ten centimeters long and four centimeters broad. The point, as in the former species, is entire, and still more rapidly and acutely acuminate; and the lobes, alternate, short, equal and similar, give to this species a beautiful ap- pearance. Hapsitat.—Middle Park, Dr. F. V. Han yden. 17. MyricA ? LESSIGIANA, sp. nov. This species is represented by nearly the half of the leaf, encrmous, at leastif it belongs to this genus.” Leaf linear, oblong in outline, deeply lobed ; lobes opposite, ovate-lanceolate, obtusely pointed, at an open angle of divergence, entire, joined at a short distance of the thick mid- dle nerve in obtuse sinusés; lateral veins thick, subopposite on an open angle of divergence, ascending to the point of the lobes, rami- fied from the middle upward in branches curving to and along the bor- ders; tertiary veins, variable in thickness, relative position and direetion, some forking under the sinuses, and passing up on both sides of it; others traversing the large intervals between the base of the secondary veins and the borders of the lobes, and following the borders in multiple festoons; areolation of the same character as in the former species, the large areole, however, being subdivided in very small meshes of the same character. This magnificent leaf seems of a pellucid texture, though thick; at least, all the details of areolation and nervation are distinctly perceiv- able in black upon the chestnut-color of the leaf. ‘Though the fragment does not represent one-half of the leaf, the terminal leaflet being de- stroyed, and the base also, still it is twenty-three centimeters long and eighteen centimeters broad, each lobe being nine to ten centimeters long from the middle nerve to the point, and seven and a half centime- ters broad between the sinuses. It is doubtfulif this leaf represents, as the former, a species of the section of the Comptonia. It resembles Comptonia grandifolia, Ung., which was till now considered as the giant . representative of the section, but whose leaf is scarcely half as large as this. The nervation and areolation of this leaf are of the same char- acter as that of Myrica, identical, indeed, to that of M. Matheroniane Sap., Ht. U, 2, p. 93, T. V., Fig. 7, whose lobes are also of the same form. It 18 much larger, however, too large it seems for a Myrica. By the form of the leaf it is comparable to Araliu multijida Sas, Ht. 1,1, 7. XII, f. 1 and 1°, and also but more distantly to Cussonia polydrys Ung., Flora von Huboea, p. 47, T XVII, f. 1. Hapiratr.—Found in connection with a bed of lignite west of Denver, Colo., and kindly communicated by Mr. W. H. Lessig, who discovered it, and had tlie specimen framed in a bedding of plaster. 18. BETULA VOGDESII, sp. nov. Leaves small, ovate, acutely-pointed, rounded, and narrowed to the petiole, minutely serrulate, penninerve, lateral veins distant, opposite at or LESQUEREUX.] “NEW TERTIARY FOSSIL PLANTS. ‘313 near the base, simple or rarely branching, passing up in an angle of divergence of thirty to thirty-five degrees, nearly straight to the bor- ders, craspedodrome; details of areolation obsolete. Hapitat.—Near Fort Fetterman, in connection with a profusion of remains of Taxodium distichum, Lieutenant Vogdes. 19. CASTANEA INTERMEDIA, sp. nov. Leaves proportionally long and narrow, linear-lanceolate pointed, narrowed to the base; borders equally and sharply dentate; teeth acd- minate, turned upward; areolation and nervation similar to that of Castanea Vesca. By its character it is intermediate between Castanea Ungeri of the Miocene and C. vesca. Hapirat.—Middle Park, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 20. CARPINUS GRANDIS, Ung. This species, so common in the Miocene of Europe, is represented in our flora by. a number of leavesidentical in all the characters. Hapirar.—Near Florissant, South Park, Dr. Ff. V. Hayden. 21. QUERCUS HAIDINGERI, Ett. Leaf ovate-lanceolate, narrowed to the base (point broken); borders obtusely crenato-serrate ; lateral veins numerous, close, on an angle of divergence of forty to forty-five degrees, rarely branching, camptodrome and ecraspedodrome. ‘The leaf appears to be tapering toa point. It is upon coarse sandstone, and the details of areolation are totaliy oblit- erated. By its form, the divisions of the borders, and the nervation, it agrees with the characters of the species, except that in this leaf the mid- die nerve is not thick, as described by Heer. HABITAT.—Green River, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 22, PLANERA UNGERI, Ett. Leaves short-petioled, ovate, acuminate, narrowed to the base, simply, coarsely serrate from the middle upward; secondary veins nine pairs, . passing up to the point of the teeth in an acute angle of divergence. This form, though represented by one leaf only, is in entire concordance of chazaerers with those of this species widely distributed in the Miocene of urope. be HABITAT.—South Park, Capt. Hd. Berthoud. 23. FICUS OVALIS, sp. nov. The only leaf repesenting this species is coriaceous, oval, entire, nar- rowing in a curve to a long thick or flat broad petiole, grooved in the middle penninerv; lateral vein alternate, camptodrome, curving along the borders in festoons; tertiary veins short; areolation obsolete. The upper part of the leaf is broken. Hapirat.—Pleasant Park, Plum Creek, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 24, FICUS PSEUDO-POPULUS, sp. nov. Leaves oval-pointed, narrowed to the petiole, entire, three-nerved from the top of the petiole; lateral veins at an acute angle of divergence, like the secondary veins, two or three pairs, the lower of which is at a great distance from the primary ones, camptodrome; nervilles distinct, in right angle to the midrib, crossed by oblique branchlets, forming a large equilateral or polygonal areolation. A remarkable species, 314 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. resembling a Cinnamomum by the nervation of its leaves and a Zizyphus by the form. Hapirat.—Evanston, Dr. Ff. V. Hayden. 25. FICUS WYOMINGIANA, sp. nov. a May be a variety of ne former, resembling it closely by the form of the entire, long-petioled leaf. The difference is marked, however, by the total absence of secondary veins; the middle nerve being joined to the lateral ones by strong nervilles in right angle. HApsitat.—West of Green River station, Dr. F. V. Hayden. 26. DIOSPYROS? FICOIDEA, sp. nov. Leaf ovate, narrowed to a point (broken), rounded to the petiole, thickish, entire, pinnately-nerved; midrib thick, deeplv marked, as also the secondary veins, parallel, at an acute angle of divergence, all doubly camptodrome ; fibrille thick, nearly in right angle to the veins, divided in the middle; areolation square or polygonal; surface rough. The generic relation of these leaves is not satisfactorily fixed. HABITAT.—Black Butte. 27. VIBURNUM PLATANOIDES, sp. nov. This species essentially differs from Viburnum marginatum by the less numerous, more open, lateral veins, whose branches are more curved in passing up to the borders, and especially by the enlarged truncate or subtruncate base of the leaves. The direction of the veins along the lower branches of the lateral veins is the same, and the borders are den- tate in the same manner, though not black-margined -as in V. margin- atum. HAsrTatT.—Black Butte, mixed with Saurian bones, and as abun- dant in that bed as is its congener, in the shale above the main coal of the same locality. 28. CISSUS PAROTTILAIFOLIA, sp. nov. Leaves ovate-subcordate or narrowed to tne base, gradually and ob- tusely pointed, undulato-crenate, three-nerved from the top of the peti- ole or from a little above the border-base ; lower secondary veins at a distance from the primary ones, which are much divided ; all the branches, like the secondary veins, craspedodrome; nervilles strong, in right angle to the veins; areolation small, square, by subdivision of veinlets. The species is represented by a few leaves, one of them, fragmentary, _ has a cordate, unequal base, and may belong to a different species. Habirat.—Green River, west of the station, Dr. f. V. Hayden. 29. RHAMNUS RossmMAssLERT?, Heer. Leaves oblong-obovate, Bheasel y pointed, entire, narrowed to the base, penninerve ; secondary veins close, parallel, passing to the borders nearly straight and curving along them ‘in festoons. These leaves are small ; one only is preserved entire; their specific relation is not fixed. HABiItAT.—Black Butte. 30. PHASEOLITES JUGLANDINUS?, Heer. Leaflets of an apparently compound leaf, oval-oblong, obtusely pointed, rounded to a short petiole, entire, subcoriaceous, penninerve; lateral veins parallel, distinctly camptodrome, and following the borders i in fes- toons; ultimate areolation small, irregularly quadrate. LESQUEREUX.] NEW TERTIARY FOSSIL PLANTS. 315 The species may be different from the European one bearing this name, but it appears to differ only by more open secondary veins. Hapirat.—Green River group, near mouth of White River, Prof. Wm. Denton. . 31. LEGUMINOSITES ALTERNANS, sp. nov. - Leaflet lanceolate, narrowed to the sessile base (point broken), appa- rently tapering and acute; borders entire; secondary veins close, nu- merous, fifteen pairs in a space of two and a half centimeters, with in- termediate shorter tertiary veins anastomosing by crossing veinlets ; areolation obsolete. This leaf is comparable to a Dalbergia or a Podo- gonium by its nervation; its form, especially the narrowed base, is com- parable to Cassia. HABitat.—Near mouth of White River, Prof. W. Denton. 32. SAPINDUS DENTONI, sp. nov. Leaves lanceolote, gradually narrowed to a long acumen, unequilat- eral and rounded at base to a short petiole, entire or slightly undulate, thick; secondary veins close, parallel, diverging forty to fifty degrees, thick, straight to the borders, where they abruptly curve, and which they closely follow. Species allied to Sapindus falcifolius, Heer, but remarkably distinct from this and other congeners by the thick, close, lateral veins straight to the borders, where they curve so abruptly that they appear at first sight as craspedodrome. The areolation is of the same character as that of S. falcifolius. HABITAT.—Green River group, near mouth of White River, Prof. W. ‘Denton. 33. LOMATIA MICROPHYLLA, sp. nov. Leaves very small, thick, coriaceous, linear-lanceolate, gradually nar- rowed to a point, and in the same degree to the base; secondary veins simple, thin, in an open angle of divergence, connected to a marginal vein. We have two leaves of this fine species. It is comparable to Lomatia firma, Heer, of the Baltic flora, but very small and thick; the surface mostly covered by a coating of coaly matter. HAsirar.—Same locality as the former, Prof. W. Denton. A large number of fruits and seeds, considered under the name of Palmacites, Carpolites, etc., have been figured for the Lignitic Flora. As the characters of these organs cannot be represented by mere description, they are not mentioned in this short synopsis. A REVIEW OF THE CRETACEOUS FLORA OF NORTH AMERICA, | §1.—GENERAL REMARKS. The formation known under the name of Dakota group is positively determined as Cretaceous by the animal-remains profusely embedded into the strata overlying it. This fact has been repeatedly and clearly exposed in the former reports of Dr. F. V. Hayden. As this formation rests immediately upon thick limestone beds of Permian age, its flora, which is mostly represented by dicotyledonous leaves, has apparently no ancestors in this country. In Europe, the dicotyledonous plants of the Cretaceous epoch are scarcely known, or, at least, they have not yet been satisfactorily studied and described. The more recent and impor- tant publication on the subject refers to the Cretaceous of Greenland, and exposes the specific characters of a proportionally large number of Cryptogams and Gymnosperms, Ferns, Conifers, Cycads, with few Dicoty- ledonous. Three of these only are represented in the flora of the Dakota group. There is, therefore, from antecedents or from contemporaneous floras, no points of comparison to which the character of the plants of this group might be referred. For analogies, we have to look to spe- cies described from more recent epochs. And, in these researches, the paleontologist is met with another kind of difficuity. The strata where the dicotyledonous leaves are found in Kansas, Nebraska, Dakota, &ec., are separated from the Lignitic-Tertiary formations by a few thou- sand feet of measures, mostly shale and sandstone, all of marine origin, with animal fossil-remains denoting an uninterrupted series of Creta- ceous types. These strata are generally overlaid by heavy beach-sand- stone lovally interspersed with fucoidal remains, extremely abundant in some places, or with a mass of crushed, half-pulverized fragments of land- plants. Over this, the Lignite beds come to view, with their accom- panying shales and sandstones, wherein vegetable remains are found sometimes in profusion and in a beautiful state of preservation. Here, then, we should expect to recognize forms of leaves or species, if not identical with those of the Dakota group, at least showing, as probable offsprings, some affinity of characters with them. This as yet is not the case. The typical forms of leaves of the North American Creta- ceous are not at all repeated in the Lower Lignitic flora of the Rocky Mountains, not more than they are in the Lower Eocene of Europe. With the exception, however, of the peculiar type of oak and chestnut, Dryophyllum, which originates in the Middle Cretaceous of both con- _tinents, is recognized in species of the Lower Kocene of France, Sezane and Gelinden, as in that of Point of Rocks, in Wyoming, and leaving some of its representatives in all the geological series, passes to the flora of our time. Some few more leaves of the Dakota group have a relation to species of Evanston, especially to those of Miocene of Car- bon, in the same proportion, about, as they have to Miocene species of Europe; more still are closely allied to species of the Pliocene of Cali- fornia; but the analogies become far more evident and marked, also, by 316 LESQUEREUX.] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 317 more numerous points of similarity, in the present vegetation of the Atlantic slope of North America. This absence of related forms in the nearest geological series of the Cretaceous, the re-appearance, also, of Cretaceous types in more recent formations, and especially at this time, are perplexing, indeed, to the querist, surrounding the study of this flora with a great deal of uncer- tainty and of difficulty. Who can believe that the dicotyledonous plants, which were destined to take such an immense predominance in the vege- tation of the world, were, from the beginning, the same as they are now ? How suppose that, after their exclusion from the floras of long geo- logical epochs, a number of them have re-appeared anew, with their original characters? This would seem an anomaly, in contradiction to what is known, or, rather, generally admitted in regard to the succession, themultiplication, and the improvement of types, in following the ascend- ing grade of the vegetable reign in its development. Do we not mis- take in recording, as evident and close points of affinity, what may be mere illusional appearances? Questions of this kind give to the study of the North American Cretaceous flora a higher degree of importance, _ but, at the same time, force the paleontologist, who is trying to decipher the ‘hieroglyphic records of the old floras, to pursue his researches with the greatest caution, reviewing again and again the forms which he con- siders as specific, comparing them from as large a number of specimens as may be obtainable, especially studying their relations with the veg- etable contemporaneous types recognized in the same formations, or in those of another country. This renders the acquisition and the study of new materials constantly desirable, and, therefore, subject the conclu- sions arrived at to possible modifications. For this reason, the first volume of the Cretaceous flora of the Dakota group should be considered as an incomplete memorial, to which successive supplements have to be added by every one who, engaged in paleontological researches, is in position to get specimens of fossil plants from this group. The present review is one of these supplements, demanded for the reasons alluded above; first, by the discoveries in the Cretaceous formations of new and important materials, modifying, by their characters, generic divisions fixed from insufficient specimens, or adding new species or new types to those which were already known; and, secondly, by the critical notices of learned friends, at home and abroad, who, sensible to the importance of the data offered to science by the first exposition of the flora of the Dakota group, have urged me to pursue the work merely begun, and to bring forth, without delay, the results obtained by these new re- searches. . There is, however, still another and more forcible inducement to re- view successively the data procured by new researches and discoveries, in addition to our knowledge of the North American Cretaceous flora. It is the insufficiency of the materials obtainable for the comparison and the determination of specimens of fossil plantsin thiscountry. Messrs. Debey and Kttinghausen began the study of the Cretaceous flora of Belgium al- readyin1843. After spendinga few yearsin exploring the Cretaceous for- mation in its geological and stratigraphical distribution and in collecting - specimens, having, as they supposed, about three hundred species to an- alyze, they published, in 1848, an abridged synopsis or general review of the Cretaceous flora of Belgium, describing then only a new genus of Conifers, and a few species referable toit.* In 1849 they still published, as *Ubersicht der urweltlichen Pflanzenreste des Kreidegebirges iiberhaupt, und der | MACheDET Kreideschichten i im Besonderen, in Verh. des nat. Vereines d. preus. Rhein- ande, 1848, 318 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. evidence of the progress of their researches, a catalogue, names only, of seventy species of their Belgian Cretaceous plants. But after they had enlarged their collection of specimens, and pursued their work of compar- ison, they were soon called to review their first determinations and to acknowledge that very few of their former specifications could be pre- served, as they had to unite in one species a number of forms which were first considered as different, or to separate some others which they had formerly admitted as identical. In 1850 the great herbarium of the Botanical Garden of London was opened to them, and they had free ac- cess to the immense materials, especially exotic species of plants of the present time, which they wished to have for comparing the vegetable forms of the Cretaceous. In 1851 the celebrated authors published an- other short general review of the Cretaceous flora of Maestrich. These were merely introductory memoirs to the work which they had under- taken, and for which they acknowledge the assistance received, not only by direct communications of the greatest botanists and paleontologists of the time, Brongniart, Decaisne, Hooker, &c., but also by the freeuse of the largest botanical and paleontological collections of Europe, and of scientific libraries, where they could study, from its origin, the lit- erature referable to vegetable paleontology; all the papers, even the most unimportant, which have been published on the subject. It was only, in 1859, and after nearly fifteen years of study, that the first and second parts of their work were published. The first, concerning the Thallophytes, describes and represents, in three plates, eighteen species of Kucoids, or marine plants, four species of Fungi, and one Lichen. The second part, on the Acrobriz, describes, with figures, forty-one spe- cies of Ferns, and two species of doubtful relation to this family. Since then nothing more of this work has been published, and we know the dicotyledonous leaves, whose remains are said to abound in the Bel- gian Cretaceous formation, merely by some generalities related to their classification and a few generic names. The work of the European authors is certainly of the highest scien- tific order, and might be taken as a model to be followed for proceeding in paleontological researches in our cotintry. But who could work ten to fifteen years In preparing the publication of a report, when in his re- searches a naturalist does not find any materials for comparison. We have, as yet, no valuable collections in vegetable paleontology, and it is especially because the first materials have to be carefully prepared for institutions of this kind, that the paleontologist is called to review and correct his determinations as fast as new materials are prepared for ex- amination. The plants of the Dakota group, as known mostly by detached leaves, are striking by the beauty, the elegance, the variety of their forms, and of their size. In all this they are fully comparable to those of any geological epoch as well as to those of our time. From entirely developed leaves, less than one inch in size, they show all the gradations of size to one foot, even to one foot and one-balf in diameter. The multiplicity of forms recognized for a single species is quite as marked as it might be upon any tree of our forests. And to expose the admira- ble elegance of their forms, it suffices to say that, at first sight, they forcibly recall those of the most admired species of. our time: the tulip- tree, the magnolia, the sassafras, the sweet-gum, the plane-tree, the beach, the aralia, &c. The leaves of Protophyllum Sternbergii have the size and the facies of those of the catalpa, one of our finest ornamental trees. Those of Menispermites obtusiloba, of Protospermum quadratum, represent in the same manner some of the rarest shrubs, Menispermum, LESQUEREUX. ] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 319 Ferdinandia, &e., carefully raised in conservatories for the grace- ful forms of their leaves or the richness of their vegetation. It is indeed the first impression received from the beauty of forms of the leaves of the North American Cretaceous, and the evident likeness of their facies to that of the finest vegetable types of our time as we see them around us, which strikes the paleontologist and may lead him into error, in forcing upon the mind the belief of a typical identity where, possibly, there may be a mere likeness of outlines, a casual similarity of forms in the leaves. For, really, when we enter into a more detailed analysis of these Cretaceous leaves, we are by and by forcibly impressed by the strangeness of the characters of some of them, which seem at variance with any of those recognized anywhere in the floras of our time, and unobserved also in those of the geological intermediate periods. Not less surprised are we to see united in a single leaf, or species, characters which are now generally found separated in far dis- tant families of plants. The leaves of Hremophiyllum, so striking by the peculiar appendages of their borders; those of Anomophyllum, refer- able to planes by one half, to oaks by the other; those of Platanus obtusiloba, half Acer, &c., are of this kind. On another side, the charac- ters of some of the Cretaceous species are sometimes of such a transient or indefinite order that it is scarcely possible to take hold of them and to expose them with a degree of reliance. At first sight they seem very distinct, but, in comparing a number of specimens, the differences dwindle by unmistakable transitions, and disappear. In other leaves, on the contrary, visibly identical by their outlines, the nervation is so different that they are forcibly separated and referred to far distant generic divisions. Hence, this flora does not leave any satisfaction, any rest, to the mind. Even the most clearly defined types become doubtful in regard to their integrity when we see others, which at first were recognized as positively fixed, manifesting instability and pointing to diversity of relations by the discovery of new specimens. The leaves considered first as Sassafras seemed evidently referable to this genus; but when leaves of the same type were found with dentate borders, though bearing besides all the characters of a genus which belongs to the Laurinee, a family where, as yet, no representative has been found with dentate borders of leaves; when others were obtained with subdivision of the lower lobes in two or three, thus showing the palmate shape of Aralia leaves, the confidence in the value of the char- acters at first recognized had to be abandoned. This revision bears, therefore, on the degree of relation, or of generic identity, which may exist between the leaves of the Dakota group and species of plants living at our time in this country or described from intermediate geological periods; on the degree of persistence in the characters which have been, or should be, considered as specific in the determination of these leaves; on the essential types of the Cretaceous flora considered as original, derived, or ancestors. These questions cannot be examined in the order where they are presented above; but they may be touched upon, as far as opportunity is offered, in remark- ing upon the different vegetable groups represented in this flora. It is remarkable that though the Dakota group formation is recog- nized as marine by the presence of marine fossil mollusks, no remains of marine plants have been to this time found in any part of its strata. Divers reasons may be suggested in explanation of this fact; the coarse- . ness of the matrix, for example, wherein the vegetable fragments were imbedded, and where mere cellular and soft plants could not be pre- served. The fossilization of the leaves in the red ferruginous shale of 320 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the Dakota group is not a true petrification. The forms or casts only are left after the total destruction of the substance. This may explain how most of the leaves which have been obtained from this group of the Cretaceous are of a coarse, thick, coriaceous texture. The delicate or- gans of plants, like thin leaves or sea-weeds, may therefore have been totally destroyed. If it is so, we know from this flora a part only, the one which is represented by leaves of a hard tissue and by some fruits and stems. At different places and horizons of the formation, especially near the upper part and at the base of the measures, one finds thin beds of black, plastic, soft clay, where remains of plants could be preserved in their integrity even with the epidermis of the leaves. A single leaf has been found of that kind near Sioux City; it is referable to one of the species most commonly represented in the red shale, and therefore does not afford any point of comparison. The other deposits of clay have been found either barren of vegetable remains of any kind, or, also near Sioux City, mixed with decomposed, undeterminable frag- ments, especially of leaves of Conifers and of rootlets of water-plants, Asitis the case in thered shales of the other formation to which this one has been compared—the Upper Devonian, the Lower Permian *—thin layers of coal or coaly matter have been deposited here and there in the so-called sandstones of the Dakota group. They are no coal-beds, how- ever, but mere attempts or premises, and preparatian also, of a future Carboniferous formation. In the strata related as synchronous to the Dakota group, in Canada, New Mexico, New Jersey, &e., no workable coal-bed has been discovered till now. Some, which may be compared to the subconglomerate coal-beds of the Carboniferous, have been appa- rently formed near the end of the Cretaceousepoch. As yet, their fossil flora is unknown. In connection with the thin layers of coaly matter in the shale of the Dakota group, no specimen of fossil plants has been discovered till now. Toward the end of the period of the Dakota group and in the upper beds of the formation a rapid succession in the elements of the com- pounds, mixed in various ways, in the size of the débris, ete, indicates a new influence, the introduction of deep marine water by slow submer- sion or subsidence of the land. It is after this, or in the Niobrara group, that the only species of marine plant described in the Cretaceous flora . has been found. This Zonarites digitatus,t though similar in its char- acter to the species published under this name by Brongniart and Geinitz, has its relation contradicted by the great difference between the geolog- ical periods where the remains have been found in Hurope and in America, and still more perhaps by the difficulty of identification of ma- rine plants whose characters are represented merely by a vague likeness of outlines. It would have been advisable, perhaps, to leave out without description a vegetable of that kind, not even referable to the Dakota group, and to leave also. without even a mention mere fragments like those described as Ligodium trichomanoides, Abietites Haydenii, Flabel- laria minima, ete., whose characters and relation are too vaguely indi- cated. But as the Cretaceous plants of this and other countries are scarcely known, it seemed proper to represent by drawing all the dis- cernible fragments, leaving to time an opportunity of confirming or refuting by better specimens the first determination. Even small frag- ments may become valuable as complement of other specimens which, fragmentary also, may be defined by those which have been published before, and which, for the same reason of defectiveness, should be left * Cretaceous flora in Dr. F. V. Hayden’s Report, vol. vi, pp. 26, 27. t Cretaceous Flora, p. 44, Pl. I, Fig. 1 LESQUEREUX.] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 321 aside as rubbish. Anemidium Schimpert, Sphenopteris grevillioides, etc., of the Cretaceous Arctic flora of Heer, are not more subject to satisfac-- tory determination than Lygodium trichomanoides or Pterophyllum Hay- denti. Moreover, this last species, though imperfectly represented, indi- cates a point of relation between the Dakota group flora and that of the Cretaceous (Quadersandstein) of the Hartz Mountains in Germany. Fragments of this kind are, therefore, doubly interesting by botanical and “geological affinities. Betore entering farther into the discussion and comparison of generic and specific types of the North American Cretaceous flora and of their relation with vegetable forms described from Cretaceous formation of. other countries, I have to add a few remarks more on the third volume of the Arctic flora of Heer, which was in publication at the same time as that of the flora of the Dakota group, and of which I could give only a short mention (p. 40), from a general synopsis formerly published by the celebrated author. The Cretaceous flora of Greenlaud, which constitutes the essential part of this third volume,* is in two parts. The first describes seventy-five species from four different localities of the north side of the peninsula of Noursoak, North Greenland, repre- senting a lower stage of the Cretaceous. Of these, thirty-eight belong to Ferns,t four to Lycopods and Equiseta, eight to Cicadex, sev- enteen to Conifers, six to Monocotyledons, and one to Dicotyledons. This flora is, therefore, composed of fifty-six per cent. of Acrogens, Ferns, Lycopods, and Equiseta; twelve per cent. of Cycadex; twenty- two per cent. of Conifers; eight per cent. of Menocotyledons ; and one per cent. of Dicotyledons. In the Ferns, the genera Aspleniwm, Pecopteris, Gleichenia, are predominant, this last genus especially, which is represented by thirteen species. In the Cicadex, the Zamites, five species; in the Conifers, the Sequoia and Pinus, the first with five spe- cies, the second with four. The second part of the Greenland Cretaceous flora describes remains of plants, especially found in the southern part of the same peninsula. Considered as Upper Cretaceous by the author, it has in sixty-two species, thirteen Ferns, two Cycadez, ten Conifers, three Mono- cotyledons, and thirty-four Dicotyledons. The relative proportion of these plants is therefore far different, as here, fifty-five per cent. are Dicotyledons. In regard to their generic distribution the predominance is marked, in the Ferns by Pecopteris and Gleichenia, in the Coniters by Sequoia and Pinus, and by Populus, Proteoides, Chondrophyllum, and Magnolia, in the Dicotyledons. And in considering the general character of the land vegetation of North Greenland, at the Cretaceous epcch, and as far as it is known for the present by counting together the species of both stations, we find it represented by a percentage of thirty-seven for the Ferns, three for the Lycopodiacee and Equisetacee, eight tor the Cycadee, ‘nineteen for the Conifers, six and a half for the Monccotyle- dons, and twenty five for the Dicotyledons, which therefore represent only one-fourth of the whole. The first exposition of the Dakota group flora shows four species of Ferns and six species of Conifers only. To this small number we have *A number of the Cretaceous plants of Cape Staratschin, Spitzberg, are also described in this work. They represent five Ferns, one Equisetum, nine Coniters, and one Mono- cotyledon, or sixteen species. The predominance of Conifers is remarkable as well as the absence of Cycadez and of Dicotyledons. Of these species, three Ferns and three Conifers are identified with the lower Greenland flora, and five Conifers with the upper, indicating an equal relation to both or an intermediate geological station. Bya misprint in the above exposition given in Cret. Flora, p. 40, the word Fucoids is written for Ferns. 1H oe GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. added in this review one species of Gleichenia and five species of Conifers. The specific value of some of the vegetable remains referable to this last family is, however, doubtful, especially for those which are represented by cones only, Abietites Hrnestinw, Sequoia formosa, Sequoia Reich- enbachi, and the fragments described as Inolepis, all which, however, though uncertain their specific or generic relation may be, are evidently representatives of some species of Conifers. The fragments referable to this group are of a difficult determination ; for the organs represented upon the coarse shale or hard ferruginous sandstone of the formation, merely expose some outlines of their forms by the same kind of fossili- zation or molding, remarked already for the leaves. We do not find, therefore, any flattened cones with the scales, any flattened branches with leaves, but impressions only, more or less deeply carved into the stone, the cones even passing through the shales and showing the space originally occupied, as a mere cylindrical hollow, around which the forms of the scales are more or less clearly engraved. The numerous leaves of Pinus spread upon the surface have dug in the same way and by their hard substance, narrow linear channels, representing the back of these leaves, with an indistinct midrib, and the branchlets of Sequoia also are seen as longitudinal grooves, bearing on both sides the same impressed form of their leaves. This cannot be considered a very dis- tinct representation of characters, the minute details desirable for an exact determination being more or less obsolete. Among the specimens recently examined, a fragment has been found geferable to Phyllocladus; the presence of this genus in the Cretaceous flora is thus sufficiently ascertained. We may, therefore, record as recognized in the flora of the Dakota group, for the Ferns, the genera Lygodium, Sphenopteris, Hymenophyllum, and Gleichenia, the three first by each one species, the last by two; and in the Conifers, Sequoia, by three species; Pinus, by one, and Phyllovladus by one, leaving out as of uncertain generic relation with the cones mentioned above, Glyptostrobus (?) gracillimus, which is perhaps identifiable with Sequoia condita, or with Frenelites, and Geinitzia (?), known merely by the im- pressions of some detached seales. To this should be added Araucaria spatulata, described in extinct floras of North America by Dr. New- berry, from Nebraska specimens. A fine plant, doubtfully described with the Ferns in Cretaceous Vlora, p. 48, Plate X XIX, figs. 1-4, under the name of Todea (?) saportanea, has tobe eliminated from this family. For, though the shape of the leaflets, their mode of union to the rachis, the position of parallel equal branches are, by similarity, comparable to leaflets and - to divisions of fronds of ferns, the areolation of the leaves, which has been studied from better specimens and figured here again, Pl. VI, fig. 2, more positively relates these vegetable fragments to a peculiar section of the Proteacee or to Lomatia, a genus especially represented in Aus- tralian Islands and on the southwestern coast of South America, Chili, and Peru. For this. separation I readily submit to the opinions of learned friendly critics. But I cannot consider the glumaceous leaf and tubercle described as Phragmites cretaceous in Cret. Fl., p. 55, Pl. I, figs. 13, 14, and Pl. XXIX, fig. 7, as a species of Draccena or Yucea, &e. The tubercle represented (tig. 13) is really similar to organs of the same kind found attached to Rhizomas and to stems of fossil Phragmites and Arundo. And for confirmation of the warranted reference of these fragments, we have now in Arundo greenlandica, Heer. FI. Arct., VILLI, p- 104, Pl. XX VIII, figs. 8-11, leaves which, though narrower, have the same form and the same characters of nervations as those of the Dakota LESQUEREUX.] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. a20 group. In the Kansas specimens only the epidermis of the leaf is destroyed at a few places where the veinlets become perceptible. Gen- erally, however, as in the specimens of Greenland, the primary veins only can be seen. Of the fragments doubtfully referred to Flabellaria? and described as F'. minima, Cret. FI., p. 56, Pl. XXX, fig. 19, nothing more has been discovered in regard to their relation, which has to be considered as unknown as yet. The same may be said of the peculiar vegetable form described in Cret. Fl., Pl. 1, fig. 6, as Pterophyllum? Haydenti, which was supposed to represent some kind of Cicadece. It differs from any species known of this family by the broad stem and short leaves, nar- rowed to the point of attachment, and from these characters Professor Heer thinks it referable to Conifers. Now, counting the leaf described as Dioscorea? cretacea, whose generic reference may be doubted, but which evidently represent a species of the Dioscoree or a monocotyledonous, and also the fragments reterable to Conifers in the description, we have to this time, in the flora of the Da- kota group, and exclusively of the dicotyledonous, sixteen specific forms, representing the cryptogamous acrogens by five Ferns, the phoenogamous gymnosperms by nine Conifers, and the monocotyledonous by one glu- maceous and one petaloid species. The first dicotyledonous leaves described in the Cretaceous Flora, under the name of Liquidambar integrifolium, have been considered by some authors as uncertain in regard to their generic relation merely on account of their entire borders. The form of the leaves, however, espe- cially as figured (PI. Ll), with the lobes slightly enlarged above the sinuses, and then gradually narrowed to a slightly obtuse point, and the nervation also, have the same character as those of the living Liqut- dambar styraciflua. It is true that the four species of this genus known in the present flora have serrate borders of leaves. But three fossil species represented by leaves with entire borders have been described as Liquidambar from the Tertiary of Europe; and, though this reference is more or less hypothetical and controversed, it shows, however, that botanists of high standing—Unger, Watelet, Massalongo—have con- sidered as probable, at least, the relation of leaves with entire borders to this genus. It is easily seen that the leaves of Aralia Towneri, de- scribed in this paper (Pl. IV, fig. 1), have a relation of shape or general outline to those of Liquidambar integrifolium ; and this apparent simi- larity can but suggest the possible reference of all these and like forms to the genus Aralia. I may admit this reference as probable for the two leaves figured in Cret. Fl., Pl. X XIX, figs. 8 and 9, which are compara- ble, by their primary nervation, to those of Aralia conereta, sp. nov., Pl. IV, figs. 2 and 3. But though we have now a large number of speci- mens referable to divers araliaceous types, there is none as yet with leaves divided into lanceolate acute lobes like those which are figured in Pl. II, Cret. Fl. The reference of these leaves to Sterculia has been proposed also, from analogy of forms to some species of this genus. The presence of one well characterized species of Sterculia in the Creta- ceous flora of New Jersey, where it is in connection with numerous leaves of Magnolia alternans, seems to give a kind of support to this | proposition. But in this case, also, I find too evident a difference in the characters of nervation of the palmately-nerved leaves of Sterculia with those referred to Liquidambar. Even taking as evidence of possible affin- ities the distribution in the same formation of leaves referable to allied genera, we could just aswell admit the presence of Liquidambar species in the Dakota group, by the reason that other forms of Hamamelidea, 324 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. a family to which this genus belongs, are recognized in the same group. From these considerations, I persist in regarding as ancient, primitive, or derived representatives of a species of Liquidambar the fossil leaves de- scribed under this generic name, until other specimens, if any are found, may point, by a variation of characters, to another more evident rela. tion.* A number of vegetable remains of the Cretaceous are evidently referable, by their characters, to Populus. The only dicotyledonous leaves recognized by Heer, in the specimens which he studied trom the Lower Cretaceous formations of Greenland, represent a Populus, appropri- ately specified by the name of P. primeva. From a higher stage of the samme Cretaceous formation of that country, the celebrated Swiss pale- ontologist has described three other species of Populus. In his Phyl- lites Crétacées du Nebraska, and from specimens of the Dakota group, he has recognized Populus litigiosa, Populus? debeyana, and another species still, P. cyclophylla, described in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Professor Newberry, in his paper on the later extinet floras of North America, has described, also, besides the doubtful P.? debeyana, three new species: Populus? cordifolia, P. elliptica, and P. microphilla. The specification and the interrogative punctuation applied to some of these hames show that the authors them- selves do not consider the generic reference as definitive, the character of some of the Jeaves being somewhat in disaccord with those generally recognized in species of Populus of our present time. Indeed, species of this kind, like the present P. alba, for example, have such multiplied and diversified forms of leaves, such great variability in their nervation, the mode of attachment of the petiole, &c., that they readily offer, by comparison with fossil leaves of obscure relation, some points of affinity which, being not found elsewhere, have to be considered by the authors. Hence the doubtful references which may be, and are often rectified by subsequent discoveries, as is proved by the great proportion of synonyms appended to the enumeration of Pupulus species. To obviate this incon- venient multiplication of fluctuating species of Populus, I proposed a new generic division, under the name ot Populites, for the classification of those Cretaceous leaves, numerous indeed, which, partaking of some of the characters of Populus, are nevertheless removed fren this division by some others, as remarked in the memoir.j Populus lancastriensis — was considered as a legitimate species of the genus, and in the new division were described Popuilites elegans, P. ovata, P. quadrangularis, P, fiabellata, and P. salisburiefolia, with P. cyctophylla, represented by leaves which I considered as answering to the description of this species by Heer. This first memoir on some Cretaceous fossil plants from Nebraska had to be prepared, at a short notice, from a limited number of speci- mens. Since its publication, I have had opportunity to study the specific forms of this Cretaceous flora by comparing a very large number of specimens, and have thus recognized a more evident affinity of some of those leaves referred to Populites with other generic divisions. The only Populites lancastriensis and P. elegans which Schimper considers as a true Populus are preserved in this genus, while Populites cyclophylla and P. ovata, appearing rather related by their characters to the Ampelidec, are deseribed under a new generic division. The leaves represented by these species have, indeed, by their craspedodrome and subpalmate ner- *Fraements of leaves closely allied to this form are vesoualen as Phyllites in Reuss, Verstein, Pl. LI, figs. 4 and 5. t Am. Jour. Sci., Yol. xlvi, July, 1868, p. 93. LESQUEREUX. ] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 325 vation, and by their base narrowed to the petiole, a more evident affinity to species of Cissus, or Vitis, than to those of Populus. In regard to the distribution of Populus, to which is referred the most ancient dicotyledonous leaves known as yet, that of the Lower Creta- ceous of Greenland, it has, as said above, three species known already in the Upper Cretaceous of that same country, and five or six in the Dakota group. It has, however, not been remarked in any Cretaceous flora of Europe. It is not mentioned in the review of the genera repre- sented by the, as yet, undescribed species of Aix la Chapelle, and no form even distantly related is described in the Lower Paleocene flora of Gelinden. It has, however, one species in the Eccene flora of Sezane, and increases in the number of its representatives in all the stages of the Miocene. As far as we know it, till now, it has few species in our Lower or first American Tertiary group, the Hocene; a large propor- tion, eight per cent. of the species, in the second ; sti!l more, or tweive per cent., in the third; and is scarcely present in the fourth, the Green River group. The presence of willows, species of Salix, in the flora of the Dakota group is not controverted; the reference of leaves by which the genus is represented in this formation is evident. As it is seen in Cretaceous Flora, p. 60, Pl. V, figs. 1-4, I have described as refer- able to one species only, a number of leaves somewhat different in their size and their shape. As the specimens representing them are from the same locality, and as I recognized upon some of them fragments of leaves with all differences of size, forms, and even consistence and color, I considered them as mere variations of leaves of a same tree. Dr. Newberry has from the same formation four species which, he says, he has chosen to regard as distinct, for geological convenience. No salix has been recognized as yet in any stage of the Cretaceous of Green- land; but one species, Salix Hartigit, Denk, is from the quader sand- stein of Germany, and another, Salix Goetziana, Heer, from Quedlin- burg. The genus is therefore sparingly represented in Hurope and North America in Cretaceous floras which are considered as nearly synchronous. The other genera of the Amentacee, Betula, Alnus or Alnites, Myrica, Quercus, Fagus and Ficus, to which leaves have been referred in the Cretaceous Flora, do not require any observations. In this case, as in all the determinations of fossil plants, the characters cf the species are not always satisfactorily established, but the generic affinities have been recognized or passed without any marked criticism. The generic relation is especially positive for the remains referable to Myrica, which was already represented in the Cretaceous Flora by one fragmentary leaf and by seeds, and to which a fine new species is added in this memoir. It seems equally so for Quereus or its peculiar division, . Dryophyllum, of which we have two new species, and for Ficus, to which one species is added. Specimens of leaves referable to Platanus have been found in moder- ate proportion both in Nebraska and Kansas. The first was described by Heer, in the “ Phyllites du Nebraska,” as Platanus Newberry?, trom avery incomplete fragment. The accuracy of this determination was, however, subsequently testified by the discovery of more complete leaves figured in Cretaceous Flora, Pl. VILL, figs. 2 and 3, and Pl. IX, fig. 3, which show the narrowed base descending along the petiole lower than the point of union of lateral primary veins, and also the tendency to a three-lobed division, characters which were not observable in the fragment which Professor Heer had for his examination. To this fine species have been added: Platanus primeva, described from leaves so remarkably 2 326 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. similar to those of P. aceroides, of the Miocene, that I was at first disposed to consider them as identical; then, P. Heerti, rare, like the former, and found as yet only along the blufis of the Salina River; P. obtusiloba, from a number of somewhat fragmentary specimens from Beatrice, Nebraska, all representing leaves of about the same size and of the same characters; P. affinis, P. recurvata, and P. diminutiva. All the species are described and figured in Cretaceous Flora. The last one as remarked in its description may be a dwarfed form of P. prameva or P. Heerii. The leaf appears as gnawed along the veins by insects or perhaps by a parasite fungus. Its specification is not positive and is subject to criticisms. ‘The base of the leaf is rounded to the petiole, a character as yet unique for a species of this kind. PP. recurvata should, following the opinion of my honored friend Count Saporta, be referred to the Aralicese by a more intimate affinity to Araliopsis species; and Platanus affinis seems now, after the examination and comparison of a number of specimens from Kansas, more evidently referable to the Ampelidew than to the Platanee. Therefore these two last species are now eliminated from this generic division. I persist in considering P. Heerti and Pl. obtusiloba as two different species, though it has been suggested that the last was probably a mere variety of the first. The identity is denied not only by the facies, and the nervation of the leaves, but especially by the thinner texture of those of P. obtusiloba. The fact, that the numerous specimens representing it are all from the same place in Nebraska, and that P. Heerit has not been found in this State till now, confirms this separation. In regard to this last species, Professor Geinitz has remarked in the Isis, 1875, p. 558, that paleontologists might perhaps recognize in it a Credneria. There is some similarity in the general outline of the leaves, indeed. But this might be said of many of the generic forms of the Cretaceous, which seem to refer to a few different types, or to present in one leaf the characters which we now generally find isolated in separate vegetable groups. The genus Credneria, known as it is to me by what is described in the vol. V, of the Paleontographica, by Stiehler, includes species with cord- ate or subcordate leaves (none narrowed to the petiole), and bearing above the base two or three true secondary veins in right angle to the midrib. In P. Heerii, the leaves are cuneate to the base, even gradually narrowed or decurrent to the petiole, which thus becomes slightly winged, and the veins under the primary nerves are mere marginal veinlets. Per- haps the relation of this species is more marked to the genus Ltting- hausenia, which, I regret to say, is scarcely known to me except by OChondrophyllum grandidentatum, as represented by Heer in the Creta- ceous Flora of Moletin, and by Phyllites repandus, Sternb., two forms which have no affinity to Platanus. _ In regard to its geological distribution, this genus is truly remark- abie. No trace of it is recorded as yet in the Cretaceous of Kurope, not even in the Paleocene and Eocene of France, so rich in fossil vegetable remains. Its first appearance in Europe is in the Upper Miocene of OCeningen, and of Austria and Italy, where it is represented by two very similar forms, Platanus Guillelme and P. aceroides. These two species are present in the same tormation from the northern parts of the Arctie lands to Italy. It is followed in the Upper Tertiary or Pliocene of this last country by Platanus Academie Gaud, related as originator, perhaps, to the living P. orientalis. I have remarked above that the relation of leaves of the Dakota group to Platanws has been considered as doubtful by some European paleontologists. This doubt may have been induced by the understanding of the total absence of Platanus leaves in the Cretaceous and Lower Tertiary of Hurope. If so, it is cer- LESQUEREUX. | REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 327 tainly removed by the presence in our lignitic Eocene of some very beautiful and well characterized species of this genus: Platanus Haydenti and P. Reynoldsii, Newby. Tuese species, discovered first in the Tertiary cf the Upper Missouri River, near ort Union, are predom- inant at Golden, Colo., by the number of specimens which represent them, and are also found at Black Butte. The third Tertiary group, that of Carbon, has, fcr the more numerous representatives of its flora, leaves of Platanus Aceroides and Pl. Guillelme. No species of this genus has been described from the Green River or fourth group ; but we have from the Upper Tertiary (Pliocene) of California very fine specimens of leaves of two species of Platanus closely related by their characters to the living Platanus occidentalis. Therefore, and consider- ing the geological records, we may trace the origin of Platanus as far down as the North American Cretaceous, and follow its development through nearly all the stages of the Tertiary to our present time, by a number of closely-allied intermediate forms. Coming now to the Lawrinew, I have to remark somewhat more defi- nitely on thé Cretaceous species referred to this family. The relation of some of them to the genera to which they have been referred is gen- erally acknowledged, and the presence of the Laurinee in our Cretaceous flora receives a kind of historical authority by that of a Sassafras in a Cretaceous formation of Greenland; of three species of Daphno- phylum in that of Moletin, and of Laurus cretacea, Daphnogene primigenia, Daphnites Gopperti, in that of Niedershoena. Of the species which have been described formerly in the flora of the Dakota group, Laurus Nebrascencis is related to Daphnophyllum ellipticum and D. crassinervium of Heer, while Cinnamomum and Oreodaphne cretacea are comparable to Daphnogene primigenia of HKttinghausen. Persea Sternbergvt is also evidently of the same family, and the two leaves, described here below under the name of Laurus protecefolia, are indeed allied to species of Laurus or of Persea by their nervation, especially by the more acute angle of divergence of the lower veins, though they show in the grooved middle nerve a character often remarked in species of Ficus, especially Ficus protogea Heer, of the Greenland Cretaceous flora. Moreover, the fruit described (Fl. Cret., p. 74) as Laurus macre- carpa satisfactorily completes the evidence afforded by the leaves, of the existence of species of Laurine in the vegetable world of the Cre- taceous epoch. We have, however, to eliminate of this family Lauro- phyllum reticulatum, which appears more properly referable to Ficus. its nervation, and especially its areolation, formed of square or irreg- ularly polygonal meshes by the interposition of tertiary veins between the secondary ones and parallel to them, and the rectangular subdi- vision of its branches, are of the same character as in Picus Geinitet, Ett., Ficus protogea, Heer, and many species of this genus now living in Cuba, even Florida, like Ficus suffocans, F. lentiginosa, L. pertusa, FI. dimidiata, etc. Numerous specimens recently found in Kansas repre- sent this fossil species in characters more precise than formerly, as seen in its more detailed description under the name of Ficus lawrophyllum. But if the reterence of some of the above-mentioned leaves to the Laurinee is not contested, it is not the same in regard to those which, at first appearance, were considered as more positively related to it, and which have been described under the generic name of Sassafras. The question of the relation of those leaves which, by their number, seem to be the essential components of the North American Cretaceous flora, has been already touched upon.* But since, I have obtained * Cretaceous Flora, p. 77. 328 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. from divers localities a large number of specimens representing all the forms described as species in the same work, and I have now some more data to offer to the consideration of paleontologists on the subject. From historical documents the presence of Sassafras species in the flora of the Dakota group is as legitimately presumable as that of species of Laurus or Persea. In his Flora Arctica, Heer has described as Sassafras arctica a leaf which, by its form, is similar to those described as Sassafras creiaceum, as remarked by the author, differing merely by its base somewhat less narrowly tapering to the petiole. The nervation is of the same character. Count Saporta considers this Greenland leaf as a true representative of Sassafras. He has himself published in the Sezane Flora,* as S. primigenium, two fragmentary leaves whose base, more narrowly tapering, is similar to that of our S. Mudgei, as well as the lobes which, enlarged in the mid- dle, have that ovate-lanceolate shape so distinctly marked in the present 8. officinale. There is also no appreciable difference in the nervation. The lower secondary veins of the middle lobe ascend a little higher in the leaves of the Sezane flora, and unite with those of the lateral lobes somewhat nearer the borders of the sinuses. But in some of the speci- mens of Kansas the same appearance is remarked also, and the difference between the more or less distance which separate from the sinuses the branch which unites the upper division of the secondary veins, is ob- servable upon leaves of S. officinale, this vein being sometimes mar- ginal, sometimes curving one to three millimeters lower than the border of the sinuses. Comparing leaves of Sassafras officinale with those rep- resented by Count Saporta in the Flora of Sezane and the specimens of S. Mudgei from Kansas, itis impossible for me to recognize any charac- ter, even any specific difference by which these leaves could be sepa- rated. It is, therefore, not surprising that Dr. Newberry first, and after him Heer and Schimper, did consider Cretaceous specimens of this kind as representing species of Sassafras. In the last volume of his superb work on Vegetable Paleontology.t Prof. W. P. Schimper, speaking of leaves of Sassufras cretaceum, of which I had sent him photographical designs, remarks, ‘* That those leaves, very variable in size, present such a remarkable likeness to those of S. officinale, now living in North Amer- ica, that one would be disposed to consider them as belonging to an homologous species.” He rightly adds that the only difference seems to be in the thicker substance of the fossil leaves. Even on this point I have from Texas specimens of the present S. cretaceous, whose leaves appear of a consistence nearly as thick as those of the Dakota group seem to have been. But now, and on another side, no species of the Lawrinee family living at our time is known with dentate leaves ; and it may be remarked, from the figures, that the two leaves described as Sassafras Oretacewm (Cret. Flor., Pl. XI, figs. 1 and 2) have the borders of the lobes somewhat dentate, and some of the secondary veins running into the point of the teeth or craspedodrome. This’ character is still more marked in S. mi- rabile, loc. cit., Pl. XII, fig. 1, a form extremely common in Southern Kan- sas, and represented in very numerous and remarkable varieties. In some of the leaves the secondary veins are all camptodrome, and there- fore the borders of the lobes are entire. In others, as seen, Pl. XI, fig. 2, the outside lateral veins are craspedodrome, and thus the borders den- tate, while on the inside they curve along the borders, which are entire. *P. 366, Tab. VIII, figs. 9 and 10. + Traité de Paleontologie végétale, vol. iii, p. 598. _ LESQUEREUX.] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 329 In the fine complete leaf, fig. 1 of the same plate, the middle lobe has the veins all camptodrome on the left side, while on the right one a few of them, one or two, reach to the border, which has, therefore, one or two short undistinct teeth, and the lateral lobes are clearly dentate on the out- side only. This evidently shows such a disposition to variations of nervation and border divisions, that I did formerly consider as unjusti- fiable a specific, and still more a generic division between the leaves of Pl. XI, figs. 1 and 2, and those of Pl. XII, figs. 2-and 3, of the Cret. Flora. When, therefore, we find the same differences between the leaves which represent S. mirabile, Pl. XI, fig. 1, it seems that the same conclusion should follow. But in this case, with the more generally predominant character of the indentation of the leaves, which, in some larger specimens than the one figured, are more deeply cut by divisions, like pointed lobes, there is still another one, remarked on a specimen recently discovered, which seems to more forcibly separate these forms from the Lauwrinee, and indicates a more evident relation to the Aralia- cee. The specimen communicated by M. Chs. Sternberg, to whose careful and zealous researches the flora of the Dakota group is indebted for many important discoveries, represents a large leaf which, by its out- lines, the nervation, and the dentate borders of its lobes, is exactly like our S. mirabile of Pl. XI, fig. 1. The leaf, which is much larger, how- ever, the lobes measuring ten centimeters in length from the point of union of the primary nerves, greatly differs by the forking of the lateral nerves, from a point two and one-half centimeters above their base, and thus forming, of course, a subdivision of these lobes into two equal parts, or a palmately five-lobed leaf. Among the innumerable varieties in the shape of the leaves of the living Sassafras officinale, we see a constant and gradual mode of division passing from a round or oval and entire shape to a bilobed and trilobed one; but, as yet, I have been unable to observe a single case of subdivision of the lateral lobes, or to find a palmately five-lobed Sassafras leaf. This character is, on the contrary, far more generally seen in the Araliacee of our time than in the trilo- bate form of Sassafras. But in this section of Araliacec, the Hedera, which may be compared to our leaves, I do not know any with trilobate leaves. Hedera turbascens, H. discolor, H. argentea, H. aurifolia, H. ja- tropefolia, have leaves five to seven palmately lobed, or, when occa- Sionally trifid, their segments are narrow and acuminate, of a type related to that of Aralia tripartita of P1. I, fig. 1, of the memoir. The ref- erence of these leaves to Araliacee is, therefore, apparently obscure or uncertain. And still,on another side, comparing the beautiful Aralia saportanea represented in this memoir, fig. 2 of the same plate, we See in its nervation, as well as in the indentation of the borders, &c., a remarkable identity of characters with those of the five-lobate leat’ of Araliopsis mirabilis. Thus we have about the same degree of evidence in regard to the relation of these fossil leaves to Aralia or to Sassafras. Going further into this kind of investigation, we are met by a new difficulty in the appearance of another modification in the characters of this peculiar type of leaves. In examining the first specimens of the species represented, Pl. II, fig. 1, I could but consider them as repre- senting either Sassafras (Araliopsis) obtusum, or S. mirabile, for, the specimens being fragmentary, had only the lobes or part of them. As long as the auricled and peltate base was unknown, the reference of the specimen could not be different. The nervation, the form of the lobes, their size, all is of the same character as in S. mirabile. But in the peltate base of the leaves, which is figured from a leaf pre- served entire, Pl. IT, fig. 1, and from fragment of much larger ones, 330 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. fic. 2, we have another character which presents the union of leaves of this kind either with the Laurinee or with the Araliacea, and thus it is necessary to admit a third generic division for the classification of the vegetable remains of this new and remarkable type, which adds to its affinity to Sassafras and Aralia a character which relates it to Platanus and Credneria, by the basilar appendage of the leaves and its nerva- tion. We have thus already in those leaves Sassafras, represented by S. Mudgei, and less positively by S. acutilobum, S. cretaceum, and SW. cretaceum var. obtusum, which, as seen by the desernption, has to be considered as a specific form. To Araliopsis are referable S. mirabile, with the dentate S. cretacewm and Platanus recurvata; and to the new generic division, under the name of Aspidiophyllum, those leaves which, either Aralia or Sassafras by their upper trilobate part, are forcibly separated from these genera by their auricled peltate append- age. Still, the subdivisions in the classification of these peculiar and so-called Sassafras leaves, have to be pursued farther, for by degree and by the gradual obliteration of their lobes, they become round or truncate, or broadly pointed at the top, preserving more or less the narrowed base, tapering to a long petiole, and the trifid craspedodrome nervation from a distance above the borders, and thus they become more evidently related to other vegetable orders. One species is a true Hedera, another goes to the Hamamelidee, and a number have their affinity with the “Ampelidece. The characters of the leaves of this order, especially those of Cis- sus, are somewhat obscurely represented in Sassafras Harkerianum, Cret. Flor., Pl. XI, figs. 3 and 4; Pl. XXVII, fig. 2, and in S. obtusum, Pl. XIU, figs. : 2 to 4; more distinctly in Cissites acuminatus, aru. VILL, ite, Jk and C. Heerii, Pl. VI, fig. 3, two new species de-. scribed in this’ memoir. They appear to constitute an indivisible group with the two former ones. Some of the leaves formerly de- scribed as Populites are also referable to this section, or to another less exactly defined ; Ampelophyllum, allied by some of its characters to Hedera, by others to Credneria ; thus intermediate to the Ampelide or the Tiliacee; by the areolation to Greviopsis, and also more distantly to Chondrophyllum of Heer, as remarked in the description. From this it is perceivable that this Sassafras type, which at the beginning was regarded as simple, well defined, and limited in its character, is, on the contrary, multiple and representing forms which, as far as the re- searches increase the discoveries, indicate affinity to a number of differ- ent genera or orders of the vegetable reign. Considering for example Sassafras acutifolium of Cret. Flor., Pl. XIV, which, from specimens representing intermediate forms between fig. 3 and fig. 4, I was disposed to consider as a mere variety of S. Mudgei, and passing to fig. 7 of PI. XXX, evidently of the same generic type, and then to fig. 1 of Pl. VIII of this memoir, where is the difference or the point of separation to be marked? The type of Ampelide is quite as distinct as that of the Araliacee in this peculiar group; but both are recognized it seems merely in the extreme and opposed limits of their modifications. The same remark is applicable just as well to the leaves which have been described in the Cret. Flora under the generic name of Protophyl- lum. The disagreement in the affinities of its species has been exposed in the remarks following the description of the genus. I have now to add still to this division two leaves recently communicated from Kan- sas, represented, Pl. III, fig. 1, and Pl. VIII, fig. 4. They fully confirm the former observations. By the outline of the leaves, their craspedo- drome nervation, and the presence of two pairs of secondary veins LESQUEREUX.| REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 331 under the primary ones and in right angle to the midrib, they represent a species of Protophyllum; but the border base of the leaves is truncate, not subpeltate, and by this difference the leaves are rather referable to Oredneria, from which, however, they differ by the veins all craspedo- drome as well as their divisions, and by the truncate, not cordate, base of the leaves. I have formerly published a short description of these leaves under the name of Credneria ? microphylla. It now seems that by their evident relation to Protophyllum quadratum, they have to be admitted in the generic division, an optnion which may be put at naught by the discovery of specimens pointing to another reference for these leaves. We have, also, an addition of three new species to the group of Cre- taceous plants described under the genericname of Menispermites. In this case, however, there is no difficulty whatever in conformably uniting into a definite group the characters of the leaves which, round, ovate, or oval, with borders entire or undulate, have a common generic affinity, indi- cated by their nervation. In order to more clearly bring into view the relation of the undulate-lobed forms of leaves described in Cret. Flora, Pl. XX, figs. 1-4, and Pl. XXV, fig. 1, I have represented, Pl. VII, fig. 3, of this paper, a finely and wholly preserved leaf of Menisper- mites obtusiloba, which, though small, is easily identified with the large one of Pl. XXV, fig. 1. Now, comparing it to figs. 3 and 4 of the present Pl. V, the identity of nervation is defined by the five basilar veins, with a thin pair of marginal veinlets underneath; and by the up- ward direction of the internal lateral veins, which, in fig. 3 of Pl. VII, ascend to above the middle, pass still higher in the short oval leaf, Pl. V, fig. 3, and reach nearly to the obtuse point in fig. 4. The subdi- vision of the tertiary veins is in all the leaves of the same type, and the shape of the leaves or their outlines are mere modifications, depending upon the direction of the veins. The leaf, Pl. VI, fig. 4, is peltate from the point of attachment of the petiole near the middle. The char- acter of the nervation remains, however, the same. It is somewhat ob- secured in the figure, from indistinctness of the specimen. But a larger, finer leaf of the same species, has been more recently procured by Mr. H. C. Towner, of Clay Center, Kansas, another of those proficient ex- plorers whose researches have greatly increased the materials for the elucidation of the Cretaceous flora. This leaf, preserved in its whole is nearly round, with slightly undulate borders, and the nervation is marked by three pairs of primary veins, on each side of the mid rib, and under them by one pair of true marginal veinlets curving on each side toward the borders. Comparing, therefore, this peltate leaf with that of Pl. V, fig. 3, the position of the petiole is the only notable difference. The peltate form of these round leaves might perhaps sug- gest the fitness of some slight modification in the characters assigned to the genus Pterospermites, in the Cret. Flora, p. 94, the leaves being here rounded or subcordate at base. The difference is immaterial, and is remarked even upon leaves of the same species of Menispermum of our epoch. These round peltate leaves, for example, are so much like those of living species of Cissampelos, that they rather prove the adaptation of this generic division to all the Cretaceous leaves which I have referred to it. The Magnoliacee, an order of the same class, are equally numerously and definitely represented in the North American Cretaceous flora in about the same proportion as they are in that of Europe. Magnolia al- ternans and M. Capellini have been described by Heer in his Phillites du Nebraska; and since, these two species have been recognized over 332 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the whole explored area of the Dakota group, as also in the lower stage of the Cretaceous of New Jersey, and in the Upper Cretaceous of Green- land. Two other species have been described from the Dakota group: one, M. obovata, by Dr. Newberry, in his Ancient Floras; another, J. tenuifolia, in Cret. lora. In Europe the leaves referable to this genus are of a different type than ours, larger and more beautiful. Two species—M. amplifolia and M. speciosa—are described by Heer in the Flora of Moletin, there represented by leaves and fruits. Count Sa- porta considers also as a Magnolia Phyllites plagiaus, Ung., of the flora of Gosau. To the same order belong Liriodendron, so easily recognized in the peculiar form of its leaves. Its Cretaceous origin, or rather existence, is marked in the Dakota group by a number of specific representatives locally and distantly distributed. At least, though the first lot of Cre- taceous specimens sent from Nebraska and Kansas for examination had many fragments of the species described in Cretaceous Flora, I have since received only a small leaf found in Kansas by Dr. Mudge, refera- ble to L. Meekii. This genus is not as yet represented in the Cretaceous floras of Europe, nor in that of Greenland. To the class of the Columniferee, taking altogether the three orders, Sterculie, Buttneriacew, and Pterosperme, are apparently referable the forms described under the generic name of Protophyllum, as well as the true Oredneria. The Sterculiacee are more distinctly represented by a leaf described in this memoir as Sterculia cretacea. Though the nerva- tion is obsolete, the mode of division of the leaf in equal linear diverg- ing lobes is like that of species of this genus, which has also a well-de- fined species in both stages of the Cretaceous of New Jersey. To tke Tiliacee, the leaves described as Greviopsis Haydenii have an evident affinity of characters. The relation of Cretaceous species to the following and last classes of the vegetable reign is not very clearly defined. To the Acerec is retera- ble Negundoides acutifolius of the Cretaceous Flora. The leaf, however, as seen from the figure and description, is too fragmentary for a satisfactory determination of its characters. Acer antiquum is described by Htting- hausen in his Cretaceous Flora of Niedersheena. But even from the opinion of the author the reference is uncertain. The leaf rather resem- bles a deformed form of Quercus or of Liriodendron. Heer has trom the Upper Cretaceous of Greenland a Sapindus prodromus, represented by one leaf only, which, however, has evidently the character of the genus. To the Rhamni, the leaf described as Rhamnus tenax, in Cretaceous Flora, is probably related, and this relation seems con- firmed by the presence of Celastrophyllum and Ilex species in the same formation. Count Saporta, however, considers this leaf as show- ing more affinity. of form and nervation to Salix. To the Anacardie, we have probably to refer as Rhus debeyana, that species described as Populus and as Juglans, as seen in Cretaceous Flora, p. 110. I have not obtained from the Dakota group any new materials comparable to this form, especially common in Nebraska. But I have seen -a very fine specimen got out of a deep tunnel in Oregon, presenting upon its sur- face, with the details of nervation and areolation, some punctiform small protuberances, apparently oily glands, like those remarked upon leaves of the living Rhus aromatica and other species of this genus. A species of Rhus is described from the Cretaceous of Greenland by Heer, while considering historical authority, we have the same evidence in favor of Juglans, by a species of this genus in the Cretaceous flora of Moletin. Of the Rosifloree, we have from the Dakota group one leai and LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 333 one fruit described as Prunus. Ihave recently received from M. Towner a fruit of the same character upon a specimen bearing leaves of Aralia Townert. The Myrtifiore, as well as the Leguminose present by a nun- ber of species in the Greenland Cretaceous, have not been till now posi- tively recognized from Kansas and Nebraska specimens. The few groups not considered in this review have been remarked upon already in the Cretaceous Flora, and the former views, in regard to the leaves referred to them, have not been modified either by the remarks of Eu- ropean authors or by the discovery of new materials. § 2. DESCRIPTION AND ENUMERATION OF GENERIC AND SPECIFIC DIVISIONS. With the descriptions of the new forms illustrated by the plates, this part of the memoir contains an enumeration of all the species established till now from the vegetable remains of the Dakota group, with remarks suggested by the examination of the materials discovered since the publication of the Cret. Flora*. In order to give to this enumeration the value of a synopsis of this flora, I have added to the specific names short descriptions, either copied in full or somewhat modified from those of the same volume. For the discovery and the communication of the new materials, all coilected in Kansas, the thanks of paleontologists are due especially to Messrs. Ch. Sternberg, of Fort Harker, H. C. Towner, of Clay Center, and also to Prof. B. F. Mudge, of Manhattan. CRY PTOGAMOUS. THALLOPHYTES. AZONARITES DIGITATUS, Brgt., Cret. Flor., p. 44, Pl. I, fig. 1. Frond flat, membranaceous, dichotomous, branching in an acute angle of Miveryence; divisions as broad or broader than the main axis, linear, entire, obtuse, slightly enlarging upward. The reference of this species to that described by Brongiart from the Oolithe is contested especially by reason of difference in the geological station. FILICES. LYGODIUM TRICHOMANOIDES, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 45, Pl. I, fig. 2. Pinna linear, from the truncate base to the middle, enlarged and lobed upward by the forking of the middle nerve; veins broadly oblique, distinct, siinple or forking from the base. HYMENOPHYLLUM CRETACEUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 45, Pl. I, figs. 3, 4. Frond subcoriaceous, pinne linear oblong, pinnately divided into oblan- ceolate or cuneiform oblique pinnules, decurring to the convex, slightly winged rachis, more or less deeply bi-trilobate; lobes obtuse, simple-nerved. This, like the former species and Sphenopteris corrugata, Newby., are contestable on account of the deficiency of the specimens. PECOPTERIS NEBRASKANA, Heer. Cret. Flor., p. 46, Pl. X XIX, fig 5. Pinnee coriaceous, linear-lanceolate obtuse, alternately equally lobed ; lobes more or less disjointed, turned outside, obtuse ; middle vein thin, wn dulating ; divisions alternate, ascending to the borders. i * Report of the United States Geological Survey of the Territories, by Dr. F. V. Hay- den, vol. vi, Cretaceous Flora (1874). 334 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. GLEICHENIA KuRRIANA, Heer., Cret. Flor., p. 47, Pl. I, Figs 5-5°. Frond pinnate ; pinne long, linear, pinnately equally lobed ; lobes nearly ot right angle to the rachis separated to near the base ; medial nerve thick, pinnately branchiug, veins forking at the middle. GLEICHENIA NORDENSKIOLDI, Heer, Flor. Foss. Arct., p. 50, Tab. IX, figs. 6-12.—PI. LL, fig. 5.- Frond slender dichotomous, bi-polypinnate; ultimate pinne alternate, rigid, open, linear, parallel; leaflets free, oblong obtuse, rounded at their buse, inclined upward, coriaceous ; secondary veins few, three or four patrs, the lower forking, the wpper simple. This species is very distinct from the former, and the differences in the characters easily seen even in our fragmentary specimens. In the one figured here, the pinnules are separated to their base, and not mere lobes as in the former; they are turned upward, and by the upper basilar border they compress the rachis, which becomes evidently flexuous, in our specimen, at least ; the veins, also, are more distant, or less divided. The fructifications of this fine fern are marked upon the specimens of Greenland by two large round sori on each side of the middle nerve, near the base of the leaflets. There is no difference whatever in any of the characters of the Kansas specimen with those of the Greenland form. Even the undulation of the primary rachis distinctly remarked in Tab. IX, fig. 7, of Heer’s flora, is equally distinct in the primary rachis of the fragment figured here. This species has been observed on specimens from the Lower Cretaceous of Greenland only, wherefrom Professor Heer has described thirteen species of Gleichenia, while only two were found in the specimens of the Upper Cretaceous of the same country. Hapirat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. PHANOGAMOUS. CYCADE A. 4 PTEROPHYLLUM (7?) HAYDENII, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 49, Pl. I, fig. 6, 6°. Frond linear, simply pinnate ; rachis rugose, half an inch broad or more, marked by circular dots in vertical rows, and regularly placed about half a centimeter distant, apparently scars of the points of attachment of the pinne; pinne (or leaves) entire, oblong, oval-obtuse, slightly arched on the lower side, flat, attenuated at the round point of connection to the rachis, regularly and narrowly striated lengthwise. Of this peculiar organism, no other part has been discovered except the fragment figured. Professor Heer regards it as unreferable to the Cycadec, on account of extraordinary broad stem, and supposes that it should rather be considered as a Conifer, of the section of the Araucarites. This opinion seems confirmed by the presence upon the same specimens of the cone described here below as Abietites Hrnestine, both cone and branch being originally described as representing a same species related to Pterophyllum Ernestine of Stiehler, described from similar fragments in the Paleontographica. CONIFERS. ABIETITES ERNESTIN&, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., Pl. I, fig. 7. Cone oblong, abruptly narrowed to a short pedicel, scales broad, truncate, appressed and vmbricated. LESQUEREUX.] | ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 335 SEQUOIA FORMOSA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 50, Pl. I, figs. 9 and 9%. Cone spindle-shaped, tapering upward from above the base and more rapidly narrowed to a short petiole ; scales closely appressed and imnbri- cated, rhomboidal, margined. SEQUOIA REICHENBACHI?, Heer, Cret. Flor., p. 51, Pl. I, figs. 10, 10°. Cone small, oblong, oval ; receptacles oval, pointed at both ends; foliaceous scales crumpled, deeply embedded into the stone; seeds small, oval-oblong. In comparing tbis cone to the figures given of the species by Professor Heer in his Moletin flora, the reference was made especially to fig. 3 of Pl. I. Professor Heer remarks rightly that there is no relation between these cones of Moletin and the one of Nebraska, the former being much larger and the scales therefore longer, and that though representing ap- parently a species of Sequoia, the specific name should be left undeter- mined until better specimens have been discovered. SEQUOIA FASTIGIATA? Sternb., Heer, Mol. Flor. p. 11, Pl. I, figs. 10, 13.—PI. ILI, figs. 2 and 8. Branches erect, slender ; branchlets filiform, fastigiate, crowded ; leaves loosely imbricated, short, decurrent at the base, broadly lanceolate, acumi- nate, subfaleate, or more or less curved upward ; nerved. We know of this species only what is seen in the small branch figured -8 and 8°, for the cones of the same plate, fig. 2, though observed upon specimens of the same locality, have not been found in connection with the branches bearing leaves. The leaves appear of the same form and characters as those represented by Heer in his Moletin Flora, loc. cit., and as those from the Greenland Upper Cretaceous flora by the same author, p. 102, Pl. XX VII, figs. 5 and 6, merely differing by the presence of a middle nerve recognizable upon the specimens of Kansas, and which is not seen upon the leaves of Greenland and Europe. This mode of division of the branches is the same, and in comparing the cones of our fig. 2 with those figured by Heer from both Greenland and Moletin specimens, the likeness appears very great indeed. As the leaves of this species are very variable in size and the middle nerve generally perceivable with great difficulty, I am not disposed to separate it from the only difference of the more distinct middle nerve of the leaves, and I consider it as very probably the same as that of Moletin. Heer re- marks a character also recognizable upon the fragment from Kansas, viz, the difference of the size of the leaves upon different parts of the branches. HABITaT.—Kansas, Clay Center, H. C. Towner. SEQUOIA CONDITA, sp. nov., Pl. IV, figs. 5-7. Branches rigid, pinnately divided ; branchlets slender, filiform, open or oblique; leaves either short, oblong pointed narrowed to the decurring base, appressed to the stem, or longer, subulate acuminate, open and slightly fal- cate, nerveless ; cone small, oval-oblong, scales rhomboidal, acutely mam- millate. After briefly describing this species Sp the Bulletin No. 5, second series of the Geological Survey of the Territories, I received from Clay Center a number of fragmentary specimens satisfactorily showing its various characters. They prove that the fragment, Pl. IV, fig. Ce which I had considered as representing a different species, and deser ibed as doubtfully referable to Sequoia subulate, Heer, of the Greenland Cretaceous flora, belongs to the same species as the fragment, fig. 5. 336 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. In this one, the leaves closely appressed to the stem, either imbricated or distant, two millimeters long, one millimeter broad in the broadest part above the middle, have an oblong, elongated rhomboidal form, with a short, acute point, and gradually taper from above the middle to the decurrent base. In other specimens they are, as in fig. 7, linear, acu- minate, or subulate, four to five millimeters long, less than one millimeter broad, decurring at the base, more generally half open and straight, sometimes, however, slightly falcate. Passing downward upon the same branches, these leaves become shorter, more closely appressed to the stem, the point only being turned outside, and they then are similar to those of the enlarged fig. 5, differing merely by the size. A num- ber of fragments of cones, also, one of ‘them preserved nearly whole, and still attached to a branch, prove that fig. 6 represents rather al unopened young. fruiting catkin of the same species than a male one, as [ supposed at first. The ripe cone is fourteen millimeters long, five millimeters broad, cylindrical-oval, with scales deeply impressed into the stone, and the apophyses three to four millimeters broad and nearly as long, rhomboidal in outline, acutely narrowed on both sides, bearing in the middle or a little above a pointed (?) mammilla, marked by a small hole in the stone. Another cone, cut in its length exposes the thick, smooth (not crumpled) foliaceous appendages, and the receptacles of the seeds, which are large and similar to those of the cone described in Cret. Flora, Tab. I, Fig. 10 and 10°, as Sequoia reichenbachi. Indeed, the form of the opened cone is the same; this last one appears only some- what longer. All the fragments representing this species are, like the cones, deeply impressed or molded into the stone, even the leaves, which often penetrate it by their points. They appear thus of a thick coriaceous consistence. Their outside surface is, of course, the only -part whose impression is represented. It is half-round or slightly chan- ueled; the inside surface, if exposed, could perhaps show a middle nerve. This species is distantly related to Sequoia fastigiata, Sternb., described above, differing by the pinnate mode of division of the branches, the form of the leaves, etc. The fragment, fig. 7, has a likeness to the one represented by Heer in his Flor. Foss, Arct. IIL, Pl XXVII, fig. 9°, as Sequoia rigida, a species, however, far different by the visible nerve of its leaves and by the large size of its cones. HABrratT.—Fort Harker and Clay Center, Chs. Sternber: g, H. C. Towner. PINUS QUENSTEDTI, Heer, Moletin Flora, p. 13, Pl. LI, figs. 5-9, and Pab. LII—Pt. LI, figs. 6, 7. Leaves by five, very long and slender, linear, deeply nerved, the base in- closed in o long cylindrical sheath; cones cylindrical, very long, scales with a broadly rhomboidal shield (apophi yse) acute on the sides, 2 manmillate im the center. The specimens representing this species are numerous, but all more or less fragmentary. The attachment of the base of the leaves by five is more or less distinctly marked by the long sheaths forming deep — holes into the stone, the oritice of which has remains of leaves ;. these are very numerous, always seen by their deep impressions, half cylin- drical on the back, channeled and deeply nerved on the inside, as marked in the enlor wed figure 77. The length of these leaves is not rec- ognizable from our specimens, which have mere fragments, five to eight centimeters long; but Prof. Heer, who had complete splendid speci- mens for his description, gives the measure at twenty centimeters; their width being scarcely one millimeter. The cylindrical cone is LESQUBREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 337 twenty-two millimeters broad, gradually tapering to the base, and from what is seen from large stones perforated by its impressions, its length was at least fifteen centimeters. Most of the specimens whereupon it is represented show it curved or paltate. It is the only difference remarked in comparing it to the cones, represented by Heer, from the Moletin flora, and which are straight. In the flora of Gelinden, by Saporta aud Marion, the authors remark, p. 19, that this species does not differ in any character from the living Mexican Species, with qui- nate leaves, which now compose the section of the Pseudo-strobus. Hapirat.—Mostly and more generally found near Fort Harker, by Chs. Sternberg ; some leaves are mixed with the specimen of the former species sent by H. C. Towner from near Clay Center. GLYPTOSTROBUS GRACILLIMUS, EST Cret. Flor. p. 52, Pl. I, figs. 8, ‘-11. Branches fastigiate, very slender, thread-like, much divided; leaves imbricate, appressed, embracing the base, linear-lanceolate, more or less abruptly pointed; cone narrow, cylindrical. No new specimens of this remarkably fine species of Conifers has been found; its reference is therefore still uncertain. J consider it, from the affinity of its characters to those of Frenelites reichti of Ettinghausen, as identical with this species. Butits trne relation, even if identity was positive, is not the better ascertained for that. Schimper admits* this Frenelites as a synonym of Sequoia fastigiata, Sternb. The presence of both these species in the Cretaceous of Kansas would perhaps give to this opinion a kind of authority. But it seems contradicted by tne great difference in the appreciable characters of these remains as far as they are known. We can, however, say nothing in regard to the affinity ot this Glyptostrobus or "Frenelites, as long as its cones are unknown. If the scales found in connection ‘with the branchlets and figured in Cret. Flor. Pl. I, fig. 8 (enlarged), belong to it, they rather resemble those of the cones of “Sequoia condita, which, however, are longer, narrower, and of a different type than those of S. fastigiata. INOLEPIS? species. Pl. IV, fig. 8. Cone or fruit globular, jfive-costate, attached to a branch mixed with un- determinable remains of conifers. The specimen is distinctly represented in the figure ; it shows the deep semi-globular impression of an apparently unopened fruit, marked in the length by five obtuse cost or narrow ribs coming together, and disappearing below the top. ‘The other fragments attached to the stem above this impression appear like the scales of an opened cone or fruit of the same species. I tind nothing to which this can be compared but the cross-section of a cone of Inolepis imbricata, Heer., Flor. Foss. Arct., Pl. VXI, fig. 16, supposing that the impression of our specimen repre- sents the outside surface of a cone of this kind deprived ofits scales. This affinity is indeed a distant one, and the comparison is acceptable merely — on account of the connection of this vegetable organism with a mass of decayed and broken remains of Conifers. PHYLLOCLADUS SUBINTEGRIFOLIUS, Lesqx., Cret. Blor., p. 54, Pl. I, fig. —Tab. IL, fig. 4 Leaf coriaceous, Pee tapering a below the middle to a short thick petiole; undulate toward the top and abruptly rounded ; middle nerve * Paleontologie Vegetable, vol. ii, p. 316. 22 I 338 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. narrow and scarcely distinct except near the base where it becomes inflated; lateral veins close and thin, a few of them more prominent and thicker, all running to the borders in an acute angle of divergence and nearly straight. The fragment figured here is the second specimen of a leaf of this kind observed in the Cretaceous. Its relation seems authorized. MONOCOTYLEDONUS. GLUMACE A. PHRAGMITES CRETACEOUS, Lesqx., Cret. Fl, p. 55, Pl. I, figs. 13 and 14; Pl. XXIX, fig. 7. Leaves and culms of various size, the leaves gradually narrowed to an obtuse point, doubly veined ; primary veins thickish or inflated by the epi- dermis, under which only the intermediate secondary veins, three or four, may be discernable. The reference of the fragment of stem and the knot, Pl. I, figs. 13 and 14, and of the leaf, Pl. X XIX, fig. 7, of the Cret. Flor., has been contested as very uncertain. The exactness of the determination, however, is rendered probable, at least, by the presence of fragments of the same kind in the Upper Cretaceous of Greenland, and described by Heer, loe. cit., p. 104, Pl. XXVIII, figs. 8, 11, as Arundo grenlandica. The leaf, fig. 11, and its point, fig. 11°, have the same form as that of our fig. 7. Ihave more recently still received a number of fragments of small culms, one to one and a half centimeters, representing still more clearly the characters of the species. The distance between the primary veins is variable. DIOSCORE Ai. DIOSCOREA? CRETACEA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 56, Pl. XXVIII, fig. 10. Leaf coriaceous, entire, nearly round, slightly emarginate at the potat, broader than long, rounded or truncate at the base; veins apparently all from near the base, the outside ones curving parallel to the borders and sparingly branching ; the other parallel to each others, simple, curving in the same way in ascending, connected in the upper part by arched nervilles, - the inner ones acrodrome. PALMA. FLABELLARIA? MINIMA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 56, Pl. XXX, fig. 12. Rays narrow, splitting in lacinie ; veins prominent, parallel; intermediate space concave, marked by indistinct veinlets parallel to the primary veins. The reference of these small fragments to the Palm family is gen- erally contested. DICOTYLEDONOUS. APETALE., ITEOIDE 4. LIQUIDAMBAR INTEGRIFOLIUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 56, Pl. IL, figs. 1-3; Pl. XXIV, fig. 2. Leaves coriaceous, variable in size, deeply five-palmately lobed ; divisions ovate lanceolate, obtusely pointed, entire, separated by obtuse sinuses ; infe- rior lateral lobes in right angle to the midrib ; nervation camptodrome. LESQUEREUS. ] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 339 POPULITES LANCASTRIENSIS, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 58, Pl. III, fig. 1. Leaf large, coriaceous, broadly cordate, apparently pointed, entire or with slightly undulate borders ; nervation pinnate, subcamptodrome. According to Schimper, this species is a true Populus. POPULITES ELEGANS, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 59, Pl. III, fig. 3. Leaves broadly oval or nearly round, narrowed by an abrupt curve to @ long, slender petiole ; borders entire, undulate ; nervation pinnate, subcamp- todrome, the lower primary veins joining the middle nerve a little above the border-base of the leaf. SALIX PROTEZFOLIA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor. p. 60, Pl. V, figs. 1-4. Leaves lanceolate, gradually tapering to an obtuse point, largest at or more generally below the middle, narrowed toa short petiole ; coriaceous, surface polished. AMENTACE Zs. BETULA BEATRICIANA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 61, Pl. V, fig. 5; Pl. XXX, fig. 4. Leaves small, rhomboidal-obovate in outline, cuneiform from the middle to the petiole, rapidly tapering from above the middle to a point, simply dentate in the upper part, entire to the base ; nervation pinnate, craspedodrome. In his critical notes, Count Saporta says that these leaves might be, perhaps, detached leaflets of some species of Cissus or Araliopsis, the presence of Betula leaves being improbable in the Cretaceous. MYRICA OBTUSA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 63, Pl. X XIX, fig. 10. Leaf thick, coriaceous, shining, linear, obtuse, entire; medial nerve thick ; secondary veins thin, nearly at a right angle to the middle nerve, curving near and along the border in marginal festoons, anastomosing, from the mid- dle or above, with the branches of intermediate short veinlets. MYRICA CRETACEA, sp. nov. PI. III, fig. 4. Leaf linear lanceolate long (point broken), gradually narrowed to a thick petiole; minutely denticulate on the borders, secondary veins parallel, dis- tant, at an acute angle of divergence from the flat broad middle nerve, camp- todrome; tertiary veins short, anastomosing with branches of the second- ary ones. The figure shows the only fragment known of this species. The sub- stance of the leaves is subcoriaceous, rather thick, the surface smooth or polished; the borders, slightly reflexed, minutely denticulate, evidently so, but not quite as deeply as marked upon the figure; from the broad middle nerve, the secondary veins, irregular in distance and branching, ascend, in an acute angle ot divergence, about 30° to near the borders, which they closely follow by ramifications. The areolation is not distinguishable. . The leaf is comparable to Myrica (Dryandroides) Zenkeri, Ett., Kreide Flora von Neidershoena, p. 23, Pl. III, figs. 1, 3, 11, which is also publish- ed by Heer from Greenland, in the Arct. Flora. Though our leaf is larger and the denticulation of the borders of a different character, in right angle to the borders not as pointed and turned upward as in the European species, these differences might be merely local and the species identical. A close comparison is not possible, from the absence of the characters of the secondary nervation, on the specimens of Europe and of Greenland. EHttinghausen, however, remarks that the teeth of the borders are minute and acute, or slightly obtuse and close, as 340 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. in our leaf, but adds that the secondary veins are very slender (tenu- assimi), while in ours they are thick and distinct. Hapsrrat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. MyRICA SEMINA, Cret. Flora, p. 63, Pl. XXVII, figs. 4 & 4°. Seeds obovate, a l ittle more than two millimeters in the upper part, poinicd at the other side, bordered by a narrow margin. CUPULIVIER A. DRYOPHYLLUM (QUERCUS) LATIFOLIUM, spec. nov. Pl. VI, fig. 1. Leaf large, oval, obtuse at the top and base, sinuate or obtusely dentate ; lateral veins on an acute angle of divergence, str raight to the borders, branch- ing once or twice. This fine leaf is coriaceous, twelve centimeters long, nine centimeters wide below the middle, its broadest part, obtuse at the point and base, deeply undulate, or, rather, obtusely dentate at least in its upper part. The nervation is thick, the secondary veins pass up at an angle of diver- gence of 50° to the borders, and enter the teeth, while the upper division or veinlets pass under the sinuses and follow the borders, a marked character of the species of this section; the nervilles are distinct though thin, in right angle to the secondary veins, distant and disconnected ; the ultimate areolation is obsolete. The leaf resembles somewhat by its form Quercus Olafseni, Heer, of the Flora Arctica. Hapirat.—Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. DRYOPHYLLUM (QUERCUS) PRIMORDIALE, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 64, Pl. V, fig. 7. Leaf subcoriaceous, narrowly ovate-lanceolate, equally gradually tapering | from the middle upward to a point and downward to a short petiole, sharply equally dentate; nervation pinnate, simple, craspedodrome. DRYOPHYLLUM (QUERCUS) SALICIFOLIUM, sp. nov., Pl. VIII, fig. 2. Leaf linear lanceolate, rounded to the base; borders acutely denticulate, with small tecth turned outward in the lower part, upward in the upper part, lateral veins numerous, parallel, subeamptodrome. The fragment represents a slightly faleate leaf, rather membranaceous than coriaceous, with a narrow middle nerve and close parallel second- ary veins, most of them ascending to the teeth and passing under the sinuses by an upper branch, or some of them curving along the border and reaching the teeth by a small division. The areolation is not dis- tinct; only in the upper part of the leaf the nervilles, in right angle to the veins, appear ramified in the same way, ending in square or polygo- nal areole. This species is comparable, and, indeed, eae related to Dryophyllum lineare, Sap., Sezane flora, p. 350, Pl. IV, fig. 6 HABITAT. ” Near the San J uan River, at | a higher Cretaceous station than the Dakota group, Southwest Colorado, W. H. Holmes. QUERCUS HEXAGONA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 64, Pl. V, fig. 8. Leaf rhomboidal ovate, tapering from above the middle to an acute point, narrowed, wedge-form to the petiole, irregularly broadly dentate in the upper part only, nervation pinnate, simple craspedodrome. QUERCUS? ELLSWORTHIANA. Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 65, Pl. VI, fig. 7 Leaf subcoriaceous, oblong oval, point broken, narrowed in a curve to the base; borders undulate; nervation pinnate, camptodrome. The relation of this fragment is as yet uncertain. ee a ee ee LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. eee QUERCUS? PORANOIDES, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 66, Pl. XXX, fig. 9. Leaf broadly oval or nearly round, point.broken, truncate at the base, wi- dulate on the borders, middle nerve thick, lateral veins thin, subopposite, at an open angle of divergence, curving to and along the borders, camptodrome. The reference of this fragment is as uncertain as that of the former. FAGUS POLYCLADA, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 67, Pl. V, fig. 6. Leaf ovate, oblong, cuneate to the base, short petioled; borders entire, undulate; middle nerve straight, secondary veins close, numerous, simple, parallel and craspedodrome. PLATANEZS. PLATANUS OBTUSI LOBA, Lergx., Cret. Flor., p. 69, Pl. VII, figs. 3, 4. Leaves small, not thick, palmately irregularly trilobate; lobes obtuse, short with regularly undulate borders, nervation 3 to 5 palmate from a distance _ above the base of the long petioled leaf. PLATANUS PRIMA@RA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 69, Pl. VII, fig. 2, and Pl. XXVI, fig. 2. Leaves large, coriaceous, palmately trilobate, with short, scarcely dis- tinct lateral lobes, broadly deltoid, deeply, distantly dentate to the point ; nervation three palmate, coarse, platanoidal. PLATANUS HEERH, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 70, Pl. VIII, fig. 4, and PI. IX, figs. 1 and 2. Leaves round or broadly rhomboidal in outline, palmately three obscurely lobed; lobes short, obtuse ; borders entire or undulate broadly wedge-form at base and more or less decurrent to the short petiole. We have of this fine species a specimen representing a small leaf nearly entire on the border and with the trilobate form scarcely defined. The supposition that these leaves could be referable to Credneria is contradicted by the short petiole, besides the other differences indicated in the introduction. PLATANUS NEWBERRIANA, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 72, Pl. VII, figs. 2, 3; Pls Xe) fie. 3. Leaves of medium size, thickish, palmately three-lobed, cither tapering to a point from the lateral lobes upward, or without lobes and ovate ; taper- pointed, broadly cuneate to the base, equally dentate ; nervation trifid from a little above the base ; secondary veins close, numerous. PLATANUS DIMINUTIVA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 73, Pl. VIII, fig. 5. Leaf small, thick, half round from the middle to the base, narrowed to an obtuse. point ; borders entire, undulate ; nervation trifid from above the base ; nerves thick and irregularly inflated. As remarked already, this may be a diseased leaf of one of the for- mer species. URTICINEA. MORE. Ficus HALLIANA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 68, P]. XXVIII, figs. 3 and 9. Leaves subcoriaceous, very entire petioled, broadly lanceolate, gradually narrowed to a long acumen, more rapidly narrowed and rounded to the petiole, nervation pinnate; lateral veins close, straight on an acute angle of divergence, parallel, numerous. 342 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. FIcUS LAUROPHYLLUM, sp. nov. Pl. V, fig. 7. Laurophyllum reticulatum, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 76, Pl. XV, figs. 4,5. Leaves coriaceous, entire narrowly lanceolate acuminate, gradually taper ing to a short, thick petiole; nervation pinnate, middle nerve thick, grooved, secondary veins close, open. A large number of specimens have been obtained of this fine spe- cies. Though generally more or less fragmentary, they indicate, by comparison, the essential characters of the leaves. They vary in size from one and one-half to four and one-half centimeters broad in the middle, and from ten to eighteen centimeters long. Their form is like that of Pl. V, fig, 7, of this memoir, which is an exact likeness of the only leaf seen preserved in its whole. The secondary veins are always open, nearly at a right angle to the very thick, broad, and grooved or rather channeled middle nerve. The areolation is by fibrille at right angle to the secondary and intermediate tertiary veins, forming irregular quadrate or polygonal loose meshes. ‘The secondary veins curve along the borders, and, connecting with those above, form a kind of margin, very undistinct, however, to the leaves. These characters of nervation and areolation more evidently refer this species to the Ficus than to any division of the Lawrinee. They are the same as in the leaves described as Ficus protogec, Weer, in Flora Arct. II, p. 108, PI. XXX, figs. 1-8 of the Upper Cretaceous of Greenland. Some living species, especially of Cuba, have the same type of nervation and areo- lation. The relation of these leaves is also marked to species of Nerium. FICUS DISTORTA, Sp. nov., Pl. V, fig. 5. Leaf coriaceous, entire, obovate, unequilateral, pointed or acuminate, apparently gradually narrowed to the base (broken); nervation pinnate, secondary veins thick, parallel, equidistant camptodrome; nervilles in right angle to the veins, areolation irregularly quadrate or polygonal. This fragment as figured here is the only one seen of this species, and it is not sufficient to positively indicate the relation of the species to Micus ; the unequilateral shape of the leaf, its nervation and areolation seem to authorize its reference to this genus. HapitatT.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. LAURINE. Laurus Nebrascensis, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 74, Pl. X, fig. 1, Pl. XXVIII, fig. 14. Leaves thick, coriaceous, elliptical oblong or narrowly lanceolate, obtusely pornted, tapering downward to a short, thick petiole; middie nerve thick, half round; secondary veins alternate, at an acute angle of divergence, camp- todrome. LAURUS MACROCARPA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 74, Pl. X, fig. 2. Fruit round, oval; nut surrounded by a thick pericarp; pedicel club- shaped. The fruit may belong to the species represented by the leaves of Laurus Nebrascensis. LAURUS PROTEZFOLIA, sp. nov., Pl. V, figs. 1 and 2. Leaves subcoriaceous, broadly lanceolate, gradually narrowed from below the middle into a long acumen, more rapidly narrowed to the base ; middle nerve narrowly grooved and comparatively narrow; lateral veins oblique, slen- der, curving to and along the borders, parallel, except the lower pair, which as more oblique and ascends higher. - LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 343 These leaves, of which we have a number of specimens, the two best ones figured here, vary.in size from two to three and one-half centime- ters broad in the widest part, far below the middle, and twelve to six- teen centimeters long. By their shape, the long narrowly tapering and slightly faleate acumen, they closely resemble Proteoides daphnogenoides, Heer, as represented in Cret. Flora, Pl. XV, figs. 1 and 2, differing, however, by the broader middle nerve and the distinct, equidistant and parallel secondary veins. These, at an acute angle of divergence of ubout thirty degrees, are somewhat curved in passing toward the bor- ders, where they become effaced ; the lower pair is at a more acute angle of divergence and ascends higher in following the borders; tbe areola- tion is obsolete, the surface appearing punctulate or closely dotted by small convex areolz, like the leaves of some species Laurus or Persea. Hapiratr.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. PERSEA LECONTEANA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 75, Pl. XXVIII, fig. 1. Leaf large, oblong-ovate, lanceolate pointed ; borders undulate, nervation pinnate ; lower secondary veins distant, at a more acute angle of divergence, curving near the borders and ascending te the middle of the leaves ; upper veins shorter, parallel. The character of the nervation is the same as in the former species. The relation of this leaf is, however, contested, on account of its size and shape, which seem more like those of a Magnolia. PERSEA STERNBERGII Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 76, Pl. VII, fig. 1. Leaf large, thick, coriaceous, entire, broadly oblong, oval, or obcvaie, obtusely pointed ? (point broken), gradually narrowed in a curve to the base ; nervation pinnate, very distinct, camptodrome. DAPHNOGENE CRETACEA, Sp. DOV. Cinnamomum Scheuchzeri, Heer, Cret. Flora, Pl. XXX, figs. 2, 3. Leaves coriaceous, polished on the upper surface, elliptical or ovate-lanceo- late, pointed, narrowed to a short petiole ; slightly undulate on the Lorders, and triple-nerved from a distance above the base; middle nerve and lateral veins thick, the lower primary ones ascending along the borders as high as the lower secondary veins, which they join by ramifications. To Professor Heer, the reference of these leaves to Cinnamomum Schenchzeri seems very hazarded, for though the form of the leaves is mucb the same, the middle nerve is too thick for that species, especially toward the point. Count Saporta is also of the opinion that the presence _ ot C. Scheuchzeri in the Cretaceous is very improbable, as this species in Europe is essentially of the Upper Miccene. I have accordingly changed the name of this species, which, though positively referable to the Laurinee, is as yet uncertain in its relation. The genus Daphnogene, Ung., less definitely limited, is appropriate for leaves of this kind, to which the following species is also referred. These two leaves are dis- tantly related to Cinnamomum Mississippiense of the lignitic. DAPHNOGENE HEERII. Cinnamomum Heerii, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 84, Pl. XXVIII, fig. 11. Leaf thickish, subcoriaceous, entire, ovate, taper-pointed, rounded at the base, three-nerved ; lateral veins ascending higher than the middle of the leaf, branching outside. OREODAPHNE CRETACEA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 84, Pl. XXX, fig. 5. _ Leaf coriaceous, elliptical, gradually curving to an obtuse point, narrowed am about the same degree to the base ; middle nerve thick, secondary veins thick and opposite, three or four pairs, inflated at the axils. 344 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. SASSAFRAS. The remarks in the introduction expose the opinions of paleontologists and the discussion upon the species referred to this generic division from the specimens of the Dakota group. They prove that, though the number of these leaves is very large, their generic reference is still very uncertain. Leaving aside for the present the task of deciding on the evidence in regard to the degree of their relation to Sassafras or Aralia, I shall here describe them provisionally under the generic name of Sas- safras and Sassafras (Araliopsis), placing this group altogether at the end of the Laurinee until we get some more positive information on the subject. SASSAFRAS MUDGEI, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 78, Pl. XIV, figs. 3, 4; Pl. XXX, fig. 7. Leaves proportionally long ; primary nerves narrow, at an acute angle of divergence ; middle lobe twice as long as the lateral one; all ovate-lanceo- late obtusely pointed ; base of the leaves narrowed, acutely cuneate to the petiole ; surface of the leaves polished. SASSAFRAS ACUTILOBUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 79, Pl. XIV, figs. 1, 2. Leaves subcoriaceous, of the same consistence as the former species; lat- eral lobes lanceolate, sharply pointed, entire, middle lobe twice as long as the lateral ones, which diverge nearly at right angle; base of the leaves narrow and tapering. The leaves of this and the former division are rare among the speci- mens furnished tome. This so-called species is perhaps a variety of the former. Both were found at the same locality. SASSAFRAS (ARALIOPSIS) CRETACEUM, Newby., Cret. Flora, p. 80, Pi. XII, fig. 2. Leaves comparatively of small size, with diverging, obtusely pointed, short lobes, enlarged toward the broad sinuses ; broadly cuneiform, and decur- ring to the rachis, long petioled ; border entire. VAR. DENTATUM, Cret. Flora, Pl. XJ, figs. 1, 2. Differs by the lobes more or less aalaie on the borders, and the secondary veins subcamptodrome or mixed. SASSAFRAS (ARALIOPSIS) CRETACEUM OBTUSUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 80, Pl. XII, fig. 3, Pl. XIII, fig. 1. - Leaves of various size, some of them very large, with short obtuse entire lobes, the lateral diverging in an obtuse angle and the nervation coarse and very deep. From a number of specimens examined, this form appears truly dis- tinct by its peculiarly broad nervation. Even in the smallest leaves the primary nerves are twice as thick as in the leaves described as Sassafras cretaceum. This character is well marked upon fig. 3 of Pl. XIL espe- cially. It cannot be considered as a modification resulting from the different face of the leaves preserved by the specimens, as some of these in the collection are double specimens, representing both faces, where the same difference is distinctly remarked. I have also not seep any leaves of this coarse nervation with dental borders; the lobes are always entire. To this division are referable some leaves evidently of the same type, but entire, or not lobed. One of them has been described in Cre- taceous Flora as Sassafras? subinteyrifolium, p. 82, Pl. III, fig. 5, which is apparently abnormal or distorted by compression. A number of better specimens represent leaves of this kind nearly entire or broadly oval, with one obscure lobe on one side, or none, and the deep, coarse, broad nerva- LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 345 tion which is a character of this so-called variety. I will further remark that specimens of both the entire and trilobate leaves were found at the same locality. SASSAFRAS (ARALIOPSIS) MIRABILE, Lesqx., p. 80, Pl. XII, fig. 1. Leaves thick, coriaceous, large ; lobes broad and short, the lateral ones on a broad angle of divergence, with borders dentate or deeply, undulately lobed ; secondary veins mostly craspedodrome. A remarkable modification of the character of this species is observed upon a fine leaf still much larger than the one figured in the Cretaceous Flora. It is twenty centimeters broad between the points of the lower lateral lobes; about, fifteen centimeters long from the top of the petiole (lower part of the leaf destroyed), divided by the forking of the lateral primary veins in five equal aud equally sinuate dentate lobes, with the same character of nervation as in the normal form. The lobes also are of equal length and width ; the middle one fifty-seven millimeters broad and scarcely sixty millimeters long, with the lower secondary veins camptodrome and the upper ones craspedodrome, and entering the teeth. As l have remarked it already, this subdivision in four lobes tends to show the reference of those large leaves to Aralia rather than to Sassafras. But it may be also an exposition of that disposition to poly- morphy so remarkably evident in the leaves of our living Sassafras offi- cinale. As these generally tripalmate leaves pass to an entire oval shape sometimes, they subdivide more or less in the same way. One of the largest specimens of 8. mirabile, lately received from Mr. Towner, of Clay Center, Kansas, has one of the lateral primary nerves twice as thick as the other, and its base is higher. One of its lobes is, therefore, much longer, fifteen and one-half centimeters, while the other is only ten. SASSAFRAS, (ARALIOPSIS,) RECURVATA. PLATANUS RECURVATA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 71, Pl. X, figs. 3-5. Leaves three to five palmately lobed ; lobes nearly equal in length, the mid- dle one broader, lateral nerves curving downward, simple or forking above the base; borders of the lobes entire or sparingly coarsely dentate. This form is still more uncertain, and, so to say, transient in its char- acters. By the decurrent base of the leaves descending to the petiole, lower than the point of union of the primary veins and also by the trilo- bate division, it is a Sassafras. The irregularity, however, ot the lobes, © the nervation and the double divisions in lobes or teeth refer it to Pla- tanus ; the tendency to become five-lobate by the forking of the lateral nerves is a character of the Araliacew. This disposition to a subdivis- ion or multiplication of lobes is seen in fig. 3, where the lower branches, though thick, do not diverge widely enough for modifying the borders ot the leaf, but are curved inward and join the secondary veins at the base of the lobes; but in fig. 4, which represents a fragment only, the subdivision in five lobes is evident. It is still more marked upon a leaf recently found and figured by Mr. H.C. Towner. In this one the cuneate base of the leat descends far down, two and one-half centimeters lower than the point of union of the primary nerve; the lateral ones divide in two branches from below the middle, and curving backward they form well-defined ovate pointed short lobes, and thus a palmately five-lobed leat of the Aralia type. This leaf, without the petiole, which is broken, is twelve centimeters long, and as wide between the points of the lowest lateral lobes, which are only oue and one-half centimeters long ; the oth- ers, as also the middle one, are three centimeters long and about as wide, being half round, cuspidate, and separated by narrow obtuse si- nuses, 346 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. PROTHACEA. LoMATIA? SAPORTANEA. TODEA? SAPORTANEA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 48, Pl. X XIX, figs. dee Pl. VI, fig. 2 (enlarged). Leaves coriaceous, pinnately laciniate; divisions entire, narrowly lan- ceolate, pointed, connected by the decurring base, which forms a more or less broad and nerved wing to the rachis ; primary veins thick, ascending to the point ; secondary veins distinct, at an acute angle of divergence, close, par- allel, curving up in passing to the borders and following them in simple fes- toons; 3 areolation mixed by tertiary veinlets and their branches in various angles of divergence. The fine specimens figured in the Cret. Flora, as quoted Dre repre- sent the essential characters of the leaves; the branches parallel and distichous? along the primary stems, a disposition similar to that of the fronds of a number of species of large ferns by parallel open pinne. The point or upper part of three of these dissected parallel leaves is - represented in fig. 1; this division is by more or less distant segments, which, opposite or alternate, are of various size, narrowly lanceolate pointed, decurrent at the base, and thus connected by a wing along the rachis. As seen at the base of the segments of the middle leaflet of fig. 1, the wing along the borders is nerved like the divisions or leaflets. The middle vein of these segments is thick; the secondary veins close, parallel, turned up in passing to the borders, simple, but joined in vari- ous directions by oblique nervilles, forming a mixed, angular, square, or polygonal areolation. The nervation and areolation were exactly copied for fig. 2 of Pl. VI of this memoir, but the wood-cut does not expose it in its details. Some of the specimens show the upper part of three parallel leaves whose tops are on aright line and more exactly like the upper pinne of a fern than the specimen figured in the Cret. Flora. My first opinion in regard to the relation of these remarkably fine vegetable remains was that they represented some kind of an old ex- tinct type of Filices. I even supposed that, considering the peculiar disposition of the leaflets and their nervation, we had here something like a transient form between the ferns and plants of a higher order. The sections of the leaves are similar to those of some species of fossil ferns, Stenopteris desmomera, Sap.,* for example, which, from the remarks of the author, is without relation to any living fern; also like the fragment described by Debey and Ettinghausent under the generic name of Mon- heimia, which not only have a similar division of leaves or pinne, but, as seen in fig. 6, a nervation of an analogous character, the numerous parallel secondary veins curving up along the borders, some of them united by oblique veinlets. A mere sketch of one of my specimens sent to Count Saporta gave him the same impression in regard to its refer- ence to ferns. But the areolation was not represented upon it, and the characters of the areolation especially remove the species to another order of vegetables, the Proteacew. Indeed species of Lomatia have the leaves pinnately laciniate, with the divisions alternate, decurring along the middle nerve or rachis, and a nervation and areolation somewhat com- parable to those of the fossil species. I have therefore abandoned the first reference, and, following the opinion of the celebrated author from * Plantes fossiles des lits de poissons de Cerin, by Count Saporta, p. 22, Pl. XIV. t Urweltlichen Acrobryen, p. 33, Pl. IV, figs. 1-10. LESQUEREUX. | ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 347 which this species is named, I have placed it with the Proteacew. Iam, however, still uncertain in regard to the true relation of these rewarka- ble remains. ‘There is, as said above, in the position and the subdivis- ions of the leaflets a remarkakle affinity with those of some species of ferns, and at the same time a discrepancy with what is remarked in the segments of the leaves of Lomatia and other species of laciniate Pro- teacee. In the fossil plant the decurrent base forming a wing of the rachis, has the same character of nervation as the leaflets, while in the basilar segments of the Proteacew the winged part is generaliy without visible veins, or rather veined lengthwise. Moreover, there seems to be a kind of anomaly in the presence of plants of the so called Australian types in a vegetable group where the characters of the present American fiora are so predominant, or in connection with species of Fagus, Lyrio- dendron, Platanus, etc. The leaves described under the name of Prote- oides are as yet not positively referable to the Proteaceae, their nervation being still unknown; and thus we should have to admit this Lomatia ? as the only representative of an Australian type among a large number of forms of different affinities. This species has been found originally in very fine specimens by Prof. B. F. Mudge, in Southern Kansas. I have lately received a small frag- ment only trom Mr. H. C. Towner, found near Clay Center, Kansas. PROTEOIDES DAPHNOGENOIDES, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 85, Pl. XV, figs. 1, 2. Leaves ovate-lanceolate toward the base, gradually tapering upward to a long scythe-shaped acumen, entire, smooth and coriaceous; middle nerve narrow ; secondary veins obsolete, few, ascending at a very acute angle from the middle nerve and following the borders. PROTEOIDES AcuTA, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 86, Pl. XV, fig. 3; Pl. XXVIII, fig. 13. Leaves coriaceous, linear-lanceolate, narrowed to the base and gradually so to a scythe-shaped point ; borders undulate ; middle nerve strong, sec- ondary veins obsolete. PROTEOIDES GREVILLE ZFORMIS, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 86, Pl. XX VIII, iene Leaf coriaceous, small, enlarged above the base, linear-lanceolate, flecuous ; borders entire ; middle nerve thick ; secondary veins alternate, thin, acro- drome, ascending nearly parallel to the borders and slightly curving inward. EMBOTHRITES ? DAPHNEOIDES, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 87, Pl. XXX, fig. 10. Leaf coriaceous, polished, oblong, narrow, gradually narrowed downward and decurrent to the enlarged middle nerve; borders slightly reflexed ; nerva- tion pinnate ; lateral veins opposite, close, at a very acute angle of diver- gence. This fragment of leaf is of an uncertain attribution. ASARINEA. ARISTOLOCHITES DENTATA, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 87, Pl. XXX, fig. 6. Leaf nearly round, thickish, split from the base of the petiole to the borders, undulate-crenate, three-nerved ; secondary veins curving and anas- tomosing in large, oval, angular meshes. 348 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. GAMOPETALE A. BICORNES. ANDROMEDA PARLATORUL, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 88,-P]. XXIII, figs. 6-7; Pl. XXVIU, fig. 15. Leaves lanceolate, narrowed to the base and decurring along the petiole by a narrow border, entire; middle nerve thick; secondary veins at an acute angle of divergence, parallel, camptodrome. ANDROMEDA AFFINIS, sp. nov. PI. III, fig. 5. _ Leaf thickish, narrowly lanceolate, narrowed to a long acumen, gradually decreasing toward the base; borders entire; middle nerve comparatively thick ; lateral veins close, parallel, subequidistant, in an acute angle of. divergence ; areviation minute. The leaf five and one-half centimeters long, eleven millimeters broad in its widest part, the middle, is gradually equally narrowed down to the petiole and up to a long narrow acumen, and entire; the secondary veins are numerous, simple, at an angle of divergence of 30°, parallel, rather obsolete, though thickish, scarcely curving in ascending close to the borders, camptodrome; the areolation is in round or quadrate-polyg- onal minute areole. It is closely allied to the former species, if not a variety of it. HABITAT.—Spring Cation, where it is mixed with fragmentary leaves of Andromeda parlatorti ; the horizon of this locality is not geologically determined, Dr. F. V. Hayden. DIOSPYROS AMBIGUA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 89, Pl. VI, fig. 6. Leaf coriaceous, narrowly oval, narrowed near the point into a short slightly obtuse acumen; borders entire; nervation pinnate, camptodrome. DIOSPYROS ROTUNDIFOLIA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. $9, Pl. XXX, fig. 1. Leaf subcoriaceous entire, nearly round, pinnately nerved; secondary veins parallel, camptodrome; surface undulate, polished. POLYPETALE. UMBELLIFLOR &. ARALIA TRIPARTITA, spec. nov. Pl. I, fig. 1. Leaf small, three palmately divided to two-thirds of its length; lobes equal, linear obtuse, entire ; secondary nervation obsolete. . The leaf is seven centimeters long, six centimeters wide between the points of the lobes, which diverge in an angle of 25°; cuneate to the base, which apparently descends a little lower than the point of union of the primary veins, where it is broken; lobes four and one-half centi- meters long, one centimeter broad, nearly exactly linear, abruptly rounded at the point, with perfectly entire borders and obtuse sinuses ; primary nerves thin but distinct, secondary veins totally obsolete. The surface is smooth and the consistence of the leaf coriaceous. This small leaf appears like an original simple representative of a type of Aralia predominant in numerous diversified forms in the Dakota group. Hapsirat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. | 349 ARALIA CONCRETA, spec. nov. Pl. IV, figs. 2, 3,4. Cret. Flora, Pl. XXIX, figs. 8, 9. Leaves small, very thick, coriaceous, palmately five-lobed to below the middle, cuneate and curving to the petiole; very entire; primary veins three, from the top of the petiole or from a little above the border base of the leaves, the lateral ones forking ; all thick, flat, and deep, preserving the same size to the top of the pointed lobes. These leaves vary in diameter from five and one-half centimeters to eight, across the point of the lobes, not as long as broad; cuneate to the thick petiole, which they reach by a more or less abrupt curve; divided to below the middle in three to five equal oblong lanceo- late-pointed or obtusely-pointed lobes, separated by narrow sinuses and very entire. The primary veins are very thick and flat, the lateral ones forking above the point of union, as it is the case in all the forms of this type; the secondary nervation is totally obsolete, as in the former species. This, however, differs from it, not only by the subdi- vision in five lobes, but also by the remarkably broad middle nerve. I had originally separated as a different species, the leaf, fig. 4, under the name of Aralia semi-orbiculata, on account of its remarkable halt: round base; of the difference of size of some of the lobes and of the acute sinuses. As the primary nervation is the same and the secondary one as obsolete as in the other leaves, the coriaceous consistence being also a common character, I regard it as probably a mere variety. This appears the morerational, as all these leaves come from the same locality. HABITAT.—Clay Center, H. C. Towner. ARALIA TOWNERI, spec. nov. PI. IV, fig. 1. Leaves large, coriaceous with polished surface, five-lobed to below the mid- dle; lobes oblong, obtuse, or obtusely pointed, entire; primary nerves three JSrom the top of the petiole, the lateral ones forking above the base ; second- ary veins on an open angle of divergence, camptodrome. This fine leaf of which a part only is figured, is, as seen from another Specimen, fifteen centimeters long, from the top of the petiole, and twenty to twenty-four centimeters broad between the point of the lobes which, descending much lower than the middle, are seven to ten centi- meters long and three to three and one-half centimeters broad. The primary nerves are comparatively narrow, not half as thick as in the former species and gradually narrowing to the point; the form of the lobe is oblong, the point slightly obtuse, the sinuses also obtuse. The secondary veins, distant and on an open angle of divergence pass toward the borders in curves and follow them in festoons, anastomosing by nery- illes with those above; they are generally separated by tertiary shorter veins, forming by their ramifications in more or less oblique directions square or polygonal angular large meshes. Though the general out- line and the division of these leaves are similar to those of the former species, they evidently differ, »y narrow, primary veins, less coriaceous substance, polished surface, and distinct areolation. The type is, how- ever, the same. HaBITAT.—Same as the former, H. C. Towner. ARALIA QUINQUEPARTITA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 90, Pl. XV, fig. 6. Leaves membranaceous, three-nerved from a distance above the base ; five- lobed by the forking of the lateral primary nerves ; lobes oblong or obiance- olate, somewhat narrowed downward, distantly dentate toward the point ; base of the leaves deltoid cuneiform. We have now of this species, described in the Cret. Flora from a mere fragment, a far better specimen. It represents a leaf sixteen centime- 350 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. ters long from the point where the base joins the petiole to the top of a large lateral lobe preserved in full; its base narrowed in a curve, and decurrent. It is deeply divided in six narrow oblanceolate lobes nar- rowed toward the sinuses, dentate from the middle upward, the lower lateral ones nearly entire; the middle ones twelve centimeters long, two centimeters broad in the middle, and only one centimeter near the sinuses. The distance between the points of the external lobes is nine to ten centimeters. The primary lateral nerve on one side forks twice and therefore forms three divisions or lobes, while on the other side it forks once only, and therefore has two divisions, and thus the leaf is six-lobed, though the normal division of the leaves is by five. Though thickish, they are of a rather membranaceous consistence and smooth. The lateral veins, though obsolete, appear very thin, distributed about as in the following species, but on a broader angle of divergence and more curved in passing up to the borders. From the base of the lobes downward no trace of nervation is observed. Hapsrrat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. ARALIA SAPORTANEA, sp. nov. PI. I, figs. 2 and 22. Leaves palmately five-lobed to above the middle, narrowed in a curve or broadly cuneate to a long, slender petiole, fan-shaped in outline; lobes of different size, lanceolate, obtusely pointed, distantly dentate; nervation craspedodrome. The leaves are variable in size, from nine to eighteen centimeters long without the petiole, and from nine to twenty centimeters broad between the points of the external lobes; lobes lanceolate, gradually tapering to an obtuse point, distantly obtusely dentate; the lateral ones gradually shorter than the middle one, which, in the largest of our specimens, is twelve centimeters long from the point to the obtuse sinuses; leaves three-nerved from the base; lateral nerves forking once, and lateral lobes oblique at an acute angle of divergence. The nervation and areo- lation are perfectly distinct in all the specimens, and its characters identical; the secondary veins, at an acute angle of divergence of thirty degrees, curve in passing up to the borders, where they enter the teeth, and are then craspedodrome, while the lower ones more generally follow the entire border base of the lobes; the nervilles are strong, nearly continuous, branching at right angle, and forming by this kind of divi- sion small square or equilateral areole. The leaves which represent this species are of a beautiful and elegant pattern; the small ones still more finely shaped by the distribution of the lobes, which are acutely pointed, and at a more open angle of dis- tribution toward each other. They represent, perhaps, a different species; but I could not find a persistent and distinct character, neither in the form nor in the nervation, to separate them. By the texture, which though tbhickish is not membranaceous, by the form of the broader lobes not narrowed toward the sinuses, by the distinct nerva- tion, the point of union of the primary nerves at the non-decurrent base of the leaves, the species is evidently different from the former, though found at the same locality. The relation of these Aralia leaves to the Sassafras (Araliopsis), especially to S. mirabile, is easily remarked ; there is, however, a great difference in the characters of nervation and areolation, clearly perceivable in comparing our fig. 2? with the leaves in Cret. Flora, Pl. XI, fig. 1, and PJ. XII, fig. 1. The habitat of these Aralia species shows once more the peculiar grouping of leaves of same or analogous characters in a same locality. Aralia quinquepartita aud A. Saportanea are from the south of Fort Harker, Kansas, while the LESQUEREUX.| . ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 351 two species with entire leaves, A. Townert and A. concreta, were found near Clay Center, except A. tripartita, which also is from Fort Harker. These five new types of Cretaceous plants proves the richness of this remarkable flora, and their local distribution assures for future explora- tions a rich field for new discoveries. HABITAT.—South of Fort Harker, Chs. Sternberg. HEDHRA OVALIS, Lesqx,, Cret. Flora, p, 91. Pl. XXV, fig. 3, and Pl. . XXVI, fig. 4. Leaves coriaceous, entire, oval, rounded at the point, narrowed to the base, pinnately nerved ; middle nerve thick; secondary veins alternate, irregular in distance, more or less numerous ; areolation in large irregular meshes. These leaves have an evident relation to those published by Professor Heer under the name of Chondrophyllum Nordenskioldi and C.orbiculatum, from the upper Cretaceous of Greenland Foss. in his Flor., Aret., III, pp. 114 and 115, Pl. XXXII, figs. 12 and 13, reconstructed from fragments. When the specimens are compared, they may prove to be the same spe- cies, for, though I have formerly considered the leaves as representing one species only, for the fragments show a great diversity in the charac- ters of the nervation, there is, however, too great a difference between the multiple much-divided secondary veins on a broader angle of diverg- ence of Pl. XXV, fig. 3, and the more simpie nervation of Pl. XXVI, fig. 4, to permit considering them as representing the same species. HEDERA SCHIMPERI sp. nov. Pl. VII, fig. 5. Leaf subreniform, broader than long, rounded at the top, abruptly nar- rowed or nearly truncate to a short petiole, three-nerved from above the base; lateral veins curving in various directions toward the borders, anastomosing by thick branches and nervilles with the divisions of the short, distant secondary veins, curving along the borders and entering by short veinlets the distant, slightly-marked denticulations of the borders. A fine leaf of coriaceous substance, six centimeters long without the petiole (which is only seven millimeters long and enlarged at its base), six and one-half centimeters broad, with borders minutely denticu- late, the teeth at different distances and of various size, and a trifid nervation from a short distance above the border base of the leaf; the lateral veins curve, the one inside toward the middle nerve, the other outside toward the border and branching nearly at right angle, they anas- tomose with nervilles or divisions of the secondary veins and form an areolation irregular and mixed with angular, square, or polygonal meshes. This areolation partakes of the characters of that of the former species. It is somewhat analogous to that of Greviopsis tremulefolia, and of Cissus ampelopsidea Sap., and recognizable also in the following. HABItatT.—South of Fort Harker, Chs. Sternberg. HEDERA PLATANOIDEA, sp. nov. PI. ILI, fig. 3. Leaf small, broadly ovate, truncate at the base, round at the top, short petioled, entire ; nervation trifid from a short distance above the base; pri- mary veins craspedodrome. This leaf five centimeters broad, four and one-half centimeters long without the short evlarged petiole, has its borders entire, though the primary and secondary veins reach to the borders and enter them ; the two lateral primary nerves force the border slightly outside, and the leaf appears thus sublobate or enlarged in the middle; the lower branches B52 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. of the lateral nerve follow the borders in festoons along the base of the leaf, and, as in the former species, there is a pair of marginal veinlets under the primary nerves, and at right angle tothe midrib. The areola- tion is mostly in square or angular large meshes, less irregular than in the former species. From the form of the leaf, the short inflated petiole, and the character of the areolation, the leaf appears referable to the same generic division as the former. It differs, however, by the primary and secondary veins joining the borders, and not curving inside of them. These two leaves appear to be transitional in their characters between the Araliacew and the Ampelidee. Haprrar.—South of Fort Harker, Chs. Sternberg. AMPELIDEA. CISSITES, Heer. Under this generic name, Professor Heer has described in the Phyl- lites du Nebraska, p. 20, Pl. Il, figs. 3 and 4, fragment of a leaf which seem to have a close affinity to those which I describe under this same division. These leaves, enlarged on the sides and above the middle by the extension of primary lateral veins, are either deltoid, pointed, or round, or lobate at the top. and broadly rounded and attenuated to the base. Their primary nervation, trifid from above the base- border of the leaves, is of the same type as that of the Sassafras (Araliopsis), and the secondary veins, all camptodrome, curving along the borders in successive bows, have also an undeniable affinity with the same group. But they evidently differ by the less distinct trilobate division of the leaves, the broader base, the smaller size, and the general facies. It is evident, however, in comparing the leaves described under this generic name, that closely relatedws they are between themselves, they are altogether allied by some of their characters to the Aralicee. CISSITES HARKERIANUS. PI. VII, figs. 1 and 2. Sassafras (Araliopsis) Harkerianum, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 81, Pl. XI, fig. 4. Teaves coriaceous, round in outline, subtrilobate, broadly cuneate to the base; nervation trifid from above the border base; lateral primary veins branching outside ; secondary nerve ELS, distant, mostly opposite campto- drome or craspedodrome. The two leaves figured here are smaller than that of Plate XI, fig. 4, of the Cretaceous. Flora ; but there is not any marked difference in the outline and the nervation ; we have, moreover, specimens showing leaves of intermediate size. The nervation is more or less pronounced, according to the face exposed by the specimens. This and the following form might be indifferently referred to Sassafras (Araliopsis) or Cissus. CISSITES AFFINIS. Platanus afinis, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 71, Pl. IV, fig. 4, Pl. XI, fig. 3. Leaves coriaceous or subcoriaceous, round, polygonal in outline, subtri- lobed, rounded and narrowed to the petiole, broadly deltoid to the point ; borders undulate; distantly short dentate; nervation trifid from the base or from a little above the borders. From the comparison of a numberof specimens, and especially from the discovery of one representing, by the splitting of the stone, both sides of the leaf, I have ascertained that the one represented, Plate IV, fig. 4, whose veins are thin, and the surface scarcely furrowed by the | LESQUEREUX.] | ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 353 nervation, is of the same species as that of Plate XI, fig. 3, whose sur- face is deeply cut by broad nerves and secondary veims. In this form, the secondary veins are sometimes all craspedodrome, sometimes mixed. CISSITES ACUMINATUS, sp. nov., Pl. VIII, fig. 1. Leaf deitoid from the middle to the acuminate point, rounded and sub- truncate to the petiole, subtrilobate, entire Ger taceotss nervation trifid from the base. This fine leaf, though of the same type as those described under the two former specific divisions, differs evidently by its form, its entire borders, and its secondary veins parallel, close to each other, all campto- drome. Itis about eight centimeters long without the petiole, which was apparently long and slender; seven centimeters broad between the two points of the primary lateral nerves, where it is enlarged into a slightly marked acute lobe, and wheretrom it is broadly deltoid to the acuminate point. Comparing it to the fine small leaf of Sassafras Mudge in Cret. Flora, Pl. XXX, fig. 7, we easily recognize a likeness of characters in the form and the nervation, which proves also the rela- tion of this Cissites to the Sassafras or the Araliacec. HaApirat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. CISSITES HEERII, sp. nov. Pl. VI, fig. 3. Leaf fan-shaped in outline, rounded and cuneate to the base, enlarged above the middle, divided in the upper part into five acute nearly equal lobes; nervation trifid from above the base; lower secondary veins ascending to the point of the intermediate lobes, the others all camptodrome like their divisions. The base of this leaf is destroyed; but its outline is clearly defined by the border of the preserved part, and the direction of the lateral primary vein. The leat broadly ‘cuneate toward the base, is slightly contracted a little above, and hence is rounding to join the petiole ; the two lateral primary nerves ascend to the point of a lower acute lobe, as also the lower secondary veins, appearing, with the middle nerve, like five branches of a five-lobed fan-like leaf. The lobes are equal, separated by halt-rounded sinuses, and acutely pointed. Except that the two lower secondary veins ascend to the points of two lobes, the nervation is of the same type exactly as in the former species. ‘he affinity of these two leaves is therefore evident. It is, however, certain that this one cannot be now compared to Sassafras (Araliopsis), nor to Aralia, and it therefore authorizes the separation of this group, which by its characters, seen in this last species, is allied to the Ampelidew, espe- cially to Cissus. Hapsirat.—Near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. CISSITES CYCLOPHYLLA, Lesqx. Populites cyclophylla?, Heer,—Cret. Flora, p.59, Pl, IV, fig. 5, and Pl. XXTV, fig. 4. Leaves round, entire, subcoriaceous, with slightly undulate borders, round or truncate to the long slender petiole; nervation subtrifid or pinnate from the base; lateral veins straight to the borders, craspedodrome, the lowest branching. I am not positive in regard to the specific identity of the two leaves referred to this species. ‘Fig. 5 of Pl. IV has the veins on a more acute angle of divergence, it being less enlarged on the sides; fig.4 of Pl. XXIV, has under the lower pair of lateral nerves a thick marginal vein in right angle to the mid-rib; in both, however, the veins and their divis- ions enter the borders, and the nervilles, which join them in right 23 304 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. angle, are thick, undulate, at equal distance, and generally simple. It has been remarked already, that the characters of the veins, all craspe- dodrome, favor a separation of these leaves from the genus Populus, though the round form and long slender petiole give them the appear- ance of poplar leaves. CISSITES OBTUSUM. Sassafras obtuswm, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 81, Pl. XIII, figs. 2-4. Leaves thin, long petioled, flabelliform, three-obtusely lobed, entire or undulate on the borders, broadly cuneate or narrowed to the petiole, three- nerved from a little above the border base; secondary veins parallel, camp- todrome. ; If the relation of these leaves to the Araliacee is marked by the three- lobate form and the nervation, their affinity to the Ampelidec is indicated also by the thinner substance of the leaves, and the long, slender peti- ole. Like many other Cretaceous leaves, they are of a mixed character, and their reference uncertain. Except by their thin substance and long petiole, they are indeed very similar to fig. 4, of Pl. XI, of the Cret. Flora, representing Cissites Harkerianus. By the other characters they relate to the following generic division. é AMPELOPHYLLUM, Lesqx. Leaves ovate or obovate obtuse entire, narrowed to a long petiole or sub- cordate; palmately three-nerved from above the base; nervation craspedo- drome. AMPELOPHYLLUM ATTENUATUM, sp. nov. PI. II, fig. 3. Leaf broadly obovate, enlarged upward from the cuneate base, rounded at the top, entire, subcoriaceous ; lateral primary nerve from a distance above the base flexuous, branching outside and inside, ascending to the bor- ders. This fine leaf is six and one-half centimeters long without the petiole, nearly six centimeters wide above the middle, rounded at the top, un- dulate by the slight protuberance of the veins, three-nerved from a distance (one centimeter) above the narrowed base, with two pairs of distant alternate secondary veins, reaching the borders like the pri- mary nerves, either directly or by their branches. Connected by ner- villes at right angles, and also divided in very oblique veinlets, they form irregular quadrate large meshes, and pass up in right angle to the borders. There is under the base of the primary nerves one or two pairs of marginal veinlets in the same degree of divergence as the other veins, 40° to 50°. | The form of this fine leaf and its nervation also are peculiar, and of a character analogous to that of some leaves described under the ge- neric name of Greviopsis in the Sezane Flora by Saporta; there is, however, a marked difference in the primary nervation and in the entire borders of the leaves. The two lower pairs of veinlets give also to this leaf an affinity with Credneria, and especially with the small en- tire leaves of Platanus Heerti as figured in this memoir, Pl. VIII, fig. 5; The secondary and tertiary nervation are, however, of a different character. HABitaAt.—South of Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. vEesquerEUX.] © ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 395 AMPELOPHYLLUM OVATUM. Celtis? ovata Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 66, Pl. IV, figs. 2, 3. Leaves thickish, membranaceous, obtuse or truncate at the point, gradually enlarged toward the truncate or subcordate base, abruptly curving to a long petiole, borders entire, undulate three-nerved from the base, secondary veins two or three pairs, ata distance from the primary ones, all craspedodrome. These two leaves evidently represent the same species, but their refer- ence to this division is not positive. As in the former species, the lower veins are irregularly divided, the fibrillz distinct, at least in fig. 3, which has also one pair of marginal veinlets; the subdivision of the veins along the borders is, however, obsolete, though the veinlets appear to pass up into them. HAMAMELITES KANSASEANA. Pl. VII, fig. 4. Alnus Kansaseana, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 62, Pl. XXX. fig. 8. Leaves membranaceous, oval or obovate rounded or subcordate to the base, obtuse, undulate, pinnately nerved ; veins parallel, ascending to the borders inan acute angle of divergence, branching outside, cruaspedodrome except the lowest, which is more open and curving along the borders. The specimen figured here is more complete than the one described in the Cret. flora. No traces of denticulation are observable along the borders, but regular deep undulations, which neat the point pass to obtuse teeth. Except the two lower pairs of veins, all the others and their divisions reach the borders; they are parallel, under an angle of divergence of 40°, equidistant and deeply marked. In this specimen the middle nerve passes under the border-base of the leaf, which is rounded; while in the other fragment figured in Cret. Flora, the border base is cordate, and curves on both sides to the middle nerve. From the opinion of Saporta, the author of the genus in the Sezane flora, the reference of these leaves to the Hamamelites appears legiti- mate. HapiratT.—Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. HAMAMELITES QUADRANGULARIS. Alnites quadrangularis, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 62, Pl. IV, fig. 1. Leaf subcoriaceous, smatl, broadly rhomboidal in outline, with obtuse angles ; borders entire, undulate, rounded to a short petiole (broken); nerva- tion pinnate ; veins parallel, craspedodrome, except the lower pair mere mar- ginal veinlets. The leaf, whose areolation is not distinct, has apparently the same characters of nervation as in the former species, differing merely by its shape and its size. ‘Though the veins are thicker it may represent the same species. POLYCARPIC Zi. MAGNOLIA TENUIFOLIA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 92, Pl. X XI, fig. 1. Leaf large, oblong, rounded upward to an obtuse point? (broken), nar- rowed in a curve to a short slender petiole ; middle nerve straight, narrow ; lateral veins alternate, on a broad angle of divergence, slender, undulate, deflexed near the point of insertion to the middle nerve. MAGNOLIA ALTERNANS, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 92, Pl. XVIII, fig. 4. Leaves subcoriaceous ovate-lanceolate or elliptical, obtusely pointed, entire 356. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. tapering to the petiole ; secondary veins numerous, parallel, alternately shorter and longer, camptodrome. The specimen figured in the Cretaceous Flora is poor. Until recently I had not seen any better, neither of this nor of the following species. Both have been more commonly found in Nebraska than in Kansas. MAGNOLIA CAPELLINI, Heer, Phyllites, p. 21, Pl. III, figs. 5 and 6. Leaves coriaceous, broadly oval, very entire; secondary veins at an acute angle of divergence, curving to the borders, camptodrome. Specimens referable to this species were received with others of M. aliernans from Mr. Sternberg; they are all more or less undistinet and fragmentary. The two forms seem to pass from one to the other by intermediate degrees, especially in the width of the leaves, so that it is difficult to find the point of separation between them. ‘The State cabi- net of New Jersey has a large number of specimens representing both species, some of them appearing indifferently referable to the one or to the other. But here, also, all the specimens are more or less fragmentary and indistinct. LIRIODENDRON MEEKII, Heer, Phyllites, p. 21, Pl. IV, figs. 3 and 4. Leaves panduriform (violin-shaped), emarginate at the top, bilobate, lobes obtuse, secondary veins branching. This species is rare in the Cretaceous, at least in Kansas. This year I have received, for the first time, a small specimen discovered in that State by Professor Mudge. The leaf is of a thin texture, oblong in out- line, short petioled, deeply emargined, the upper part of the leaf being thus bilobate; lobes oblong-obtuse, one centimeter broad, separated from the lower lobes by an obtuse narrow sinus scarcely four millimeters broad; lower lobes eighteen millimeters long from the berder of the sinus, ob- long obtuse, diverging nearly at right-angle; base of the leaf rounded tothe petiole. Considering that in the leaves of the present Liriodendron tulipifera the emargination of the leaves and the lateral lobes are very variable in size, it is proper to refer this leaf to the species described by Heer, for, except the length of the lobes, it has the same char- acters. The small leaf is without the petiole, thirty-eight millimeters long, and just the same width between the top of the lateral lobes. LIRIODENDRON INTERMEDIUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 93, Pl. XX, fig. 5. Leaf large, trilobate ; upper lobe deeply emarginate-lobed, secondary veins thin, simple, parallel. Since the deseription of this and the following species, published in 1868, I have not found and not received any specimens referable to them. They would be very acceptable, for we know these fine species merely from fragments. LIRIODENDRON GIGANTEUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 93, Pl. XXIII, fig. 2. Leaf very large, bilobed; upper lobe deeply emarginate, segments oblong ob- tuse, with four parallel secondary veins. This mere lobe of a leaf is about twelve centimeters long, and, there- fore, would indicate a leaf at least twenty-four centimeters broad be- tween the points of the upper divisions, or nearly one foot broad, and as long. Liriodendron tulipifera has in favorable localities leaves as large as those indicated by this fragment. MENISPERMITES OBTUSILOBUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p.94, Pl. XXV, figs. 1, 2; Pl. XXVI, fig. 3.—PI. VII, fig. 3. Leaves coriaceous, large, broadly deltoid, either shorter, nearly round in LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 357 outline, or longer, narrowed to an obtuse point, peltate from near the base, subtrilobate, five-palmately nerved, deeply undulate. The fig. 3 of Pl. Vil of this memoir has been given here on account of the good preservation of the leaf clearly exposing the. characters of the genus. Comparing it with the figures of the same species in the Cret. Flora,its characters appear evidently identical. Krom the large leaf, fig. 1, Pl. XXII, it differs in no manner whatever except by its size, showing, therefore, that this fine leaf is, as remarked, a mere variety of the normal form. But more than this, by comparison of the distribution of the veins and of the essential characters of the nervation in the fol- lowing species, it proves their relation to this generic division, which has two definite sections, represented one by lcbate, the other by en- tire leaves. HApBiratT.—Clay County, H. C. Towner. -MENISPERMITES SALINENSIS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 95, Pl. XX, figs. 1, 4. Leaves thickish, membranaceous or subcoriaceous, triangular in outline, deeply undulate-lobed, or palmately five-lobed from the border base, which is enlarged and truncate. MENISPERMITES ACERIFOLIUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 96, Pl. XX, figs. 2 and 3. Leaves small, triangular in outline, palmately obtusely three-lobed, wedge form, or abruptly narrowed to the base ; nervation three-palmate. MENISPERMITES POPULIFOLIUS, sp. nov. Pl. V, fig. 3. Leaf broadly ovate, obtuse, subcordate at the base, five-palmately nerved Srom the border base, primary nerves in an open angle of divergence, dividing on the lower side, like the secondary veins, all camptodrome. The leaf is broadly ovate, perfectly entire, coriaceous, five and one- half centimeters long, and as broad below the middie, where it is some- what enlarged; five palmately nerved from the base, the lateral veins diverging about equally in an angle of 30° from each other, so that the inner one ascends to the two-thirds of the leaf, the second to below the middle, and the basilar veinlets are in right angle to the midrib. The primary veins branch on the outside, anastomose with nervilles, and the exterior ones curve along and follow the borders; the secondary veins are at an open angle of divergence of 60°, separated by strong nervilles at right angle to the middle nerve. The areolation is obsolete. HABITAT.—South of Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. MENISPERMITES OVALIS, sp. nov. Pl. V, fig. 4. Leaf narrowly oval oblong, obtuse rounded at the base; jfive-palmately, nerved ; lateral veins on an acute angle of divergence, the inner ones as- cending to near the top, branching outside ; branches numerous, parallel, curving along the border in multiple festoons. This fine leaf, preserved nearly entire, is subcoriaceous, seven and one- half centimeters long, three and one-half centimeters broad, nearly exactly oval-oblong, perfectly entire and rounded to the base. The palmately five nervation is less definite than in the former leaf; the two internal lateral veins are as strong as the middle nerve, curve gradually in the same direction as the borders, and, near the top, join the branches of the midrib, with which they anastomose in curves; the outside lateral veins are thinner and shorter; they ascend nearly parallel to the borders, but disappear in the middle of the leaf in anastomosing with branches of the inside primary veins. In comparing this nervation with that of the 358 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. former species and also with that of the other leaves referred to this division, its identical type will be easily recognized and its reference to this genus found appropriate. Under the name of Daphnogene Kani, Professor Heer has published in the Arctic Flora, 1, p. 112, Pl. XIV, from the Miocene of Greenland, leaves which by form and nervation are closely related to this Cretaceous species. In the flora of Gelinden by Saporta and Marion, fragments of leaves of the same character are referred to the Menispermacee and described under the generic name of Cocculus. The Cretaceous form here described is intermediate between the Tertiary species and those described here from the Dakota group. Hapirar.—Near Clay Center, Kans., H. C. Towner. MENISPERMITES CYCLOPHYLLUS, sp. nov. PI. VI, fig. 4. Leaf subcoriaceous, entire, nearly round, peltate from near the middle, deeply concave, palmately five nerved; inner lateral veins curving inside toward the point; the outer ones open nearly at right angle to the middle nerve, all dividing by open straight branches ; basilar veinlets thr €€, PASSING down and curving along the borders. The first of these leaves figured here is not quite as well preserved as a larger specimen obtained lately. The essential characters are, how- ever, distinctly marked. Excepting the modification in relation to the form of these leaves, and the point of attachment of the petiole, the nervation is of the same type as in the former species As observed upon the larger specimens, three or four veinlets pass downward from the lower part of the point of attachment of the petiole, curving on each side and following the borders in festoons, like marginal veinlets. _ The tertiary nervation, which is distinct and as marked upon the upper part of the figure, is exactly of the same type as in the former species, the veinlets nearly at right angle or slightly oblique to the secondary veins, forming a double series of outside curves like superposed arches, the last row following the borders in festoons. The leaf figured as marked above is concave to the round point of attachment of the peti- ole, which passes down into the stone, leaving an opening like the pipe of a funnel. In the larger leaf, which is ten centimeters broad and eight long, the depression is not as marked and the surface is nearly flat. On this specimen the primary veins and their branches pass up to near the borders before dividing, and thus have a nervation remarkably similar to that of Menispermites Salinensis, as represented in Cret. Flora, Pl, XE, fig. Hapirar.—Kansas, near Fort Harker, the first leaf, Chs. Sternberg. Near Clay Center, the largest specimen, H. C. Towner. MALVACEA. STERCULIA LINEARILOBA, Sp. nova. Leaf truncate to a short thick petiole, large, divided to near the base in five linear-entire, narrow, obtusely-pointed lobes about equally diverging, from acute sinuses. I know this fine leaf only from a sketch communicated by the owner of the specimen. It is seventeen centimeters broad between the points of the lower lobes, which are in right angle to the middle one, eleven centimeters long from the top of the petiole to the point of the middle lobe, which is eleven centimeters long from the sinuses; five-palmately nerved from the base; lobes nearly linear, narrowed into a short point, LESQUEREUX.] ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 359 entire; nerves very thick, secondary veins and areolation obsolete. This leat may be referable to Aralia, but it appears more evidently related to Sterculia by its truncate base and its narrow linear lobes. HABITAT.—Near Clay Center, H. C. Towner. TILIACH A. GREVIOPSIS HAYDENII, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 97, Pl. III, figs. 2,4; Pl. XXIV, fig. 3. Leaves large, broadly ovate, tapering up to a point, more or less abruptly narrowed to the base ; borders equally denticulate from below the middle ; nervation irregularly pinnate or abnormally five-palmate, craspedodrome. In regard to these leaves, whose attribution is not positively known, Count Saporta remarks that by their facies they resemble leaves. of Corylopsis, a generic division of the Hamamelide, especially represented in the Japan flora; the attribution would be therefore a natural one. These leaves, however, appear equally related by some of their vharac- ters and by their facies to the Tiliacee. - ACERACE 2. NEGUNDOIDES ACUTIFOLIUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 97, Pl. XXI, fig. 5. Leaves irregularly cut ; leaflets thin, lanceolate-pointed or enlarged lobate, with acuminate lobes, pinnately veined ; veins camptodrome. No other fragments referable to this have been discovered. The true character of the leaves represented by the fragments is uncertain. CELASTRACE AL. CELASTROPHYLLUM ENSIFOLIUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 108, Pl. X XI, figs. 2, 3. Leaves very thick and coriaceous, linear, abruptly contracted to the base by a round curve, broadly deltoid-pointed, borders undulately crenate or. merely undulate; nervation pinnate, secondary veins close, parallel camp- todrome, diverging in acute angle from the thick middle nerve. AQUIFOLIACE Ai. ILEX STRANGULATA, sp. nov. Pl. VIII, fig. 3. Leaf coriaceous, narrow, panduriform or strangled in the middle to a small angular lobe ; rounded and narrowed to the petiole, entire toward the base; upper part enlarged oval (point broken), borders irregularly, dis- tantly, obtusely y dentate, secondary veins close, nearly at right angle to the middle nerve, irregularly camptodrome. This leaf is about five and one-half centimeters long without the petiole, which measures one and one-half centimeters; its broadest part above the petiole, as below the point, is not more than twelve milli- meters, and in the middle, where it is contracted, two millimeters only. Its texture is thick; the surface rugose; the secondary veins generally very open, though variable in their direction; curve near, and along the borders, forming a more or less distinct narrow margin. The areolation distinct only at one place, where the epidermis is destroyed, is in small angular generally square areola. The deformed shape of this leaf, its border, its thick texture, and nervation, indicate its relation ‘to this genus. 360 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Bas HABITAT.—Same as Dryophyllum salicifolium, in connection with eoal strata of Southwest Colorado, at a higher stage of the Cretaceous, H. Holmes. These two last-named species have no relation known as yet with any of the Dakota group, and none also with species of the Lower Lignitic or Hocene. Their affinity appears to be with a group of plants known from specimens of tbe upper stage of the Cretaceous of New Jersey. Indeed, the two horizons where fossil leaves have been found in this State, represent, by the lithological composition of the strata, their relative distance, and the characters of their fossil leaves, a striking affinity with what is seen in the stratification, the composition, and the plants of the formation referred above and reported by Mr. Holmes. The Lower Cretaceous of New Jersey is composed, as tar as I could judge from the specimens which [ examined, of sandy, white, or reddish coarse shale, wherein the plants are imbedded in profusion, but in a poor state of preservation. These represent many species identical with those of the Dakota group, or at least evidently related forms. Both Magnolia Capellint and especially Magnolia alternans, are among them. The upper group, on the contrary, has scarcely any identical species with those of the lower, though the intervening space is not more than one hundred feet; its types appear generally different, and as the vegetable remains are found in a soft clay, the leaves are far better preserved. Among the species of this Upper Cretaceous group, one is apparently closely related to the Dryophyllum deseribed from Mr. Holmes’s specimens.* FRANGULACE AE. PALIURUS MEMBRANACEUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 108, Pl. XX, fig. 6. Leaf small, membranaceous, oval, obtuse, entire, palmately three-nerved from the base; lateral veins thin; nervilles distinct, in right angle to the veins and joining them. RHAAMNUS TENAX, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 109, Pl. X-XI, fig. 4. Leaf entire, lanceolate-pointed or acuminate, narrowed by a@ curve to a short petiole ; lateral veins close, numerous, thin, parallel, camptodrome. TEREBINTHACE 43. JUGLANS? DEBEYANA, Heer, Cret. Flora, p. 110, Pl. XXIII, figs. 1-5. Leaves coriaceous, entire, broadly ovate, obtuse, or with a short obtuse point, rounded-subcordate at the base, or narrowed by a curve and slightly decurring to the petiole; middle nerve thick ; secondary veins numerous, open, camptodrome. It has been remarked, in the introduction, that these leaves may be referable to Rhus. Count Saporta remarks that if there is among these leaves a proportionate number of them with unequilateral base, like figs. 4 and 5, they may indeed represent a Juglans or a Juglandites. * These specimens were received after my return from New Jersey, where, by the kindness of Dr. G. H. Cook, the director of the geological survey of that State, I had the privilege of examining the numerous materials of the State collection. I have not had yet opportunity of comparing the specimens of Colorado with those of New Jersey, and speak therefore from memory. LESQUEREUX.] © ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. o61 PHYLLITES RHOIFOLIUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flor., p. 111, Pl. XXII, figs 5 and 6. Leaves coriaceous, lanceolate penninerve, irregularly obtusely dentate ; middle nerve thick; secondary veins parallel, caomptodrome, deeply marked. PRUNUS? CRETACEUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 111, Pl. XXIII, figs. 8 and 9;— PI. IV, fig. 9 Drupe ovate, obtusely pointed, grooved on one side to the middle, notched at the enlarged obtuse base. Nothing new has been elicited in regard to the relation of this fruit, though another specimen has been found apparently representing the same species. As seen in fig. 9 of Pl. LV, it is exactly of the same size and form as the one in Pl. XXIII, fig. 8, of the Cret. Flora. It is upon the surface of a large flat fragment of sandstone, where it is im- bedded to the middle of its thickness, the part figured being very dis- tinct. From the remnants of a thin coat of matter similar to a sheliy envelope, it seems to have been surrounded by a coriaceous pericarp. The same specimen represent a leaf of Aralia Towneri. HABITAYT.—South of Clay Center, Kansas, H. C. Towner. INCERT Ai SEDIS. ASPIDIOPHYLLUM, Lesqx. Leaves large, triangular in outline, palmately trilobed, truncate and auricled at base; nervation coarse, primary nerves three from above the peltate top of the petiole; secondary veins close, parallel, camptodrome or craspedodrome. The essential difference separating the leaves of this new division from those of Sassafras (Araliopsis) is the broadly peltate and auricled base. As seen from Plate II, fig. 1, the lateral veins are very open, nearly at aright angle with the middle one, and therefore the lobes have the same direction, and the leaf has nearly the appearance of a cross; these short broad lobes, either obtusely dentate by the extension of the point of the secondary veins entering them, or entire whenever these veins curve along them, are remarkably similar to those of S. Harkerianum. The secondary nervation, however, is of a somewhat different character, the veins being more curved in passing up to the borders, and also at a more obtuse angle of divergence. The rounded, more or less elongated auricle is nerved by the downward continuity of the secondary veins, or, as seen in fig. 2, by two pairs of secondary veins in right angle to the middle nerve, and two pairs of marginal veinlets from the top of the petiole. This disposition has analogy to the basilar nervation of Credneria leaves, with the difference, however, that in Credneria all the lower secondary veins are at a right angle to the midrib. The same kind of affinity is still more marked with species of Protophyllum, as for example P. multinerve, Cret. Flor., Pl. XVIII, fig. 1, whose leaves, however, are not lobed, and whose upper nerva- tion is of an entirely different type. We have therefore still in these leaves a union of different characters separately and distinctly recog- nized in other groups of this remarkable flora. ASPIDIOPHYLLUM TRILOBATUM, sp. nov. Pl. II, figs. 1, 2 Leaves large, coriaceous, triangular or rhomboidal in outline, more or less deeply trilobate, broadly cuneate to the base, enlarged into an half-round auricle, three-nerved from above the peltate base of the thick middle nerve. These leaves vary in size from ten to twenty-four centimeters long and 362 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. from twelve to thirty centimeters broad between the points of the lateral lobes ; these are turned upward in the normal form, the angle of diver- gence of the lateral veins being 40° to 50°, with a very deep coarse nervation. The borders of the lobes are more generally dentate, and the veins, therefore, mostly craspedodreme. I was disposed to consider as a separate species the leaf represented, fig. 1, greatly differing by its diminutive size, the direction of the lobes, and the still broader nervation. These leaves, of which we have two specimens, have the surface runcinate, or appearing as if they were not fully unfolded; they represent probably a peculiar form or variety of the same species, for, except this difference, the characters are the same. Hapirat.—South of Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. PROTOPHYLLUM STERNBERGII, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 101, Pl. XVI; Pl. XVIII, fig. 2. Leaves large, coriaceous, peltate entire, rounded or cordate at base, grad- ually narrowed up into a slightly obtuse point ; basilar veins one or two pairs. PROTOPHYLLUM LECONTEANUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 103, Pi. XVII, fig. 4; Pl. XVI, fig. 1. Leaves coriaceous, round, more enlarged in the middle, entire; middle nerve thick, lowest secondary veins much divided, basilar veins in right angle to the middle nerve proportionally thick. PROTOPHYLLUM ? NEBRASCENSE, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 103, Pl. XX VII, fig. 3. Leaf small, subcoriaceous, oval-oblong, abruptly narrowed to the petiole ; borders entire, middle nerve thin, secondary veins close, parallel, all under the same angle of divergence. This leaf is by its character referable to the generic division of the Hamamelites, and clearly related to the leaf of our Pl. VII, fig. 4. PROTOPHYLLUM QUADRATUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 104, Pl. XIX, fig. 1. Leaves thickish, subcoriaceous, round-square in outline ; truncate at the base and subpeltate, deeply undulate, obtuse; nervation thick, secondary veins straight to the borders. “ PROTOPHYLLUM MINUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 104, Pl. XIX, fig. 2; Pl. XXVII, fig. 1;— Pl. V, fig. 6. Leaves small, coriaceous, broadly ovate, truncate or subcordate at the base ; entire or slightly undulate, subpeliate. These different forms of Protophyllum are clearly defined and preserve their characters in the numerous specimens which [ have had for exam- ination. PI. IV, fig. 6, shows a very small leaf of this species, repre- senting in miniature the large forms described in the Cret. Flora. PROTOPHYLLUM MULTINERVE, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 105, Pl. XVIII, fig. 1. Leaves of medium size, coriaceous, oval-oblong, round-truneate at the base, peltate, middle nerve thick, secondary veins close, numerous, in an open angle of divergence, the lower ones in right angle and deflecting downward, borders entire or undulate. PROTOPHYLLUM RUGOSUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 105, Pl. XVII, figs. 1 and 2; Pl. XIX, fig. 3. Leaves deltoid-ovate, rounded and subpeltate at the base, borders entire ; nervation coarse, surface rugose, secondary veins irregular in distance and direction. LEsQuEREUx.] © ENUMERATION OF CRETACEOUS PLANTS. 363 PROTOPHYLLUM HAYDENI, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 106, Pl. XVII, fig. 3. Leaves small, coriaceous, smooth, oblong-ovate, pointed, deeply irregularly undulate-lobed, abruptly rounded to the base, subpalmately three-nerved ; secondary veins parallel, straight to the borders, basilar veins two or three pairs at right angles to the middle nerve. The basilar nervation of this species, as also of the following, is of the Credneria type. PROTOPHYLLUM CREDNERIOIDES, sp. nova. Pl. II, fig. jae Ae Se fig. 4. Leaves small, nearly round, truncate at the base, long petioled ; borders entire, undulate ; nervation obscurely trifid ; secondary veins on various angles of divergence. These leaves, of which we have many specimens, vary in size from six to eight centimeters, and are as broad as long; they are more or less deeply undulate, but the borders are entire, though all the veins and their divisions pass to the borders; the petiole is comparatively long and slender and the secondary veins more or less open, according to their position, being at a right angle to the middle nerve near the base and at an acute angle of divergence near the top. As in the former species, the leaves are obscurely tripalmately-nerved, the lower lateral primary veins above the borders being underlaid as in Credneria by two pairs of thinner veins in right angle. In this case, however, as these lower veins branch, and have the same direction as those above, they are rather secondary veins, like the others, and the nervation should be considered as pinnate. HaApirat.— Mostly found near Fort Harker, Kansas, Chs. Sternberg. PROTOPHYLLUM? MUDGEI, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p, 106, Pl. XVIII, fig. 3. Leaf thick, coriaceous, ovate-obtuse, enlarged and truncate at base, equally denticulate ; middle nerve very thick ; secondary Beins alternate, mere or less branching, craspedodrome. The leaf, the only fragment of which is figured, is of uncertain refer- ence. ANISOPHYLLUM SEMI-ALATUM, Lesax., Cret. Flora, p. 98, Pl. VI, figs. Leaves thick, coarsely veined, ovate or obovate in outline, either abruptly narrowed, subtruncate and subcordate to the petiole, or rounded wedge-form _to the base, irregularly lobate on one side, deeply undulate on the borders ; ner vation irregularly three to five palmate from above the base of the leaves ; primary veins much dinided. | EREMOPHYLLUM FIMBRIATUM, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 107, Pl. VIII, fig. 1. Leaf peltate, kidney-shaped, with an entire broadly truncate base; bor- ders dentate by equal hastate or auricled, and pointed teeth; nervation seven-palmate. , VEGETABLE ORGANISMS OF UNCERTAIN AFFINITY. PHYLLITES BETULZFOLIUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 112, Pl. XXVIII, figs. 4, 7. Leaves small, mostly in fragments, round-ovate, truncate at the top, nar- rowed to the base by a rownd curve; borders dentate; nervation pinnate, irregular, craspedodrome. 364 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. PHYLLITES RHOMBOIDEUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 112, Pl. VI, fig. 8. Leaf rhomboidal, broadly cuneate to the base, more obtusely narrowed and undulate from the middle to an obtuse short point ; nervation five-palmate From the base, the two inner lateral veins curving up at a very acute angle of divergence and acrodrome or nearly reaching the point of the leaf, branching outside, the external veins following the borders up to the middle of the leaf, where they anastomose with branches of the first pair. PHYLLITES COTINUS, Lesqx. BUMELIA MARCOUANA, Heer (Lesqx.), Cret. Flora, p. 90, Pl. XXVIII, fig. 2. Leaf membranaceous, broadly oval, entire, emarginate, rounded downward to a long slender petiole, penninerve. From information received of Professor Heer, this leaf positively differs from the one which he examined and which is figured in Dana’s Manual of Geology. Though the likeness of this leaf to those of Rhus cotinus is marked, its relation is not definite. PHYLLITES VANONA, Heer,—Cret. Flora, p. 113, Pl. XX, fig. 7; Pl. XXVIII, fig. 8. Leaves small, ovate-lanceolate, pointed, cuneiform to the base ; borders en- tire, middle nerve thin, secondary veins few, scattered, camptodrome. PHYLLITES UMBONATUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 113, Pl. XIX, fig. 4. Leaf quadrate in outline, truncate at the base, deeply notched at the top by the splitting of the thick middle nerve, trregularly broadly undulate on the borders ; secondary veins few, at irregular distances, nearly at right angle to the middle nerve, camptodrome. PHYLLITES AMORPHUS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 113, Pl. XXII, figs. 3, 4. Two fragments of coriaceous, obovate, entire leaves, narrowed to the base (broken) ; middle nerve deep and narrow ; secondary veins either in right angle to the middle nerve or curved downward, or passing up in an acute angle of divergence, branching and anastomosing in varions abnormal ways. PTENOSTROBUS NEBRASCENSIS, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p.114, Pl. XXIV, dyad Cone oblong, cut in tts length ; seeds oblong-oval, lenticular, obtuse at one end, pointed at the other, winged, wings oval oblong, striated. CAULINITES SPINOSA, Lesqx., Cret. Flora, p. 115. Stems or branches cylindrical, with rough surface marked by irregular, close dots, or small cavities resembling the impressions of scale ; bearing long spines at right angles. CARPOLITHES ?, Cret. Flora, p. 114, Pl. XX VI, fig. 5, Pl. XXX, fig. 11. Fruit ? large, oval-pointed at both ends, costate, marked at the lower end by a small hollow surrounded by small semi-globular bolsters corresponding with the end of the coste. The bodies represented by the figures are doubtfully referred to some _ vegetable organism. It would, perhaps, seem advisable to close this review by a table of comparison, exposing the relation of the species of the Dakota group with those of the Cretaceous floras of other countries. A table of this kind, however, would not offer any valuable information, and could be of little interest, on account of the scantiness of the materials available for comparison. The few points of affinity between our American Cre- ~ 4 LESQUFREUX.] REVIEW OF CRETACEOUS FLORA. 365 taceous plants and those of Europe have been remarked in the Cretaceous Flora, and, since its publication, no other werk has appeared on the same subject but the third volume of the Arctic Flora, where, as remarked be- fore, Professor Heer describes the species of fossil plants from two stages of the Cretaceous of Greenland ; a lower one, that of Come; an upper one, that of Atane, and an intermediate small group from Spitzberg. With the species of the first division, the Dakota group flora has Gleichenia nordenskidldi, identical and none related; with those of the second, it has two Coniters—Sequoia fastigiata and Pinus Quenstedti. This last has been described also by the author, trom Spitzberg, and formerly from Moletin. In the monocotyledonous, our Phragmites cretaceous seems identical with Arundo greenlandica, Heer, of the same upper stage, and in the dicotyledonous, Myrica cretacea, Lesqx., is comparable to M. zenkeri, Heer, which is represented by a fragment only. There is still an evident relation of the leaves described by Heer as Chondrophyllum orbiculatum and C. nordenskioldi with those of Hedera ovalis, ot the Dakota group. We have also Andromeda Parlatorvi, Magnolia Capellini, and M. alternans present in both floras. These three species are appa- rently extensively distributed in the Cretaceous. Without taking into account the more or less acceptable modifications of generic and specific forms proposed in this review, we have here an addition to the North American Cretaceous flora of twenty-four species, mostly clearly defined from very fine specimens. This contribution, the result of the discoveries made during one year only, by two zealous young naturalists who have explored merely an area of small extent in the counties where they live, shows what abundant materials are still left in the strata of the Dakota group to reward future researches. It exposes, also, with more evidence the riches and the diversity of the vegetation of the Cretaceous period, manifested as it is by the distribu- tion of the dicotyledonous leaves in the three great divisions of this class of plants; by the numerous, clearly-limited, generic groups which they represent, as well as by the multiplicity of specific forms referable to some of the genera. The species of Menispermites and of Protophyl- lum, tor example, are as distinctly separated by the characters of their leaves, though preserving the unity of their generic type, as we see them at the present time under analogous climatic circumstances. These facts tend to confirm the general conclusions briefly exposed in the Cretaceous Flora concerning the origin and the distribution of the dicotyledonous species, a question to which the history of our present North American flora is interested in the highest degree. ce Rhy 3 EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Fig. 1. ARALIA TRIPARTITA, sp. nov., page 348. Fig 2, 28, ARALIA SAPORTANEA, sp. nov., page 300. i=} eu RT pe ale ER | fie SIC eR ICUTACRON Patel. . Ms eats ar eae Thy “ fs a mth a Tes un bey EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Figs. 1, 2. ASPIDIOPHYLLUM TRILOBATUM, sp..nov., page 361. Fig. 3. AMPELOPHYLLUM ATTENUATUM, sp. nov., page 304. Fig. 4. PHYLLOCLADUS SUBINTEGRIFOLIUS, Lesqa., page 337. Figs. 5, 5%. GLEICHENIA NORDENSKIOLDI, Heer., page 334. Platell. * ALT rang patti Nt, OK SURI Fi * if. ‘ ad Pecsirg ok EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. Fig. 1. PROTOPHYLLUM CREDNERIOIDES, sp. nop., page 363. Figs. 2, 8, 8*. SEQUOIA FASTIGIATA, Sternb., page 335. Fig. 3. HEDERA PLATANOIDAA, sp. nov., page 351. Fig. 4. MYRICA CRETACEA, sp. nov., page 339, Fig. 5. ANDROMEDA AFFINIS, sp. nov., page 348. Figs. 6, 6%, 7, 79. PINUS QUENSTEDTI, Heer., page 336. Plate lll. on a I) diem l wicHol-S. S& Svieiy as EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. Fig. 1. ARALIA TOWNERI, sp. nov., page 349. i Figs. 2-4. ARALIA CONCRETA, sp. nov., page 349. Figs. 5-7. SEQUOIA CONDITA, sp. nov., page 335. Fig. 8. INOLEPIS ?, species., page 337. Fig. 9. PRUNUS ? CRETACEA, Lesqx., page 361. SHE ODKG A805 4 LONRATONT aungal .g Sas C eot YGE ogg ,.sos Ke SOMOULITOT an rime M Remy Op SEE OBEY HOS 42 ChIAVO Barataria Mo} PvE BURNIN af one Coed e088 ATAOTAG BUT 8 ait SOE oes: Rw 4UAiM MULIYHIOTONTL 0, i SET ‘ g of GbE ogeg .. MOLICETOAYAL eUOCL .T ory EXPLANATION OF PLATE V. Figs. 1 and 2. LAURUS PROTEZFOLIA, sp. nov., page 342. Fig. 3. MENISPERMITES POPULIFOLIUS, sp. nov., page 357. Fig. 4. MENISPERMITES OVALIS, sp. nov., page 357. Fig. 5. FICUS DISTORTA, sp. nov., page 342. Fig. 6. PROTOPHYLLUM MINUS, Lesqz., page 362. Fig. 7. FICcUS LAUROPHYLLUM, Lesqx., page 342. Ai ey ee Si alt Ne aa ae z ne : Ts oe Ei ‘ih . Vane tnee pm aoe hae eae EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Fig. 1. DRYOPHYLLUM (QUERCUS) LATIFOLIUM, sp. nov., page 340. | Fig. 2. LOMATIA SAPORTANEA. Lesgz. An enlarged leaflet, page 346. Fig. 3. CISSITES HEERI, sp. nov., page 353. Fig. 4. MENISPERMITES CYCLOPHYLLUS, sp. nov., page 358. dea EXPLANATION or PLATE Vu Figs. 1and2. CrSsITES: HARKERIANUS, Danae. page 352. Fig. 3. MENISPERMITES OBTUSILOBA, Lesqx., page 356. ‘Fig. 4. HamamMetires KansaSeana, Lesqit., paeee 355. Fig. 5. Igoe SOMGM oO 8p. HEE BAB Bol rae, Pedi eo eR EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII: Fig 1. CISSITES ACUMINATUS, sp. nov., page 355. Fig. 2. DRYOPHYLLUM (QUERCUS) SALICIFOLIUM, sp. nov., page 340. Fig. 3. ILEX STRANGULATA, sp. nov., page 39. Fig. 4. PROTOPHYLLUM CREDNERIOIDES, sp. nNov., page 363. Fig. 5. PLATANUS HeEs#Rtt, Lesqz., page 341. ee SS eg ere le b, t eS, ee REPORT OF W. H. JACKSON. 367 ELSI ea Es Iu ~~ i i | i a es as) Plate I. ANCIENT RUINS IN SOUTHWESTERN COLORADO. By W. H. JACKSON. In the extreme southwestern corner of Colorado Territory, west of the one hundred and eighth degree of longitude, are groups of old ruined houses and towns, displaying a civilization and intelligence far beyond that of any of the present inhabitants of this or adjacent Territory. We will endeavor, in the few pages following, to describe these with: as much minuteness and circumspection as a very hasty trip enabled us to observe; depending more upon the pictorial illustrations accom- panying this article for clear exposition of the subject than upon any choice of words. Although ruins in considerable number and importance were said to exist along the Rio Las Animas and San Juan, we did not think it best to spare any of the little time at our disposal for their investigation. Our object being to find those in which the picturesque predominated and were the least known, we directed our course to the westward, hav- ing obtained reliable information of the existence of some which would come up to our anticipations. ‘The Rio Mancos, one of the western trib- utaries of the San Juan, rises in two principal forks among the western foot-hills of the Sierra La Plata, flows southwesterly through fertile and beautiful valleys to a great table-land, known as the ‘ Mesa Verde,” and entering, flows directly south through it to the valley of the San Juan, and then turning west again joins that stream near the crossing of the boundary-lines of the four Territories. Commencing our observations in the park-like valley of the Mancos between the mesa and the mountains, we find that the low benches which border the stream upon either side bear faint vestiges of having, at some far-away time, been covered with dwellings, grouped in communities apparently, but now so indistinct as to present to the eye little more than unintelligible mounds. By a little careful investigation, however, the foundations of great square blocks, of single buildings, and of circu- lar inclosures, can be made out; the latter generally with a depressed center, showing an excavation for some purpose. The greater portion of these mounds are now overgrown with artemisia, pifion-pine, and cedar, concealing them almost entirely from casual observation. We found the surest indication of their proximity in the great quantity of broken pottery, which covered the ground in their neighborhood, the same curiously indented, painted, and glazed ware found throughout New Mexico and Arizona. It was all broken into very small pieces, none that we could find being larger than a silver dollar. We had no opportunity to make any excavations about these old mounds; but such little scratching around as we could do developed nothing new below the surface, all the pottery which covers the ground having been broken and scattered since the, demolition of the homes of the makers. No- where among these open-plains habitations could we discover any ves- tiges of stone-work, either in building material or implements. It is 369 24 0 370 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. very evident that the houses were all of adobe, the mound-like charae- ter of the remains justifying that belief. The “‘ Mesa Verde” extends north and south about twenty, and east and west about forty miles. It is of a grayish-yellow Cretaceous sand- stone, with a very nearly horizontal bedding, so that the escarpment is about equal upon all sides, ranging from 600 to 1,000 feet in height. The capping or upper strata are generally firmly and solidly bedded, retaining a perpendicular face of about 200 feet, with a succession of | benches below, connected by the steep slopes of the talus. Side-cafions penetrate the mesa, and ramify it in every direction, always presenting a perpendicular face, so that it is only at very rare intervals that the top can be reached ; but, once up there, we find excellent grazing, and thick groves of cedar and pifon-pine. From the bottom of the cation up, the slopes of the escarpment are thickly covered with groves of cedar and pifion, gnarled and dwarfed, but sucking up a vigorous livelihood from the cracks and crevices of the barren declivities. Below, the cot- tonwood and willow grow luxuriantly beside the streams, while dense growths of a reedy grass tower above our heads as we ride through it. Throughout its entire length, the cafon preserves an average width of ‘about 200 yards, sometimes much wider and again narrower. The stream, meandering from side to side, frequently interrupted by beaver- dams, cuts a deep channel in the friable earth which characterizes all the valley-lands of this region, while the banks upon either one side or the other are perpendicular, so that it is an extremely troublesome mat- ter to cross. Added to the difficulties of getting in and out of the stream is a thick-matted jungle of undergrowth, tall, reedy grass, wil- lows, and thorny bushes, all interlaced and entwined by tough and wiry grape-vines bordering its banks upon either one side or the other. The current is sluggish, and the water tinged with a milky translucency, gathered from the soil. Kintering the cafon at its upper end, we strike into the old Indian trail which comes over from the head of the Rio Dolores, and, passing down this cafion a short distance, turns off to the left and goes over to the La Plata. About a hundred Indians had just passed over it with their horses and goats, so that it was in most excellent traveling order, although winding in and out, and over and among great blocks of sand- Stone and other débris from above; the encroaching stream, too, fre- quently forcing the narrow pathway high up on the slopes of the pro- jecting spurs, the treacherous character of the banks of the stream for- bidding the crossing and recrossing usual in-such cases. Grouped along in clusters, and singly, were indications of former habitations, very nearly obliterated, and consisting mostly, in the first four or five miles, of the same mound-like forms noticed above, and accompanied always by the scattered, broken pottery. Among them we found one building of squared and carefully- laid sandstone ; one face only exposed, of three or four courses, above the mass of débris, which covered everything. This building lay within a few yards of the banks of the stream; was apparently about 10 feet by 8, the usual size, as near as we could deter- mine, of nearly all the separate rooms or houses in the larger blocks, none larger, and many not more than 5 feet square. The stones ex- posed are each about 7 by 12 inches square and 4 inches thick, those in their original position retaining correct angles, but, when thrown down, worn away, and rounded by attrition to shapeless ‘bowlders. Being so exposed to the elements, the cementing material which bound the ma- sonry together is entirely worn away upon the surface; but, upon puil- ing away a few courses, it was found binding the rocks together quite LE Zs Ul Edy (Uy Y NA } nb LAG Ipri7~ Free aM ly ry 1 2 = vy) i Plate II. Plate III. LF Sean in — LO dh My Aah U) Wy 4 Z be: ee ens I 9 vag ct a oh ma JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN S. W. COLORADO. eal firmly. It was not, however, anything more than an adobe or clay- cement. As we progressed down the caiion, the same general characteristics held good; the great majority of the ruins consisting of heaps of débris, a central mass considerably higher and more massive than the surrounding lines of subdivided squares. Small buildings, not more than 8 feet square, were often found standing alone apparently ; no trace of any other being detected in their immediate neighborhood. We now commenced to note another peculiar feature. Upon our right, the long slopes of protruding strata and débris formed promontories, extending out into the cafion. Upon these, and not more than 50 feet above the stream, we found frequent indications of their having been occupied by some sort of works, the foundations of which in every case were circular, with a deep depression in the center, and generally occur- ring in pairs, two side by side, ranging from 10 to 20 feet in diameter. There was no masonry of any kind visible, but thickly strewn all about any quantity of broken pottery. Above, were indications of habitations in the face of the cliff, but not marked enough to warrant further search. At those places where the trail ran high up, near the more precipitous portion of the bluff, we found remnants of stone walls, inclosing spaces of from 5 to 12 feet in length, in the cave-like crevices running along the seams. They were pretty well demolished, the stones undressed and imbedded in mud mortar. In many places, little niches or crevices in rock had been walled up into cupboard-like inclosures of about the size of a bushel-basket. We searched them eagerly, but they had all been despoiled before us. Nothing of any greater importance was found up to the time we made camp at night-fall. All that we had seen during the day was of exceeding interest, but came far short of our expecta- tions. Our camp for the night was among the stunted pifions and cedars immediately at the foot of the escarpment of the mesa ; its steep slopes and perpendicular faces rising nearly 1,000 feet above us. Quantities of broken pottery were strewn across the trail, to the edge of the stream, and as ruins of some sort generally followed, close attention was paid to the surroundings; but, with the exception of a small square inclosure of rough slabs of stone, set in the earth endwise, and indicating, possi- bly, a grave, nothing was found to reward our search. Just as the sun was sinking behind the western walls of the cation, one of the party de- seried far up the cliff what appeared to be a house, with a square wall, and apertures indicating two stories, but so far up that only the very sharpest eyes could define anything satisfactorily. We had no field- glass with the party, and to this fact is probably due the reason we had not seen others during the day in this same line; for there is no doubt that ruins exist throughout the entire length of the canon, far above and out of the way of ordinary observation. Cedar and pines also grow thickly along the ledges upon which they are built, hiding com-: pletely anything behind them. All that we did find were built of the same materials as the cliffs themselves, with but few, and then only the smallest apertures toward the cafion; the surface being dressed very smooth, and showing no lines of masonry, it was only upon the very closest inspection that the house could be separated from the cliff. The discovery of this one, so far above anything heretofore seen, inspired us immediately with the ambition to scale the height and explore it, although night was drawing on fast, and darkness would probably overtake us among the precipices, with a chance of being de- tained there all night. All hands started up, but only two persevered 372 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. to the end. The first 500 feet of ascent were over a long, steep slope of débris, overgrown with cedar; then came alternate perpendiculars and slopes. Immediately below the house was a nearly perpendicular ascent of 100 feet, that puzzled us for a while, and which we were only able to surmount by finding cracks and crevices into which fingers and toes could be inserted. From the little ledges occasionally found, and by stepping upon each other’s shoulders, and grasping tufts of yucca, one would draw himself up to another shelf, and then, by letting down a stick of cedar, or a hand, would assist the other. Soon we reached a slope, smooth and steep, in which there had been cut a series of steps, now weathered away into a series of undulating hummocks, by which it was easy to ascend, and without them, almost an impossibility. An- other short, steep slope, and we were under the ledge upon which was our house, (Fig. 12, Plate III.) It was getting quite dark, so we delayed no longer than to assure ourselves that it was all we hoped for, and to prospect a way up when we should return the next morning with the photographic outtit. “eis Bright and early, as soon as breakfast was dispatched, we commenced the ascent. Mexico, our little pack-mule, with the apparatus upon her back, by sharp tacks and lively scrambling over the rocks, was able to reach the foot of the precipice of which I have spoken above. Up this we hauled the boxes containing the camera and chemicals by the long ropes taken from the pack-saddle. One man was shoved up ahead, over the worst place, with the rope, and tying it to a tree, the others easily ascended. The house stood upon a narrow ledge, which formed the floor, and was overhung by the rocks of the cliff. The depth of this ledge was about 10 by 20 in length, and the vertical space between ledge and overhanging rock some fifteen feet. The house occupied the left-hand half as we face it; the rest being reserved as a sort of esplanade, a small portion of the wall remaining which cut it off from the narrow ledge running beyond. The edges of the ledge upon which the house stood were rounded off, so that its outside wall had to be built upon an incline of about forty-five degrees; the esplanade, too, had been extended by three abutments, built out flush with the walls of the house, upon the steeply-inclined slope, and giving support probably to a balustrade. The house itself, perched up in its little crevice like a swallow’s nest, consisted of two stories, with a total height of about 12 feet, leaving a space of two or three feet between the top of the walls and the over- hanging rock. We could not determine satisfactorily whether any other roof had ever existed or whether the walls ran up higher and joined the rock, but we incline to the first supposition. The ground-plan showed a front room about 6 by 9 feet in dimensions, and back of it two smaller ones, the face of the rock forming their back walls. These were each about 5 by 7 feet square. The left hand of the two back rooms projected beyond the front room in an L. The cedar beams, which had divided the house into two floors, were gone, with the exception of a few splintered pieces and ends remaining in the wall, just enough to show what they were made of. We had some little doubt as to whether the back rooms were divided in the same way, nothing remaining to prove the tact, excepting holes in the walls, at the same height as the beams in the other portion. In the lower front room are two apertures, one serving as a door, and opening out upon the esplanade, about 20 by 30 inches in size, the lower sill 24 inches from the floor; and the other a small outlook, about 12 inches square, up near the ceiling, and looking over the cafion beneath. In the upper story, a window corresponding in ‘SOONVI, HHL FO NONV()) AHL NI ‘SN OH-SAITO ] i, y a Ny ae Yi yf Plate 1V. JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN 8. W. COLORADO. . = 373 size, shape, and position to the door below, commands an extended view down the canon. The upper lintel of this window was of small, straight sticks of cedar, of about the size of one’s finger, laid close together, the small stones of the masonry resting upon them. Directly opposite this window is a similar one, opening into a large reservoir, or cistern, the upper walls of which come nearly to the top of the window. This is semicircular, inclosing the angle formed by the side wall of the house against the rock, with an approximate capacity of about two and a half hogsheads. From the window, and extending down to the bot- tom of the reservoir, are a series of cedar pegs, about a foot apart, enabling the occupants to easily reach the bottom. The entire con- struction of this little human eyrie displays wonderful perseverance, ingenuity, and some taste. FPerpendiculars were well regarded, and the angles carefully squared. The stones of the outer rooms or front were all squared and smoothly faced, but were not laid in regular courses, aS they are not uniform in size, ranging from 15 inches in length and 8 in thickness down to very small ones. About the corners and the windows, considerable care and judgment were evident in the overlapping of the joints, so that all was held firmly together. The only sign of weakness is in the bulging outward of the front wall, pro- duced by the giving way or removal of the floor-beams. The back portion is built of rough stone, firmly cemented together. The mortar is compact and hard, a grayish-white, resembling Jime, but cracking all over. All the interstices between the larger stones were carefully chinked in with small chips of the same material. The partitions were of the same character as the smooth wall outside, both presenting some- what the appearance of having been rubbed down smooth after they were laid. The apertures, from one room to another, are small, corre- sponding in size and position to those outside. Most peculiar, however, is the dressing of the walls of the upper and lower front rooms, both being plastered with a thin layer of firm adobe cement of about an eighth of an inch in thickness, and colored a deep maroon-red, with a dingy white band 8 inches in breadth, running around floor, sides, and ceiling. In some places it has peeled away, exposing a smoothly-dressed surface of rock. No signs of ornamentation, other than the band al- luded to, were visible. The floor, which was covered to a depth of 2 or 3 inches with dust, dirt, and the excrement of small animals, had been evened up with a cement resembling that in the walls. The back rooms were half-filled with rocky débris from roof and cliff. While busied with my negatives, the others had prospected the ledge in opposite directions, coming upon ample evidence of its having been quite thickly peopled. Ruins of half a dozen lesser houses were found near by, but all in such exposed situations as to be quite dilapidated. Some had been crushed by the overhanging wall falling upon them, .nd others had lost their foot-hold and tumbled down the precipice. One little house in particular, at the extremity of this ledge, about fifty rods below the one described above, was especially unique in the daring of its site, filling the mind with amazement at the temerity of the builders and the extremity to which they must have been pushed. Careful views of this having been secured so as to show as well as possible its almost complete inaccessibility, we felt impelled to hurry on to new developments. Apparatus was carefully lowered to the patiently-wait- ing mule, and adjusted to the pack-saddle, then, mounting our own animals, we pushed on down the cafion, which now opened out into quite a valley, side cafons opening in from either hand, adding much to the space. Every quarter-mile, at the most, we came upon evidences 374 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. of former habitations, similar to those already described; tne greater majority occurring in the level bottoms and on the low spurs of the escarpment. Two or three miles below the house in Fig. 12, we discovered a wall standing in the thick brush upon the opposite side of the river. Con- siderable difficulty was experienced in crossing; in some places having to cut our way through the entangling vines with our belt-knives, and then, when the bed of the stream was reached, had to follow it some distance before an opportunity occurred to emerge. The walls before us were a portion of an old tower, (see Fig.1, Plate _,) in the midst of a group of more dimly marked ruins or foundations, extending some distance, in each direction from it. As seen in the figure referred to, the tower consists of two lines of walls, the space between them divided into apartments, with a single circular room in the center. The outside diameter of all is 25 feet, that of the inner circle 12* feet, and as the walls were respectively 18 and 12 inches in thickness, left a space of 4 feet for the smal! rooms. This outer circle was evidently divided into six equal apartments, but only the divisions marked in the diagram could be distinguished. In the places where they should have occurred, the walls are so broken down and covered with débris as to render all details indistinguishable. Where the walls are standing, they show small window-like doors opening into the inner circle. The highest portion of the inner wall is now not more than 8 feet, and of the outer about 15. From the amount of débris, it could not have been much higher—not more than 20 feet at the most. The space between the walls is filled with débris, while outside there is very little, except where the wall is totally ruined. The stones of which this tower was constructed are irregular in size and shape, but with the outer face dressed to a uniform surface, and of the same average size as those already described. The mortar and “chinking” had been worn out entirely from the more exposed portions, giving the wall the appearance of having been dry-laid; but upon pull- ing away some of the stones to a little depth, they were found to have been well cemented. ; Passing on down the cation, not stopping now to notice the more ordi- nary forms of ruins, we passed the mouths of numerous side-cafions, down which come great freshets during the rainy season, gouging out deep arroyos, and strewing the surface with the collected débris of pition and cedar, sage-brush and cacti. About the mouth of Coal Caiion, par- ticularly, the whole surface of the “ wash” was covered with lumps of fine-looking bituminous coal, as though a thousand coal-carts had trav- - eled that way with their tail-boards out. We camped at sunset at what our guide called the Rattlesnake Bend, within a half dozen miles of the outlet of the canon. We had not dis- covered any more of the high cliff-houses during the day; but there is no doubt that, if we had had a good field-glass with us, many more might have been found along the crevices near the summit of the escarpment. To have verified our .suppositions by a personal inspection would have involved a great deal of labor, and more time than we could have spared from our very scanty store. In the vicinity of our camp, the caton changed much in appearance; instead of the long slope of talus capped * These dimensions were estimated from the photograph after leaving the locality, not having the time or appliances for accurate measurement while there. The same ruin has since been examined by Mr. Holmes and accurately measured, with the follow- ing results: Diameter over all 43 feet; of the inner circle, 25 feet. Mr. Holmes also makes out ten apartments instead of six. Bulletin No. 1, vol. 2, p. 11. Plate V. JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN S. W. COLORADO. 375 by a perpendicular ledge, we have here a perpendicular ledge first, of 200 or 300 feet, and then a long receding bench, back to the higher mesa beyond. Close to our camp was one of the little towers that occur quite fre- quently, about 10 feet in diameter, and now some 8 feet in height, with the inside half-filled with the debris from the walls. Half a mile below, in the vertical face of rock, and at a height of from 50 to 100 feet from the trail, were a number of little nest-like habitations. Fig. 5, Plate I, illustrates one of them, and their general character. Communication with the outside world was from above to a small window-like door, not ‘showing in the sketch. Two small apertures furnish a lookout over the valley. The walls are as firm and solid as the rocks upon which they are built. The stones are more regular in size than any noticed here- tofore, but smaller. The chinking-in of small chips of stone is notice- ably neat and perfect on the inside. This is not a commodious dwelling ; 15 feet would span its length, and 6 its height, while in depth it is not more than 5 feet. Near by, upon a low ledge, and readibly accessible from below, is a string of five or six houses, evidently communicating, mere kennels compared with some others, made by walling up the deep cave-like crevices in the sandstone. The same hands built them that lived in the better houses; the masonry being very similar, especially the inside chinking, which was perfect, and gave the walls a very neat appearance. Fig.8 of Plate II is an example of the tenacity of the mor- tar; the view being of one of the line of little houses just spoken of. In this case, a portion of the ledge upon which the house stands has -become separated from the cliff, carrying a portion of one of the build- ings with it; and although torn away from the remaining wall, and thrown over ’at a considerable angle, yet it remains perfectly firm and unshaken. Scratched into the face of the cliff which contains these houses are various inscriptions, one of which is depicted i in Fig. 6 of Plate I. As they are not cut in very deeply, and in some places mere scratches, it is very doubtful whether they are COs ONE neous with the houses them- selves. Two or three miles farther, and the cafion changes in feature again ; the highest level of the mesa coming forward and towering over the val- ley with a thousand feet of altitude; the bottom-lands widening out to a half and three-quarters of a milein breadth. Cottonwood and willow fringe the meandering stream in pleasant groves, while the dead level of the valley is heavily carpeted with a dense growth of artemisia and cacti. Everything is dry, dusty, and barren; the stream itself losing in volume, and becoming more turbid. Fig. 13 of Plate III represents in outline the characteristics of the canon, or valley rather, at this point. In the high bluff, on the right hand in the sketch, are some of the most curious and unique little habitations yet seen. While jogging along under this bluff, fully 1,000 feet in height, and admiring its bold outlines and brilliant coloring, one of our party, sharper-eyed than the rest, descried, away up near the top, perfect little houses, sandwiched in among the erevices of the horizontal strata of the rock of which the bluff was composed. While busy photographing, two of the party started up to scale the height, and inspect this lofty abode. By pene- trating a side-cafion some little ways, a gradual slope was found, that carried them to the summit of the bluff. Now, the trouble was to get down to the house, and this was accomplished only by crawling along a ledge of about 20 inches in width, and not tall enough for more than a creeping position. In momentary peril of life, for the least mistake 376 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. would precipitate him down the whole of this dizzy height, our adven- turous seeker after knowledge crept along the ledge until the broader platform was reached, upon which the most perfect of the houses alluded to stands. The ledge ended with the house, which is built out flush with its outer edge. This structure resembles in general features the cliff houses already spoken of. The masonry is as firm and solid as when first constructed, the inside being finished with exceptional care. In width it is about 5 feet in front, the side-wall running back in a semi- circular sweep; in length 15, and in height 7 feet. The only aperture was both door and window, about 20 by 30 inches in diameter. In Fig. 7 of Plate II, is a desigh of this aerial habitation as it appeared from below, its uniqueness consisting in its position on the face of the bluff. To the casual observer, it would not be noticed once in fifty times in passing, so similar to the rocks between which it is plastered does it appear from our position on the trail. A short distance to the right, and on the ledge above, is another building of somewhat ruder con- struction, but with corners square, and the walls truncated. Referring again to Plate Ill and Fig. 13, the position of these houses, and also of the one in Fig. 12, can be seen in the dark heavy lines near the summit, just above the most precipitous portion of the bluff, gener- ally at a height of from 600 to 800 feet above the level of the canon. This was the last cliffhouse we noticed in this canon. From the first to the last, all that were upon an elevation, however slight, were on the western side of the cafion, with either doors or windows facing east, overlooking the opposite bluffs. We could not find even the faintest vestige of ruins or houses upon the eastern side. Those built low down on the level land did not hold to the same rule, being scattered indis- criminately upon either bank of the stream. Proceeding down the broad open cafion over the now very easy trail, we espied upon the opposite side of the stream a tower of apparently greater dimensions than the ones noticed above. The crossing was execrable; but, forcing a way through the tangled undergrowth to the stream, a way was found out of it to the ruin some forty rods back; (see Figs. 2 and 3.) The tower only remained; this is circular, 12 feet in diameter, and now about 20 in height, the wall being about 16 inches in thickness. Facing the valley northward is a window-like aperture, about 18 by 24 inches in size; the lower lintel some 7 or 8 feet above the base. The stones of which it is constructed are uniform in size and angle. Being so entirely exposed to atmospheric influences, the mortar has worn away entirely from between the outer layers. In- side, the débris was heaped up nearly to the window. JBy referring to Fig. 3, it will be seen that a rectangular structure, divided into two apartments, each about 15 feet square, joins thetower. Only one corner of three or four courses of masonry remains, Shown in the sketch by the shaded lines ; the rest being indicated by mound-like lines of loose débris, in which but few stones remain; from which fact, and also that the center of each square is considerably depressed below the surrounding surface, it is probable that they are underground apartments, their roofs not reaching the window midway in the tower. It would be ex- tremely interesting to excavate upon these old foundations; for there is no doubt that many interesting relics, and possibly some clue to their manner of life, might be found. Our time, however, was too limited to admit of the experiment, much as we desired the information it might furnish. In the same neighborhood stands a corner and a portion of a doorway of a house, (see Hig. 4), showing considerable care and skill in its con- ‘OWTOW WHL 10 NONVO AHL NT ‘SONTITHMA HAVO @ Nal i la MM N \ al S i 2 ah i Plate VI. ‘ : "JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN 8S. W. COLORADO. Blut struction, and what we had not noticed before, the doorway facing east is a little over 6 feet in height, tall enough to enable a person to stand up in it. With these, we finished our observations of the ruins in the Catton de los Mancos. We were now at its mouth, the mesa ending as abruptly as it began: the river turning well westward and following approxi- mately the course of the San J uan, joins it near the south western cor- ner of the Territory, at the foot of El Late. Striking off to the right from the stream, and following close under the bold escarpment of the mesa, we could still discern, aS we bore away, group after group of standing walls and mounds, extending down the valley into the broad open plain of the San Juan. It was with many regrets that we turned our backs upon these relics of a forgotten race. Our trail now lay over the peculiar marly earths lying under the sandstones of the table-land, soft, friable, and dusty, without vege- tation, our mules’ feet sinking into it to the fetloeks at each step. At our right, portions of the mesa have become separated and weathered into peculiar pinnaeled turrets. One particularly stands out detached some fifty rods; the trail passing between it and the mesa, forming an old and well-known landmark on the old Spanish trail from Santa Fé to Salt Lake. A little farther on, and to the right, is another mass, bearing a curious resemblance to a matron standing with a child beside her, the alternating bands of red and white strata marking off the fig- ure into its different proportions and into flounces and trimmings. Away to the south and west, over the broad plains of the San Juan, where roam the great flocks of ‘sheep and goats belonging to the Nava- jos, the Callabassas Mountains rear themselves into distinct view ; while between them and the river, a great cristone thrusts itself up out of the earth to a height of at least 2,000 feet, as veritable a needle as was ever christened such. Striking into this old trail, we bore around to the western side of the Mest, and, near nightfall, arrived at the extensive group of ruins about “Aztec Spring s,”” lying out upon the northeastern flanks of El Late, and close upon the divide between the waters of the Mancos and the McElImo. It was our intention to have camped here and worked up the surroundings at our leisure; but, very much to the surprise of our guide, the spring was perfectly dry, not even the least moisture remain- ing to tempt us to dig for it, for others before us had dug to the depth of three or four feet with no reward for their labor. At its best, it could have been but a very insignificant source of supply; the surplus oozing away through a few yards of wiry grass into the dry sand. The basin of the spring lay in quite a depression, that had evidently been excavated for the purpose. A well may have existed; for it cannot be reasonably supposed that the very large settlements which at one time existed in the neighborhood were supplied from it in anywhere near its present condition. The nearest running water was 12 or 13 miles away, and none of the surroundings indicated that this spring ever had any very considerable volume of water. Immediately adjoining the spring, on the right, as we face it from below, is the ruin of a great massive structure of some kind, about 100 feet square in exterior dimen- Sions; a portion only of the wall upon the northern face remaining in its original position. The débris of the ruin now forms a great mound of crumbling rock, from 12 to 20 feet in height, overgrown with arti- misia, but showing clearly, however, its rectangular structure, adjusted approximately to the four points of the compass. Inside this square is a circle, about 60 feet in diameter, deeply depressed in the center. The 37%8 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. space between the square and the circle appeared, upon a hasty examin- ation, to have been filled in solidly with a sort of rubble-masonry. Cross- walls were noticed in two places; but whether they were to strengthen the walls or divided apartments could only be conjectured. That portion of the outer wall remaining standing is some 40 feet in length and 15 in height. The stones were dressed to a uniform size and finish. Upon the same level as this ruin, and extending back some distance, were grouped line after line of foundations and mounds, the great mass of which is of stone, but not one remaining upon another. All the subdi- visions are plainly marked, so that one might, with a little care, count every room or building in the settlement. Below the above group, some two hundred yards distant, and communicating by indistinet lines of _ débris, is another great wall, inclosing a space of about 200 feet square. Only a small portion is well enough preserved to enable us to judge, with any accuracy, as to its character and dimensions; the greater por- tion consisting of large ridges flattened down so much as to measure some 30 or more feet across the base, and 5 or 6 feet in height. This better-preserved portion is some 50 feet in length, 7 or 8 feet in height, and 20 feet thick, the two exterior surfaces of well-dressed and evenly- laid courses, and the center packed in solidly with rubble-masonry, look- ing entirely different from those rooms which had been filled with debris, though it is difficult to assign any reason for its being so massively constructed. It was only a portion of a system extending out into the plains, of much less importance, however, and now only of indistin- guishable mounds. The town built about this spring is nearly asquare mile in extent, the larger and mere enduring buildings in the center, while all about are scattered and grouped the remnants of smaller struc- tures comprising the suburbs. It was sunset by the time we had secured the photographic views necessary to illustrate the leading features of this group. A camp had to be found, a thing very easily done in most localities, but here one very important constituent was wanting. Sage-brush and grass abounded, but water was sadly deficient. However, by good luck, as we might call it, a few pools of the grateful fluid were found in the nearly dry bed of an old stream, about four miles distant from the ruins. This pretense of a stream known locally as the McElmo, flows westwardly into the San Juan; and is for the greater portion of the year but a deep dry gulch. A short distance above our camp, and upon the top of the mesa, which, at this point, is not more than 25 feet above the valley, we found a tower very similar to that on the Mancos (see Fig. 1), but con- siderably larger, and surrounded by a much greater settlement. It is about 50 feet in diameter, and, like the Mancos one, double-walled, the space between the two about 6 feet in width, and subdivided into small apartments by cross-walls pierced with communicating doors or windows. Immediately surrounding this tower is a great mass, of which it is the center, of scattered heaps of stone débris, arranged in rectangular order, each little square with a depressed center, suggesting large sub- divided buildings, similar to the great community-dwellings of the Pue- blos and Mogquis and the old ruins of the Chaco. Upon the southeast corner of this group, and upon the very edge of the mesa, are the re- mains of another smaller tower, and below it, founded upon the bottom of a small cafion, which ran up at right angles to the McHImo, is a portion of a heavy wall rising to the base of this lesser tower. This group covers a space of about one hundred yards square; while ad- joining it on the mesa is group after group upon the same general plan, Plate VII. x WatTCH-TOWER, IN THE CANON OF THE MCELMO. JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN S. W. COLORADO. 379 a great central tower and smaller surrounding buildings. They cover the whole breadth and length of the land; and, turn which way we would, we stumbled over the old mounds and into the cellars, as we might call them, of these truly aborigines. The same painted, glazed, and otherwise ornamented ware, of which I have spoken, accompanies each settlement, and we were continually picking up new designs and forms. | Starting down the cafion, which gradually deepened as the table-land rose above us, we found upon each hand very old and faint vestiges of the homes of a forgotten people, but could give them no more atten- tion than merely noting their existence. Half a dozen miles down, and we came upon several little nest-like dwellings, very similar to those in Figs. 5 and 7, but only about 40 or 50 feet above the valley. Two miles farther, and we came upon the tower shown in Fig. 9, standing upon the summit of a great square block of sandstone, some forty feet in height, detached from the bluff back of it. The building, upon its summit, is square, with apertures like windows upon two faces, looking east and north, and very much ruined, but still standing in some places about 15 feet above the rock on which itis built. At the base of the rock is a wall running about it, a small portion only.remaining, the rest thrown down and covered with débris from the house above. About here we crossed the boundary-line into Utah, and then, two or three miles farther, we came upon a very interesting group. The valley, at this place, widens out considerably, and in the center stands a solitary butte of dark-red sandstone, upon a perfectly bare and smooth floor of the same, dipping down: to the center of the valley at a slight inclination. The butte, a remnant of a former mesa, worn down by time to its present dimensions, is about 100 feet in height and 300 in length; an irregular mass, seamed and cracked, and gradually going the way its former surroundings have traveled. Running about its base, in irregular lines, are remains of walls, but whether for defense or habitation would be hard now to determine. Af the back of the rock, a view of which is had in Fig. 10, are the remains of two quite consid- erable walls, one above the other; the lower portion—one corner only of a square building, all traces of the remaining portions having entirely disappeared—seemed to serve as a sort of approach to the larger build- ing above, the top of which came up nearly to the summit of the rock. It is about 18 feet in length and 12 feet in height. Portions only of the side-walls, connecting it with the rock, remain. The stones of which it is built are very uniform in size, angle, and finish, more so than any yet seen, but, like all similarly-exposed buildings, the mortar is washed or worn away entirely from between the outer layers; farther in, it is intact as usual. In front is a single aperture of about 18 by 24 inches, whether for door or window would be hard to guess. The only access to the top of the rock was through the window of this house. On top are evidences of some sort of mason-work, that covers it from one end to the other. All the irregular gaps and crevices have been walled up, probably to make an even surface. But few of the stones remain in position; in one or two places, three or four courses, all the rest are thrown down and scattered. 3 In the rear, about fifty yards removed, are other ruins belonging to the group, surrounding the rock. The better-preserved portions consist of a square tower, with one round corner, about 12 feet in Ciameter, and upon the lowest side—which stands in a dry run—about 20 feet in height. The walls are 18 inches in thickness with no signs of apertures. Adjoining this ruin is another, but so much thrown down as to be almost 380 GECLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. unrecognizable ; and between these and the rock were circular depres- sions of some considerable depth, indicating either subterranean apart- ments or reservoirs. No water could be found anywhere in the neigh- borhood. The dry bed of the McElmo was fully a mile distant, in which water occurs during the winter and spring only. Aside from the interest attaching to the ruins themselves, there are thrown about this rock and its surroundings the romance and charm of legendary association. The story runs thus, as given us by our guide, and very excellently rendered by Mr. Ingersoll, in his article to the New York Tribune of November 3: Formerly, the aborigines inhabited all this country we had been over as far west as the headwaters of the San Juan, as far north as the Rio Dolores, west some distance into Utah, and south and southwest throughout Arizona and on down into Mexico. They had lived there from time immemorial-—since the earth was a small island, which augmented as its inhabitants multiplied. They cultivated the valley, fashioned what- ever utensils and tools they needed very neatly and handsomely out of clay and wood and stone, not knowing any of the useful metals; built their homes and kept their flocks and herds in the fertile river-bottoms, and worshiped the sun. They were an eminently peaceful and prosperons people, living by agriculture rather than by the chase. About a thousand years ago, however, “they were visited by sav- age strangers from the North, whom they treated hospitably. Soon these visits became more frequent and annoying. Then their troublesome neighbors—ances- tors of the present Utes—began to forage upon them, and, at last, to massacre them and devastate their farms; ; so, to save their lives at least, they built houses high upon the cliffs, where they could store food and hide away till the raiders left. But one summer the invaders did not go back to their mountains as the people expected, but brought their families with them and settled down. So, driven from their homes and lands, starving in their little niches on the high cliffs, they could only’ steal away during the night, and wander across the cheerless uplands. To one who has traveled these steppes, such a flight seems terrible, and the mind hesitates to pic- ture the suffering of the sad fugitives. At the cristone they halted, and probably found friends, for the rocks and caves are full of the nests of these human wrens and swallows. Here they collected, erected stone fortifications and watch-towers, dug reservoirs in the rocks to hold a supply of water, which in all cases is precarious in this latitude, and once more stood at bay. Their foes came, and for one long month fought and were beaten back, and returned day after day to the attack as merciless and inevitable as the tide. Meanwhile, the families of the defenders were evacuating and moving south, and bravely did their protectors shield them till they were all safely a hundred miles away. The besiegers were beaten back and went away. But the narrative tells us that the hollows of the | rocks were filled to the’ brim with the mingled blood of conquerors and conquered, and red veins of it ran down into the cafion. It was such a victory as they could not afford to gain again, and they were glad, when the long fight was over, to follow their wives and little ones to the south. There, in the deserts ‘of Arizona, on well-nigh un- approachable isolated bluffs, they built new towns, and their few descendants, the Moquis, live in them to this day, preserving more carefully and purely the history and veneration of their forefathers than their skill or wisdom. It was from one of their old men that this traditional sketch was obtained. The bare floor of nearly white sandstone, upon which the butte stands, is stained in gory streaks and blotches by the action of an iron constit- uent in the rocks of another portion of the adjoining blufis, and this feature probably gave rise to the legend. Half a mile back, or north from this historic butte, is a group of small cave-houses. A long bloff line, about 100 feet in height, of alternating bands of red and white sandstone, has, along a line of its upper strata, quite a number of shal- low caves, in which are snug little retreats, securely walled in, the masonry perfect and substantial. Along the top of the bluff are traces of old walls, but now well-nigh obliterated. While passing the mouth of a wide side-cation, coming in from the right, a tall, black-looking tower caught our eye, perched upon the very brink of the mesa, overlooking the valley. Tying our riding-animals at the foot, and leading the pack-mule, with photographic kit, we soon - Plate VII. | \ i) pail a tCINS IN TITEH CANON OF THE HoOvVENWEEP, U7TAH. JACKSON. ] ANCIENT RUINS IN §. W. COLORADO. 36k) struck into an old trail, worn deep into the rocks, winding and twisting among great bowlders, and overgrown and obstructed with rank growth of sage, cedar, and cacti. In its day, the trail had been a good one; now it was anything but such. Bad as it was, however, it was the only way to the summit, and we were thankful for it. Skirting the edge of the mesa a few yards, we came to the tower, the trail passing back of it and on up toa higher level. A huge block of sandstone has rolled down from the escarpment of the mesa above, lodging upon the very brink of a bench midway between top and bottom, and upon this the tower is built, so that from below both appear as one. They are of the same diameter, about 10 feet, and some 18 feet in height, equally divided be- tween rock and tower. In construction, it is similar to those already described, of single wall. It was evidently an outpost or watch-tower, guarding the approach to a large settlement upon er beyond the mesa lying above it. From this point we now struck out for another group of ruins lying upon a nameless stream, some eight or ten miles farther west. Four or five miles we followed the McElmo down, the trail good, the whole surface covered with a dense growth of artemisia and groves” of cedar and pifion, with cottonwoods fringing the dry stream. Branch- ing off at right angles, crossing the heads of two cations which opened out quickly into great gorges, and then descending into a valley densely covered with greasewood, we came upon the ruins we were in search of. Through the valley ran a "deep gulch, a narrow thread of warm, brackish water appearing at intervals in its bed, and gathering into pools in basins a short distance below the ruins. In Fig. 11 of Plate III, is a sketch of a ground-plan of the “ city,” showing its general arrangement. The stream referred to, and shown — in the sketch, sweeps the foot of a rocky sandstone ledge, some 40 or 50 feet in height, upon which is built the highest and better-preserved por- tion of the settlement. Its semicircular sweep conforms to the ledge; each little house of the outer circle being built close upon its edge. Be. low the level of these upper houses some 10 or 12 feet, and within the semicircular sweep, are seven distinctly-marked depressions, each sepa- rated from the other by rocky débris, the lower or first series probably of small community-houses. Upon either flank, and founded upon rocks, are buildings similar in size and in other respects to the large ones on the line above. As paced off, the upper or convex surface measured 100 yards in length. Each little apartment is small and narrow, averaging 6 feet in width and 8 feet in length, the walls being 18 inches in thick- ness. Thestones of which the entire group is built are dressed to nearly uniform size and laid in mortar. A peculiar feature here is in the round corners, one at least appearing upon nearly every little house. They are turned with considerable care and skill, being true curves solidly bound together. With this last our observations of these interesting relics came to an end. Our trip was short and rapid, and instituted in the first place, as I have said, in quest of the picturesque, ‘and we found it. For a much more complete and faithful exposition of this interesting subject, the reader is referred to a series of photographic views from which the ac- companying illustrations are drawn. I cannot close without extending thanks to Capt. John Moss, of La Plata, our volunteer guide, who accompanied us over the route compris- ing the ruins. To his accurate knowledge of their locality, and the best way to reach them, as well as of the language of the Indians, is due much of the success of the trip. t) He Re ee ted no a ay Pate ZOOLOGY. REPORT OF ERNEST INGERSOLL. 383 pe ie a0 REPORT ON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRI- TORIES, 1874. By ERNEST INGERSOLL, ZOOLOGIST. New York, March 1, 1876. Siz: I herewith forward the subjoined report of zodlogical work done during the season of 1874 in connection with the survey under your direction, a preliminary account of bien, was published by you in the Bulletin of the Survey, second series, No. 2, under date of } May 14, 1875; and I remain, with high respect, yours, ete., ERNEST INGERSOLL, Zoologine Dr. F. V. HAYDEN, U. S. Geologist, Washington, D. CU. The material herein reported upon consists of two collections, chiefly of mollusks: one made by Mr. E. A. Barber, of West Chester, Pa., in the northwestern part of the Territory ; and the other made by the writer ip connection with the Photographic Division of the Survey during July, - August, and September of 1874, in which he was assisted by Master Frank Smart, of Washington. Mr. Barber was attached to Mr. Marvine’s Topographical Party, and collected plants and shells in North Park, along Bear and White Rivers, and at the White River agency, where he was engaged in making baro- metric observations for several weeks. His collection is not large, but is interesting in that it exhibits several species which, I did not find, and also includes additional examples of the new Microph ysa, Which was described by Mr. Bland from my specimens. My own route lay from Denver west into Middle Park, thence south up the valley of the Blue to Hoosier Pass, leading the party into South Park, from which we crossed over to the Arkansas, and thence through Poncha Pass into San Luis Park, and across to Saguache. From here the road led west to the Los Pinos Indian agency, and then southwest through Antelope Park to Baker’s Park, in the high mountains. At this point, the camp was stationed; and leaving Mr. Smart to col- lect here, 1 accompanied Mr. Jackson on a side-trip of nearly three weeks’ duration, made southwest into the valley of the Rio San Juan, at the extreme corner of the Territory. On our return trip from Baker’s Park, we followed the Rio Grande to Del Norte, thence struck across the San Luis plain to the “ sand-hills,” through Mosea Pass, Huerfano Park, Wet Mountain Valley, and Oak Creek, and pay came to Canon City, where I left the party. Collections were made at nearly every camp on ile whole route, and that they do not make a greater aggregate is due to the inexperience of the writer, the haste with which the party moved, and not a little to the comparative scarcity of those objects in which he happened to take the most interest, and most desired to have completely represented. In such cases, in the absence of specimens or affirmative evidence, a cer- 385 25 : 386 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. tain amount of negative evidence appears, which may be of value in future deductions. J append a list of the localities, remarking upon ele- vation and so forth, at which collections were made. The absence of any camp, as Nos. 12 316, from this list, does not necessarily imply that I was idle, but that nothing of importance reached home from that locality. LIST OF LOCALITIES FROM WHICH SPECIMENS WERE BROUGHT HOME. Camp 9: Hot Sulphur Springs, Middle Park, July 31 to August 5. Ele- vation 7,125 feet. A broad, open valley, containing hot and cold springs of various mineral- waters. Camp 9-10: Grand River Valley, August 5. About ie 500 feet. Grassy prairies and river-terraces of coarse gravel covered. with sage-brush, with but little timber, except along some portions of the river- banks. Camp 10: Mouth of Blue River, August 6-8. About 7,500 feet. High river-terraces. Cottonwoods and “alders along the river and about springs in the neighboring hills. Camp 10-11: Blue River Valley, August 8. 7,500-8,500 feet. Same general characteristics. Camp 11: Ute Peak, Blue River Valley, August 8. About 8,500 feet. Springy ground by a cold streamlet, with abundance of small timber and luxuriant herbage. Many shells were collected on a wooded hill 2,000 feet higher than the camp. Camp 17: Head of San Luis Valley, August 14. About 8,000 feet. Luxuriant grass and herbage; large pines and spruces. Water in plenty. CAMP 17-18: San Luis Valley, August 15. 7,600-7,200 feet. Distance thirty miles, mostly Artemisia plains, very dry and dusty. The weather, which had been rainy, now began to be clearer, with hot noondays and cool nights. . CamP 18: Springs, Saguache, August 16. 7,700 feet. Edge of dry plains. The springs come copiously from under a volcanic bluff, and flow into a marsh, which drains into Saguache Creek. Camp 19: Saguache Creek, August 16. 7,748 feet. Five miles beyond Camp 18, on the banks of the above stream, which is a tributary of the Rio Grande and waters a fertile region. Thousands of cattle are herded hereabouts. Camp 20: Twenty miles west of Saguache, August 17. About 9,000 feet. Volcanic caion. Camp 21: Los Pinos Indian agency, August 19-24. 9,290 feet. A fer- tile plain watered by two creeks, and surrounded by hills, affording plenty of rain. Thecamp was placed among a grove of various trees by a little rocky stream. We remained a week at this point; but my time was largely occupied in studying the traits of the Ute Indians, whose southern agency is here. CAMP 22: White Harth Creek, August 24. About 8,000 feet. A deep ravine, which had been recently burned over. Camp 23: Timber-line; divide between the Gunnison and Rio Grande, Au- eust 25. About 10,000 feet. Timber mostly small; no pines. Found many mollusks in the deep wet grass early in the mornin g. Camp 24: Clear Creek, August 26. About 9,300 feet. A tributary of the Rio Grande, emptying in Antelope Park. The banks were here cov- ered with a riotous growth of brush and weeds. Camp 25: Jennison’s Ranch, August 27-28. About 9,600 feet. On the Rio Grande, between Antelope and Baker’s Parks. Fertile alluvial INGERSOLL.] ZOOLOGY—LIST OF LOCALITIES. 387 bottoms, with plenty of timber on the hills. Clear, with frosty nights. Camp 26: Howardville, Baker’s Park, August 29-September 23. 9,700 feet. A deep valley among immense trachyte mountains. Abundance of timber (spruce and the like, and aspen), bushes and plants. Frosty nights, and snow toward the last of our stay. Cunningham Gulch is a deep caiion near by, on the high, perpendicular side of which, along trails leading to silver-mines, I found active mol- lusks and insects at an altitude of fully 11,000 feet. Camp D: Cascade Creek; head of the Animas Valley, September 3. About 8,000 feet. Southern slope of high sierras. A beautiful region in all respects. This and the four following localities were on the _ side-trip into the San Juan Valley. Camp HE: Animas Park, September 4. About 6,600 feet. Lower down the river, where the broad bottoms are somewhat cultivated. Camp H-F: Between the Rio Animas and Rio La Plata, September 4. $,000 feet. Half-way we passed a great pond, surrounded with rushes; the resort of innumerable wild fowl, and inhabited by a great variety of fresh-water life. Observe the note to Helisoma trivolvis, Camp F: Rio La Plata mining-camp, September 5-8. About 7,500 feet. Collections made in dense damp groves of evergreen and de- ciduous trees. Camp K: Hovvenweep, Utah, September 13. About 4,500 feet. A low, | dry ravine some twenty miles into Utah, in a desolate mesa country, named by us Hovvenweep, from two Indian words meaning deserted canon. Only gnarled cedars, sage-bush, and greasewood grow there. The valley must be subject to floods. Camp P: Head of Mineral Creek, September 19. About 10,000 feet. The sources of a mountain-torrent draining into Baker’s Park. Camp 28-29: Saint Mary's Lake, Antelope Park, September 25. 9,300 feet. A beautiful lake without inlet or outlet, cn the northeastern - Side of the park, surrounded by rocky cliffs. Inhabited by some pe- culiar shells and hosts of water-fowl, while its shores are the resort of large herds of antelope. Camp 30: Rio Grande above Del Norte, September 28. 7,560 feet. The camp was ina low spot by asluggish stream. Camp 32: Lakes, San Luis Valley, September 20. About 7,500 feet. These lakes are most of them dry in September, and all! the shells I found were dead on the beach. They are frequented by innumerable wild geese and ducks, which are tormented by the many large gulls which make the lakes their home. The waters are alkaline, and the whole region is white with saline deposits and nearly barren. It will be observed that all of these localities are in Colorado except Camp K. GENERAL ACCOUNT OF THE WORK. Attention was chiefly given to fresh-water invertebrate life, though the results were not very satisfactory. At the springs near Saguache, leeches were found, pronounced by Prof. A. E. Verrill to be Aulostomum lacustre, var. tigris, Verrill, and Clepsine modesta, Verrill, both of which have been found heretofore in the same region. A more thorough search, had it been possible, would probably have revealed additional forms, as the locality was extremely - favorable. For crustacea a sharp lookout was kept, but only the following spe- cies were certainly seen: two amphipods, Gammarus robustus, Smith, 388 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. and Hyallela inermis, Smith, both of which were described in the Report for 1873, which inhabited the above springs in great abundance. From the pond mentioned between camps E and F a small crab was brought home, which Prof. S. I. Smith pronounced to be a true marine form, be- longing to the Astacidow. That this is a survivor of the period, probably comparatively recent, when this pond was a salt-water marsh, is sup- ported by the astonishing fact that two specimens of a young Trun- catella and well-preserved fragments of an Arca were found on the muddy shores. It would be ‘of great interest to know whether the exuberant vegetation of the pond retains any traces of marine plants. The insects were not methodically collected, and but few, chiefly my- riapods, which are very abundant in the mountains, were brought home. A small collection of spiders consists of ten species of ARANE At (Dras- side 2, Lycosa 5, Attus 1, Thomisus 2) and four species of PHALANGE At (Phalangein 3, Gonyleptes 1). All of these species are believed by Mr. HE. H. Emerton, who has examined them, to be undescribed, though in part identical with forms previously collected in Colorado. "A descrip- tion is not attempted herewith, because the material is not at hand for proper study and comparison. Further collections and observation in this branch of entomology are particularly desirable from the mountain- ous regions of all the Territories. Land and fresh-water shells comprise the largest part of the material brought home. They were made a specialty; and the fact that next to nothing of this class had ever been reported from Colorado, and but lig- tle was ; known at all-of the Mollusea of the Rocky Mountain region, was deemed a sufficient excuse for what might seem too exclusive attention to this department of natural history, which does not present to the careless mind such striking attractions as the study of the higher ver- tebrates. No fishes were collected, although numerous aulempts were made. The majority of our time was spent where they seemed to be entirely absent, or So extremely scarce that, although all were interested in the capture of certain species, not a trout eraced our table during the whole trip. Some snakes and frogs were secured at Hot Springs, Middle Park, and a number of Amblystoma seen for the first and last time. Reptiles were. taken wherever they occurred after this, also, except upon the long side-trip mentioned above, where it was impracticable to preserve anything greater than could be put in a pocket-bottle of alcohol. The marsh between the Animas and La Plata was a fine locality for batra- chians. South of the mountains, lizards began to appear in great num- bers and variety, and increased as we got farther out upon the dry plains. Camp 20 furnished us our only rattlesnake, and I do not remember any other camp at which we were even suspicious of their presence. Such large suites had already been secured of the mammals and birds of Colorado that it was not deemed advisable to spend time in a syste- matic collection of them. Some skins were obtained, and observations recorded, but little worthy of special mention. Birds were nowhere seen so abundantly as in Berthoud Pass and on the Arkansas below Granite. The former locality, being easily accessible, ought, before many seasons, to yield a rich ornithological harvest. In conclusion, I wish to express to Mr. Wm. H. Jackson, director of our party, the appreciation I have of his hearty co-operation and genial sympathy, through which he not only afforded me opportunities I would not otherwise have had, but added immensely to my personal enjoy- ment of this delightful trip. SPECIAL REPORT ON THE MOLLUSCA. The collection of Mollusks fairly represents the land and fresh-water families, aud comprises many additions to the fauna of Colorado, as well as the following six species, believed to be new: Limax montanus, Ingersoll. Limaz castaneus, Ingersoll. Microphysa Ingersoll, Bland. Pupilla alticola, Ingersoll. Helisoma plexata, Ingersoll. With respect to their distribution, it will be seen that none were found on the eastern slope of the range, although there is no conclusive evi- dence that they do not exist there; that there was a marked increase as we advanced south; that altitude seemed to have little influence upon their range so long as other favorable conditions were present ; and that some species (as of Helisoma) had a very local distribution. The genera Zonites, Vitrina, Vallonia, Pupa, Succinea, and Pisidium were wide-spread. Among the Helices, Patula Cooperi only occurred in broad open valleys; Patula striatella and Cronkhitei were found together over the northern portion of the district traversed, but in the south the latter replaced striatella. The little Microphysa, occurring abundantly on the cliffs in Baker’s Park up to 11,000 feet, and in the Animas and other valleys draining into the Rio San Juan, was also found in the North Park by Mr. Barber, but his examples were less robust. All the other species of this genus belong to Florida and the Gulf coast. The Pupe were perhaps the most common forms, increasing as we went south, where specimens of Vertigo californica and Pupilla alticola were numer- ous everywhere on the mountains as high up as timber grows. Pupilla Blandi, heretofore known only as a fossil in Missouri River Drift, was col- lected alive in considerable numbers. In order to make this lst as far as practicable a statement of our present knowledge of the Mollusea of that portion of the United States lying between the Rocky Mountains on the east and the Sierra Nevada on the west, designated, by Mr. W. G. Binney, The Central Province (Bulletin Mus. Comp. Zo6l., II], ix), I have inserted in their proper system- atic place the names of such mollusks as I could ascertain to have occurred within that region, distinguishing those species which form my own list by the black head-letter type. A brief mention of the range extralimital to the scope of this paper is added to most species. There seems some reason to doubt whether the limits assigned by Mr. ‘Binney in his Geographical Catalogue, above referred to, cireumscribe a true zoological province, considered with reference to the Mollusca; but I have contented myself with carefully tabulating such observations as I had access to, leaving to others such deductions as the facts may warrant. Enough is presented, however, it seems to me, to show that the - Central Province, so-called, is not so deficient as has been supposed, either in the number of species or in representatives ot adjoining faunas. The impression that this inter-montanic region is unfavorable to the development of Pulmouates also seems wrong, except in respect to the scarcity of lime, to which cause we may probably attribute the fact that the more minute forms are in large majority. A further discussion of the geographical and hypsometric distribution ot the Moilusks of the 389 390 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. Rocky Mountains may be found in an article by the author in the Popular Science Monthly for May, 1876. It gives me pleasure to acknowledge my indebtedness and tender my thanks to Messrs. Thomas Bland and W. G. Binney, Dr. James Lewis aud Prof. Edward S. Morse, for much kind help and good counsel, both before and after the completion of this manuscript. VEOLELUSCA. - Class GASTEROPODA. Order PECTINIBRANCHIATA. Family VALVATIDZ. Valvata sincera, SAY. takes a Samy tims Valleys occ elie es eerie 1 specimen. Reported also from Salt ‘bales (Hemphill). Inhabits the Western States. My single shell was found dead upon the beach. It is typical, except in size, which exceeds that of any other specimens I have seen. I agree with Mr. W. G. Binney that I have never seen ‘‘ specimens referred to this species that can easily be distinguished from carinate forms of V. tricarinata.” Valvata virens, Tryon.—Cceur @Aléne Lake, Montana (Hemphilt ); Pacific coast. RISSOID i. AMNICOLIN Aa. Tryonva clatharata, Stm.—Colorado Desert (Blake). Tryonia protea, Gld.—UColorado Desert (Llake.) Somatogyrus isogonus VAR. subglobosus, SAY. makes san Tumis Walley 32 sie miigeee vei ustee oe 5 specimens. Northwestern part of the Union (Say). All my specimens were dead. My time was so limited at this inter- esting point that I could not search the deep water for living mollusks. Amnicola turbiniformis, Tryon.—Crane Lake Valley and Surprise Val- ley, Northeast California (Gabb); near Fort Hall, Idaho (Reid); Truck- ee, Nevada (Carlton). California. Amnicola longinqua, Gld.—Colorado Desert (lake). Fluminicola Nuttaliana, Stm.—Warm Springs, near Salt Lake, Utah» (Reid); Upper Des Chutes River, and Klamath River, Oregon (New- berry). Oregon and California. Fluminicola seminalis, Stm.—Salt Lake, Utah (Reid); Oregon and Washington Territory (Newberry). Fluminicola Hindsii, Stm.—Salt Lake, Utah (Reid); River Kootanie and stream at foot of Rocky Mountains, 4,626 feet, British Columbia (Lord). INGERSOLL.] ZOOLOGY——-MELANIIDA.—PULMONATA. 391 The last two of these three species are considered identical with the first by Mr. Binney and some others; their range seems to be co-exten- sive. Fluminicola fusca, Hald.—Shores of Lake Utah (Burton); Sacramento River, California, to Green River, Utah (Cooper). POMATIOPSIN Ai. Pomatiopsis intermedia, Tryon.—Owyhee River, Southeast Oregon (Gabb); White Pine district, Nevada (Hemphill). Pacific coast. MELANIIDA. Goniabasis plicifera, Lea.—Rivers of Washington Territory (Cooper). Pacific coast. Goniabasis silicula, Gld.—Usually regarded as a variety of the above. “ Quoted from Washington Territory ; Oregon; Hell-Gate River, Mon- tana; and the Missouri above the Falls (Cooper). Pacific coast. — Goniabasis Newberryi,. Lea.—Upper des Chutes River, Oregon (New- comb). California. Goniabasis nigrina, Lea.—Clear Creek, Shasta County, California. Pacific coast. Goniabasis Draytoni, Lea.—Walla Walla, Oregon; Clear Creek, Shavic County, California. Pacifie coast. Leptoxis fusca, Hald.—Shores of Lake Utah (Burton). Pacific coast. Order PULMONATA PUPIDA. PUPINA. Cionella subcylindrica, LInN.US. Camp 24> Clear Creek tac ecrs tenia. oe ok ace neal 3 specimens. These three were found in wet grass and bushes, some 8,300 feet above the sea. Though I searched particularly for them afterward, no more were obtained. It is a circumpolar species. Pupilla muscorum, LiNN US. Camp wi) Blue River Walleye. 24. sos sone sale oan. 1 specimen. Cannprzile: os Pinos Aweney icc snc eyes = Oo specimens. Canada; Hastern States; Europe. Pupilla Blandi, MORSE. Campa. Clear Creek. 2 Segre mal rise yey ie) oiepe ay eee 2 specimens. Camp 26e, Cunningham Guleheees soo -\2,.44seoae 40 specimens. Camp Oe Aninas Valley isn oee to ee rh ee ee 1 specimen. Camp E); Rio la Plata... 22732... 2. se Re oleae hae ae 1 specimen. Sub-fossil in Drift on Missouri River near Fort Berthold. Pupilla alticola, SP. NOV. Animal not observed. _ Shell perforate, straight, two and one-half times as long as broad, densely striate, subtranslucent, chestnut-brown ; apex obtuse ; whorls 6 or 7, convex, 392 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the middle three of the spire equal, causing a parallelism in the sides of the shell, the last noticeably greater, expanding toward the aperture, not closely appressed to the body-whorl; suture deeply impressed ; aperture small, oblique, subtriangular, marg gins connected by a thin deposit, without internal processes ; peristome simple, somewhat reflected over the umbilicus. Length, 22 mm. ; diameter, 1 mm. Camp 263) Cunnineham Gulch ssa case ce ae eee ee 25 specimens. Camp F: Rio La Plata... ....-.- ICT RI Re ny aE 5 specimens, It will not be difficult to recognize this species by its parallel sides, base-like expansion of the last whorl, coarse incremental lines, and eden- tate aperture. It seems to be an essentially alpine species, none having been found at an elevation less than 8,000 to 9,000 feet. It was plenty in the localities mentioned above. Leucochila arizonensis, Gabb.—Fort Grant, Arizona (Horn); Pike's Peak, Colorado (Tryon); White Pine, Nevada (Hemphill). California. Leucochila hordeacea, Gabb.—Fort Grant, Arizona (Horn). VERTIGININ As. Vertigo californica, ROWELL. Camp! Blaeikiver Walley... 2 ssc eee ae ee . 15 specimens. Camp 21) Los Pinos agency +4. 25,2522 -2 eae 3 specimens. Camp 23: Divide southwest of Los Pin@S cases eee 3 specimens. Camp 26; Howardvilles 2:05.72. jase ee eee 50 specimens. Camp D: Animas Valley..........-.--.. See eee 2 specimens. Gamprkie Rio Wa. Platac. 25%. © aks o2 eee eee 4 specimens. Pacific coast. Vertigo corpulenta, MORSE. Camp 2: Los) Pinos agency Ste... ee ea eee .. 2.Specimens. Camp 23: Divide southwest c* Los Pinos .......--..-. 1 specimen. astern slope Sierra Nevada (Stretch ; Hemphill). Vertigo ovata, Say.—Fort Grant, Arizona (teste Binney). HKastern United States. HELICID A. VITRIN 2. Macrocyclis vancouverensis, Lea.—Idaho; west side of Coeur d’Aléne Mountains, in forests of Conifer (Cooper); Sumass Prairie, Fraser River (Lord). Pacitic coast. > Zonites arboreus, SAY. Camp: 9: Hot, Sulphur Sprimes2ee Soosn eee ee eee 3 specimens. Campull: Bine River Valleyai.. 4-543 Sa. eee 13 specimens. Camp 26: Howardville, Baker’s Park.......-..-..-.-. 22 specimens. Camp is) RiouwlaP lata ce eee. 2 ees eee ine bee 3 specimens. North Park (Barber) .......-- LA a tare A UR ET A zi 2 specimens. INGERSOLL.) ZOOLOGY—HELICID&. 393 “Damp bottom-lands along the Jower valley of Hell-Gate River, Mon- tana” (Cooper); Washoe County, Nevada; Montana; Rio Chama, New Mexico (Binney and Bland). United States generally. Zonites viridulus, MENKE. Waray) Mes blue boiy er Veillle yarns ssc ce 4,0 aor s mayer nate _ 2 specimens. Camp lose sacuache: Creek eros es-: -o- «s,6)14)- ‘... 12 specimens. Camp 20: Twenty miles west of Saguache .... .....-. 1 specimen. Camp D: Cascade Creek, Animas Valley. ........--. 3 specimens. Cannel: Lode, Platay.c emery sce siciee 25's oan 4 specimens. I find no other localities for this mollusk recorded in the inter-montanic region, except that Mr. Lord mentions finding a ‘ Zonites like electrina, Fort Colville, Columbia River”; and Mr. Binney accredits it to the Central Province. All my own localities were at the foot of mount- ‘ains, and in each case the animals were found in the wet shaded ground beside running water. In the valleys of the Animas and La Plata, they were very abundant underlogs. Itisdistributed over the United States generally, except on the Pacific coast. Zonites indentatus, Say.—Accredited by Mr. Binney (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Ui, ix, 202) to the Central Province (Utah) as having been de- rived from the north. Eastern North America. Zonites nitidus, Miill.—Colorado (Carpenter). Europe, New York, Ohio, and British America. Zonites Whitneyi, Newe.—Lake Tahoe, Sierra Nevada, 6,100 feet (Cooper); Truckee, Nevada (Carlton). Zonites Brewert, Newe.—Truckee, Nevada (Carlton); Lake Tahoe (Newcomb). California cgast. Zonites minusculus, Binney.—Accredited in Binney’s catalogue to the Central Province; Fort Grant, Arizona (Horn). All of North America and the West Indies, Zonites conspectus, BLAND. Camp 26: Cunningham Gulch, altitude 11,000 feet...... 1 specimen. No mention has been made of tbis species that I am aware of since its description by Mr. Thomas Bland (Ann. N. Y. Lye. N. H., VIII, 163), who quotes San Francisco, California, as its habitat. Zonites fulvus, DRAPERNAUD. Campo 9: lot Sul phiwreSpringse pac mers of Smith’s Borkee-ees teers tees eeeee eae see eee eeeee 7,500 Mouth of branch a of North Fork .....-- 1g tend Gaby eed Shee Shc oe Se aBOE DOSE Ee 5, 500 Mownioigoname hub) ot,€ calli reekaaeeriseee eee tans ae ae aoe anes Bele sei ae 7,077 WiC OF InrAMCN TOT IM OREIK Sooo bene sone 5 cocdceassose sede eseEre ened asec 6, 000 MIG HID OF |RMACIN OK INO < OIREE)K caccco 5565a0 Beauanscos sebeeuesemas beeeen seis 7, 100 Monthrofioranchyeot Rock Creeks smeeeetesce ease cisecae = eee ce saat 8, 400 Moutinomnnanehy pe latedul Cneeksen-s cmer nase -iys nea wsleeie see - cic =e ee SOS Mouth of branch g Plateau Creek Monthyotmbranchya: Plateau Creelanesareee eyes ets sells) «eee e-leiner eee oeels 5, 580 28 H TOPOGRAPHICAL REPORT OF NORTHERN DIVISION, 1874. By Story B. Lapp, M. E. WASHINGTON, D. C., June 1, 1875. Sir: I have the Mons to submit to you the {opoor yphical yonunt of the northern division of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, to which I was assigned as topographer, for ’ the season of 1874. The party, in charge of Mr. A. R. Marvine, geologist, left the ren- dezvous camp, near Denver, on the 20th of July. A camp was made for three days near Golden City, and a detailed survey made of the country between Ralston Creek and Mount Morrison. We crossed the Front or Colorado range by Berthoud’s Pass, and traversed the Middle Park to our field of work north of the Middle Park. The first station was made on the Ist of August, and the last one on the 20th of November. The wagon-road from the White River Indian agency to Rawlings Springs was taken, and Rawlings was reached on the 28th of November, and Denver, by railroad, on the 30th. Mr. Wm. 8. Holman, jr., took the supplies for the party, and a mercu- rial barometer to the White River agency, via Rawlings, and the wagon-road from that point. The barometric station which he estab- lished there is the base on which the majority of our altitudes depend. The plan of the topographical work is exactly the same as used the year before, and as adopted by the other parties. Very respectfully, yours, STORY B. LADD. Dr. F. V. HAYDEN, United States Geologist, in charge of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories. REPORT. The country assigned to the northern division, to be surveyed during the season of 1874, is north and east of the Middle Park, in Colorado. The northern limit was north latitude 40° 30’ and the ‘southern the Eagle River from its source at the summit of the Mount Powell range to its junction with the Grand River, and then the Grand. On the east the work was to connect with that of the previous year on the western and northern sides of the Middle Park, and to the west the work was to be continued as far as the season would allow. The most western point reached was nearly to longitude 108°, though _ the average limit is about 107° 45’. This arrangement gave us a narrow strip north of Middle Park, covering the southern end of the North Park, of an average width of about eleven miles, and extending from 435 436 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. the summit of the Front or Colorado range north of Long’s Peak, west to the Park range, which is the eastern limit of the bulk of our ‘work, and has a trend of north 25° west from Mount Powell. The disposition of the country made it desirable to commence at the eastern end of the North Park district, and to extend the work to the west toward our supply depot at the White River Indian agency, and when, early in November, we reached the country between the Mount Powell range and the headwaters of the Eagle, the storms and the clouds that hung constantly around the mountains made it impossible to continue the work, and we were obliged to leave that portion for another season. The total area surveyed is about four thousand one hundred square mniles of mountain country, interspersed with a few wide, open valleys. The methods of working are the same as adopted by the other parties. A line of primary triangulation stations bordering the country on the east and south and Dome Mountain near the center of the district, lati- tude 40° 00! 57.45, and longitude 107° 04/ 40,46, (approximate,) were the points with which the secondary triangwation joining all the topo- graphical stations were connected. Highty-six principal stations were made, together with some minor compass stations along the lines of travel. The average distance of the stations apart was 6.84 miles. A barometric station was established at the White River Indian agency, commencing on the 17th of August, and a meteorological record has been kept from ‘that time to date. “Different members of the party were observers while the party was in the field, and sinve then the observations have been inade by Mrs. E. H. Danforth. A portion of the party was encamped at the mouth of the Hagle River for twenty-six days, and a barometric record was kept there during the time, which gives the elevation of that point very accurately. The station at the agency is the base used in the ealculation of the majority of the heights; for the work done while the small side-party was at the mouth of the Hagle, that base was used as being much nearer, and the work done in the North Park previous to the establish- ment of the White River base depends upon the bases at Fairplay and Denver. The southern end of the Medicine Bow Mountains, which border the North Park on the east, forms a high, precipitous, granite range be- tween the valley of the North Grand and the Park. Mast of the North Grand. rise the mountains of the great Front range, of the same gene- ral character as they are to the south, sharp, serrated summits, with am- phitheaters on either side. The highest points of these ranges rise to a little over 13,000 feet, but the general elevation is 12,500 feet. To the north the Front range loses its rugged Alpine character and changes to a high, heavily-timbered platean range, separated from the Medicine Bow by the Big Laramie kiver, and drained on the east by the Cache la Poudre. The range in the other direction bears south 40° east, and culminates in the highest mountain of the whole northern district, Long’s Peak. The valley of the North Grand is narrow and close, ex- cepting a portion of its lower course, where it widens into a broad beaver meadow. Crossing the Medicine Bow range, we descend by long, broken spurs to the broad open prairie-like basin of the North Park, drained by the North Platte River. Across the Park rises the Park range, a broad, rounded’ mass, heavily timbered, about twelve miles in width, and with an elevation of from 10,000 to 10,500 feet. The range retains this character for fitty miles to the south, and then rises to the very rugged precipitous range of Mount Powell. To the north, for ten miles, it re- mains the same, and then changes to a more mountainous type, but not LADD. GEOGRAPHY—GENERAL FEATURES. A37 as rough a one as to the south. The divide at the head of the Muddy Creek ot Middle Park is very low, but 8,772 feet elevation; while at no point is the Park range lower than 9,000 feet, except where the canon of the Grand cuts through it. So, if this caion did not exist, the entire drainage of the Middle Park would flow through the Muddy Pass into the North Platte River. The main spurs or ridges between Park View Mountain and the Park range, which, to the south trom the divides between the Troublesome, the west iork of the Troublesome, and the Muddy, have a northwest and southeast trend parallel to the range. Considering thé country west of the Park range as a unit, the main topographical feature is the White River plateau, a lava capped mesa, irregular, and cut by deep cadons and valleys, which often nearly sub- divide it. This western district comprises about three thousand five hun- dred and twenty square miles, and the drainage is divided into three systems, the Yampah or Bear hiver, the White, and the Grand. The Yampah drains nearly the northern half of the distriet, the White the western central, about one-quarter, and the Grand the southern third. The Yampab has a northeasterly and northerly course from its source on the eastern side of the mesa, which, situated in the center, is a point from which the drainage radiates, till it reaches the Park range within a mile of our north line, when it makes a sharp bend and holds a course due west till it joins the Green River. The White River drains the heart of the plateau, and the main stream has its source in Trappei’s Lake, which nestles in one of the deep-cut- ting valleys close under the cliffs. The South Fork of the White, head- ing near Shingled Mountain, cuts a deep precipitous cafon through the center of the plateau. The Grand River, which issues from the Middle Park through the canon in the Park range, flows through a broken series of gorges for ninety miles, opening out occasionally into a small valley of from one to five miles in length, but for the greater part of its course in rough, often impassable canous. The Eagle flows through an open sage-brush val- ley. jor twelve miles and then through a narrow valley for five miles before it joins the Grand. From the White River plateau, the surface of which is irregularly rolling, there rise a number of isolated mountains, Shingled Mountain, station XLI, and point 17-—XLI, from 500 to 1,000 feet elevation above the general surface. These made excellent topographical stations. The eastern edges of the spurs, as well as of the main plateau, are the high- est, sloping on the west to the edges of the mesa, and falling off on all sides with abrupt, high cliffs, to the long, sloping spurs below. ‘To the east there are a number of ridges partially detached from the plateau, and the highest points of these are the mountains that show so promi- nently from the east, Dome Mountain and Mount Ornuo, which stand just south and north of the head of the Yampah, the highest mountains west of the Park range in this district. The Dome Mountain ridge is entirely separated from the plateau, and the Mount Ornuo mass is connected by a narrow wall of rock, some- what higher than the plateau at either end, in places but 3 feet in width, and a sheer precipice on both sides of from 700 to 800 feet. To the north lies the valley of the Williams Fork, a large tributary of the Yam- pah ; to the south the headwaters of the Yampah itself. Standing near the center of this wall, which is 125 feet in length, with outstretched arms, and dropping a stone from each hand simultaneously, they fall for 100 feet before touching the sides of the cliffs. It was very much 438 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. cracked and shattered, and another winter will probably demolish this natural causeway. . The eastern edges of the plateau and the main spurs and ridges have a northwest and southeast trend, parallel to the*Park range. West of the Park range and parallel withit is a broken range, about ten miles distant from the axis of the main one. Starting as a spur from the Mount Powell mass it forms the high ridge of station LX XXI, reaching to 11,000 feet. The Grand has cut a canon through the ridge, leaving a detached mountain, station LXXX, north of the Grand. North of station LX XX there is quite a low saddle ; then it rises again to station LX XVII. To the north the Yampah has cut a small canon through the range, but it there becomes lower, and soon falls off to the broad, low ridge of station XV. West of this range, and between it and the spurs from the plateau, lies Kgeria Park, drained by the Yam- pah, the Chimney Fork, a tributary of the Yampah, and Bayard Creek, a branch of the Grand. It is an open, terraced basin, about twelve miles long from northwest to southeast, and trom one to four miles wide. The divide between the Yampah and Grand River waters is only a very low gravel terrace, scarcely noticeable. The valley of the Yampah, between stations XVII and XV, forms a small park about ten miles long and from one to three wide. Below the great bend of the Yampah, near station XV, tor seven miles the valley is a wide, open bottom ; it then closes into a canon for nine miles, and then widens out into another rich and fertile bottom, extending almost continuously for eighteen miles down the river, and bordered on the north and south by low, rolling hills. It is in this valley that the new settlement of Haydenville is started, the beginning being made in November last. Near the lower end of the bottom the wagon road from Rawlings’ Springs on the Union Pacific Railroad to the White River Indian agency crosses the Yampah, and a small Indian trading-post, now kept by Mr. Morgan, is located there. The valley of the Yampah is the finest and most promising of the whole district. This river is bordered by a growth of large cottouwocds, and the soil appears to be very tertile and productive. It has an eleva- tion of from 6,200 to 6,800 feet. The only valey that rivals it in the least is that of the White River at Simpsou’s Park, where the agency is located; this, however, is on the Ute Indian reservation. Coal is found in a number of localities along the Yampah, between it and the White, as well as north of it, and although it has not been thoroughly explored and tested, yet it promises to be very abundant and of good quality, equal to any in the Territory. The Steamboat Springs are located right at the bend of. the Yampah, on both sides of the river, and close to the bank on the north side. The water is lukewarm, of trom 70° to 72° temperature, and is strongly saturated with sulphur. At the head of a small stream, a tributar), of the Wagle, draining the valley southwest of station LX XXII, there are a few quite small sul- phur-springs, and on the banks of the Grand River, two miles below the mouth of the Eagle, there is another set of sulphur-springs on both sides of the river. A short distance below these springs there is a very large one that gushes forth close to the edge of the river, so that in the spring, at high stages of the river, it 1s entirely submerged. This spring has very little, if any, sulphur, though it probably has some salt, with possi- - bly some other ingredients. North of the White River plateau the country is mountainous and irregular, with no distinct, well-defined system. : The continuation of the spur, of which 6-XLI is the highest point, | - LADD.] GEOGRAPHY—ROADS AND TRAILS. 439 forms the dividing range between the White River and the Williams Fork and Waddle Creek tributaries of the Yampah. It is a broad, rolling, heavily timbered range, with several prominent cone- ‘summits, as Pagoda Peak and point 9-X XIX, and has three easy passes. An old trail crosses between Pagoda Peak and the plateau from the Wil- liams Fork to the White; a good trail crosses between Pagoda Peak and point 9-X XIX from the main branch of the Williams Fork to the White, at an elevation of 8,300 feet, and the Government wagon-road crosses through Yellow J acket Pass, west of station XX XI, at an eleva- tion of 7,493 feet. The plateau continues to the southwest, forming the divide between the White and the Grand Rivers, but it loses the distinctive mesa char- acter to a great degree, and becomes more like a high, roJling range; the streams flowing south cut deep, profound canons, while to the north sloping spurs and hog-back ridges divide the tributaries of the White. ROADS AND TRAILS. There are two roads that penetrate this country, the Government wagon-road from Rawlings’ Springs,on the Union Pacific Railroad, to the White River Indian agency, and the one known as Berthoud’s Salt Lake wagon-road. The first, starting from Rawlings’ Springs, crosses the old stage-road to Salt Lake City just west of Bridger’s Pass, then following the valley of the Muddy, crosses the Little Snake at the settlements, and, cross- ing to Fortification Creek, follows that for most of its course, and fords - the Yampah River just below the mouth of Elk Head Creek and half a mile east of Morgan’s trading-post. It then follows a nearly straight course, crossing the Williams Fork and the Waddle, through Yellow Jacket Pass to the agency. The second, which is a road surveyed by Capt. E. L. Berthoud, in 1861, from Golden City, Colo., to Provo City, in Utah, via Berthoud’s Pass and the Hot Springs, in Middle Park, crosses the Park range at Gore’s Pass at an elevation of 9,590 feet; then through the small group of meadows drained by Stampede Creek, across a low divide to Sarvis Creek, and down that valley to the Yampah. For the last few miles it leaves Sarvis Creek and follows down a small side-stream. Within a few years, since the discovery of mines on the Elk and Snake Rivers, a number of teams have been through by this route, and they have broken a road from Stampede Creek through to Egeria Park, and that is now the passable route, the former one down Sarvis Creek being but a trail. : Passing through Egeria Park and down the Yampah for seven miles, it follows a nearly straight northwesterly course across to Oak and Sage Creeks, then bearing to the west across a low divide east of sta- tion XXIV _ to Skull Creek, and once more meets the Yampah, which it follows down till it joins the Rawlins road. This is the route that is now used, but Captain Berthoud’s surveyed road divides on Sage Oreek, one branch passing up Sage Creek and across to the Williams Fork, and the other leaving the present road at Skull Creek, passing up Skull Creek to the Williams, where it joins the other branch, then across the hills to the range east of Waddle Creek, where it joins the present road to Simpson’s Park and the agency. This portion of Berthoud’s road © from long disuse has become nothing more than a trail. From Simpson’s Park the road follows down the White to the june- . tion of the Green, then up the Uintah River and the Duchesne Fork, and down the Timpanogos to Provo City, Utah. 440) GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. The country is traversed by a great many well-defined trails in all directions. The principal ones across the Park View mountain-range, from the Middle to the North Park, are through the Willow-Creek Pass, east of Park View, at an elevation of 9,683 feet, and one across the low divide at the head of the Muddy Creek at an elevation of 8,772 feet. This is the pass crossed by Frémont, in 1844, on his return journey, and he speaks of it as one of the most beautiful passes be had ever seen, A fair trail crosses the Park range about tive miles north of Rabbit Ears, a mountain near the Muddy Pass, capped with two sharp points of lava rock, to the valley of the Yampah, just above the great bend. The most important trails in the western district besides those men- tioned in connection with Berthoud’s Salt Lake road are those leading to and from the Indian agency. A large Indian trail to the Cochetopa agency runs almost south from the White River agency, crossing the Grand at the mouth of Divide Creek, thirty-seven miles below the mouth of the Eagle, and then south up Divide Creek. A trail to the mouth of Hagle River follows up the White for five miles, then ascends the rolling plateau and crosses it in nearly a straight line to the june- tion of the Eagle and Grand, passing down the long spur west of Cafon Creek. The trail then follows up the Eagle River for twenty-one miles, and ascends the steep sides of the canton of the Hagle to the valley southeast of station LX XI, the highest point between the Nagle and the Grand. It crosses this valley and the ridge dividing it from the . Piney River, and passing along the steep mountain-sides on the east of the Piney and south of the Grand, it crosses the valley east of station LXXXf and the Park range through a pass 7.5 miles south of the cafion of the Grand and just north of point 5—XLI, and joins the Blue River trail in Middle Park. The greater part of the whole country is abundantly watered, and the streams, with but few exceptions, are large and full. On the western edge the country becomes drier and more barren, and soon merges into the sterile, desolate region of Western Colorado. Longitude 108° is about the eastern limit of the barren waste. The country to the west is broken by low mountains, ridges, and terraces, but there are no com- manding points, and away from the Yampah, White, and Grand Rivers water is very rarely found. Careful measurements were made of the Grand and Yampah Rivers so as to give the amount of water carried by them. This is an important question in case the country ever be- comes settled enough to require irrigation, in order to utilize for culti- vation the dry plains, especially on the Blue and Muddy in the Middle Park and along the Yampah, though there is ne doubt that the sup- ply is ample for any possible demand. The Grand River was gauged at the hot springs, in Middle Park, on July 31. The river at that point was 84 feet in width, with a small side run 12 feet in width, and the greatest depth was 3 feet. The maximum velocity was 8 feet per second, and the amount of water 802 cubic feet per second. Early in November the river was gauged again at a point ninety miles beiow the springs, and just below the mouth of Eagle River, but the Grand is so much Smaller at that time, it being at its minimum, that no direct comparison can be made between the two results. The Blue, the Muddy, and the Kagle add their waters to the Grand between these two points, besides a great many smaller streams, yet the river measured only 871 cubie feet of water per second. The small amount is due to the lateness of the season, the river being then at its very lowest point. The width of the stream was 198 feet, the greatest depth 3.7 feet, and the maximum velocity 3.4 feet per second. LADD.| GEOGRAPITY—ELEVATIONS. 441 The Yampah was gauged in the middle of November, near the ford where the Rawlings wagon-road crosses, and this result also gives the minimum amount of water in it at any season of the year. The width was 156 feet, the deepest place 2.5 feet, the maximum velocity 2.4 feet per second, and the amount of water 364 cubie feet per second. In the spring these rivers are very high and impassable until nearly July, and the Grand below the Blue is “not tordable till August, and then only in a few places. Plenty of water is naturally accompanied by an abundant growth of timber, and about one-half of the whole area is so covered, though a great deal of it is small, and of no value as lumber. The Park range is covered with good large timber, similar to the Front range, mostly pines, but with aspens and small low trees along the lower edges. The Park View Mountain range and the Medicine Bow are the same, the hillsides well covered with flat areas, arms of the North Park, clear and open. ‘These flat areas are covered with the lake deposits, and wherever these basins exist, as in Egeria Park, and the parks along Yampah, they are free from timber, with the exception of the cotton- woods bordering the streams. The long sloping spurs trom the White River plateau and the heads of the valleys draining it are well timbered, especially on slopes facing the north. From the southeastern corner of the plateau, near station XLVIT, and the long ridge that, starting at this point, runs southwesterly from this point around to the east and north to the mouth of the South Fork of the White, and beyond it to station LV, the country is well, and in places even heavily, timbered, covering about 700 squaremiles. Thebest timber, pine and spruce, grows on the heads of the White, Williams York, and Yampah Rivers, and on the top of the plateau between Shin- gled Mountain (station XLII) and station LIX. The spruce-trees grow- ing on the top, at an elevation of from 10,500 to 11,000 feet above the sea, are large and fine, often reaching 3 feet in diameter. A list is given of the elevations of the principal points and. places. A few are calculated trigonometrically and those are marked with a ¢, and a few that are dependent upon an aneroid barometer are marked with an a; the rest are all obtained from a mercurial barometer. List of elevations. MOUNTAINS. Elevation, feet. SAMOnp Ml ront: TAN Mes Woe wees ia etre ache ee Shetae 0) Ue 8) Dib 12, 000 Seauroni Wi Me4(TrODM 133) is eh aN rete oe rete ore Pee es Lene 12, 513 Sieyos 0 (A MedicmesBow rangers Ses: ES 761 RSUReR UBIO LTE geet 2:0" i ctot a) DARIAN a atten ey A nee ICRP NON Cmca t13, 060 FecaTe ley ote Wis et( TOT, Fed) 5 5S BSc | = E = ce | 62 | ee oh o v d 5 5 5 Q fae a FS oO iS) iS) Campi2ieeeereeee 7p.m---.| Ang. 7, 1874 | 19. 667 19. 00 18.70 | 17.90 667 SOT 1. £67 Station 9). ..:.--.. 8a.m.-- | Ang. 8, 1874] 18.039 | 17.47 Serer 16. 40 DUDW everett 1. 639 Station 10)--- =.=. 1p.m.--.; Aug. 10, 1874 | 18 657 NOW |adsea. 35 Soros (HS Necese oc 1. 200 9.30 a.m | Aug. 11, 1874 | 21.200 }.---..-- 19.95 ON Onl eee Sae2 TS 250k eee ne Camp teeensee ee 7a.m-.--.| Aug. 11, 1874 | 22.133] 20.18 | 21.09} 20:37 953 | 1.043 1. 863 Station Mle = 2-. UP Sooaee ATG IZ Nee || BOGGS |} 119), 70 |lcsceece |lasevouc coil need] REESE see Camp 25.---..... 7p.m.-..} Ang. 12, 1874 | 21.€93 | 20. 7 20.57 | 19.90 9639)" 15123 1, 793 @ampeonee-eeese Ta.m.-- | Aug. 14,1874 | 21.579 | 20.60 | 20.52) 19.82 979 | 1.059 1. 759 sxe) (1S) s45-56- 2p.m..../ Aug. 14, 1874} 19.017 MER GW), NoSs6oesellacosoase Ola ome se | Sasuicce Camp ieee. ee 7a.m.-.-.| Aug. 15, 1874) 20.876 | 20.00 | 19.80} 19.05 876 | 1.076 1. 826 Station 14.....-- WTO: Wilsase|| Amey, 1, AI Meh PRY A NT, BS) ecco aclleoseoace 663) | 5 4 en| Sere Camp 28... ...-. 7a.m.--.| Aug. 16, 1874 | 20.465 | 19.09 } 19.33] 18.68 779 | 1.185 1. 7185 IERISS) eoasouuaeuee 9a.m-.--.| Aug. 16, 1874] 19.210 18. 40 1x. 10 17. 40) 810 1. LL0 1. 810 ZTMIMEIS pooscoooe 21d Wooo) Auer, 1G G4) || C10) OVS cee ocleen c oe Web a) ocecessoljooscca +: 1. $62 Station 16 ....... Ti, SO) a, sok | ALO, 17, USA || ME BB |) TB osccose |lecesoncs OQ: tae ve nr eee Camp 29> .-- =. Go 8i0) jos to || ANoyen, Ph aig) BS BOT \ecaasce|[easecsne IQA) occococsllecosose 1.907 Passos 11.30 a. m | Aug. 18, 1874 | 19.461 |.-.--.-. HES ae We aa: |e Seeeoes 1.091 1.701 Camp 30.......-. 6a. m=-2 || Nae! 19) 187412199247) 19S 09) eee see 2 US AD |leoascecs|oacs a+ 5- 1.724 @zmpyo lees 1D Woes || Aes IG, UTE | PO. EG eotoce 22) so25e8- GEE GS Spe ekelleisoee 1,736 Camp 3l.-....-.- 7a. m.-..| Aug. 20, 1874 | 20.203 19.30 } 19. 06 18. 46 - £03 1. 143 1.743 Campissee-seeeee 7a.m.-.-.| Aug. 22,1874} 20.502 | 19.60 ; 19.42] 18.72 902 | 1. 082 1. 782 Stawon2ieereeas- 1p.m-....| Ang. 22,1874 | 18.343 |.-..-..- 17. 14 MSP} oocssese 1. 203 1.823 @ampresee eee 7 a.m....} Aug. 23, 1874 | 20.514 19. 38 IQS Isuscce ec 1. 134 TAN9 4 Rares Camp 34......... 7a.m-.--.| Aug. 24. 1874} 19.919 | 19.01 | 1820] 1812 909} 1.119 1. 799 Jaap HIele Sasccee 7a.m.--.| Aug. 22, 1874 | 19. 906 19. 04 13. 73 18. 04 866 1. 176 1. 866 Camipreceaeeee eee Tp. m.-.-.| Aug. 29, 1874 | 21.594 | 20.54 |........ ORS ae aoe 2) ecient 1. 784 Silvertone. -=- 6p. m.--.| Aug. 31, 1874 | 21.518 | 20.50 |... ... |-------. TORS ote ss Sellvcc= ae s< Camp 39.......-. 6 p.m..-.| Sept. 2,1874| 21.307] 20.31 | 20.10 i9. 56 oO tl PAT 1. 747 Stationi29 esa. 2 pl mes! Sept.) 41747 USS 6SSi ie Lei G0) |) S28 eee eae A ite) obo bows sleeccass Camp 41........ 6a.m... | Sept. 5, 1874} 20. 816 19. 88 19. 61 19, 11 - 936 1. 206 1. 706 IPMS shissasoadee 9.30 a. m_| Sept. 5, 1874} 20.202 | 19.30 | 19.07] 18.47 .903 | 1. 153 1. 733 @amp 39.2.2... 1p.m..-.| Sept. 5, 1874) 21.345 | 20.29 | 20.10 | 19.54] 1.055 } 1.245 1. 805 Camp 42.......-. 7a.m....| Sept. 6, 1874] 21.146 | 20.15 19. 94 19. 43 996 1. 206 1. 716 Station 30)..---.. 2D Wesael| Seyoe G, Wee) We NOS | W745) ioe sto e-cllessccses HAS: 2A ae Nees Camp) 43/225. .-\-- 7a.m.-...| Sept. 8, 1874] 20.424] 19.48 | 19.20] 18.56 944 | 1.224 1. 804 San Miguel Lake} 12 m...... eyo | teh WeZh) A WGP ceceascladscoce. 1D A ell see tek 32 2,58 1. 962 Campa eeeeee 4p: m=. sept. 8) 1874) s21 ean Pees eee JOOS Oe LOO Ag aaa see 1.211 1. 901 Camp 45......... 6 p.m....| Sept. 9, 1874] 20.663 | 19.70 | 19.44 | 1885 963 | 1.223 1.813 Station 33 ....... ii. 52 || Seyoirs WO, WI) Wea |) UPEPM eo te se lessee sac o (165) leepecaealiaesese Camp46. 22.222. Glazrmee a Sept loa Ba) S21 Oisn paee eel eee ee ONO Bia Seacrest oe 1. 933 Station, 35:--..-.- 2105 Woe || RS]DUn Leh Tesh alee ailliey Pa WO oe ee cee 16. 04 CUS ins seeeee is) Campaite--ee-e 6a. m....| Sept. 14, 1874 | 20.397}... .-. NO) Oy NS OE |lscsece cal) Th iy 1. 757 Stationtaveeasee- 1p. m.-.-.| Sept. 15, 1874 | 19. 008 18.13 17. 79 17. 20 878 1.218 1. 808 Camp 48.......:. Za.m....| Sept. 16, 1874] 20.686 | 19.64] 19.50] 18.49} 1.046 | 1.186 1. 796 PASS sesh tae ee 2p.m....| Sept. 19, 1874 | 20.576 19. 56 19. 37 18. 71 1. 016 1. 206 1. 866 Station 38 ....-.- 2p.m..../ Sent. 20,1874] 18.663] 17.85} .-..--.),--.--- o Gils} IS ouaaee pecdead os Campio2aeeeeseee 6. 30 a. m_} Sept. 21, 1874 | 20. 977 19. 90 19. 80 19. 10 1. 077 1.177 1.877 Campinsaee eee 8. 30 a, m_! Sept. 22, 1874 | 21.879 | 20.73 | 20.63 19.98 | 1.149 1.249 1.899 Camp 54...-...-. 4a. m:--. | Sept. 23) 1874 |) 123. 557))|/ 22545) |) 22: 49), 21.72) a0” 1. 067 1. 837 Station 40 ....--. 1D Tails Seuss Sept. 235 1874) 22.106 |) 20569 |) 22 22 ae: iy O20 Weekeness|Sesesas. Campos eee 3) D> Wo coe | Sejorm Sey NECN) CBE GUS foc cocs|| s2.-- = PGT | og es sollogaeane. 1.918 Campporreeeneer 7a. m-...| Sept. 24, 1874 | 23.725 | 22.70 | 22.72 | 22.95) 1.025 | 1.005 1.775 Campisbee-e sees Va: m._-.] Sept. 26, 1874) | 23) 452)... .-- - CRAG Ih CG OB Ns cee 1. 062 1. 792 Station 44....... 17; Wacoal Sern Oe, sel) BESO | NS ee ce ecaoscee TUB Ml eeeaeerellaraeas aoe (Chyna) Bissscaccce 6.30 p.m | Sept. 27, 1674 | 23.927 |.-..--- PPE || BRL Ike} |. s-s5ese 997 1. 747 @amipioi(e--22a--- 6.30 a.m | Sept. 28, 1874} 24.006 | 23,00 | 23.02) 22.35 1. 006 936 1. 636 Station 47...._.. Min Wisse | Soho Qh WI PN, BHO | BOs Ioseesoe Wee Geeulescescen|acosece |) Bonccce @ampioseeeresa ae 6. 30 a. m.| Sept. 29, 1874 | 23.123 | 22.13 | 22.16) 21. 49 . 993 963 1. 633 Campo oer: 6a. m..-.| Sept. 30, 1874 | 22.577 | 21.60 }. 21.59 | 20:80 O77 987 1.777 Station 50 -.....-. WEE S10) os tate} Ole, | Ty REN) Be. eve) | PIL EO eaG 255 Jocee-e5- HON SS|pcieee Se. | Sie oe CampiG0i==2a--- @a.m.-. | Oct. 2, 2874) 21.453) |) 20:43 | 20: 31 19. 76 1. 023 1. 143 1. 693 Station 51 ..--.-- 10.30 a.m-_| Oct. 6, 1874) 19. C65 Ite Sao esas llooacos acini Saereeee [bapbogos Station 53 ....... 10 a.m.--.| Oct. &, 1874] 20. 874 ISO W essces |loosodese ote e eaceBor|baocacda Station 54 .....-. 2.30 p.m | Oct. 9, 1874} 19. 088 RE Qt bwaely feraioet| terete ODS) |e reticle ay aac Station 58 ....-- lamers Oct. 12,1874] 22. 271 UN eeoerioems| | memocee OO seseeese|eeaeecacc Station 62 ....... Ll a. m._-.] Oct. 15, 1874 | 22. 021 ROE) | Ssesessliaccasd. lg ULM eoeenertn Gedoacae Station! 63 sess. Ze Ayo) aay |) OYehe, ANG akeiab yh Palle tee) |) PAO fe) |) sees Wocecccon BROAD Es =< 2 Ss S| eee @Campyisseeee eee Ta.m.--.| Oct. 17,1874) 24.854 | 23.31 PR CU Nacedoase 1, 044 130549 | S2eeene By Station 64....) 9a.m.--.| Oct. 17,1874 | 23.646 | 22.60 |..-.... | -..--2. LL WHO oerepsenysaccsaee Camp aes 6p. m....! Oct. 18,1874) 24.633 | 23.62 |..--.--- Py Ga) |) IONS) Iemsaae a. 1. 713 WILSON] DISCUSSION OF ANEROIDS. 449 2o= : Wie 2) o ESei a. 8 a. & o's ae ee Se os See | Se Ge cl ies sl Location. Time. Date. Bes | ae che |e tees ia Sen | PS ese role Po = Efo boa) ume) RS Zo Bae Sg i Wine aie cs a fa S) Ss) 6 p.m. | July 3, 1873 | 24.371 24. 01 23. 10 . 361 1, 271 6 a.m. | July 4, 1873 | 24. 496 24.17 Zon eo . 326 1, 266 6 p.m. |July 4,1873| 22.951 | 21.94] 2Q1a1] .311| 1741 6 am. |July 5, 1873) 22.254 21. 96 21. 10 . 294 1, 154 7 p.m. | July 5, 1873) 22.200} 21.¢0) 21.04 . 3C0 1.160 6 am. |/duly 6, 1873 | 22.237 | 21.95] 21.10 otis yh, lesz 6 p.m. | July 7, 1873) 21.181 20.83 | 20.06 onl 1.12 6 am. |July 8, 1873 | 21.035 | 20.70 19. 90 . 300 1.135 7 p.m. |July 8 1873) 21.250 | 21.43 ].-...-- OR ena sae Cam piBe te satesea cece = ces sole eae 6 a.m. | July 10,1873 | 24.347 | 18.41 | 22.02] 4.937 1. 327 Stations Sees ee hse see 1 p.m. | July 10, 1873 | 21. 260 16.25 | 20.07} 5.010 1. 150 @ampiecoene eee eet adecs SA eee 6 p.m. |July 10, 1873 | 22.733 | 17.70 | 21.40 | 5.033 1. 333 Camps. geste abet ae se eines 7 p.m. | July 11, 1873 | 22. 625 17.55 | 21.25 | 5.075 1.375 CAMP Ret ere se eco ee cee es heii ee 5 a.m. | July 14, 1273 | 23.515 18. 14 22.13 dD. 375 2385 Oa eee sane ete cioc ee cies 7 p.m. | July 14, 1873 | 23.288 | 17.90 | 21.89] 5.38 1.398 Campi eecnericee aseecliecie cee eee 6 a.m. | July 16, 1873 | 23. 447 18.30) 22.08 | 5.347 1. 367 @amipisseer tye -nsa Seecioce sis sereeeey: 5 a.m. | July 17,1873 | 24.611 | 19.21] 23.14 | 5.401 1.471 @amipysscecistee eeceiessiseis ce cee eee 7 p.m. | July 17, 1873 | 25.036 | 19.60) 23.62 } 95.436 1. 416 (OR OMA G SNH NAB APE Amen A 5 a.m. | duly 18, 1873 | 25.062] 19.61 23.68 | 9.452 dl. 352 Campeaescece seioasenes se ceien se. 7 p.m. | July 19, 1873 | 22.813] 17.30] 21.55 | 5.513 1. 263 Wampysiain sassee a aisee ese.5 cco Meee 6 a.m. | July 2!, 1873 | 22.527 | 17.10} 21.29 | 5.487 1. 297 (Seay a eae ee RD DY i 6 p.m. | July 22, 1873 | 92.673 | 17.15 |..-..... 5 5PB loos sons (CELT D cae See a ae ca 7 p.m, | Aus. 3, 1873 | 22.007: |.--..._. 20050) eee 1.507 OAD Peer cdlacis ose misie ses Heese ae Guam PAT esos 1SW3) 5220539) eee ae ZIG OY Kocbsaoe 1. 519 (CAI Se 5coosha Bsseseespogesacoessas 6 p.m |) Aug. 8) 1573)) 227038 |/---- <2. 20s 5) icsbadse - 1. 638 Camp eeeercine cee le ee eats See 7 p.m. | Aug. 11,1873 | 20.542 |... .... IGEID oscssose 1. 442 Si OSLOL) (Usb oes esse em aRene ore Sess 12 m. Septs O,18io) |) 194766) ses sees ED EW) | cacacaa: 1. 376 SLavloniGMe ees ee ase dee Se See 9 a.m. | Sept. 11,1873 | 21.375 | -..---. POE OO Iconcce 1.3735 DUAGOUMONee eect se Smee see teeeeeers 9 a.m. | Sept. 14, 1873 | 22. 689 |..-..--- QTLON ea see IL asi) SUOMI OP ee iat 3 so ie eee Tih Mai, | Seyoe. 17 MS |) a sy |e soe. TEED No ssdeas > 1. 242 STATLODES (ese inne! soles eae tee 6 p.m- | Sept. 25, 1873 | 22.096 |.....--. PAD aL as iets . 526 Waa ester eine Sin wieie a crete estore ee eee T Boia, | Srojori, Sa, Weis} || Pe. EST eee oe QO Os en ee ae i, Sey Station 89 5 p.m. | Sept. 28, 1873 | 20.509 |.-..---. 1G), US) |oosedes 1. 329 Station 90 2 p.m. | Sept. 29, 1873 | 21.094 |.-....-.- ITD |iseccoos 1. 394 Station 94 10 a.m. | Oct. 2, 1873) 21.117 |_--..--- TOM Oa Reeeaees 1. 367 Station 95 3) joie, || Oyen, 2 sels} |) Bap, Os) Woo se ae a Uy UO Ne pees. 1. 529 2 ~ 2 a n Oo oc Soe | Ss & a Sal |S os OSS Sol Eero. le ole oul ree Location. aes | aa aS LA SA | Sos eA ale deci yal ELS heh 1 peel | 2 ict 8a poi! A Pans 33 Re SoS OB. | ae & Sa = || je Bm pald) 3 2 3 Sj ° & (a 4 4 6S iS) D D @ama pyaar scsise cc ae ence eee mereraete 21.103 | 20. 94 20. 59 20.95 | .163 | .513 . 153 SPaGlOD peer ee re nscr nance ye Deitel sere ee 20. 629 | 19. 775 19. 39 18.94 | .244 | . 639 1. 089 STQMON se oa ac aie vice Weems ba eon 7.946 | 17. 74 17. 28 17. 04 206 | . 666 . 906 CAM ee ae oe seis «ej obese aes sens 20. 064 | 19.55 19. 18 18. 81 514 | . 884 1. 254 SLOPES sie es wiec dic cs sie Seem enieet eee 19. 798 | 19.45 19. 06 18. S7 348 738 1. 122 Stamommeace semi. slenibinjcm aie storelmiclarsieettee ee 18. 127 | 17. 89 47. 35 17.14 | .237 | 2777 . 987 Cam piece. = f EB UGS OORO OOFeicmeosoo a5 20. 724 | 20. 20 19. 81 19.3 524 914 1 304 SUMO Ee) te sal: aa a's viel apes ate aie nramiae epee 18. 658 | 18.30 17. 79 17. 53 |-, 358 | . 868 1. 128 Carpe nec: coaaals via znainis eainisies biesinicie elas aes 2), SD || A010 Neacne se INO: Bh 1 AB esc ee- No. 3. ED Ope art a= 5M iio > ts. aaids eee 20. 283 | 19. 89 19, 49 19599 | = c93 7193 - 333 Stationecnees se eres. tow eee aes 1€.114 | 17. 775 17. 29 18. 02 | . 339 824 . 094 (CERN) cciocd onoca doe CRrEaeenese ean eas AD VAG | OLB 1G) eee eae oaee Asi) | SEBO oosomescessc Scatronjen operas seven sccincisars cen Raocacteoade 1%, 424 | 18.99 Heb) lo eceodace . 434 BAN eee eteatetets ACAD Py Selene ain als 52s waieielneaend sien its 1¢248) 1 PUL) el ees ae al Renee CO Eee See cane omic SPalOm era teem eae acre sor dia sain evap ete nat OFAC MUON OSM Reem hae ole | 889 |.----.|------nn-eee ' | ! 29 i REPORT ON THE TOPOGRAPHY OF THE SAN JUAN COUNTRY. By FRANKLIN RHODA, ASSISTANT TOPOGRAPHER. In the following report I have adopted the very common system of describing the country in the order of our travels through it. The system is a very faulty one, but seemed to be the best possible under the circumstances. In describing a river or a simple range of mount- ains, the order of sequence is laid down in nature; all you have to do is to commence at one end of the line and follow it. The mount- ains in the so-called San Juan country, however, are very compli- cated, and present no definite lines that may be followed in a descrip- tion without leaving much untold. They appear, not in a single range, nor in a suecession of ranges, but aS a great mass. It was thought best to intersperse here aud there in the description of topography such personal adventures of members of the party as might throw light on any features of the country or its climate. We started from Colorado Springs on the 14th of July, 1874, taking the road leading up the Fontaine qui Bouille, and over Ute Pass into South Park. It would have been much shorter to have gone to Pueblo by rail, and thence on horse or mule-back around the southern end of the Green- horn Mountains, through Huerfano Park and Mosca Pass, and across San Luis Valley to Del Norte. But at this time of the year we knew that along the low plains the heat would be intense and the grass and water scarce. As it was we bad a delightfully cool trip all the way, with plenty of grass for our animals. Onur road lay across South Park, thence down the Arkansas River and across the range at Puncho Pass into the San Luis Valley. Wereached Saguache on the 24th of July, and made inguiries of different persons as to the nature of the country for which we were bound; but although they were all deeply interested in the prospects of the new mines, nobody could give us any definite information. We could not even find out whether the country was made up of rugged mountains or only high plateaus. Two days after leaving this place we reached the Los Pinos agency, where the Southern Utes receive such supplies as are apportioned to them by the Government. This point was in the extreme southwest corner of the district surveyed in 1873, and was the point of beginning the past summer. Our first station was made ona peak which had been occupied in 1873 as station 34. It is a low point, a few miles northwest of the agency, and is less than 12,000 feet in elevation. Having a most beauti- tul day, and plenty of time at our disposal, we found it very pleasant to study the country that appeared in the southwest, in which our sum- mer’s work was to be. We could see none of the very rugged masses of wountains which beset our path and taxed our energies in the months fellowing. What did appear to us was as follows: A little to the west of south, and not more than fifteen miles distant, rose up the high group in which station 53 of 1873 was situated, and containing several peaks ranging in height from 13,500 to near 14,000 feet. Farther around to the west, but much more distant, appeared a high pyramidal-shaped peak, 451 452 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. which is situated south of the Rio Grande, and is marked on the map as Rio Grande Pyramid. A little farther to the right, and still more dis- tant, was a double-topped peak, afterward occupied as station 25, and named Mount Oso. Still farther around, another distant, high peak appeared to be the culmination of a high mountain mass; this is Mount Aiolus on the map. Nearly in the same «lirection, but much nearer, there appeared a high plateau, extending over many degrees of the horizon. Being more than twenty miles distant from us, and lying wholly above timber-line, it was a very interesting feature in the land- scape. At our distance it seemed to be covered with grass; but this we afterward found was not the case. Our subsequent experience showed us that in this part of the country these bigh super-timber-line plateaus are very common. Immediately beyond this area was a high mass of red- colored mountains, afterward the scene of some interesting electrical experiences. A few miles northwest of this group Uncompahgre Mount- ain appeared, presenting on its north side the peculiar precipice which distinguishes it from all the surrounding peaks. North of this a series of ridges and plateaus extends from the high mountains to the Gunnison River. Having made profile sketches of the mountains and drainage sketches of the water-courses in the vicinity, and having taken angles to every prominent peak, bluff, and stream junetion visible, we started for camp. The next morning found us on our way to the great San Juan country, of which we had heard so much and found out so little. Our course at first lay to the southwest, alovg the Ute trail, which leads from Los Pinos over to the Rio Grande. We ascended one of the peaks in the small group containing station 33 of the previous season, and had a good view of the deep and rugged canons leading outward from the center of the mass. In the several succeeding days we made stations 3, 4, and 5 on the high plateau already mentioned. From this plateau we got the grandest view of Uncompahgre obtained from any station during the summer. The full height of the great precipice stood out in clear profile. Its striking resemblance to the profile of the Matterhorn gave us a wholesome dread of it, for as yet it had never been ascended by any one, and we felt that to reach the summit might be beyond the range of the possible. The plateau upon which we stood ranges in ele- vation from 12,400 to 12,700 feet above the sea, and covers an area of about fifteen square miles. We rode‘over it on our mules, to make the station, and found it covered with loose rock, which in some places was so rough as to necessitate long detours in going from one point to another. As in many other cases which occurred subsequently, we found this plateau covered with puddles of water, and wherever there was soil it was always boggy: On the west and north sides it was ter- minated by bluffs, ranging in height from 1,000 to 2,500 feet, the last 200 to 500 feet being nearly vertical. On the west side of the plateau the bluff terminates below in rolling, timbered land, which extends a little over a mile to the bed of Lake Fork. The total fall from the top of the bluff to the streAm is 4,000 feet, in a horizontal distance of one and a half miles. . Having finished this part of the country, we traveled down the White Earth to the point at which it emerges from tbe upper canon. Here the new road from Saguache crosses it at a small angle, and, swinging far up to the north to avoid the high bluffs, it finally turns up Lake Fork ata point about twelve miles from the crossing of the White Earth. Thence our course lay up stream, and we traveled along just west of our plateau stations and nearly under the blufis. From a camp RHODA.] GEOGRAPHY—SAN JUAN MOUNTAINS. 453 just below the junction of Godwin Creek and Lake Fork we made sta- tion 8 on a point about five miles east of Uncompahgre Peak. The next station to be made was on tbe great peak itself. In order to accomplish this, it became necessary to move with our pack-train about five miles up Godwin Creek, to a point where it is joined by a small stream com- ing in from the north. Leaving the train at this point, and taking an extra mule with us to carry our blankets and food, we rode with great difficulty up the side gulch, and camped at an elevation of 11,900 feet, near the timber-liue. We started out early the next morning, expecting to have a very difficult climb. We were terribly taken aback, however, when, at an elevation of over 13,000 feet, a she grizzly, with her two cubs, came rushing past us from the top of the peak. Contrary to all expectations, we found the ascent very easy, and arrived on the summit at 7.30 a. m., having been two hours and a halt in climbing up 2,400 feet. We found that the bears aforesaid had been all over the summit of the peak, though how they got up over one or two short but steep passages in the ascent, puzzled us nota little. The summit of the mountain is quite smooth, and slopes from the brink of the great precipice toward the south. It is composed of several successive flows of lava, in hori- zontal position, which gives it a stratified appearance, and causes the slope to the south to appear terraced in profile. On the north the edge is sharp and definite, and the precipice so perfectly vertical, that by dropping a stone a few feet from the edge it fell 1,000 feet before strik- ing an obstacle, as we determined by timing the descent. The bluff surrounds the peak on all sides except the narrow strip on the south end, and is about the same height all around, but not so nearly vertical as on the north side. From here, for the first time, we were able to see the great massive- ness of the mountains in our district. To the south the peaks appeared in great numbers, and in the distance appeared a group of very scraggy mountains, about which the clouds were circling, asif it was their.home. Subsequently we found that they were most of the time thus enveloped. The high mountains near us covered the horizon from the east around by the south to the west. Nearly due west of us appeared a very high, sharp peak, which was afterward ascended as Mount Sneftels, and just to the south of it another high mass, bearing in its center a large, flaring patch of snow. The culminating point of this was, later, station 35, or Mount Wilson. Southeast of us, and about eight or ten miles distant, was a mass of peaks, filling the whole space between Lake Fork and Godwin Oreek, all of a bright red color. The highest of these points is over 14,000 feet above the sea. Ten or fifteen miles to the southwest was another smaller mass of lower peaks of the same color, while in various places appeared mountains of white, yellow, and biue, all the colors being very well defined and clear They were caused by the oxi- dization of iron and other ingredients of the rocks. Tothe north the mountains fall very suddenly down to the bed of the Gunnison ; in fact, the peak is situated on the extreme north line of the Uncompahgre Mountains. Just before we left the summit, clouds came along, and we were soon enveloped. It was at this time that we experienced, for the first time in the season, the electrical phenomena which later iniertered so much with the topographical work. As at this time these phenom- ena were not very marked, and as our experience on all the peaks was very similar, the detailed account of them is reserved for another place. We made the entire descent that evening from the summit to Godwin Creek, where the pack-train had left us, getting the benefit of a rain be- fore reaching camp. Up to the second day before this the weather had 1 454 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES. been very fine, but from this time till fall, rain commenced early every afternoon, and continued into the night. Moving up Godwin Creek, Dr. Endlich made a special examination of some of the highly-colored peaks already mentioned, while Wilson and I rode up to the head of the canon and out upon a high and pretty extensive plateau, which extends from a high, sharp pinnacle a few miles west of Uncompahgre Peak around the heads of Godwin Creek and Lake Fork to the head of the Animas. It forms the divide between these three streams and the Un- compahegre River. An area of fifteen or twenty square miles is above the timber-line. Ten or fifteen square miles have an elevation of over 12,000 feet. The timber-line here ranges from 11,500 to 11,900 feet above the sea. This whole area is covered with a very short growth of grass, which is almost entirely unfit for feed for animals. This is com- mon with all the grass growing high up on the mountains; it is not nu- tritious. Unlike the plateau east of Lake Fork, this is not surrounded by bluffs. Instead of being smooth and nearly level, like the former, it is rolling and cut up by gulches. The slopes down to the surrounding streams are steep, but bluffs are very rare. The ground is not very rocky, but like all the soil at this elevation, is very damp and boggy. A number of small lakes are dotted here and there over it, and in many places springs of ice-cold water gush out from the rocky prominences, ted by the banks of eternal snow which are scattered about in consider- able numbers. In crossing this elevated region a strong west wind was blowing, and, the temperature being below the freezing- point, riding was very disagreeable both for our beasts and ourselves. Under these cir- cumstances we were not so observant as we should otherwise bave been. Still, there were so many new and interesting things about us that we could not fail to notice some of them. The eastern half of the plateau drains out through a canon leading northward and westward into the Uncompahgre River. We crossed its head on our tramp, and noticed that it feli very suddenly, till within about two miles of us it became a deep, narrow canon, at which point the stream turned abruptly to the west. From this fact we were ena- bled to get a good broadside view of the north bluff of the cation, and we saw it weathered out most curiously, being worn into almost all con- - ceivable fantastic shapes, the general appearance being that of a great wall covered with niches and statuary. Time would not permit us to go closer and make a more careful examination; so we had to content ourselves with a distant view. From the headwaters of this creek we crossed a divide running laterally across the plateau, and for some dis- tance the drainage was into Godwin Creek, until, near the peak upon which we made our Station, the water again flowed to the north. From station 10 the caion of the Uncompahgre River appeared in all its rug- gedness. From here we got a fine view of Mouut Sneffels and its sur- roundings. We could see no possibility of ascending the peak from the east side, as it was cut up by rugged caiions and innumerable blufis and pinnacles ; these latter ornamenting all the ridges leading down from the great peak and its near neighbors. In some places numbers of the pinnacles massed behind one another presented the appearance of church-spires, only built after a much grand- er style of architecture than most of our modern religious edifices. In some places two systems of vertical pillars were separated by a narrow strip of horizontal lava-flow, and served to heighten the fantastic appear- ance of the rock-forms. The fact that we stood on a peak four or five miles distant from the scene described, will give some idea of the great size of these pinnacle-forms. A month later we had another much nearer RHODA. | GEOGRAPHY—SAN JUAN MOUNTAINS. 4545 and finer view of this same curious group from a peak several miles southwest of us. Beyond. this we saw nothing of interest that cannot be better described in the sequel. The next day found us retracing our steps down Godwin Creek. Aiter camping a night at the junction, we moved up Lake Fork, making a station by the way on a low point near the stream. 23 Wonehitenay Ses Sas eee eae as re See Nae ei atalala eiatg ae areca ee akelere ee erent ate te teers 406 Commies yo Si ee a ae Se nelaare Javan elem Go eee tes atte ge apc ro rettayetone 304 (COMOCOIAY ONE! Socooeeonucded one sou bHaddabe s5oo 65nd C655 Sedo Bou Dose soso DDN SS 112 @orbiculay. ye seberse Socata ak ee eels UN ASS ctee ae IE eerie Sree ea Corbiculad sere 5 ose a eee oe DEE Ge Saas teres aotearoa meteorite ~ 406 Clommdleyiinas) jonni 38 565 So eso6 ehbodo ondoss codosacseg soso sueo so2cone5¢ 42 PLM OG S ee eae be yah che eee Se vee nctotale oheimioveres Se meres S53 SOROS 114, 211 @rocodilus eek < fos feAsee eee Eset oc detec esc Stone eee EEC eeEEE Cee 23, 158 (Conon linen) Sones aacoe anal cade cmepeoacidces sano code ooSsau oobaeS Sans an00e 340 GiyiCad esa see Boys is Nek oles toraiaia oan Howsisie veisjaiayciam nue ae oleic eee pa selene ee eRe ieee 283, 334 @yclopteris: (20.122 oohs Se lesen ee ea le ot sbemes 3d Seve seeeeene eee eee eee Dapknogene cretacea ..---..-.--- AGOODD 800d ROS ang.cd00b55S00 CsonaD acces ORC 343 Heerii .---- HIB Sa DoW hae 2 si ncicind Salapaceisene See eee cae eee eer 343 Dichonematiabellatormersssreeaee ees ee ace eaesiseeen eee ee ee eee 276 IDNR EWE Saeko doo Gos aaocud sesadc Shae by Heo sHs boc IobecEa de Ooase0 ocoase Sous 4 406 IDNOSONyROS ANTM, Bo6 coScas bao Soe soedos Gann Soe 605 DoDCSs GodSESeDescs DN9526 348 brachysepala 22esenesrercor Seciee us see see ee ele ere eee 306 2 ALCOLMC AI alewrs Sm cava Sie leis tels en) Sloat creieinie areejeyaeetelay see tere ote eer 314 rotundifolia .c3.es . ooace ee eke coe tees aes Go ee eee EeEeee 348 Wiscorea, ?iCretacea; =4.< pieces LAS aaa wale aie ole eee ee ee eters eet Meese wie 338 DEG) (eRe Se Oe R ee eis er ae Sees OS a Cer aioe Oab Sac Soccddde 338 IDM OVOSNS OUMGUER co dno cosacd cb656s 6550 bhU50G sesh seDSeU C550 oS0008 Senses = 32 IDAVOVo Ty Whmrin GREAT oo56 o6aSo5 ce5e Sedolscoo capes Sse50nns ceoo nesses dase 301 (Qwenews)) ley .S sce acca 5606 So55 594555 Ghs0 se00 Coes Soee = ; 340 pLIMordialesece essen ease eee eee Oe eeeeeee oe 340 salicitolium.<.. coh 4s oe ets sey 340 subfalcabum si 22.3 222 sie eye nesters ways as oem eel ree ene er eerslene 340 USO sacadc dbo co adaods docund Seueus Sooccd duaoS bedava boon esos osuoss naedee 25 ANIMVETIC AMIS sees See sisciere Soe ee Seer cian ee et ee Cree eee rears 251 Bran oouloveiwsss Cy plu ONCES so S50 San sod SooSse dae coo cho nos Hons ne Do SSbs 300 2aEE 347 JB DSG6 Oe Goan Be ROS NEARS On SABA See MoM SES Santo amca cacacune oSocoS cddabe 23, 25, 158 ntelodoneeeee seers aes eee ula te leraue oleyeie se jena wineie! = ciel eteiat se oere Oetennelotete 25 IDUTUR EN SAP oS ec eM ener sen SAaeeRacesaEo so boobOe obo Guo ccon pseder osoSsud 216 IUD a Se SOA ce See eS oso CAA sees oN Saas Buco undo cass ddcnos oSsoa0 p85 23, 20 DES ADO O Ny louad isHeM) MEPIS 5 a Aoo Boo boS Soe S66 S660 5405 cs0sao 5208 Soosa9 Seasoe 363 IOWA DIAS < 55555 adooco ba sccs HoSdso. c5d506 Hobs asoson cnas SooSeU on soSSso ous 112, 213 IPMS) DOVOACh oo cas GoGnae Badoes sobe5e S605 b56des 6 bouode coauce Ns0505 oecaEC 341 TRG) Teer ne eee Ae ae ae eee a ema s HAe ec aero S55 GH Ob onda60 CSeeeS 23 Hermeaystermberoileeseeeeelecec ereie eset FE REE e AIS ERE ae So6n obo S-caeneo 139 Iniems asprenMOliege 5 doo506 soaoGo bacacos baG0 GOnoOnS Usbans coode9 cou So0Ge5 basaoe 303 Gallimati cae wae ae esc chaser eis naiteie es See eee eto See ee eee rereeenaia nar 303 GIST ODtay Fart aes ei oa cece bone e o cisies eetee Oe ceisler eee eee ieee 342 DE CMIDE hee Rene ne a Ee neem CRSA GG Oba KOGOED Gado cated 341 INDEX OF SYSTEMATIC NAMES. 5IL Page inicns lemon ilies seo seat eset Rese Bea ae CAS SA S25) Goes aoce ceemoTeerIES 342 OWVANI Se meee RE a 2 Sh oe i fara areneasfayermniodtictsrafates © ae ate Sh eS Aan, de ee a Mea 313 plamicostabapes= cece ys scsceel eee BESO Oe SUR Ges SME one SoU UCUCIEMae 291, 304 PREUCO HOMINIS 4s Bk eadeso 0505 6d6a60 docbon Abdo ceueso onde obo ada aoomae 313 (UBS ONEY cis Fee a eee ae ee eee eR ee Cae 32, 291, 304 Whyounlinanere) 233563650 354 esa5q5saoouadous paae ad Soeubaeoboe cece codece 314 JEINGSS 3 SASS des Sa ee a ee helio e Saris Heer oSOOS 333 Haat ell area tear UnTMMNe oko. 2 eee Oe ae eee ais Stam oie Sie ee etn Eicinioe ie hole cite a arama 338 SRO Re 2 52 2 46 SABA aR GSE SSBC nas Rae are Saas eel ebro oo 360 TP mews WMO 5 - 5555 64S S45 bb5e56 Ss645d so5eda dddses besde5cscons sosnSe sosces 296 Gamopetalespeereeice: = nice oor Gee terete tiene Abele ee ereticca ts Di Mra Be ohare 348 (Gascero POdapeepmeern: 4:2 Joh Mee ater neem mace mE ss Ses Bar ss eS S ac epee erase eimerel tote 22, 390 CieichentayKurmamal.2 22522025 aster Se NN uk eae ce ee oe Rott eRe eS Sale 334 Nordenskioldi .----.. Gee Rie BAM ee ears sai! 5 Mk ie SNe Neha marae neti 334 (GHIMTINEVORRS "Sei do dd SHR ae Oars te eens oa ae ee BNI SBI Sa tse 338 Giyptosthrobusforacillimusmasces cece esis ee see cece see els serne ier nleiaeiare 307 Goniopterisyoulchella:: 2: = =8eaaeee saess. sees eee e ace stn eeiee tees wane apereueals 309 Greviopsisy@leburmt . os 222 sae cares aser ae sierone crests aie cis teva Doavaeeieeheseinetels 291, 306 OWEN. 2:0 tance aes see ace Aas ste as Sacto aeetsice ee a Scots ieee 309 Ciaypleeagpibeiertyes: Lis sae eee aa tctiye sas seelsel ys seismic ae c seesiniataictele 129, 134, 224, 226 LAI IG ONES 5 SGaSa ORES e Ose anc rec eis SOG SOSe CEOS ESOS eS oerr See sans see ol EIAMAM ee SPAN SASCANA fx ca ceesie pe cieeeiecicnlt ene Soe e sais oan se cieis ciel teens eteee 355 GME CINE MEBINS son cacees pnoboo cccueo sdobes dapeGo oseconecacose 300 TACHA CrATOW AUIS ee ac ees eee oe eee oa Ss Boe asa cae Shee Satis ones s ayes 3ol Mlatan o1deap sca. saaes shee tase ee acarta ne Seer sees naar seamen dol SOMUMPEL Se. thes tes see Eee een e ae eee ace octal ersateys 3oL HeliGi ce peetete > < 5s Sas SANS Bas san Aeeaa aoe Segoe See Saas eee Moers 392 JEIGIGHNGD 5 53 RM eA eRe Oty ER SY a ii eS Ae pl nae eae ed 396. EC MSOMCAMDI OX Lalas aaa. nsec es ke aa See eee oe nen Reo 8 ye eee oe Ru ae 402. HMUVOlV IS Mae series a aa ee alo aa or Aas Rane ae era a alas, Hite) Gree 404 HO wanes se <5 /ase see ee a SELES Da ek ee Cel ai ee ee oe anaes 23, 25 AON 2 ciara cas AA ee ee eA iad e eientare Ae oes oe a we seecouare aaae sees 24 @Qiicrophysa)elnicersollivs pees ssa ec cne pe esine eee cies neeietie sees rasle 397% ETI OROATIOWME Sc Set eee Sue ens sere eh Sea St Ree) Se kee ays NSS Naat eles 20, ive nodonb Js) nese ssa a seae eee ease Saemee aa B eS ee Ones Seas ees eee oe 23, 20 hymen oply Mites sees corse sine spe heres canes = Ach eee neato eee ease cease 280) Eivmenophy lium cretacemmiacs seceics oais aio csieyseer saece sets seiaealectemsie 333 JB ODO ANTS Se ee ec Reeorio Cage Gots ern eet a earic Paria ee esis aioe ys 25 Ely PAUL AV CEMUs Sets as g ete a occa e in oS aysises Wieiert. ie eiaeialle suse ele oie sisal elie aise 309° TE RCOC OME <2. spas aae oacrahesia a Se acts Sela ecole saaicic sand ae Sos ane eAsieesce 25 SxS IMUM OM Ata ves ee ese evelsloiare slarae Scab attr Sata aU ear nc, tore Lenton ledans 309: MnGCria® GCS Sis See See ee ee rey OCA Se sea Meee art een ea ee ee emmy a 361 IRMMO AIIM Slee Sessoweee, Stet peee hence ee hoe SRO oR ES Cie, eaten 29, 30, 35, 56, 136, 224, 226. barabin aysastee veces Seiciet Sic cia el vatemstc Seale P aoe Seas eerie 137 CIS ile ape esis ore eect are eae Re ee ee aah a OS oR ee eat ee 129, 134 INRCIC ONS 305 SHER ORES Dep So CE AO Sen ety Beene EEE e rn ae nai rrer nek easter a ee! ; 337 SCI IRGMDY Sele 35 (Shoe waa Sate Ge eS Ace: DiS Sah on Ore ae em Beeesers 25 libeOrde reps - <. 5.08 hos Sees Saas BP SS Ae Hepat es eC SEL OE Ie aie awe 333: SEN OA ue ESAUL TINA)» = Seva See ale cl Me Ie ee SUS en Sate ko a Ne AS Las se ae 308 IDOE Pee Sar Sar eae Aman nee ee Ea aE OS oy Sh ae RM aera STAN A 360 BINEVMNM OLS! Sse ayes ai2 ees aye ieee So AVN Se apeetat sie tap tates as Pte eRe Sree ee 307 TAN COSR 2 eee er SEB RE BES EOC IE Se EIS SEE eee aero eer e ecAape er 291 IMPOR SROCC Cen talismans ya norvers cere cectar cinch cial a asterc eae, nase eterereparcterers 86. HMeurive Mik nan CMe bat faye Salers pete rove cla tet Notts stolen alae a satsan Rigas d oer ete treet 22 THB TOYS. eS Ip N78 3h a oe a ee age Ot eae ae ek eee 327, 342 EES MIT LC TO CAL Dili. aya sions Aveta sraeiete aie tapel Se eet cits usw citer aeeeawls saree ee eas TE 342 @Bersea)vpreestansy? Se aeete saecial taeise ar laasaisa octeicte none marae tial este 305 AOLOHE LOLOL A. eee etree tee nme ee sree Rime Nie ses bik hem ae alae anata 342 HAS OMUMIMO SIGE St AlLE LAT Slay rate ewe setae rma eee ane Naseer dood Tea 315 IL@tLO SOUMLHT. Bae Ge ees CED ASe SE DOSS ORE SOAS EEE Se SS EEE ees oe sean eet 287, 288, 300 Mapidonendromcarina hums seme seers ome eee ane, Gens anit ore, ues 279 MO GANG Ue tee aye eioeaetee sate e ek Saeise oe ees e naiek Sone 279 SLBYONOIONTEINS 3 cl ens Sov ene ee oe IT CIE Oe ee a A ao a ee 23, 24 LE iRMGliane Cee SOEs e Beebe on soeedoCSOd BOO SEO EHO at aan Bape omerSe rete Adac 25 eT Och Gams yee aiais ss era cnerre etre tee eater cies ae ine Meteo ke onic mee eee 25 IU CHONONEED TS oo Behe co SEO BOE EES SSAC BeBe O ACCS ee ee Sess Spe a 25 ILP iN CARIN GUE Baap eeoe toes < Cone Sad Ceo pOn ee ACBe ries Sees een Ee Bic 396 ; RE OMA TUUTS tate fe che te eee o Sata ree ticteeeles 5 wise sie kneles SEGe She Le ECR eee 394. JEM E Dy i526 oA o5 OER PERSO RE EES AOS Ses Ooh sen A lt eae ee ars ees gi eae tS 23, 20» 512 INDEX OF SYSTEMATIC NAMES. Page. MGS Tee nee ee ee ciara) ee ae Siac) ie ele Sr et tare ay re eeeiaray Nanp Oe eee un 405 bOI REE 5 iG de BRO ANE es Genes meaner CS OeConbies Sorc Hea Sl td Oe Read 112, 134 Ibn GWU So oe Sosa ness deeoes So09 poSsou Fo55 boda b8E5ES Sa50 soos CoN oaoo So ende 112 ILAG TUG EyeH HATE Tine CO TINS C54 Gaon on66 dodo Sued Hdodoo HAoO Baeeee aaa baede Sues 323, 338 Lonnie Tree OnE Sooke Rese he Gone cads opodad 6hn0 dASSh5 oSdas6 dabess soos 315 ISBAOO WIENIEE) Socooe Cheoh6 Sho choo soos ches oes S sos Sos cds one Seba ne ooes 346 ILATCIONMOWNe6SA68 So5650 n6eG00 abag cam obOls S455 soocce Sooo So osc sss bbe see sonas 290 lL ivexoghinion |e co5 boos secoeo ross cea5 coos Goda onadiboe scons ods Sob eesda- 309 IW EY ann ean Soe oo Per SEH Soe Senn Beam NaGoG Sheep oinad do 309 trichomanoidesy. = ja 26 soe cei era elaine ieee ee ere oe eee 333 IMPIGIMENWONTS 5455950650 S555 2655 sees scos egos SeScte oe o8 Go segs seca qe56ed6s¢0-- 23, 25 INBKO RY ENE pS Sencisooroa cooSU nba meso Sobaencaauso oSKsas see ads cooseouooosacss 35 MOLINOS Shen BoOUlbo0e Goud agadoN Sood dosods Book oS ous bes cacoog GoKea dace ' 30 Macon oliavalternmans). =<) esi le ale ei eee as)el PEER AAD GAO5 UpeMe Se Soe ae 355 Gee ses ities I AU SE RP A Pu a ea 306 ; temurtfolian 22 WOR Ae se ee ee aie Gh Shear ee gaa ey Sa aS 355 Mla yennOlheveeks) 6565 56bnGoes 6moa Conn Sodo pdbGdo bono Kode sano soha56 os Sone Gees Gade 331 WIAI/ENOCED 56 oo56 5685 6505 Seen 5565 coon Coon beso ndeo oman as Koonce etbe sees Aa ae 358 IWIAISNOCIOM 56 Scho d6ou0s54 sosg pod Cogs dedc cade Gooe Heb Sado dd4 so sods odds once tee 23, 25 PANIVOTICANUG He ES 2 cee ee ele CN a ee aie pot aie etter cielo, 5 Oe ee te 251 MesaceralopsicOlonad OCNSISy eae sries eee ree else eter eee 150 MLSMIIOINGMS S565 5096 csod 6950 Go00 o8d6 Hens o558 Soo seU Coab on Sobo Saad seoos tas ie 20 Me Sal OPLCTIS ws am al csiele ae) avete a: Stoke ale core a alae Satan are al ye aval reer te nee ee a 279 NG Ae Me aa Wy AG tI SU aS a eM Se pe eR UR yak Oca Sh B2no IGN aWUTG es) Ges Ee ea AAMC aren SNS eSe ea aad Sago oodemcoas 391 Mielaimp uses cise sees 6 keene Sale sejehecteiniate sa cial arc Steie tec eal atte sete estas eee reg 22 AVIGIMNIS; SIMO Gos oes cao scd sadeos tebdce cose o505e9 sacadosserssseosoee5 54555 331 ACETITOMUS eet ee Se Le ese Cee aL Ee ce ope eee 357 elycloply lus: sere se re Sree ia ee est ae eye - 398 obtusilobus. sos) 8 ees coho isamcee ais cee Sure One Renee eer ees 306 ONS S) Peewee WE ee SON ee Ces ie ee eee eae ate pe eee 357 wo pmlifolings se Ae ee ee ae ey Laie IAI a a a en 307 Halimensis: . 2200s ok seals See Mecca clare ie itil se ae ae 357 Mery Chippusi: iitic eae fee Ne eh tne eveseretece cei ers e/a eet a yee eae 25 Met COMOS see 52) eee SOS eel See aie aso rercta tee ee Oe 25 IVIOUETIS Gare e eye ie ee MS lar ee Sr ee Ne re eu Scr Sc oe 390 IMIG S Ne ee a ae eee ea Mea OEE Un Gat 341 Miytica icrevacea: 3. e ees teeta soe Shite ve eece Seelam eevee eee eee 339 AUN STMMIS ys eye eee eet meee wee a Rs See IR ol aera Pres Sees 312 PAIZESSIPIOM ALS see ee cae eee Souls oee otis adele eee 2 Ore ae 312 IDC VA CARAS Aamo Sane Eien DUN A On OE SN a eae 2 ees . 311 Obtusah le -wisees Soeeheckee eee Pes Set ce evacieeh eee Merete et es eee 339 SOMINA. Po aos ee ciceeec en clajeciciilee Ga cle cies Nerasan Se Meee Se Se eee 340 Neoundoidesiacutitoluses cre). oj. ce cis beintisjeesen leone sem etie Ae Cee meee 309 Neuropterisfasciculatus 2.5.2 5225 nosooe. 22 Sacco eme cease eee 279 IN@AGEGRININE) CASE eabge6 boo 56m Goas coo GGe te ico cle sisiparnsioicrects Becee ek Dees 78 OMbolus ness Cee als a aha ie Sr a ee Syne abe Seiale pare a st ae ee 112 VOdontoOpteres iss eos oe sia aitromvele iets or sins ate = Sissel eleier a eisleh se arcl ere ee 281 GLOMUS) ese Se NS Re Sek se eet Ut Sn Sd le, Oro ula MeN alee Biers shee tanta ysnoe oe Waclseese bald SRA US a ee a 118 @Qreodaphne cretacea) $s. 22s ee eaos sates sade ere Seis lee a ene eee eee 343 OBC OG OI 2 ION ees) I RN yt at ay 0 eta a 23420 Orthisidesmopletira: 2 s2c2). oes oo see Raia Sno Seo Sake oo ae eee 112 OrbHoceras seu ees FS ee Lis Saye terete ciate osale yee otal et ane wr a ae ea a 213 Orthoromopterisssk oe sess eieere Moats ben ses Ane ee Sie ee eee 279 (DS Ge as roy eters EAU AN es SR UN rele 0 ae aL RU Pee se Meo: 20, 22, 23, 136 Ile I-56 so 656550 c0ce "Sia clase Sa es IOS oe ies eS a ye a gee 136 OstbGelita eAtmve rican eyo). a et ici ro Pape a Earp ea 300 Baloch emrushe cei atae seis nm Saloons eS eice leelese emes eye rsia ae eam eee Seyaeiseyeosib isis 25 BaleopterissBosGioscs 02 asses betes Gaels Oe as a Ee eee eeepc 278 1c (CVU UE) Cs ee arena eter ere ens ma ASI TN os Song ooak 278 ls y 102) Hep Cer epson ome ee memes apa AES Ee Se Genin do ociGadoe 278 Taeksomi Yes yes aN cu eae FPR ort pre neas MEerary uceya a 278 COLI Aen ae el eam Er AE EAMES aeRO oye 4 dS GASeEe 279 Roemerbs. Ce. So bd. Ste Se Wie ee erential Yaris 278 FGUIGTLS 6 ins SI aires VCR SS SIDI alia pe ecco Pn RT a 278 ungeq wilaberalisi cose. tek Des Is OR) SO everetararatiey tia 278 alin eee eee a Re ee Cee UM or Mase tage NECA Gt Bre 338 PAE US) WC ma TAMA COU ee S aca es eaves ee pea a a 360 INDEX OF SYSTEMATIC NAMES. _ 513 HOD TDOYSIINS) a SG Saree TS Ss CLO Eran en SIT ae Se 290 ipotocolapus: sSeeeioeins Meee secre cls cyeisioaras seein @locle ei Wicm mb nime REPENS OF Cg 25 RELI OL G Lt yy Syettepadeinraters taro = cate ceiera cvotaf=abre isieiaiatints ey meteletale elon a semen fale eect hars a 158 NRALAG OX OSH erates line ein! vlc eVeisiet so citin clans cict wise ieee ta mtaraate | aerate Pela ae vene Loic aie 112 eau OOpe Temmerete sare mn rs Lycee at Stra loiee ele ens ei sencta a ici te ie aie Sey iL 396 TRECODUSHS Jecass ctaées egeses Spee sae Nebras kana aia neers. ae issisisasis asec eceeicioe Beeteees Hae Ne ee 333 BectimilbT ame hiatialmerce:s cece citer = = coat eters a) eneia nie ioleleiorelaiioyaieie ete sata cies Woes 5 390 Rersearleconteanaies =\2s' <2) leis | senelseaine ciniceie sos 1s tie clslsvcoels ae ss cenoceree tenes 343 Stermbeneie essay So Seeue kos eave its Ses oleae ec ac Eine ae 343 Bhaseolibes Melamed Mush ste) rie apse oiees coe letera) © ay ate ctowor Seaver eyecare eps ea 314 Pe MniGoO lt Mus esses se sss oe Saletan eae ote salsa cece acete awe ae ame meas ee oe ee 281 AAO MICE STELEVACEOMS)s.)-\ eer e ere ese aici ete alate Serene aioli ay eee erect 338 TNR CHS EH pA SNG ci CEERI eS he eames PsA Mies Se esa a Re of Apa. ee ya iy 25 MEL EROS ERGPIND oo curjem meal = tensa la rsatel ste heh se rayaiia aialisvta ovals cats ara ey eos ee 400 Fa layiS1 coveteenetaie oiais ate oie ciaiealene wiecio elec siaraapne eo ainniecniaatc ae eld aly algo aie areal 400 Binvgliitessamonpbous) =e csesce ee Saale ee eal eles Sabie casio cee le 2 Senate 364 pe tull Bs FO NS) 5 sean ens es Date ane Oa loaner Dh ial ar eae eh aa ee 363 NVAATO TIED Hoe) rege tare ce epee ne eer RRR AL 2S Cea Ul) AUP MREE 2G lea Sp 364 TETAS ai catch ne em fy re tt ed eee Ls eee eR eee Hes hee aU ig 15 DEMURE TSC CGT renee teu te eae a ena Ure ae pct nT NUE LSU ee NS) a as ee WOR ian 336 TE WSTGUIDIT et 6 Rien tol Scare ee ga Sy a a Dea co eteae RPI NALA Sea yn 22 RISC RCOGRUOAUA oo Aes. Sh Barca jess Sscietenste mule Sroloyelti ie elare ede tite Sas, Arsiays ee vs HIS IIS 287, 289 IN [ey SN ARR SENS eo iey e ste hs St aL 2 a ee Nese ene pede Meyer akc 289 Planera Ungeri ...--. ECCS SCSI E oe EASES PRE ees ered oe ERE Meme 5 313 TP UO OTNMES) | SRA a ial es UR Ae Cth Seen OS aes a a ee RoR OS Es OU 402 FEU TAXOTADIS:, Sefer Res et Teer REVERE) eee ies ae an tas a re Ce IU ie A ARLE 23, 25 BINS HOME MTG so sateen te yepaver vera ee Renn cee oe aie SW SEES Cah oe) Sea aa ees a ars 154. IPs iniRCED See Bad abas caus tA sehe cia by eam be othe eta cee rer ear en oes 341 {icy HALTS a a aT a cag ea oh Serra ere 4 Se Dp Re a COV rem mI A Gh eq) at le UC ET OG CS resp eres faerie eee REND a CHa RIN Lt eeu yet Jas Sy et ce ratataen a Sey ee ee 293 Biavdenineee..: ome OS yeas a oe pan ners Pre IOS AV" 32 TOWGYey ey Bis ot eee = ss a a ee ere RRR Ey NS RE Po aur 341 ING Wi DCTRIA DE 5 ye cere s teeters tere ty nis\S ee chav eral pees Gui oh Mor ate see ate 341 Obcusilobarchecsee sion seect ss stereos ce eee hole Sou ers ciala oie Saree 3AL HOULNN SOTA ete ortrare ene ered e ete Terai eer erayat's Gelian sleearas car arc ieis¥eie oben Sree te ee nae 341 EMO DMOBUS).< 25 Cee a Seite ev ccn cy ee Wiccan Leis acials verare siereteraver te eee ooh 5 Malis CUO GIT e WIEN sein ep rare tops eal atcate ie arene ral see cheney aia: host oie rer ay aversrcclensrayel Se Nee 25 Pare MME Rey <2 ea ciaie din eae ee cla ern anaes ae Sod Sue eae awl uo nolo oevncrasia see 309 FAO MAIO SINGS Sosa iaeee teers nie eloy tre serene ere Cure e Sh ybare eile eee ae eee 391 FZOREN LTO MOAN ED: Se operate eae ale atePe ai orclisrats wu raeie seinem c/ekaetiohiamhe © ieee Sener 405 HO MUNMUESNCLe CANS a knee ome etre seme em eM en en kes ok ci etevetat asaya aes 339 ANC AS ERUCTICNS ye vetoes bec crete ie teee ks hs pee ati Ue LTA ea RL oy are 339 JPEG cscs ene ae pee eet ich eM Ete OO Ries MN nNe Ona aaa Me ieee Beep eaea ee. 23 UL CLIGS h peees ts nl Ss ee EN a sn Ne Aes a eee 2 Sy RR Re) 293 TOONS IB TAYE WER RS cao Caches Bae ers ID = ar AAC hee me era Neen eee A ETL 302 MEV ALL OLUES Wasi es ee yar wees Saree netie ne, anaibae aie alene ie oy aiSeasiertvalaleba ea aera ae 291, 302 TORIES NTS es CSUR dee ois yt ae ey eR ea i eel Ste a a IN 291 GREMNU OVUCS Peete noe ete cesar e nica any etigie es ers crelel acinar cia ai ae oes 81, 86, 93. JP Gi TOOT) 5 EES ARSC APU US Sr Lia an hep pes AS) i ORR A RNa Ramps Ay kt 2) hy 22 AOMOCY CUTS AW sy ONMING NSIS a emrersiaats cise cpetatere eceis fe Giapslomic rere eve oe Garena sere 136 LE SGC NTA VSLITIS) 5 eae aaah Cag SS ee Mey I dy yn Sega eg 25 JETRO EK OLDIS) oie Wage Dm RAT SAGE, aoe AU RE el ee ATO AAI Ica MA ro 114, 119 BEMIS HAUS ane oes kan ae Eps navies Rial Sere arse oe GL ee GME SHELL NYA ORE See PLAS ag ee ay aU) SA aa cn eo cies aL 213 ODE ACE es aioe rma eae MRIs ie FP ol (epee IER Ne alts ee es aU 346 OPC OU ESRC UID ALE = ee ae ere ee eee pe eo ene era orem aad Oa Me NES 8 to) CN 128, 347 Maphnovenoldesran see emeise wine eet eee sen eee Secl e een 347 CrevillestOrmMige ese a Mier wba aac eiarar atl ew Va Ct pan a 347 TPICUU DLS, +a OSES CCE ES Nahe ad Mn aaa EEA rato ede Do 25 . Protophyllum crednerioides...-......--...--.--- RSE Shey Nah Thwatens Cu draenei 363 HEVeny VEIN seers me ete ae eee thee oe ei URN le ei on Swear 363 33 514 INDEX OF SYSTEMATIC NAMES. Page Propophiylium Jueconteanumy . 2) 0202 senescent Ug 362. AUNIND ALS ei 2 Se ER SG UN chy STU oD TR UG 362 TOMI Oe ne Sees Aakcieras tale ( sel yee ete PS SPE ES Ar ile p Hat esa ILD Mai ea Le NAb 363 TNA Olsaos s5b0 ooe6 Caos EO aStu pe En ea ane ra ear a aa 362 4 WO MPSCONES Saasiee cost bose esdod PST AMES ESL TS As a ae DME RA 362 GWE KCU PRUE Bo Soeaeb honor oso oreanbos oFecee coca conunoseeoe 362 TUIGOSWN, soso cond cas cose02 boebec S500 sooo Sae0 bono seamSO DeTeeS 362 Stermberouiy. Soe sel sepa ce cee oieaio sale ice yee ster eet ae nea at er ma . 362 BASU SVATINEKL CAM Ayers eis ero cael eee Slee eee eae rep ARR SS UTS 10 eo 249 CHICIR AS Bye See Rear aye de Oe culo eee 249 Pi CTECACCUS i. Ke ate oie ce eoapers oy cele eter es eee Ste SE te ee try 361 MEMO s oh be edosboddeacn sens oboddooppeosee cSdenods thos edddcg adoac 249 IPS IO OU ON « 5 co5 cosbos Ss oSc0 dSa5 Gone88 does00 655550 900800 ce se55 be SSOn Sane 276 IPFEWOStLO DUS NEDVASCOMSIS soca s Sees este ee cee mee oe ee een 2 ae ana ee 364 Prana olonalhinan Yosby Clem (oS Se5 boo a ose4 peed eo sed a4 Hbed See eas Sone Bdsodo ene 304 (Pulmonatbaeis ooo eke Se ec ap Na hake re abst d erates es le (ale tare testo) ste ete a aN 391 JewONGES —46c6 55000 45 SeoSda ce SSo us bes5 655550 Sosnad one soa cseese dha shos nes 39L TeTpori le AACE oo oe oc cho sao bases Godse s sobe4 34 Seto Seog sspses abesess- boos 391 TeTMpOMMNE) 5365 God cogabocd onaG occos Seo Beud sane deseases cant eneadadoudds=ccse 391 @ivene nis) alae emp a eteoe eo lee ele aceeee ee 86 SEE sworthianaes- eee eee eee eee ese ree ST LCN A 340 PUL GLINET- VAS ioe Se esas IN ee Lee Cn IE IEP GUST ER 2 Re CE 993 dae Uh aye EA CR AI UN PSNR Nn 313 IVESREO ia oocac soooge Seco ebaa coos HoEsad oSooRe CoSOSE bhSe Soso bnSEbe = 340 4 DOMINOS) So kess coe bed oe asa bse oco cess SHaseu comedo ddsa dso bossHe 341 RTARTA Sle es errs k cjaperal Gye Spare farce Siete in rel starete cave efaleye galerrote fia ete LNA ge a Bee 289 PEC ELINCTE VS eo ee Vee ears ae yey ae aT el ae a ete Nea Eo sans AT Sg 991 Rossmassleni tees soy cee a Seas aay aad SO SS Le OUR Ba EN DN 314 ATS) 0 eeepc a UHRA Sata ve ea se 2 (esinencee cee aera eee 360 TRIOVINOCCWOS soos 6556 cb00 boca cues Coes CoSeeN Loco bons HDS SHomSanaUeds Cescoo cess 23, 29 EUHUS ME MTDLAM ACE Ais sees ie ee Sens eee aS eee mise ee erate ee ore Reuter ta er ae ea Ra 306 TRIM MONE A o5 560 Seog shod ccs dees Soho cons bone Shed dosaseneias soso cece aShoe 211 1H a3 WY) tn esa ee en a a CO SL OE a a es no Godda 913 PISSOLC OO is Lis ah eietie pole ei tiwte reso s pe veeainy mimeo cteySletellecs alot wie Sraus oe he sevens to Rao Pe ee tee _ $890 Salball piiGlemenyenVes4 554 chou sos eco bend Buabine So sduce seq ouSsee oobo55 Sako cecnse 290 Camipbelli we Ssieicd Sess oS Aas Nolawc.ccelsaie cieeismuere ciate toa cin eA ore eee 32 GO MITT Ses ee Ee ae ere OG) Soe Va aces a ee ee Soca So) Sette SLE (CRIA CaS e Selo ee SPAS SMG BA Cass MeO eOS SORE MAG Seman Son Seocieca soc 289, 290, 301 DRACO, Cho bSseeuseeons Saad Hoda ad Adee ese osSsonob oss Bae 2 Hache 290 SAMO We WES 50 555 os55 coasos coosedbbosce Soe cose bedssa deea essences 279 Elbe Pa ICE PIE hep Seo ee eines ita rey LECT U ee een NUN CRED Se EN 5 Bese 983 OLOLeDSLOlIAS scree Mews set cinie eine ei a saiatee ye eine iat yeradel rad ee nc eer te ee 339 Nalvaniavattenuatar.. 2c ceo ea SS Cee ee isles ie eae eee 296 SA TAGIMNG) NNT S 3 355566 odo Saad Sdde seneebe Secu ss eesaes se cee seebs os se coos ae 289 Mr OUD ee ee a AIS NSE AOU CSE ba 315 SaSsaritaseacemccemertecce sete NOEL Ne lal ks setie Arena lsuelainiaeteeha a teyelat ee ee 344 EV OTOUVU KOON CT Aas ao A ey BRE Re LANE Te See 344 (Aualiopsis)) cretace mine eee ee ee eee a ae ee eae 344 Wil. Oma teat Ue oe ere a 344 Cay OU RDEST DN 0 eyed eee a ogee 344 mirabile.) o5 oe ee ee al Sen Aa ee 129, 345 AR eCCLID SAT h Ips hee ON LT AIA ye a a i PS oe Go) Se 345 WOES Goo dba eo obo So seek Ghee baSe so Sab boss sess coo sec 2225005 344 SIGRID Saas SGAAE eas Bae es Bete ee odedadeasddderscs oscso sashes 135, Wia rel lass ee eee en ee) Re oc ale ay eC gd ae 136 Sellaeivoveslilay }) iRWANE) 555 545 6555 coee bocede do bases S66 Geb asad d oso sosoosssee a2 297 Teen mn Tea Tea ees Se ST NEI rs SHA A A Ra 297 Sequoia acuminata..---..----. Pag eee NGS PU ENN tes Ae Ot i a ean 310 EQUATED espe es ee es NN SE ET Ae EL 80 a VCE SLO yo ea SVE Spe RN LU UA eS a lhe 289, 290, 298 1 ap 75 5755 0) bz ees eee ee a re er IE HO TNL SS a a a ot Ba 289, 298 COM GIG aise oie ie Rr I SE UTR en EB 335 MERTEN S45 Sn Rese AB ROS beeen beside So 5500 e564 335 FOLIOS Bes ee See is hs SOs I FN UU eo aN 330 lepoyeshormttie ie SAN ee Chee ehh codoca bebe os sees dedses seesococrSeee 201 lhowyequgal bith 2 ioe RAB OR SR ARN ee ee oR eee Gost go cos sod suyadee 289, 290 Reich emi pelea e Sete ee kara eh sae siege ee ege ee els re Met eet are peek tate 289, 335 ae EyE oe on SUE ee ea ARERR ee oe eee Cac ode ocean hoes 289 Src lainey ee ee hee sua NA AAELINT Dae ENTE DB MERE agora Lr 289 INDEX OF SYSTEMATIC NAMES. 515 I Page. SHepPWecdiaCAMAGSMSISw ee esis Mew Mare Le eG ie ie bai miaaneta Ue een al/ rc eam Us 249 re AUD nHe) GRABS Ca Oe Sui ee ee Oe ee oO ae ae Bea seme 280 NoOMaALo cy LUSKeSOSOMUGME Ee wees scene lesen ce-in ne cen Se Se SAAB CaS SSA eee ae 390 SPhREnoOpLerisneasees sosese ower ucaluarce ayecuciscicialelelee le sont erjetataeatefeln/=iciece 134, 278, 280 COREE SSE eS aa Re ea a Re ARES eS a ee 280 Hoenn hausilie asset = Cseccjcise is cccbielema amiss cis copes 980 RS) SUIT Sy HI sy eS I RR eh RI 114, 115, 119, 211, 216 SPUBTPS LIM ye ete la lm S/S aicl eteale aia cetera eta ponin ep atsteiattene ete keste eretelle oS ciera eearatemn vere eioietajters 115 SER CONDE eee cine occ) Save sew ninjalears cle wuelne mieote aisio eens ola ietevere ojerelaverieneetarets 25 SUSKCHUT ARN SATO Ae Saves ee sore a trey eter sere te deste lepe atte eh hence career Si a pte Renan ea 308 PS BRR RT ATE Sa ey npr ea 2) se BH SYN NE LRN VR EAS Neda OIC SP 279 TTDKEOTIOVES) <.c; HaeNeL SE ears aha nL LM) Ave en eeCnihe pap era nnn Meters Meaty mae 5,424 EY fe rearing) ae sh a ah 8 I UP Ra lr em UN ea 399 ALE OGRE G TIE EY THVETEN ORIG VS ee ee Safe CU EE a 35 EPR eaoxcO CU CETIAY CLUB LOUD IN (renee ais eagle us Peale el ha 08 aE SL NL hea a de 293 ANGIE OSA NG CSES |G 5 RR ca a ali ON at Ge eee NE Shes eel 360 TGR TG CE GSE's 5 CURSE RSs CoE PIE UTE ae eae ela eS nt ao OS sR aI RE MM ons i 23, 24, 25 DIPALG INTIS soe coe SSosed coca eddeco cobocd bees cece bec6S5 doaeae Soddcg paSea ae 333 TIEN GSE Ge 05k INES SRR MS Sle 2 8 SUB BS al Pe eo Ee EMA ERS 359 “LECH TY CB YSN Ds Es IRR ae SS nat Sen ec a en US ROS ea ALT AS 2B TYodea ? Saportanea...----.-.-- Rape ars houe Sera ier hyensa lay eemeane raph Sey eer electri 322, 346 REAP ANVOLE AMIS ejay iac)s) cere cheissieclereistelais wblalal=clseintaletaielpie alee ol dnie Relevere nm sle emilee a 289 THICTLOD My l apg sisete ole ere Bias seer nwins af cietsis wicinls 'wiciniaca veisiaia ieee eo 304 TRG HERVE Sc SEU a ee a re a SU Ae oC 23, 24, 158 COMERS SS SSG Cent Ey Ae Se Be PE CN iar es ran oe ge ea a ne eS PR reg aC ee RE Cet Lo 23 (Uftkoca kenaica beara Taam DISS SUS ee se AT a a etree kD Pao re eae PI ee Re AL 280 UADROS SE SSS Ce IR eo a ete Gos RE ees LO te es 22, 23 {pricey rn lice Pa i Sg yd eve Ree Mra naial nee etiam wks otal elciciovars aiare@imieye Merten Sere ee 407 ITE GLOBES a eee ees ea Ns I a ee eR Lago 341 BY Fea NCAT UR SMLY C0 Ure eee ieee pe Ep ta RL Ufc TC AEC peur heey LOL OV DVN SS RRR ey 390 Valvatide ...-. Hees ca was NCAA 1, FEE OR C2 ea ea a ea PEERY ee RU Sey EA 390 \ Orel a2 eo ho) Re = AU ce elt ay acento 1 eae ce NAT Ae Ga AU EN 392 Viburnum HT ATOOUT cb CME ae ene year feia inter sia aimee ata ee aren ene mea 291, 306 platanoides fs Sry aS NAA A aes sp Oe UTR UE rove LN Hae eee 314 GOULD NOYO LY OUST aM, 5 ay PA a ASIN AON GU Re Ag ID ay al Sea a ek 305 Why Melis aie sets sie eee eer See) py alates ate a aici ofA A cst ta 306 A VASGUS SURV EATS Aa iS ha ie Sa es a 21 CS Sp ECU el EU ae 249 Geri TA OM sy SN a I eS Os ARO et SS Ge a ce i ns Pa 249 iii eee HE EONNRENE, ARAN PeeWee eR Tea age Lene bie Ae Cie Up ye ee TS 392 Ar Inetience IIA ON Clay NG Bet eee NE Cie van rUete so Sie en ore cia silat S ciaicilnis siaivteveystelaiele sie 394 TYRES TERE UNG NOE Ve fe0 hI A iy a ad ay ey aa Ne biagataapiu lines at 394 NTR SENTRA Gis Si eee GE ee eo ee BR eRe Nc la 22, 23, Ba (ROLE) EMH CY LOTTE) pe ea Ma I A en CO Ps ed es le eR eR ED Ear YS Ye at Widdringtonia complanata .----.------------------------------------------ 299 PATRAS CEO USA: TUT ALVIS sete slctes tae ate es cerca Ne le ere cmiei dle aictelsvere epic esoutiarel sweater: 309 ZAOVRACCTOS) CSET H HD eee 25 ci ST EN a ag eg ee AR SRR Rel md 333 Zonites conspectus pa eerie rN ENO Sf De SEIT a a eae a Se A chads Se et 393 Ffiitllovill Seperep eee tney een Fhe eine ead UG EDN Ree Aue a cw /cmar eel UAE Ea yi Rp 393 TrID DAS NN a NA GS RJ DO ea BS BO A 393 : 7 nisl { a / , ~~ . ait , . | . i s . Sf los BAO Pe ee ne!